AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Perfectly Enlightened One.

Aṅguttaranikāye

Aṅguttara Nikāya

Aṭṭhakanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Aṭṭhaka Nipāta Aṭṭhakathā

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. First Fifty

1. Mettāvaggo

1. Mettā Vagga

1. Mettāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Mettā Sutta Commentary

1.Aṭṭhakanipātassa paṭhameāsevitāyāti ādarena sevitāya.Bhāvitāyāti vaḍḍhitāya.Bahulīkatāyāti punappunaṃ katāya.Yānikatāyāti yuttayānasadisakatāya.Vatthukatāyāti patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu viya katāya.Anuṭṭhitāyāti paccupaṭṭhitāya.Paricitāyāti samantato citāya upacitāya.Susamāraddhāyāti suṭṭhu samāraddhāya sukatāya.Ānisaṃsāti guṇā.Sukhaṃ supatītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ekādasakanipāte vakkhāma.

1.In the first of the Aṭṭhaka Nipāta, āsevitāyā means cultivated with care. Bhāvitāyā means developed. Bahulīkatāyā means repeatedly performed. Yānikatāyā means made like a vehicle. Vatthukatāyā means made like a foundation in the sense of a support. Anuṭṭhitāyā means kept present. Paricitāyā means accumulated and gathered from all around. Susamāraddhāyā means well begun, well done. Ānisaṃsā means benefits. What should be said in Sukhaṃ supatī, etc., I will explain in the Ekādasaka Nipāta.

Appamāṇanti pharaṇavasena appamāṇaṃ.Tanū saṃyojanā honti, passato upadhikkhayanti mettāpadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya anukkamena upadhikkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ pattassa dasa saṃyojanā pahīyantīti attho. Atha vātanū saṃyojanā hontīti paṭighañceva paṭighasampayuttasaṃyojanā ca tanukā honti.Passato upadhikkhayanti tesaṃyeva kilesūpadhīnaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ mettaṃ adhigamavasena passantassa.Kusalī tena hotīti tena mettāyanena kusalo hoti.Sattasaṇḍanti sattasaṅkhātena saṇḍena samannāgataṃ, sattabharitanti attho.Vijetvāti adaṇḍena asatthena dhammeneva vijinitvā.Rājisayoti isisadisā dhammikarājāno.Yajamānāti dānāni dadamānā.Anupariyagāti vicariṃsu.

Appamāṇa means immeasurable in terms of pervasion. Tanū saṃyojanā honti, passato upadhikkhaya means, for the vipassanā based on the establishment of mettā, the ten fetters are abandoned by sequentially attaining arahatship, which is known as the destruction of the substrata. Or else, tanū saṃyojanā honti means both aversion and the fetters associated with aversion become subtle. Passato upadhikkhaya means for one seeing mettā in terms of attainment, which is known as the destruction of the kilesa-substrata themselves. Kusalī tena hotī means he is skilled through that vehicle of mettā. Sattasaṇḍa means endowed with a multitude consisting of seven, meaning filled with seven. Vijetvā means having conquered by Dhamma, without force or weapons. Rājisayo means righteous kings, like sages. Yajamānā means giving gifts. Anupariyagā means they wandered about.

Assamedhantiādīsu porāṇakarājakāle kira sassamedhaṃ, purisamedhaṃ, sammāpāsaṃ, vācāpeyyanti cattāri saṅgahavatthūni ahesuṃ, yehi rājāno lokaṃ saṅgaṇhiṃsu. Tattha nipphannasassato dasamabhāgaggahaṇaṃsassamedhaṃnāma, sassasampādane medhāvitāti attho. Mahāyodhānaṃ chamāsikaṃ bhattavetanānuppadānaṃpurisamedhaṃnāma, purisasaṅgaṇhane medhāvitāti attho. Daliddamanussānaṃ hatthato lekhaṃ gahetvā tīṇi vassāni vinā vaḍḍhiyā sahassadvisahassamattadhanānuppadānaṃsammāpāsaṃnāma. Tañhi sammā manusse pāseti hadaye bandhitvā viya ṭhapeti, tasmā sammāpāsanti vuccati. ‘‘Tāta, mātulā’’tiādinā nayena pana saṇhavācābhaṇanaṃvācāpeyyaṃnāma, piyavācāti attho. Evaṃ catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi saṅgahitaṃ raṭṭhaṃ iddhañceva hoti, phītañca, bahuannapānaṃ, khemaṃ, nirabbudaṃ. Manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā viharanti. Idaṃ gharadvāresu aggaḷānaṃ abhāvatoniraggaḷanti vuccati. Ayaṃ porāṇikā paveṇi.

In Assamedha, etc., it is said that in ancient times there were four objects of generosity for kings: sassamedha, purisamedha, sammāpāsa, and vācāpeyya, by which the kings would gather the world. Among them, the taking of one-tenth of the produced crops was called sassamedha, meaning skillful in completing the harvest. The providing of six-monthly food and wages to great warriors was called purisamedha, meaning skillful in gathering men. Giving away thousands or two thousand in wealth to poor people for three years without increase, after taking a written note from their hand, was called sammāpāsa. Indeed, it properly binds people, as if binding them in the heart; therefore, it is called sammāpāsa. And speaking gentle words in the manner of “Father, uncle,” etc., is called vācāpeyya, meaning pleasant speech. Thus, a country gathered together by these four objects of generosity is prosperous and thriving, with abundant food and drink, secure and free from troubles. People live joyfully, dancing their children on their laps with open houses. This, due to the absence of bolts on the doors of the houses, is called niraggaḷa. This is an ancient tradition.

assamedhaṃ purisamedhantiādike pañca yaññe nāma akaṃsu. Tesu assamettha medhanti vadhentītiassamedho. Dvīhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa ekavīsatiyūpassa ekasmiṃ pacchimadivaseyeva sattanavutipañcapasusataghātabhiṃsanassa ṭhapetvā bhūmiñca purise ca avasesasabbavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Purisamettha medhantītipurisamedho. Catūhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sammamettha pāsantītisammāpāso. Divase divase yugacchiggaḷe pavesanadaṇḍakasaṅkhātaṃ sammaṃ khipitvā tassa patitokāse vediṃ katvā saṃhārimehi yūpādīhi sarassatīnadiyā nimuggokāsato pabhuti paṭilomaṃ gacchantena yajitabbassa satrayāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vājamettha pivantītivājapeyyo. Ekena pariyaññena sattarasahi pasūhi yajitabbassa beluvayūpassa sattarasakadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Natthi ettha aggaḷātiniraggaḷo. Navahi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā ca purisehi ca assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa sabbamedhapariyāyanāmassa assamedhavikappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

They performed five sacrifices, namely, assamedhaṃ purisamedha. Among these, that in which they slay horses is assamedha. This is a term for the sacrifice that should be performed with two pariyaññas, with twenty-one yūpa posts, with the slaughter of seventy-five hundred animals on just the last day, setting aside the land and men, and with the remaining wealth as the offering. That in which they slay men is purisamedha. This is a term for the sacrifice that should be performed with four pariyaññas, with the wealth offered as stated in the assamedha along with the land. That in which they properly cast the noose is sammāpāsa. This is a term for the satrayāga sacrifice that should be performed by casting the samma, which is counted as a stick inserted into a hole in a yoke day by day, and making an altar in the space where it falls, going against the grain from the place where the Sarasvatī River is submerged, with the yūpa posts and other things to be collected. That in which they drink the vāja is vājapeyya. This is a term for the sacrifice that should be performed with one pariyañña with seventeen animals, with a seventeen-cubit beluva yūpa post and seventeen kadakkhiṇas. That in which there are no bolts is niraggaḷo. This is a term for the variation of assamedha, known as sabbamedhapariyāya, which should be performed with nine pariyaññas with the land and men and with the wealth offered as stated in the assamedha.

Kalampite nānubhavanti soḷasinti te sabbepi mahāyāgā ekassa mettācittassa vipākamahantatāya soḷasiṃ kalaṃ na agghanti, soḷasamaṃ bhāgaṃ na pāpuṇantīti attho.Na jinātīti na attanā parassa jāniṃ karoti.Na jāpayeti na parena parassa jāniṃ kāreti.Mettaṃsoti mettāyamānacittakoṭṭhāso hutvā.Sabbabhūtānanti sabbasattesu.Veraṃ tassa na kenacīti tassa kenaci saddhiṃ akusalaveraṃ vā puggalaveraṃ vā natthi.

Kalampi te nānubhavanti soḷasi means all those great sacrifices are not worth a sixteenth part of the greatness of the result of a single mind of mettā; they do not attain a sixteenth part. Na jinātī means he does not create enmity for himself or others. Na jāpaye means he does not cause others to create enmity for others. Mettaṃso means having a heart filled with mettā. Sabbabhūtāna means towards all beings. Veraṃ tassa na kenacī means he has no unwholesome enmity or personal enmity with anyone.

2. Paññāsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Paññā Sutta Commentary

2.Dutiyeādibrahmacariyikāyāti maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtāya.Paññāyāti vipassanāya.Garuṭṭhāniyanti gāravuppattipaccayabhūtaṃ garubhāvanīyaṃ.Tibbanti bahalaṃ.Paripucchatīti atthapāḷianusandhipubbāparaṃ pucchati.Paripañhatīti pañhaṃ karoti, idañcidañca paṭipucchissāmīti vitakketi.Dvayenāti duvidhena.Anānākathikoti anānattakathiko hoti.Atiracchānakathikoti nānāvidhaṃ tiracchānakathaṃ na katheti.Ariyaṃ vā tuṇhībhāvanti ariyatuṇhībhāvo nāma catutthajjhānaṃ, sesakammaṭṭhānamanasikāropi vaṭṭati.Jānaṃ jānātīti jānitabbakaṃ jānāti.Passaṃ passatīti passitabbakaṃ passati.Piyattāyāti piyabhāvatthāya.Garuttāyāti garubhāvatthāya.Bhāvanāyāti bhāvanatthāya guṇasambhāvanāya vā.Sāmaññāyāti samaṇadhammatthāya.Ekībhāvāyāti nirantarabhāvatthāya.

2.In the second, ādibrahmacariyikāyā means the preliminary of the Brahmacariya which is the path. Paññāyā means by insight. Garuṭṭhāniya means something worthy of honor, a cause for the arising of respect, worthy of being held in esteem. Tibba means intense. Paripucchatī means he asks about the meaning, the text, the connections, and what comes before and after. Paripañhatī means he questions, he considers, "I will ask about this and that." Dvayenā means in two ways. Anānākathiko means he is not one who speaks about miscellaneous things. Atiracchānakathiko means he does not speak about various kinds of low talk. Ariyaṃ vā tuṇhībhāva means noble silence, which is the fourth jhāna; also suitable is non-attention to the remaining meditation subjects. Jānaṃ jānātī means he knows what should be known. Passaṃ passatī means he sees what should be seen. Piyattāyā means for the sake of affection. Garuttāyā means for the sake of reverence. Bhāvanāyā means for the sake of development or for the appreciation of qualities. Sāmaññāyā means for the sake of the ascetic life. Ekībhāvāyā means for the sake of continuous existence.

3-4. Appiyasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
3-4. Appiya Sutta Pair Commentary

3-4.Tatiyeappiyapasaṃsīti appiyajanassa pasaṃsako vaṇṇabhāṇī.Piyagarahīti piyajanassa nindako garahako. Catuttheanavaññattikāmoti ‘‘aho vata maṃ aññena avajāneyyu’’nti anavajānanakāmo.Akālaññūti kathākālaṃ na jānāti, akāle katheti.Asucīti asucīhi kāyakammādīhi samannāgato.

3-4.In the third, appiyapasaṃsī means one who praises an unliked person, one who speaks well of them. Piyagarahī means one who blames and criticizes a liked person. In the fourth, anavaññattikāmo means he does not want "Oh, may another despise me," he does not want to be despised. Akālaññū means he does not know the right time to speak, he speaks out of time. Asucī means endowed with impure bodily actions, etc.

5. Paṭhamalokadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Paṭhama Lokadhamma Sutta Commentary

5.Pañcame lokassa dhammātilokadhammā. Etehi muttā nāma natthi, buddhānampi honti. Tenevāha –lokaṃ anuparivattantīti anubandhanti nappajahanti, lokato na nivattantīti attho.Loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatīti ayañca loko ete anubandhati na pajahati, tehi dhammehi na nivattatīti attho.

5.In the fifth, lokadhammā means the laws of the world. There is no one free from these; even the Buddhas experience them. Therefore, he said, lokaṃ anuparivattantī means they pursue the world, they do not abandon it, they do not turn away from the world. Loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī means this world also pursues these, it does not abandon them, it does not turn away from those laws.

Lābho alābhoti lābhe āgate alābho āgatoyevāti veditabbo.Ayasādīsupi eseva nayo.Avekkhati vipariṇāmadhammeti ‘‘vipariṇāmadhammā ime’’ti evaṃ avekkhati.Vidhūpitāti vidhamitā viddhaṃsitā.Padañca ñatvāti nibbānapadaṃ jānitvā.Sammappajānāti bhavassa pāragūti bhavassa pāraṃ gato nipphattiṃ matthakaṃ patto, nibbānapadaṃ ñatvāva taṃ pāraṃ gatabhāvaṃ sammappajānātīti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

Lābho alābho means when gain comes, one should understand that loss will also come. The same method applies in Ayasā, etc. Avekkhati vipariṇāmadhamme means he considers "these are subject to change." Vidhūpitā means dispelled, destroyed. Padañca ñatvā means having known the state of Nibbāna. Sammappajānāti bhavassa pāragū means one who has gone to the far shore of existence, one who has reached the summit of attainment, truly understands that he has gone to that far shore only after knowing the state of Nibbāna. In this sutta, the round of existence and liberation have been discussed.

6. Dutiyalokadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Dutiya Lokadhamma Sutta Commentary

6.Chaṭṭheko visesoti kiṃ visesakāraṇaṃ.Ko adhippayāsoti ko adhikappayogo.Pariyādāyāti gahetvā pariniṭṭhapetvā. Idhāpi vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

6.In the sixth, ko viseso means what is the distinguishing cause? Ko adhippayāso means what is the additional effort? Pariyādāyā means having grasped and completely established. Here too, the round of existence and liberation have been discussed.

7. Devadattavipattisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Devadatta Vipatti Sutta Commentary

7.Sattameacirapakkanteti saṅghaṃ bhinditvā na cirapakkante.Ārabbhāti āgamma paṭicca sandhāya.Attavipattinti attano vipattiṃ vipannākāraṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Abhibhuyyāti abhibhavitvā madditvā.

7.In the seventh, acirapakkante means not long after splitting the Saṅgha. Ārabbhā means concerning, regarding, in relation to. Attavipatti means his own ruin, the state of ruin. The same method applies in the remaining passages. Abhibhuyyā means having overcome, having crushed.

8. Uttaravipattisuttavaṇṇanā
8. Uttara Vipatti Sutta Commentary

8.Aṭṭhamevaṭajālikāyanti evaṃnāmake vihāre. So kira vaṭavane niviṭṭhattā vaṭajālikāti saṅkhaṃ gato.Pāturahosīti imamatthaṃ devarañño ārocessāmīti gantvā pākaṭo ahosi.Ādibrahmacariyakoti sikkhattayasaṅgahassa sakalasāsanabrahmacariyassa ādibhūto.

8.In the eighth, vaṭajālikāya means in a monastery of that name. It is said that because it was situated in a banyan forest, it was known as Vaṭajālikā. Pāturahosī means he went to announce this matter to the king of the gods and became manifest. Ādibrahmacariyako means the foremost of the entire Brahmacariya of the Teaching, which encompasses the three trainings.

9. Nandasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Nanda Sutta Commentary

9.Navamekulaputtoti jātikulaputto.Balavāti thāmasampanno.Pāsādikoti rūpasampattiyā pasādajanako.Tibbarāgoti bahalarāgo.Kimaññatrātiādīsu ayamattho – kiṃ aññena kāraṇena kathitena, ayaṃ nando indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyamanuyutto satisampajaññena samannāgato, yehi nando sakkoti paripuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carituṃ. Sace imehi kāraṇehi samannāgato nābhavissa, na sakkuṇeyyāti.Itiha tatthāti evaṃ tattha. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

9.In the ninth, kulaputto means a clansman by birth. Balavā means endowed with strength. Pāsādiko means inspiring confidence by his beauty. Tibbarāgo means intense in desire. In Kimaññatrā, etc., this is the meaning: what is the need to say anything else? This Nanda is one who guards the doors of his senses, knows moderation in food, is devoted to wakefulness, is endowed with mindfulness and clear comprehension; by these qualities Nanda is able to live the Brahmacariya completely and purely. If he were not endowed with these qualities, he would not be able to do so. Itiha tatthā means thus it is there. In this sutta, only the round of existence is discussed.

10. Kāraṇḍavasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Kāraṇḍava Sutta Commentary

10.Dasameaññenāññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena vacanena vā aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vacanaṃ vā paṭicchādeti.Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetīti bāhirato aññaṃ āgantukakathaṃ otāreti.Apaneyyesoti apaneyyo nīharitabbo esa.Samaṇadūsīti samaṇadūsako.Samaṇapalāpoti vīhīsu vīhipalāpo viya nissāratāya samaṇesu samaṇapalāpo.Samaṇakāraṇḍavoti samaṇakacavaro.Bahiddhā nāsentīti bahi nīharanti.Yavakaraṇeti yavakhette.Phuṇamānassāti ucce ṭhāne ṭhatvā mahāvāte opuniyamānassa.Apasammajjantīti sāradhaññānaṃ ekato dubbaladhaññānaṃ ekato karaṇatthaṃ punappunaṃ apasammajjanti, apasammajjanisaṅkhātena vātaggāhinā suppena vā vatthena vā nīharanti.Daddaranti daddarasaddaṃ.

10.In the tenth, aññenāññaṃ paṭicaratī means he conceals one thing, whether a cause or a word, with another cause or word. Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetī means he turns away other incoming talk from the outside. Apaneyyeso means this one should be removed, expelled. Samaṇadūsī means a defiler of ascetics. Samaṇapalāpo means, like chaff among rice, he is chaff among ascetics because of his lack of essence. Samaṇakāraṇḍavo means ascetic refuse. Bahiddhā nāsentī means they take it outside. Yavakaraṇe means in a barley field. Phuṇamānassā means for one standing in a high place being winnowed by a great wind. Apasammajjantī means they repeatedly sweep away to separate the strong grains from the weak grains, they remove them with a winnowing basket or cloth that catches the wind by the act of sweeping. Daddara means a rattling sound.

Saṃvāsāyanti saṃvāsena ayaṃ.Vijānāthāti jāneyyātha.Santavācoti saṇhavāco.Janavatīti janamajjhe.Raho karoti karaṇanti karaṇaṃ vuccati pāpakammaṃ, taṃ raho paṭicchanno hutvā karoti.Saṃsappī ca musāvādīti saṃsappitvā musāvādī, musā bhaṇanto saṃsappati phandatīti attho. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathetvā gāthāsu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.

Saṃvāsāya means for association is this. Vijānāthā means you should know. Santavāco means gentle in speech. Janavatī means in the midst of people. Raho karoti karaṇa means karaṇa is called evil action, he does that in secret, concealed. Saṃsappī ca musāvādī means one who speaks falsehoods while wriggling, meaning he trembles and squirms while speaking falsehoods. In this sutta, only the round of existence is discussed, but in the verses, both the round of existence and liberation are discussed.

2. Mahāvaggo

2. Mahā Vagga

1. Verañjasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Verañja Sutta Commentary

11.Dutiyassa paṭhameabhivādetīti evamādīnina samaṇo gotamoti ettha vuttanakārena yojetvā evamettha attho veditabbo ‘‘na vandati nāsanā vuṭṭhāti, nāpi ‘idha bhonto nisīdantū’ti evaṃ āsanena vā nimantetī’’ti. Ettha hi vā-saddo vibhāvane nāma atthe ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’tiādīsu viya. Evaṃ vatvā atha attano abhivādanādīni akarontaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvā āha –tayidaṃ, bho gotama, tathevāti. Yaṃ taṃ mayā sutaṃ, taṃ tatheva, taṃ savanañca me dassanañca saṃsandati sameti, atthato ekībhāvaṃ gacchati. Na hi bhavaṃ gotamo…pe… āsanena vā nimantetīti. Evaṃ attanā sutaṃ diṭṭhena nigametvā nindanto āha –tayidaṃ, bho gotama, na sampannamevāti taṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ ayuttamevāti.

11.In the first of the second, abhivādetī, etc., should be connected with the negation stated in na samaṇo gotamo, and the meaning here should be understood thus: "He does not pay homage, he does not rise from his seat, nor does he invite with a seat, saying, 'May the honorable ones be seated here.'" Here, the word "vā" is in the sense of discrimination, as in "Is form permanent impermanent," etc. Having said this, then seeing the Blessed One not doing his own paying homage, etc., he said: tayidaṃ, bho gotama, tathevā means that which was heard by me is just so; that hearing and this seeing of mine coincide and agree, they come to a unity in meaning. The honorable Gotama does not…pe…invite with a seat. Thus, having concluded what he had heard with what he saw, he criticized, saying: tayidaṃ, bho gotama, na sampannamevā means that not doing the paying homage, etc., is simply inappropriate.

nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, appaṭihatena sabbaññutaññāṇacakkhunā olokentopi taṃ puggalaṃ etasmiṃ sadevakādibhede loke na passāmi, yamahaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ vā paccuṭṭheyyaṃ vā āsanena vā nimanteyyaṃ. Anacchariyaṃ vā etaṃ, svāhaṃ ajja sabbaññutaṃ patto evarūpaṃ nipaccākārārahaṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi. Apica kho yadāpāhaṃ sampatijātova uttarena mukho sattapadavītihārena gantvā sakalaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokesiṃ, tadāpi etasmiṃ sadevakādibhede loke taṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi, yamahaṃ evarūpaṃ nipaccakāraṃ kareyyaṃ. Atha kho maṃ soḷasakappasahassāyuko khīṇāsavamahābrahmāpi añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘tvaṃ loke mahāpuriso, tvaṃ sadevakassa lokassa aggo ca jeṭṭho ca seṭṭho ca, natthi tayā uttaritaro’’ti sañjātasomanasso patimānesi. Tadāpi cāhaṃ attanā uttaritaraṃ apassanto āsabhiṃ vācaṃ nicchāresiṃ – ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassā’’ti. Evaṃ sampatijātassāpi mayhaṃ abhivādanādiraho puggalo natthi, svāhaṃ idāni sabbaññutaṃ patto kaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ. Tasmā tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, mā tathāgatā evarūpaṃ paramanipaccakāraṃ patthayi. Yañhi, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato abhivādeyya vā…pe… āsanena vā nimanteyya, muddhāpi tassa puggalassa rattipariyosāne paripākasithilabandhanaṃ vaṇṭā muttatālaphalaṃ viya gīvato chijjitvā sahasāva bhūmiyaṃ nipateyya.

nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇātiādi—He spoke beginning with this. Herein is the meaning in brief: "O Brahmin, even looking with the unobstructed eye of all-knowing wisdom, I do not see that person in this world with its devas, etc., to whom I should offer a salutation, rise up for, or invite to be seated. Nor is this a wonder, that I, having attained all-knowingness today, do not see a person worthy of such profound respect. Furthermore, when I had just been born and, with my face to the north, had gone seven paces, I surveyed the entire ten-thousand world-system, but even then, I did not see that person in this world with its devas, etc., to whom I should pay such profound respect. But then, even the Great Brahma, with an आयु (āyu) of sixteen thousand aeons and free from āsavas, raised his joined hands and honored me, filled with joy, saying, 'You are a great man in the world; you are the foremost, the eldest, and the best of the world with its devas; there is none higher than you.' Even then, not seeing anyone higher than myself, I uttered the bull-like speech: 'I am the foremost in the world, I am the eldest in the world, I am the best in the world.' Thus, even for me just born, there is no one to whom I should offer salutation, etc., so whom should I, having now attained all-knowingness, salute? Therefore, O Brahmin, do not expect such supreme respect from the Tathāgata. For if, O Brahmin, the Tathāgata were to salute, etc., or invite someone to be seated, the head of that person would, at the end of the night, be severed from his neck and fall suddenly to the ground like a ripe, loosened talā fruit whose stem has a weak bond."

arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamoti. Ayaṃ kirassa adhippāyo – yaṃ loke abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ ‘‘sāmaggiraso’’ti vuccati, taṃ bhoto gotamassa natthi. Tasmā arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo, arasajātiko arasasabhāvoti. Athassa bhagavā cittamudubhāvajananatthaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhāvaṃ pariharanto aññathā tassa vacanassa atthaṃ attani sandassentoatthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyotiādimāha.

arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamoti—His intention here was: "That which in the world is called the 'flavor of fellowship' (sāmaggiraso), namely, the acts of salutation, rising up, añjali, and proper conduct, that does not exist for Master Gotama. Therefore, Master Gotama is without flavor, of a flavorless nature, having a flavorless essence." Then the Blessed One, avoiding direct opposition in order to produce certainty in his mind, demonstrating the meaning of his statement differently in himself, spoke beginning with atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyoti.

atthi khvesāti atthi kho esa.Pariyāyoti kāraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, etaṃ kāraṇaṃ, yena kāraṇena maṃ ‘‘arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti vadamāno puggalo sammā vadeyya, avitathavādīti saṅkhaṃ gaccheyya. Katamo pana soti? Ye te, brāhmaṇa, rūparasā…pe… phoṭṭhabbarasā, te tathāgatassa pahīnāti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ye te jātivasena vā upapattivasena vā seṭṭhasammatānampi puthujjanānaṃ rūpārammaṇādīni assādentānaṃ abhinandantānaṃ rajjantānaṃ uppajjanti kāmasukhassādasaṅkhātā rūparasā, saddarasā, gandharasā, rasarasā, phoṭṭhabbarasā, ye imaṃ lokaṃ gīvāya bandhitvā viya āviñchanti, vatthārammaṇādisāmaggiyañca uppannattā sāmaggirasāti vuccanti. Te sabbepi tathāgatassa pahīnā. ‘‘Mayhaṃ pahīnā’’ti vattabbepi mamākārena attānaṃ anukkhipanto dhammaṃ deseti, desanāvilāso vā esa tathāgatassa.

atthi khvesāti—indeed, there is. Pariyāyoti—reason. This is what is said: "Indeed, O Brahmin, there is this reason, by which a person saying 'Master Gotama is without flavor' would speak correctly and be counted as a speaker of truth. But what is that?" "Those flavors of form, sound, odor, taste, and tactile object are abandoned by the Tathāgata." What is said is this: Those flavors of sensual pleasure, known as the taste of sensual pleasure, which arise for even those ordinary people who are considered the best by birth or status, when they enjoy, delight in, and are attached to objects of form, etc.—flavors of sound, flavors of odor, flavors of taste, flavors of tactile object—which drag this world along as if bound by the neck, and which, because they arise from the fellowship of objects of clothing, etc., are called the flavor of fellowship—all of these are abandoned by the Tathāgata. Even in saying "They are abandoned by me," he teaches the Dhamma while not exalting himself in terms of 'I' or 'mine'; or this is the eloquence of the Tathāgata in teaching.

pahīnāti cittasantānato vigatā, pajahitā vā. Etasmiṃ panatthe karaṇe sāmivacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ariyamaggasatthena ucchinnaṃ taṇhāvijjāmayaṃ mūlaṃ etesantiucchinnamūlā. Tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katantitālāvatthukatā. Yathā hi tālarukkhaṃ samūlaṃ uddharitvā tassa vatthumatte tasmiṃ padese kate na puna tassa tālassa uppatti paññāyati, evaṃ ariyamaggasatthena samūle rūpādirase uddharitvā tesaṃ pubbe uppannapubbabhāvena vatthumatte cittasantāne kate sabbepi te tālāvatthukatāti vuccanti. Aviruḷhidhammattā vā matthakacchinnatālo viya katāti tālāvatthukatā. Yasmā pana evaṃ tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā honti, yathā nesaṃ pacchābhāvo na hoti, tathā katā honti. Tasmā āha –anabhāvaṃkatāti.Āyatiṃ anuppādadhammāti anāgate anuppajjanakasabhāvā.

pahīnāti—gone from the continuum of consciousness, or relinquished. In this meaning, the expression should be understood in the instrumental case. Their root, which is craving and ignorance, is cut off by the sword of the Noble Path, thus ucchinnamūlā. Their foundation is made like a palm stump, thus tālāvatthukatā. Just as when a palm tree is uprooted along with its roots and its foundation is made in that place where only the stump remains, no further growth of that palm is evident; so too, having uprooted the flavors of form, etc., along with their roots by the Noble Path, and having made their foundation in the continuum of consciousness where only the prior existence remains, all of these are said to be tālāvatthukatā. Or, because they are of a nature of non-growth, they are made like a palm tree with its crown severed, thus tālāvatthukatā. Furthermore, because they are made anabhāvaṃkatā in this way, such that there is no subsequent existence for them, thus they are made. Therefore, he said anabhāvaṃkatāti—made non-existent. Āyatiṃ anuppādadhammāti—of a nature of non-arising in the future.

No ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesīti yañca kho tvaṃ sandhāya vadesi, so pariyāyo na hoti. Nanu ca evaṃ vutte yo brāhmaṇena vutto sāmaggiraso, tassa attani vijjamānatā anuññātā hotīti? Na hoti. Yo hi naṃ sāmaggirasaṃ kātuṃ bhabbo hutvā na karoti, so tadabhāvena arasarūpoti vattabbataṃ arahati. Bhagavā pana abhabbova etaṃ kātuṃ, tenassa kāraṇe abhabbataṃ pakāsento āha – ‘‘no ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesī’’ti. Yaṃ pariyāyaṃ sandhāya tvaṃ maṃ ‘‘arasarūpo’’ti vadesi, so amhesu neva vattabboti.

No ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesīti—but that which you speak intending, that is not the reason. But now, if it is said thus, would the existence in himself of the flavor of fellowship spoken by the Brahmin be conceded? It would not. For someone who is capable of creating that flavor of fellowship but does not do so, is worthy of being called flavorless due to its absence. But the Blessed One is incapable of doing this; therefore, revealing his inability in this reason, he said: "no ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesī"—that reason by which you speak of me as "flavorless" is not to be spoken in us.

nibbhogo bhavantiādimāha. Sabbapariyāyesu cettha vuttanayeneva yojanākkamaṃ viditvā sandhāyabhāsitamatthaṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – brāhmaṇo tadeva vayovuddhānaṃ abhivādanādikammaṃ loke ‘‘sāmaggiparibhogo’’ti maññamāno tadabhāvena ca bhagavantaṃ ‘‘nibbhogo’’tiādimāha. Bhagavā ca yvāyaṃ rūpādīsu sattānaṃ chandarāgaparibhogo, tadabhāvaṃ attani sampassamāno aparaṃ pariyāyamanujāni.

nibbhogo bhavantiādi—He spoke beginning with this. Here, in all the reasons, having understood the order of application in accordance with the method stated, the meaning spoken with intention should be understood thus: The Brahmin, thinking that very action of salutation, etc., for elders is "the enjoyment of fellowship" (sāmaggiparibhogo) in the world, and due to its absence, he spoke of the Blessed One as "without enjoyment," etc. And the Blessed One, seeing in himself the absence of that enjoyment of sensual desire in forms, etc., for beings, consented to another reason.

akiriyavādoti āha. Bhagavā pana yasmā kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ akiriyaṃ vadati, tasmā taṃ akiriyavāditaṃ attani sampassamāno aparaṃ pariyāyamanujāni. Tattha ṭhapetvā kāyaduccaritādīni avasesā akusalā dhammāanekavihitā pāpakā akusalā dhammāti veditabbā.

akiriyavādoti—he said, "Non-doer." But since the Blessed One speaks of the non-doing of evil actions of body, etc., therefore, seeing that "non-doing" in himself, he consented to another reason. Therein, setting aside evil actions of body, etc., the remaining unwholesome states should be understood as anekavihitā pāpakā akusalā dhammāti—"manifold evil unwholesome states."

ucchedavādoti āha. Bhagavā pana yasmā pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa ceva akusalacittadvayasampayuttassa ca dosassa anāgāmimaggena ucchedaṃ vadati, sabbākusalasambhavassa pana mohassa arahattamaggena ucchedaṃ vadati, ṭhapetvā te tayo avasesānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathānurūpaṃ catūhi maggehi ucchedaṃ vadati, tasmā taṃ ucchedavādaṃ attani sampassamāno aparaṃ pariyāyamanujāni.

ucchedavādoti—he said, "Annihilationist." But since the Blessed One speaks of the annihilation of the lust for the five strands of sensual desire, and the aversion associated with two types of unwholesome consciousness, by the path of the Anāgāmī, and speaks of the annihilation of ignorance, the source of all unwholesome states, by the path of Arahat, setting aside those three, he speaks of the annihilation of the remaining evil unwholesome states by the four paths according to their suitability, therefore, seeing that "annihilationism" in himself, he consented to another reason.

jegucchīti āha. Bhagavā pana yasmā jigucchati kāyaduccaritādīhi, yāni kāyavacīmanoduccaritāni ceva yāva ca akusalānaṃ lāmakadhammānaṃ samāpatti samāpajjanā samaṅgibhāvo, taṃ sabbampi gūthaṃ viya maṇḍanakajātiko puriso jigucchati hirīyati, tasmā taṃ jegucchitaṃ attani sampassamāno aparaṃ pariyāyamanujāni. Tatthakāyaduccaritenātiādi karaṇavacanaṃ upayogatthe daṭṭhabbaṃ.

jegucchīti—he said, "Repulsive." But since the Blessed One is disgusted by evil actions of body, etc., namely, those evil actions of body, speech, and mind, and even the attainment, the engaging in, the association with unwholesome, low states, all of that is repulsive to him like filth, just as a man of adorned caste is disgusted by filth, therefore, seeing that "repulsiveness" in himself, he consented to another reason. Therein, kāyaduccaritenātiādi—"by evil action of body," etc., the instrumental case should be understood in the sense of use.

venayikoti āha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – vinayatīti vinayo, vināsetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vinayo evavenayiko. Vinayaṃ vā arahatītivenayiko,niggahaṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavā pana yasmā rāgādīnaṃ vinayāya vūpasamāya dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā venayiko hoti. Ayameva cettha padattho – vinayāya dhammaṃ desetīti venayiko. Vicitrā hi taddhitavutti. Svāyaṃ taṃ venayikabhāvaṃ attani sampassamāno aparaṃ pariyāyamanujāni.

venayikoti—he said, "Disciplinarian." Herein is the word meaning: "He disciplines," thus it is vinayo, which means "he destroys." Vinayo eva—Vinaya itself is venayiko. Or, "he is worthy of discipline," thus venayiko, which means "he is worthy of restraint." But since the Blessed One teaches the Dhamma for the discipline and calming of lust, etc., therefore, he is a disciplinarian. This itself is the word meaning here—"he teaches the Dhamma for discipline," thus he is a disciplinarian. For the taddhita derivation is diverse. Seeing that "disciplinarian" quality in himself, he consented to another reason.

tapassīti āha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – tapatīti tapo, roseti vihesetīti attho. Sāmīcikammākaraṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tapo assa atthītitapassī. Dutiye atthavikappe byañjanāni avicāretvā loke kapaṇapuriso tapassīti vuccati. Bhagavā pana ye akusalā dhammā lokaṃ tapanato tapanīyāni vuccanti, tesaṃ pahīnattā yasmā tapassīti saṅkhaṃ gato. Tasmā taṃ tapassitaṃ attani sampassamāno aparaṃ pariyāyamanujāni. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – tapantīti tapā, akusaladhammānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Te tape assi nirassi pahāsi viddhaṃsīti tapassī.

tapassīti—he said, "Ascetic." Herein is the word meaning: "He burns," thus it is tapo, meaning "he afflicts and torments." This is a designation for not doing proper conduct. He has tapo, thus he is tapassī. In the second alternative of meaning, without examining the letters, a miserly person is called an ascetic in the world. But since the Blessed One is called an ascetic because of the abandoning of those unwholesome states which are said to burn the world, therefore, seeing that "asceticism" in himself, he consented to another reason. Herein is the meaning of the statement: "They burn," thus they are tapā—this is a designation for unwholesome states. He is one who has abandoned, relinquished, destroyed those tapas, thus he is tapassī.

apagabbhoti āha. Kodhavasena vā bhagavato mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇe dosaṃ dassentopi evamāha. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – gabbhato apagatotiapagabbho,abhabbo devalokūpapattiṃ pāpuṇitunti adhippāyo. Hīno vā gabbho assāti apagabbho. Devalokagabbhaparibāhirattā āyatiṃ hīnagabbhapaṭilābhabhāgīti. Hīno vāssa mātukucchismiṃ gabbhavāso ahosīti adhippāyo. Bhagavato pana yasmā āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā apagatā, tasmā so taṃ apagabbhataṃ attani sampassamāno aparaṃ pariyāyamanujāni. Tatra cayassa kho, brāhmaṇa, āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnāti etesaṃ padānaṃ evamattho daṭṭhabbo – ‘‘brāhmaṇa, yassa puggalassa anāgate gabbhaseyyā punabbhave ca abhinibbatti anuttarena maggena vihatakāraṇattā pahīnā. Gabbhaseyyāgahaṇena cettha jalābujayoni gahitā, punabbhavābhinibbattiggahaṇena itarā tisso’’pi.

apagabbhoti—He said "devoid of a womb." Even showing fault with the Blessed One's conception in his mother's womb due to anger, he said this. Herein is the meaning of the statement: "Gone away from the womb," thus apagabbho, the intention is "incapable of attaining rebirth in the deva-world." Or, "he has a low womb," thus apagabbho. Because he is outside the deva-world womb, in the future he is one who partakes of obtaining a low womb. Or, the intention is "he had a low stay in his mother's womb." But since the Blessed One's future lying in a womb is gone away, therefore, seeing that "being devoid of a womb" in himself, he consented to another reason. And there yassa kho, brāhmaṇa, āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnāti—"O Brahmin, for whom the future lying in a womb and the arising in renewed existence are abandoned," the meaning of these words should be seen thus: "O Brahmin, for whatever person, future lying in a womb and arising in renewed existence are abandoned due to the cause being destroyed by the unsurpassed path. Here, by the term 'lying in a womb' (gabbhaseyyā), the womb-born (jalābujayoni) is taken; by the term 'arising in renewed existence' (punabbhavābhinibbatti), the other three are also taken."

gabbhaseyyā. Punabbhavo eva abhinibbattipunabbhavābhinibbattīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā ca viññāṇaṭṭhitīti vuttepi na viññāṇato aññā ṭhiti atthi, evamidhāpi na gabbhato aññā seyyā veditabbā. Abhinibbatti ca nāma yasmā punabbhavabhūtāpi apunabbhavabhūtāpi atthi, idha ca punabbhavabhūtā adhippetā, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘punabbhavo eva abhinibbatti punabbhavābhinibbattī’’ti.

gabbhaseyyā—"Lying in a womb." Renewed existence itself is arising, thus punabbhavābhinibbattī—here the meaning should be seen thus. And just as even when "the maintenance of consciousness" (viññāṇaṭṭhitīti) is said, there is no maintenance other than consciousness, so too here, no lying other than the womb should be understood. And since the arising (abhinibbatti) is both that which is of renewed existence and that which is of non-renewed existence, and here that which is of renewed existence is intended, therefore it was said: "Renewed existence itself is arising, thus punabbhavābhinibbattī."

seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇātiādinā nayena brāhmaṇassa dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhesi.

seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇātiādinā nayena—He increased the teaching of the Dhamma to the Brahmin by way of "Just as, O Brahmin," etc.

seyyathāpītiādīnaṃ heṭṭhā vutanayeneva attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva hi te kukkuṭapotakā pakkhe vidhunantā taṃkhaṇānurūpaṃ viravantā nikkhamanti. Evaṃ nikkhamantānañca tesaṃ yo paṭhamataraṃ nikkhamati, so jeṭṭhoti vuccati. Tasmā bhagavā tāya upamāya attano jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ sādhetukāmo brāhmaṇaṃ pucchati –yo nu kho tesaṃ kukkuṭacchāpotakānaṃ…pe… kinti svāssa vacanīyoti. Tatthakukkuṭacchāpakānanti kukkuṭapotakānaṃ.Kinti svāssa vacanīyoti so kinti vacanīyo assa, kiṃ vattabbo bhaveyya jeṭṭho vā kaniṭṭho vāti.

seyyathāpītiādīnaṃ—The meaning of "Just as," etc., should be understood in the same way as stated below. But this is the distinction: For just as those chicks, flapping their wings and chirping appropriately for that moment, emerge in the way stated below; and of those emerging, the one who emerges first is called the eldest. Therefore, the Blessed One, wishing to establish his own state of being the eldest by that simile, asks the Brahmin: yo nu kho tesaṃ kukkuṭacchāpotakānaṃ…pe… kinti svāssa vacanīyoti—"Of those chicks... what should he be called?" Therein, kukkuṭacchāpakānanti—of the chicks. Kinti svāssa vacanīyoti—what should he be called? What should be said of him—eldest or youngest?

‘‘Jeṭṭho’’tissa, bho gotama, vacanīyoti, bho gotama, so jeṭṭho iti assa vacanīyo. Kasmāti ce?So hi nesaṃ jeṭṭhoti, yasmā so nesaṃ vuddhataroti attho. Athassa bhagavā opammaṃ sampaṭipādentoevameva khoti āha, yathā so kukkuṭapotako, evaṃ ahampi.Avijjāgatāyapajāyāti avijjā vuccati aññāṇaṃ, tattha gatāya.Pajāyāti sattadhivacanametaṃ, avijjākosassa anto paviṭṭhesu sattesūpi vuttaṃ hoti.Aṇḍabhūtāyāti aṇḍe bhūtāya pajātāya sañjātāya. Yathā hi aṇḍe nibbattā ekacce sattā aṇḍabhūtāti vuccanti, evamayaṃ sabbāpi pajā avijjaṇḍakose nibbattattā aṇḍabhūtāti vuccati.Pariyonaddhāyāti tena avijjaṇḍakosena samantato onaddhāya baddhāya veṭhitāya.Avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvāti taṃ avijjāmayaṃ aṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā.Ekova loketi sakalepi lokasannivāse ahameva eko adutiyo.Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti uttararahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ, atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ. Arahattamaggañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇassāpi nāmameva. Ubhayampi vaṭṭati. Aññesaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti, na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti, buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissarabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti.Abhisambuddhoti abbhaññāsiṃ paṭivijjhiṃ, pattomhi adhigatomhīti vuttaṃ hoti.

‘‘Jeṭṭho’’tissa, bho gotama, vacanīyoti—"He should be called 'eldest'," O Gotama. Why is that? So hi nesaṃ jeṭṭhoti—because he is the eldest of them, this is the meaning. Then the Blessed One, applying the simile, said: evameva khoti—Just as that chick, so too am I. Avijjāgatāyapajāyāti—"Of the beings gone to ignorance," avijjā means unknowing; gone to that. Pajāyāti—this is a designation for beings; it is said even of beings who have entered into the midst of the egg of ignorance. Aṇḍabhūtāyāti—"Of the beings who have become like an egg," born in an egg. Just as some beings born in an egg are called "egg-born," so too all these beings, because they are born in the egg-shell of ignorance, are called "egg-born." Pariyonaddhāyāti—"Of those completely bound, wrapped around," by that egg-shell of ignorance. Avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvāti—"Having split open the egg-shell of ignorance." Ekova loketi—"Alone in the world," in the entire collection of the world, I alone am without a second. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti—"Fully awakened to the unsurpassed perfect self-awakening," uttararahitaṃ means devoid of anything higher, the very best perfect and complete awakening, or else the praised and beautiful awakening. This is a name for the wisdom of the path of Arahat, and it is also a name for the wisdom of the All-Knowing One. Both are suitable. Is the path of Arahat the unsurpassed awakening for others or is it not? It is not. Why? Because it is not the giver of all qualities. For the path of Arahat of some gives only the fruit of Arahat; of some, the three knowledges; of some, the six super-knowledges; of some, the four analytical knowledges; of some, the knowledge of a disciple's perfection. For Paccekabuddhas also, it gives only the knowledge of a Paccekabodhi; but for Buddhas, it gives the accomplishment of all qualities, like the anointing of a king giving sovereignty over the entire world. Therefore, the unsurpassed awakening does not exist for anyone else. Abhisambuddhoti—"Fully awakened," I have fully known, penetrated, attained, and realized, this is what is said.

Idāni yadetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘evameva kho’’tiādinā nayena vuttaṃ opammasampaṭipādanaṃ, taṃ evaṃ atthena saṃsanditvā veditabbaṃ – yathā hi tassā kukkuṭiyā attano aṇḍesu adhisayanāditividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ, evaṃ bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato attano santāne aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ, anattāti tividhānupassanākaraṇaṃ. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyāsampādanena aṇḍānaṃ apūtibhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa aparihāni. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍānaṃ allasinehapariyādānaṃ viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena bhavattayānugatanikantisinehapariyādānaṃ. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍakapālānaṃ tanubhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo, kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭapotakassa pādanakhatuṇḍakānaṃ thaddhakharabhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvo. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭapotakassa pariṇāmakālo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakālo vaḍḍhikālo gabbhaggahaṇakālo. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭapotakassa pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā pakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā abhinibbhidākālo viya bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā anupubbādhigatena arahattamaggena avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhiññāpakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā sakalabuddhaguṇasacchikatakālo veditabbo.

Now, this illustrative exposition stated by the Blessed One with the phrase "evameva kho" (just so), should be understood by connecting it with the meaning in this way: Just as that hen engages in various activities such as brooding over its eggs, so too, the Blessed One, being a Bodhisatta seated at the Bodhi-pallaṅka (enlightenment platform), engaged in the threefold contemplation of impermanence (anicca), suffering (dukkha), and non-self (anatta) in his own being. Just as the eggs of the hen do not become rotten due to the accomplishment of the threefold activity, so too, the insight knowledge (vipassanāñāṇa) of the Blessed One, being a Bodhisatta, did not diminish due to the accomplishment of the threefold contemplation. Just as the moisture and stickiness of the eggs are depleted by the hen’s threefold activity, so too, the clinging affection for the three realms of existence (bhavattaya) was depleted in the Blessed One, being a Bodhisatta, by the accomplishment of the threefold contemplation. Just as the eggshells become thin due to the hen's threefold activity, so too, the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) became thin in the Blessed One, being a Bodhisatta, by the accomplishment of the threefold contemplation. Just as the claws and beaks of the chick inside the egg become firm and hard due to the hen's threefold activity, so too, the insight knowledge of the Blessed One, being a Bodhisatta, became sharp, firm, clear, and heroic due to the accomplishment of the threefold contemplation. Just as the maturation time arrives for the chick due to the hen's threefold activity, so too, the maturation time, the growing time, the time for conception of insight knowledge arrived for the Blessed One, being a Bodhisatta, due to the accomplishment of the threefold contemplation. Just as the chick, breaking the eggshell with the tip of its claw or beak, and flapping its wings, safely hatches, so too, it should be understood that the Blessed One, by accomplishing the threefold contemplation, conceived the womb of insight knowledge, and breaking the shell of ignorance with the Arahantship-path (arahattamagga) attained in due order, flapping the wings of the super-knowledges (abhiññā), safely realized all the Buddha qualities.

Ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, jeṭṭho seṭṭho lokassāti, brāhmaṇa, yathā tesaṃ kukkuṭapotakānaṃ paṭhamataraṃ aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhinibbatto kukkuṭapotako jeṭṭho hoti, evaṃ avijjāgatāya pajāya taṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā paṭhamataraṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātattā ahañhi jeṭṭho vuddhatamoti saṅkhaṃ gato, sabbaguṇehi pana appaṭisamattā seṭṭhoti.

Ahañhi, brāhmaṇa, jeṭṭho seṭṭho lokassāti, "O Brahmin, just as among those chicks, the one that breaks the eggshell and hatches first is the eldest (jeṭṭho), so too, because I am born first into the noble lineage (ariya jāti) by breaking that shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) for beings covered by ignorance, therefore I am considered the eldest, the most senior." But because he is unsurpassed in all virtues, he is the best (seṭṭho).

āraddhaṃ kho pana me, brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tatthaāraddhaṃ kho pana me, brāhmaṇa, vīriyaṃ ahosīti, brāhmaṇa, na mayā ayaṃ anuttaro jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvo kusītena muṭṭhassatinā sāraddhakāyena vikkhittacitena adhigato, apica kho tadadhigamāya āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ ahosi. Bodhimaṇḍe nisinnena mayā catusammappadhānabhedaṃ vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ ahosi, paggahitaṃ asithilappavattitaṃ. Āraddhattāyeva ca me taṃasallīnaṃahosi. Na kevalañca vīriyameva, satipi me ārammaṇābhimukhabhāvenaupaṭṭhitāahosi, upaṭṭhitattāyeva caasammuṭṭhā. Passaddho kāyo asāraddhoti kāyacittappassaddhivasena kāyopi me passaddho ahosi. Tattha yasmā nāmakāye passaddhe rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hoti, tasmā ‘‘nāmakāyo rūpakāyo’’ti avisesetvāva ‘‘passaddho kāyo’’ti vuttaṃ.Asāraddhoti so ca kho passaddhattāyeva asāraddho, vigatadarathoti vuttaṃ hoti.Samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekagganti cittampi me sammā āhitaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ appitaṃ viya ahosi, samāhitattā eva ca ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandananti. Ettāvatā jhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā kathitā hoti.

Āraddhaṃ kho pana me, brāhmaṇātiādi (etc.) was said. There, āraddhaṃ kho pana me, brāhmaṇa, vīriyaṃ ahosīti, "O Brahmin, this unsurpassed state of being the eldest and best was not attained by me through laziness, forgetfulness, a listless body, or a distracted mind. Rather, for the attainment of that, effort (vīriyaṃ) was aroused in me. While seated at the Bodhi-maṇḍa, effort in the form of the four right exertions (catusammappadhāna) was aroused by me, sustained, and unremittingly applied. And because it was aroused, it was asallīnaṃ (not flagging)." And not only effort, but also mindfulness (sati) was upaṭṭhitā (present) with me, facing towards the object. And because it was present, it was asammuṭṭhā (unconfused). Passaddho kāyo asāraddhoti, due to the tranquility of body and mind, my body was also tranquil (passaddho). Here, because when the mind-body (nāmakāya) is tranquil, the body (rūpakāya) is also tranquil, therefore it was said "passaddho kāyo" (tranquil body) without distinguishing "mind-body" and "body." Asāraddhoti, and because it was tranquil, it was also unagitated (asāraddho), meaning free from distress. Samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekagganti, my mind (citta) was also well-established (samāhitaṃ), well-placed, as if fixed, and because it was well-established, it was one-pointed (ekaggaṃ), unwavering, and unmoving. Thus far, the preliminary practice for jhāna has been described.

so kho ahantiādimāha. Tattha yaṃ yāva vinicchayanayena vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.69) vuttameva.

So kho ahantiādi (etc.) was said. There, whatever should be said according to the method of determination (vinicchayanayena), that has already been stated in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.69).

Ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇātiādīsu panavijjāti viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ.Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tappaṭicchādakamoho.Tamoti sveva moho tappaṭicchādakaṭṭhena tamo nāma.Ālokoti sā eva vijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena ālokoti. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti attho, sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha – ayaṃ kho me vijjā adhigatā, tassa me adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā, vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannā. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvaye.Yathā tanti etthatanti nipātamattaṃ. Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa vīriyātāpena ātāpino kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhātāya pahitattassa pesitattassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya, vijjā uppajjeyya tamo vihaññeyya, āloko uppajjeyya, evameva mama avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato, āloko uppanno. Etassa me padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ laddhanti.

However, in Ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇātiādi (etc.), vijjāti (knowledge) is knowledge (vijjā) in the sense of making known. What does it make known? Past lives (pubbenivāsa). Avijjāti (ignorance) is the ignorance (moha) that conceals that very past life, in the sense of making it unknown. Tamoti (darkness) is that very ignorance (moha) called darkness (tamo), in the sense of being a concealer. Ālokoti (light) is that very knowledge (vijjā) called light (āloko), in the sense of illuminating. Here, vijjā (knowledge) means attained, the rest is praise. The connection here is – "This knowledge (vijjā) was attained by me; for me, having attained knowledge, ignorance (avijjā) was dispelled, destroyed." Why? Because knowledge (vijjā) arose. This is the same method for the other pair of terms. Yathā tanti, here tanti is merely an expletive. "Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa vīriyātāpena ātāpino kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhātāya pahitattassa pesitattassāti" means, "because of not being separated from mindfulness, being diligent, being ardent with the heat of effort, being energetic by not being dependent on the body and life, being intent and directed." This is what is said: Just as for one who dwells diligently, ardently, intently, ignorance (avijjā) is dispelled, knowledge (vijjā) arises, darkness (tamo) is dispelled, and light (āloko) arises, even so, for me, ignorance (avijjā) was dispelled, knowledge (vijjā) arose, darkness (tamo) was dispelled, and light (āloko) arose. I have obtained a result that is in accordance with this pursuit of exertion.

Ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇa, paṭhamā abhinibbhidā ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhāti ayaṃ kho mama, brāhmaṇa, pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇamukhatuṇḍakena pubbe nivutthakhandhappaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā paṭhamā abhinibbhidā paṭhamā nikkhanti paṭhamā ariyājāti ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva mukhatuṇḍakena vā pādanakhasikhāya vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tamhā aṇḍakosamhā abhinibbhidā nikkhanti kukkuṭanikāye paccājātīti. Ayaṃ tāva pubbenivāsakathāyaṃ nayo.

Ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇa, paṭhamā abhinibbhidā ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhāti, "This, O Brahmin, was my first breakthrough, my first emergence, my first noble birth, by breaking the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) that conceals the previously inhabited aggregates (khandha), with the beak of the knowledge of the recollection of past lives (pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇa), just like a chick breaking the eggshell with its beak or the tip of its claw and emerging from that eggshell, being reborn into the chicken species." This, so far, is the method in the discourse on past lives.

vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā.Avijjāti cutupapātappaṭicchādikā avijjā. Yathā pana pubbenivāsakathāyaṃ ‘‘pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇamukhatuṇḍakena pubbe nivutthakkhandhappaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidha ‘‘cutupapātañāṇamukhatuṇḍakena cutupapātappaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā’’ti vattabbaṃ.

Vijjāti (knowledge) is the knowledge of the divine eye (dibbacakkhuñāṇa). Avijjāti (ignorance) is the ignorance (avijjā) that conceals passing away and rebirth (cutupapāta). However, just as in the discourse on past lives, it was said, "by breaking the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) that conceals the previously inhabited aggregates (khandha) with the beak of the knowledge of the recollection of past lives (pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇa)," so too, here it should be said, "by breaking the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) that conceals passing away and rebirth (cutupapāta) with the beak of the knowledge of the passing away and rebirth (cutupapātañāṇa)."

ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇa, tatiyā vijjātiādimāha, tatthavijjāti arahattamaggavijjā.Avijjāti catusaccappaṭicchādikā avijjā.Ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇa, tatiyā abhinibbhidā ahosīti ettha ayaṃ kho mama, brāhmaṇa, āsavānaṃ khayañāṇamukhatuṇḍakena catusaccapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tatiyā abhinibbhidā tatiyā nikkhanti tatiyā ariyajāti ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva mukhatuṇḍakena vā pādanakhasikhāya vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tamhā aṇḍakosamhā abhinibbhidā nikkhanti kukkuṭanikāye paccājātīti.

Ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇa, tatiyā vijjātiādi (etc.) was said. There, vijjāti (knowledge) is the knowledge of the path of Arahantship (arahattamagga). Avijjāti (ignorance) is the ignorance (avijjā) that conceals the four noble truths (catusacca). Ayaṃ kho me, brāhmaṇa, tatiyā abhinibbhidā ahosīti, "This, O Brahmin, was my third breakthrough, my third emergence, my third noble birth, by breaking the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) that conceals the four noble truths (catusacca) with the beak of the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas (āsavānaṃ khayañāṇa), just like a chick breaking the eggshell with its beak or the tip of its claw and emerging from that eggshell, being reborn into the chicken species."

Ettāvatā kiṃ dassesīti? So hi, brāhmaṇa, kukkuṭacchāpako aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tato nikkhamanto sakimeva jāyati, ahaṃ pana pubbenivutthakkhandhappaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā paṭhamaṃ tāva pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇavijjāya jāto. Tato sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhippaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā dutiyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjāya jāto, puna catusaccappaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tatiyaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇavijjāya jāto. Evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi tikkhattuṃ jātomhi. Sā ca me jāti ariyā suparisuddhāti idaṃ dasseti. Evaṃdassento ca pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhunā paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayena sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇanti evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe pakāsetvā attano ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ brāhmaṇassa dassesi.

What does this show so far? That chick, O Brahmin, breaks the eggshell and emerges from it being born only once, but I, breaking the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) that conceals the previously inhabited aggregates (khandha), was born first with the knowledge of the recollection of past lives (pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇa). Then, breaking the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) that conceals the passing away and rebirth of beings, I was born a second time with the knowledge of the divine eye (dibbacakkhuñāṇa). Again, breaking the shell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa) that conceals the four noble truths (catusacca), I was born a third time with the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas (āsavānaṃ khayañāṇa). Thus, I have been born three times with these three knowledges (vijjā). And that birth of mine is noble and perfectly pure. This is what it shows. And while showing this, he revealed the knowledge of past times through the knowledge of past lives, the knowledge of the present and future through the divine eye, and all the mundane and supramundane qualities through the destruction of the āsavas. Thus, by revealing all the qualities of omniscience through these three knowledges, he showed the Brahmin his state of being the eldest and the best due to his noble birth.

Evaṃ vutte verañjo brāhmaṇoti evaṃ bhagavatā lokānukampakena brāhmaṇaṃ anukampamānena niguhitabbepi attano ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāve vijjāttayapakāsikāya dhammadesanāya vutte pītivipphāraparipuṇṇagattacitto verañjo brāhmaṇo taṃ bhagavato ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ viditvā ‘‘īdisaṃ nāmāhaṃ sabbalokajeṭṭhaṃ sabbaguṇasamannāgataṃ sabbaññuṃ ‘aññesaṃ abhivādanādikammaṃ na karotī’ti avacaṃ, dhiratthu vata, bho, aññāṇa’’nti attānaṃ garahitvā ‘‘ayaṃ dāni loke ariyāya jātiyā purejātaṭṭhena jeṭṭho, sabbaguṇehi appaṭisamaṭṭhena seṭṭho’’ti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca –jeṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamo seṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamoti. Evañca pana vatvā puna taṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamānoabhikkantaṃ bho gotamātiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthamevāti.

Evaṃ vutte verañjo brāhmaṇoti, when the Blessed One, compassionate to the world, spoke, out of compassion for the Brahmin, revealing the threefold knowledge (vijjāttayapakāsikāya) concerning his state of being the eldest and best due to his noble birth, even though it should have been concealed, the Brahmin Verañja, with his body filled with the expansion of joy, knowing that the Blessed One was the eldest in the world due to his noble birth and the best due to his completeness in all virtues, criticized himself, saying, "Indeed, I, in my ignorance, said to the Omniscient One, who is the eldest in the world and endowed with all virtues, 'He does not pay homage to others.' Fie upon my ignorance!" Having come to the conclusion that "This Gotama is now the eldest in the world due to being born first in the noble lineage, and the best due to being unsurpassed in all virtues," he said this to the Blessed One: jeṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamo seṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamoti ("Venerable Gotama is the eldest, Venerable Gotama is the best.") And having said this, and again approving of that teaching of the Blessed One, he said abhikkantaṃ bho gotamātiādi (etc.). That has the meaning as stated before.

2. Sīhasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Sīhasutta Commentary

12.Dutiyeabhiññātāti ñātā paññātā pākaṭā.Santhāgāreti mahājanassa vissamanatthāya kate agāre. Sā kira santhāgārasālā nagaramajjhe ahosi, catūsu ṭhānesu ṭhitānaṃ paññāyati, catūhi disāhi āgatamanussā paṭhamaṃ tattha vissamitvā pacchā attano attano phāsukaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti. Rājakulānaṃ rajjakiccasantharaṇatthāya kataṃ agārantipi vadantiyeva. Tattha hi nisīditvā licchavirājāno rajjakiccaṃ santharanti karonti vicārenti.Sannisinnāti tesaṃ nisīdanatthaññeva paññattesu mahārahavarapaccattharaṇesu samussitasetacchattesu āsanesu sannisinnā.Anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantīti rājakule kiccañceva lokatthacariyañca vicāretvā anekehi kāraṇehi buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti kathenti dīpenti. Paṇḍitā hi te rājāno saddhā pasannā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi ariyasāvakā, te sabbepi lokiyajaṭaṃ chinditvā buddhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti. Tattha tividho buddhavaṇṇo nāma cariyavaṇṇo, sarīravaṇṇo, guṇavaṇṇoti. Tatrime rājāno cariyāya vaṇṇaṃ ārabhiṃsu – ‘‘dukkaraṃ vata kataṃ sammāsambuddhena kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samattiṃsa pāramiyo pūrentena, ñātatthacariyaṃ, lokatthacariyaṃ, buddhacariyaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajantenā’’ti aḍḍhacchakkehi jātakasatehi buddhavaṇṇaṃ kathentā tusitabhavanaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapayiṃsu.

12. In the second, abhiññātāti (well-known) means known (ñātā), recognized (paññātā), and manifest (pākaṭā). Santhāgāreti (in the assembly hall) means in the hall made for the relaxation of the general public. It seems that the assembly hall was in the middle of the city, visible from four places, and people coming from the four directions would first relax there and then go to their respective comfortable places. Some even say that it was a hall made for the royal families to deliberate on matters of state. For the Licchavi kings would sit there and deliberate (santharanti), conduct (karonti), and discuss (vicārenti) matters of state. Sannisinnāti (seated together) means seated together on the precious and excellent couches spread with fine coverings, adorned with raised white parasols, which were prepared solely for their seating. Anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantīti (speaking in various ways in praise of the Buddha) means, having deliberated on matters of state and activities for the benefit of the world, they spoke, related, and illuminated the virtues of the Buddha in various ways. For those wise kings, being faithful, confident, stream-enterers (sotāpanna), once-returners (sakadāgāmin), non-returners (anāgāmin), and noble disciples (ariyasāvaka), having all cut off the worldly entanglements, spoke in praise of the Buddha and the three jewels (tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ). There, the virtues of the Buddha are threefold: conduct (cariya), physical appearance (sarīra), and qualities (guṇa). Of these, those kings began speaking about the virtues of conduct, saying, "Indeed, what is difficult has been done by the Perfectly Enlightened One, who, while fulfilling the thirty perfections (pāramiyo)—ten perfections (dasa pāramiyo), ten secondary perfections (dasa upapāramiyo), and ten ultimate perfections (dasa paramatthapāramiyo) for more than a hundred thousand aeons (kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni), brought the conduct for the sake of relatives (ñātatthacariya), the conduct for the sake of the world (lokatthacariya), and the Buddha-conduct (buddhacariya) to their peak, and relinquished the five great renunciations (pañca mahāpariccāge)." Thus, by relating the virtues of the Buddha through hundreds of Jātaka stories, they brought it up to the Tusita heaven and established it there.

Dhammassavaṇṇaṃbhāsantā pana ‘‘tena bhagavatā dhammo desito, nikāyato pañca nikāyā, piṭakato tīṇi piṭakāni, aṅgato nava aṅgāni, khandhato caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti koṭṭhāsavasena dhammaguṇaṃ kathayiṃsu.

However, when Dhammassa vaṇṇaṃ (virtues of the Dhamma) were spoken, they spoke of the qualities of the Dhamma in terms of its divisions, saying, "The Dhamma has been taught by that Blessed One, five Nikāyas by way of collection, three Piṭakas by way of baskets, nine Aṅgas by way of limbs, and eighty-four thousand Dhamma-khandhas by way of aggregates."

Saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃbhāsantā satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā ‘‘paṭiladdhasaddhā kulaputtā bhogakkhandhañceva ñātiparivaṭṭañca pahāya setacchattaṃ oparajjaṃ senāpatiseṭṭhibhaṇḍāgārikaṭṭhānantarādīni agaṇetvā nikkhamma satthu varasāsane pabbajanti. Setacchattaṃ pahāya pabbajitānaṃ bhaddiyarājamahākappinapukkusātiādīnaṃ rājapabbajitānaṃyeva buddhakāle asītisahassāni ahesuṃ. Anekakoṭisataṃ dhanaṃ pahāya pabbajitānaṃ pana yasakulaputtasoṇaseṭṭhiputtaraṭṭhapālakulaputtādīnaṃ paricchedo natthi. Evarūpā ca evarūpā ca kulaputtā satthu sāsane pabbajantī’’ti pabbajjāsaṅkhepavasena saṅghaguṇe kathayiṃsu.

When Saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃ (virtues of the Sangha) were spoken, they spoke of the qualities of the Sangha in terms of the summary of renunciations, saying, "Having heard the Teacher's teaching, sons of good families, having regained faith, abandon their wealth and circle of relatives, and without regard for the white parasol of royal power, subordinate rulership, the positions of commander-in-chief, treasurer, and chief storekeeper, go forth into the excellent Dispensation of the Teacher. In the Buddha's time, there were eighty thousand royal renunciates alone, such as King Bhaddiya, Mahākappina, Pukkusāti, and others, who abandoned the white parasol. And there is no counting those sons of good families like Yasa, the son of the Seṭṭhi, Soṇa, the son of the Seṭṭhi, Raṭṭhapāla, and others, who abandoned wealth of hundreds of millions of koṭis. Such and such sons of good families go forth into the Teacher's Dispensation."

Sīhosenāpatīti evaṃnāmako senāya adhipati. Vesāliyañhi satta sahassāni satta satāni satta ca rājāno. Te sabbepi sannipatitvā sabbesaṃ manaṃ gahetvā ‘‘raṭṭhaṃ vicāretuṃ samatthaṃ ekaṃ vicinathā’’ti vicinantā sīhaṃ rājakumāraṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ sakkhissatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā tassa rattamaṇivaṇṇaṃ kambalapariyonaddhaṃ senāpaticchattaṃ adaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sīho senāpatī’’ti.Nigaṇṭhasāvakoti nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa paccayadāyako upaṭṭhāko. Jambudīpatalasmiñhi tayo janā nigaṇṭhānaṃ aggupaṭṭhākā – nāḷandāyaṃ, upāli gahapati, kapilapure vappo sakko, vesāliyaṃ ayaṃ sīho senāpatīti.Nisinnohotīti sesarājūnaṃ parisāya antarantare āsanāni paññāpayiṃsu, sīhassa pana majjhe ṭhāneti tasmiṃ paññatte mahārahe rājāsane nisinno hoti.Nissaṃsayanti nibbicikicchaṃ addhā ekaṃsena, na hete yassa vā tassa vā appesakkhassa evaṃ anekasatehi kāraṇehi vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti.

Sīhosenāpatī: Sīha Senāpati means the army chief with that name. In Vesālī, there were seven thousand seven hundred and seven kings. All of them gathered together, considered everyone's opinion, and, seeking one capable of administering the kingdom, saw the prince Sīha and, deciding, "This one will be able," gave him an army chief's umbrella adorned with red jewels. Referring to that, it was said, "Sīha Senāpati." Nigaṇṭhasāvako: Nigaṇṭhasāvako means a supporter and attendant who provides requisites to Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta. In Jambudīpa, there were three chief supporters of the Nigaṇṭhas: Upāli the householder in Nāḷandā, Vappa Sakka in Kapilavatthu, and this Sīha Senāpati in Vesālī. Nisinnohotī: Nisinno hoti means he was seated. They arranged seats for the other kings interspersed throughout the assembly, but for Sīha, they prepared a magnificent royal seat in the middle of the assembly, and he was seated on it. Nissaṃsaya: Nissaṃsaya means without doubt, certainly, assuredly, not speaking praise of just anyone or some insignificant person with hundreds of reasons like these.

Yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkamīti nigaṇṭho kira nāṭaputto ‘‘sacāyaṃ sīho kassacideva samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇaṃ kathentassa sutvā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamissati, mayhaṃ parihāni bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā paṭhamataraṃyeva sīhaṃ senāpatiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘senāpati imasmiṃ loke ‘ahaṃ buddho ahaṃ buddho’ti bahū vicaranti. Sace tvaṃ kassaci dassanāya upasaṅkamitukāmo ahosi, maṃ puccheyyāsi. Ahaṃ te yuttaṭṭhānaṃ pesessāmi, ayuttaṭṭhānato nivāressāmī’’ti. So taṃ kathaṃ anussaritvā ‘‘sace maṃ pesessati, gamissāmi. No ce, na gamissāmī’’ti cintetvā yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto, tenupasaṅkami.

Yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkamī: Yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkamī means he approached Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta. It seems Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta, thinking, "If this Sīha hears someone praising a certain ascetic Gotama and goes to see him, I will decline," first said this to Sīha Senāpati: "Senāpati, in this world, many wander about saying, 'I am a Buddha, I am a Buddha.' If you wish to visit someone, ask me. I will send you to a suitable place and prevent you from going to an unsuitable place." Remembering that conversation, thinking, "If he sends me, I will go. If not, I will not go," he approached Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta.

kiṃ pana tvantiādimāha. Evaṃ vadanto vicarantaṃ goṇaṃ daṇḍena paharanto viya jalamānaṃ padīpaṃ nibbāpento viya bhattabharitaṃ pattaṃ nikkujjanto viya ca sīhassa uppannapītiṃ vināsesi.Gamiyābhisaṅkhāroti hatthiyānādīnaṃ yojāpanagandhamālādiggahaṇavasena pavatto payogo.So paṭippassambhīti so vūpasanto.

kiṃ pana tva: kiṃ pana tva means "What then do you...?" Saying this, he destroyed the joy that had arisen in Sīha, like striking a wandering ox with a stick, extinguishing a burning lamp, or overturning a bowl filled with food. Gamiyābhisaṅkhāro: Gamiyābhisaṅkhāro means the effort that arises in the manner of arranging elephant carts, taking perfumes, garlands, and so on. So paṭippassambhī: So paṭippassambhī means that subsided.

Dutiyampi khoti dutiyavārampi. Imasmiñca vāre buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā tusitabhavanato paṭṭhāya yāva mahābodhipallaṅkā dasabalassa heṭṭhā pādatalehi upari kesaggehi paricchinditvā dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhānaṃ vasena sarīravaṇṇaṃ kathayiṃsu. Dhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā ‘‘ekapadepi ekabyañjanepi avakhalitaṃ nāma natthī’’ti sukathitavaseneva dhammaguṇaṃ kathayiṃsu. Saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantā ‘‘evarūpaṃ yasasirivibhavaṃ pahāya satthu sāsane pabbajitā na kosajjapakatikā honti, terasasu pana dhutaṅgaguṇesu paripūrakārino hutvā sattasu anupassanāsu kammaṃ karonti, aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇavibhattiyo vaḷañjentī’’ti paṭipadāvasena saṅghaguṇe kathayiṃsu.

Dutiyampi kho: Dutiyampi kho means for the second time. And on this occasion, while speaking of the Buddha's virtues, starting from the Tusita heaven and up to the mahābodhipallaṅka, they described the physical beauty of the Ten-Powered One, distinguishing it from the soles of his feet to the tips of his hair, in terms of the thirty-two marks of a great man, the eighty minor marks, and the fathom-long aura. While speaking of the Dhamma's virtues, they spoke of the quality of the well-proclaimed Dhamma, saying, "There is not even a single word or syllable that is misplaced." While speaking of the Saṅgha's virtues, they spoke of the Saṅgha's qualities in terms of their practice, saying, "Having abandoned such fame, glory, and wealth, those who have gone forth in the Teacher's dispensation are not by nature lazy, but having perfected the thirteen dhutaṅga qualities, they work in the seven contemplations, and they master the thirty-eight object distinctions."

kiṃ hi me karissantīti kiṃ nāma mayhaṃ nigaṇṭhā karissanti.Apalokitā vā anapalokitā vāti āpucchitā vā anāpucchitā vā. Na hi me te āpucchitā yānavāhanasampattiṃ, na ca issariyavisesaṃ dassanti, nāpi anāpucchitā harissanti, aphalaṃ etesaṃ āpucchananti adhippāyo.

kiṃ hi me karissantī: kiṃ hi me karissantī means what indeed will the Nigaṇṭhas do to me? Apalokitā vā anapalokitā vā: Apalokitā vā anapalokitā vā means whether asked or not asked. "They will not show me the wealth of vehicles if asked, nor a special privilege, nor will they take it away if unasked; therefore, asking them is fruitless," is the meaning.

Vesāliyā niyyāsīti yathā hi gimhakāle deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ sandamānaṃ nadiṃ otaritvā thokameva gantvā tiṭṭhati nappavattati, evaṃ sīhassa paṭhamadivase ‘‘dasabalaṃ passissāmī’’ti uppannāya pītiyā nigaṇṭhena paṭibāhitakālo. Yathāpi dutiyadivase deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ sandamānaṃ nadiṃ otaritvā thokaṃ gantvā vālikāpuñjaṃ paharitvā appavattaṃ hoti, evaṃ sīhassa dutiyadivase ‘‘dasabalaṃ passissāmī’’ti uppannāya pītiyā nigaṇṭhena paṭibāhitakālo. Yathā tatiyadivase deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ sandamānaṃ nadiṃ otaritvā purāṇapaṇṇasukkhadaṇḍakaṭṭhakacavarādīni parikaḍḍhantaṃ vālikāpuñjaṃ bhinditvā samuddaninnameva hoti, evaṃ sīho tatiyadivase tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ guṇakathaṃ sutvā uppanne pītipāmojje ‘‘aphalā nigaṇṭhā nipphalā nigaṇṭhā, kiṃ me ime karissanti, gamissāmahaṃ satthusantika’’nti manaṃ abhinīharitvā vesāliyā niyyāsi. Niyyanto ca ‘‘cirassāhaṃ dasabalassa santikaṃ gantukāmo jāto, na kho pana me yuttaṃ aññātakavesena gantu’’nti ‘‘yekeci dasabalassa santikaṃ gantukāmā, sabbe nikkhamantū’’ti ghosanaṃ kāretvā pañcarathasatāni yojāpetvā uttamarathe ṭhito tehi ceva pañcahi rathasatehi mahatiyā ca parisāya parivuto gandhapupphacuṇṇavāsādīni gāhāpetvā niyyāsi.Divā divassāti divasassa ca divā, majjhanhike atikkantamatte.

Vesāliyā niyyāsī: Vesāliyā niyyāsī means he departed from Vesālī. Just as in the summer season, when the gods have rained, the water flows, descends into the river, goes only a little way, stands, and does not proceed, so was the time when the Nigaṇṭha turned back the joy that had arisen in Sīha on the first day, thinking, "I will see the Ten-Powered One." Just as on the second day, when the gods have rained, the water flows, descends into the river, goes a little way, strikes a heap of sand, and does not proceed, so was the time when the Nigaṇṭha turned back the joy that had arisen in Sīha on the second day, thinking, "I will see the Ten-Powered One." Just as on the third day, when the gods have rained, the water flows, descends into the river, dragging along old leaves, dry sticks, timber, trash, and so on, breaks through the heap of sand, and flows straight to the ocean, so Sīha, on the third day, having heard the talk of the qualities of the Three Jewels, with joy and delight arisen, thinking, "The Nigaṇṭhas are fruitless, the Nigaṇṭhas are useless, what will they do for me? I will go to the Teacher's presence," directed his mind and departed from Vesālī. And as he was leaving, thinking, "I have wanted to go to the presence of the Ten-Powered One for a long time, but it is not proper for me to go in disguise," he had an announcement made: "Whoever wishes to go to the presence of the Ten-Powered One, let them all come out!" Having prepared five hundred chariots and stood in the best chariot, surrounded by those five hundred chariots and a great retinue, having taken perfumes, flowers, powders, fragrances, and so on, he departed. Divā divassā: Divā divassā means in the daytime itself, once midday had passed.

Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti ārāmaṃ pavisanto dūratova asīti-anubyañjana-byāmappabhā-dvattiṃsa-mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni chabbaṇṇaghanabuddharasmiyo ca disvā ‘‘evarūpaṃ nāma purisaṃ evaṃ āsanne vasantaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ nāddasaṃ, vañcito vatamhi, alābhā vata me’’ti cintetvā mahānidhiṃ disvā daliddapuriso viya sañjātapītipāmojjo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākarontīti bhotā gotamena vuttakāraṇassa anukāraṇaṃ kathenti. Kāraṇavacano hettha dhammasaddo ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 720) viya. Kāraṇanti cettha tathāpavattassa saddassa attho adhippeto tassa pavattihetubhāvato. Atthappayutto hi saddappayogo. Anukāraṇanti eso eva parehi tathā vuccamāno.Sahadhammiko vādānuvādoti. Parehi vuttakāraṇehi sakāraṇo hutvā tumhākaṃ vādo vā tato paraṃ tassa anuvādo vā koci appamattakopi viññūhi garahitabbaṃ ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ na āgacchati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiṃ sabbākārenapi tava vāde gārayhaṃ kāraṇaṃ natthīti.Anabbhakkhātukāmāti na abhūtena vattukāmā.Atthi sīhapariyāyotiādīnaṃ attho verañjakaṇḍe āgatanayeneva veditabbo.Paramenaassāsenāti catumaggacatuphalasaṅkhātena uttamena.Assāsāya dhammaṃ desemīti assāsanatthāya santhambhanatthāya dhammaṃ desemi. Iti bhagavā aṭṭhahaṅgehi sīhassa senāpatissa dhammaṃ desesi.

Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī: Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means he approached the Blessed One. As he entered the monastery, seeing from afar the eighty minor marks, the fathom-long aura, the thirty-two marks of a great man, and the six-hued dense Buddha-rays, thinking, "I have not seen such a man residing so nearby for so long; indeed, I have been deceived; indeed, I have suffered a loss," with joy and delight arisen like a poor man seeing a great treasure, he approached the Blessed One. Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākarontī: Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākarontī means they explain the Dhamma in accordance with the Dhamma, in accordance with the reason stated by the Fortunate One. Here, the word dhamma signifies reason, as in "knowledge in the cause is analytical knowledge of the Dhamma" (hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā) and so on (vibha. 720). Here, "reason" (kāraṇa) means the meaning of that word's occurrence itself, because of its being the cause of that occurrence. For the use of words is applied to meanings. "In accordance with the reason" (anukāraṇa) means just that which is stated thus by others. Sahadhammiko vādānuvādoti: Sahadhammiko vādānuvādoti means with reasons for the reasons stated by others, neither your speech nor its subsequent reply has any place or reason that could be criticized by the wise, not even a little. This is what is said: is there no blameworthy reason in your speech in any way? Anabbhakkhātukāmā: Anabbhakkhātukāmā means not wanting to speak what is untrue. The meaning of "Atthi sīhapariyāyo" (Atthi sīhapariyāyo) and so on should be understood in the same way as it came in the Verañjaka section. Paramenaassāsenā: Paramena assāsenā means with the supreme assurance, consisting of the four paths and four fruits. Assāsāya dhammaṃ desemī: Assāsāya dhammaṃ desemī means I teach the Dhamma for assurance, for encouragement. Thus, the Blessed One taught the Dhamma to Sīha the general with eight factors.

Anuviccakāranti anuviditvā cintetvā tulayitvā kattabbaṃ karohīti vuttaṃ hoti.Sādhu hotīti sundaro hoti. Tumhādisasmiñhi maṃ disvā maṃ saraṇaṃ gacchante nigaṇṭhaṃ disvā nigaṇṭhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchante ‘‘kiṃ ayaṃ sīho diṭṭhadiṭṭhameva saraṇaṃ gacchatī’’ti garahā uppajjati, tasmā anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṃ sādhūti dasseti.Paṭākaṃ parihareyyunti te kira evarūpaṃ sāvakaṃ labhitvā ‘‘asuko nāma rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā seṭṭhi vā amhākaṃ saraṇaṃ gato sāvako jāto’’ti paṭākaṃ ukkhipitvā nagare ghosentā āhiṇḍanti. Kasmā? Evaṃ no mahantabhāvo āvibhavissatīti ca. Sace panassa ‘‘kimahaṃ etesaṃ saraṇaṃ gato’’ti vippaṭisāro uppajjeyya, tampi so ‘‘etesaṃ me saraṇagatabhāvaṃ bahū jānanti, dukkhaṃ idāni paṭinivattitu’’nti vinodetvā na paṭikkamissatīti ca. Tenāha – ‘‘paṭākaṃ parihareyyu’’nti.Opānabhūtanti paṭiyattaudapāno viya ṭhitaṃ.Kulanti tava nivesanaṃ.Dātabbaṃ maññeyyāsīti pubbe dasapi vīsatipi saṭṭhipi jane āgate disvā natthīti avatvā desi, idāni maṃ saraṇaṃ gatakāraṇamatteneva mā imesaṃ deyyadhammaṃ upacchindi. Sampattānañhi dātabbamevāti ovadi.Sutaṃ metaṃ, bhanteti kuto sutanti? Nigaṇṭhānaṃ santikā. Te kira kulagharesu evaṃ pakāsenti ‘‘mayaṃ yassa kassaci sampattassa dātabbanti vadāma, samaṇo pana gotamo ‘mayhameva dānaṃ dātabbaṃ nāññesaṃ, mayhameva sāvakānaṃ dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, nāññesaṃ sāvakānaṃ, mayhameva dinnaṃ dānaṃ mahapphalaṃ, nāññesaṃ, mayhameva sāvakānaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, nāññesa’nti evaṃ vadatī’’ti. Taṃ sandhāya ayaṃ ‘‘sutaṃ meta’’nti āha.

Anuviccakāra: Anuviccakāra means do what should be done after having investigated, thought about, and weighed it. Sādhu hotī: Sādhu hotī means it is good. For if, upon seeing me, those like you go for refuge to me, and upon seeing the Nigaṇṭhas, they go for refuge to the Nigaṇṭhas, criticism will arise: "Why does this Sīha go for refuge to whomever he sees?" Therefore, he shows that investigation is good for those like you. Paṭākaṃ parihareyyu: Paṭākaṃ parihareyyu means they, having obtained such a disciple, raising a flag and proclaiming in the city, wander about, saying, "So-and-so, whether a king, a royal minister, or a wealthy man, has gone for refuge to us and become a disciple." Why? So that our greatness will become manifest. But even if remorse should arise in him, thinking, "Why have I gone for refuge to these people?" then too, he will dispel it, thinking, "Many know of my having gone for refuge to these people; it is difficult now to turn back," and he will not retreat. Therefore, he said, "They would carry a flag." Opānabhūta: Opānabhūta means standing like a ready-made well. Kula: Kula means your dwelling. Dātabbaṃ maññeyyāsī: Dātabbaṃ maññeyyāsī means previously, seeing even ten, twenty, or sixty people come, you would give without saying "there is nothing," but now, do not cut off the alms-giving from these people just because I have gone for refuge. For what has been obtained should indeed be given, he advised. Sutaṃ metaṃ, bhante: Sutaṃ metaṃ, bhante means "I have heard this, Venerable Sir." From where did you hear it? From the Nigaṇṭhas. It seems that they proclaim thus in family homes: "We say that it should be given to whomever something has been obtained, but the ascetic Gotama says, 'Giving should be given only to me, not to others; giving should be given only to my disciples, not to other disciples; giving given only to me is of great fruit, not to others; giving given only to my disciples is of great fruit, not to others.'" Referring to that, he said, "I have heard this."

Anupubbiṃ kathanti dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ, sīlānantaraṃ saggaṃ, saggānantaraṃ magganti evaṃ anupaṭipāṭikathaṃ. Tatthadānakathanti idaṃ dānaṃ nāma sukhānaṃ nidānaṃ, sampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ, bhogānaṃ patiṭṭhā, visamagatassa tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ, idhalokaparalokesu dānasadiso avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi. Idañhi avassayaṭṭhena ratanamayasīhāsanasadisaṃ, patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena mahāpathavīsadisaṃ, ārammaṇaṭṭhena ālambanarajjusadisaṃ. Idañhi dukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhena nāvā, samassāsanaṭṭhena saṅgāmasūro, bhayaparittāṇaṭṭhena susaṅkhatanagaraṃ, maccheramalādīhi anupalittaṭṭhena padumaṃ, tesaṃ nidahanaṭṭhena aggi, durāsadaṭṭhena āsiviso, asantāsanaṭṭhena sīho, balavantaṭṭhena hatthī, abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhena setavasabho, khemantabhūmisampāpanaṭṭhena valāhako assarājā. Dānaṃ nāmetaṃ mayā gatamaggo, mayheso vaṃso, mayā dasa pāramiyo pūrentena velāmamahāyañño, mahāgovindamahāyañño, mahāsudassanamahāyañño, vessantaramahāyaññoti, anekamahāyaññā pavattitā, sasabhūtena jalitaaggikkhandhe attānaṃ niyyādentena sampattayācakānaṃ cittaṃ gahitaṃ. Dānañhi loke sakkasampattiṃ deti mārasampattiṃ brahmasampattiṃ, cakkavattisampattiṃ, sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ, paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ, abhisambodhiñāṇaṃ detīti evamādidānaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathaṃ.

Anupubbiṃ katha: Anupubbiṃ katha means a graduated talk, that is, generosity after giving, morality after generosity, heaven after morality, the path after heaven. There, dānakatha: dānakatha means the talk about generosity, that generosity is the source of happiness, the root of prosperity, the basis of wealth, a refuge, shelter, destination, and final support for one gone astray; there is no reliance, basis, object, refuge, shelter, destination, or final support like generosity in this world or the next. For this is like a jeweled lion throne in the sense of reliance, like the great earth in the sense of a basis, like a supporting rope in the sense of an object. For this is a boat in the sense of escaping suffering, a hero in battle in the sense of giving solace, a well-fortified city in the sense of protection from fear, a lotus in the sense of being unstained by the defilement of stinginess, fire in the sense of burning them, a venomous snake in the sense of being hard to approach, a lion in the sense of not causing terror, an elephant in the sense of being strong, a white bull in the sense of being auspiciously regarded, a rain cloud, the king of horses in the sense of leading to a safe place. Generosity is the path traversed by me; this is my lineage; by me, having fulfilled the ten perfections, the great sacrifice of Velāma, the great sacrifice of Mahāgovinda, the great sacrifice of Mahāsudassana, the great sacrifice of Vessantara, countless great sacrifices were performed; by me, having given myself as a four-footed being to the flame of burning fire, the minds of those begging for possessions were pleased. For generosity gives the attainment of Sakka, the attainment of Māra, the attainment of Brahmā, the attainment of a wheel-turning monarch, the knowledge of a disciple's perfection, the knowledge of a solitary Buddha, the knowledge of perfect enlightenment, and so on, a talk connected with the qualities of generosity.

Sīlakathanti sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ. Sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ mama vaṃso, ahaṃ saṅkhapālanāgarājakāle bhūridattanāgarājakāle campeyyanāgarājakāle sīlavarājakāle mātuposakahatthirājakāle chaddantahatthirājakāleti anantesu attabhāvesu sīlaṃ paripūresiṃ. Idhalokaparalokasampattīnañhi sīlasadiso avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi, sīlālaṅkārasadiso alaṅkāro natthi, sīlapupphasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthi, sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthi. Sīlālaṅkārena hi alaṅkataṃ sīlagandhānulittaṃ sadevakopi loko olokento tittiṃ na gacchatīti evamādisīlaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathaṃ.

Sīlakatha: Sīlakatha means the talk about morality, that morality is a reliance, a basis, an object, a refuge, a shelter, a destination, and a final support. Morality is my lineage; in the time of Saṅkhapāla Nāga-king, in the time of Bhūridatta Nāga-king, in the time of Campeyya Nāga-king, in the time of Sīla-king, in the time of Mātuposaka elephant-king, in the time of Chaddanta elephant-king, in countless existences I perfected morality. For in the attainments of this world and the next, there is no reliance, basis, object, refuge, shelter, destination, or final support like morality; there is no adornment like the adornment of morality; there is no flower like the flower of morality; there is no fragrance like the fragrance of morality. For even the world with the gods is not satiated when looking upon one adorned with the adornment of morality and anointed with the fragrance of morality, a talk connected with the qualities of morality and so on.

Saggakathanti ‘‘ayaṃ saggo nāma iṭṭho kanto manāpo, niccamettha kīḷā, niccaṃ sampattiyo labbhanti, cātumahārājikā devā navutivassasatasahassāni dibbasukhaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavanti, tāvatiṃsā tisso ca vassakoṭiyo saṭṭhi ca vassasatasahassānī’’ti evamādisaggaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathaṃ. Saggasampattiṃ kathayantānañhi buddhānaṃ mukhaṃ nappahoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘anekapariyāyena khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, saggakathaṃ katheyya’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 3.255).

Saggakatha: Saggakatha means the talk about heaven, that "this heaven is desirable, lovely, pleasing; there is constant sport here, constant attainments are obtained; the Cātumahārājika gods experience divine happiness and divine prosperity for ninety million years; the Tāvatiṃsa gods, for three vassa koṭis and sixty hundred thousand years," and so on, a talk connected with the qualities of heaven. For the mouths of the Buddhas are not sufficient to describe the prosperity of heaven. And this was said: "In many ways, monks, I would tell a talk about heaven," and so on (ma. ni. 3.255).

kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃkathesi. Tatthaādīnavoti doso.Okāroti avakāro lāmakabhāvo.Saṃkilesoti tehi sattānaṃ saṃsāre saṃkilissanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘saṃkilissanti vata, bho, sattā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351).

kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃkathesi: kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ kathesi He described the drawbacks, the inferiority, and the defilement of sensual pleasures. There, ādīnavo: ādīnavo means fault. Okāro: Okāro means worthlessness, baseness. Saṃkileso: Saṃkileso means beings are defiled in saṃsāra by them. As he said, "Indeed, beings are defiled" (saṃkilissanti vata, bho, sattā) (ma. ni. 2.351).

nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi. Kallacittanti arogacittaṃ.Sāmukkaṃsikāti sāmaṃ ukkaṃsikā attanāyeva uddharitvā gahitā, sayambhuñāṇena diṭṭhā asādhāraṇā aññesanti attho. Kā pana sāti? Ariyasaccadesanā. Tenevāha –dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magganti.Virajaṃ vītamalanti rāgarajādīnaṃ abhāvā virajaṃ, rāgamalādīnaṃ vigatattā vītamalaṃ.Dhammacakkhunti idha sotāpattimaggo adhippeto. Tassa uppattiākāradassanatthaṃyaṃkiñci samudayadhammaṃ sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhammanti āha. Tañhi nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena evaṃ sabbasaṅkhataṃ paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati. Diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenātidiṭṭhadhammo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tiṇṇā vicikicchā anenātitiṇṇavicikiccho. Vigatā kathaṃkathā assātivigatakathaṃkatho. Visārajjaṃ pattotivesārajjappatto. Kattha? Satthusāsane. Nāssa paro paccayo, na paraṃ saddhāya ettha vattatītiaparappaccayo.

He revealed the benefit of renunciation. Kallacitta means a healthy mind. Sāmukkaṃsikā means spontaneously, having lifted and taken it up oneself, seen by self-originated wisdom, unique to oneself, not shared with others. What is that? The teaching of the Noble Truths. Therefore, he said, suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ means without dust because of the absence of the dust of passion, and without stain because the stain of passion is gone. Dhammacakkhu here refers to the path of stream-entry. To show the manner of its arising, he said, "Whatever is of the nature to arise, all that is of the nature to cease." For indeed, it arises perceiving all conditioned things in this way through its function, with cessation as its object. Diṭṭhadhammo means having seen the Dhamma of the Noble Truths by this. This is the method for the rest as well. Tiṇṇavicikiccho means having crossed over doubt by this. Vigatakathaṃkatho means having dispelled uncertainty. Vesārajjappatto means having attained confidence. Where? In the Teacher’s dispensation. Aparappaccayo means his conviction is not dependent on another, he does not proceed herein by the faith of another.

Pavattamaṃsanti pakatiyā pavattaṃ kappiyamaṃsaṃ mūlaṃ gahetvā antarāpaṇe pariyesāhīti adhippāyo.Sambahulā nigaṇṭhāti pañcasatamattā nigaṇṭhā.Thūlaṃ pasunti thūlaṃ mahāsarīraṃ gokaṇṇamahiṃsasūkarasaṅkhātaṃ pasuṃ.Uddissakatanti attānaṃ uddisitvā kataṃ, māritanti attho.Paṭiccakammanti svāyaṃ taṃ maṃsaṃ paṭicca taṃ pāṇavadhakammaṃ phusati. Tañhi akusalaṃ upaḍḍhaṃ dāyakassa, upaḍḍhaṃ paṭiggāhakassa hotīti nesaṃ laddhi. Aparo nayo –paṭiccakammanti attānaṃ paṭiccakataṃ. Atha vāpaṭiccakammanti nimittakammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, taṃ paṭiccakammaṃ ettha atthīti maṃsampi paṭiccakammanti vuttaṃ.Upakaṇṇaketi kaṇṇamūle.Alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ, kiṃ imināti attho.Na ca paneteti ete āyasmanto dīgharattaṃ avaṇṇakāmā hutvā avaṇṇaṃ bhāsantāpi abbhācikkhantā na jiridanti, abbhakkhānassa antaṃ na gacchantīti attho. Atha vā lajjanatthe idaṃjiridantīti padaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na lajjantīti attho.

Pavattamaṃsa means meat that is naturally available, permissible meat; the idea is that one should take the origin and seek it in the marketplace. Sambahulā nigaṇṭhā means about five hundred Nigaṇṭhas. Thūlaṃ pasuṃ means a large animal with a large body, reckoned as cattle, buffalo, deer and pig. Uddissakataṃ means done having been intended for oneself, meaning killed. Paṭiccakammaṃ means one touches that killing of a living being with regard to that meat. For indeed, that unwholesome deed is half for the giver and half for the receiver, according to their doctrine. Another method: paṭiccakammaṃ means done in relation to oneself. Or else, paṭiccakammaṃ is a designation for the instrumental action; since that instrumental action is present here, even the meat is said to be paṭiccakammaṃ. Upakaṇṇake means at the root of the ear. Alaṃ is a word of rejection, meaning, "What is the use of this?" Na ca panete means even though these venerable ones, desiring dispraise for a long time, speak dispraise, they do not age accusing, meaning they do not go to the end of accusation. Or else, the word jiridantī should be regarded as meaning shame; it means they are not ashamed.

3. Assājānīyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Assājānīyasuttavaṇṇanā

13.Tatiyeaṅgehīti guṇaṅgehi.Tassaṃ disāyaṃ jāto hotīti tassaṃ sindhunadītīradisāyaṃ jāto hoti. Aññepi bhadrā assājānīyā tattheva jāyanti.Allaṃ vā sukkhaṃ vāti allatiṇaṃ vā sukkhatiṇaṃ vā.Nāññe asse ubbejetāti aññe asse na ubbejeti na paharati na ḍaṃsati na kalahaṃ karoti.Sāṭheyyānīti saṭhabhāvo.Kūṭeyyānīti kūṭabhāvo.Jimheyyānīti jimhabhāvo.Vaṅkeyyānīti vaṅkabhāvā. Iccassa catūhipi padehi asikkhitabhāvova kathito.Vāhīti vahanasabhāvo dinnovādapaṭikaro.Yāvajīvitamaraṇapariyādānāti yāva jīvitassa maraṇena pariyosānā.Sakkaccaṃ paribhuñjatīti amataṃ viya paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjati.Purisathāmenātiādīsu ñāṇathāmādayo kathitā.Saṇṭhānanti osakkanaṃ paṭippassaddhi.

13. In the third, aṅgehī means by the qualities of excellence. Tassaṃ disāyaṃ jāto hotī means he is born in that direction, on the bank of the Sindhu River. Other fine thoroughbreds are also born there. Allaṃ vā sukkhaṃ vā means either fresh grass or dry grass. Nāññe asse ubbejetā means he does not frighten other horses; he does not strike, bite, or cause quarrels. Sāṭheyyānī means trickery. Kūṭeyyānī means deceitfulness. Jimheyyānī means crookedness. Vaṅkeyyānī means deviousness. Thus, by these four terms, his untrained nature is described. Vāhī means the characteristic of carrying out instructions, complying with advice. Yāva jīvitamaraṇapariyādānā means until the end of life with death. Sakkaccaṃ paribhuñjatī means he partakes of it attentively, reflecting as if it were ambrosia. In purisathāmenā, etc., the strengths of wisdom, etc., are described. Saṇṭhānaṃ means withdrawing, calming down.

4. Assakhaḷuṅkasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Assakhaḷuṅkasuttavaṇṇanā

14.Catutthe‘‘pehī’’ti vuttoti ‘‘gacchā’’ti vutto.Piṭṭhito rathaṃ pavattetīti khandhaṭṭhikena yugaṃ uppīḷitvā pacchimabhāgena rathaṃ pavaṭṭento osakkati.Pacchā laṅghati, kubbaraṃ hanatīti dve pacchimapāde ukkhipitvā tehi paharitvā rathakubbaraṃ bhindati.Tidaṇḍaṃ bhañjatīti rathassa purato tayo daṇḍakā honti, te bhañjati.Rathīsāya satthiṃ ussajjitvāti sīsaṃ nāmetvā yugaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pātetvā satthinā rathīsaṃ paharitvā.Ajjhomaddatīti dvīhi purimapādehi īsaṃ maddanto tiṭṭhati.Ubbaṭumaṃ rathaṃ karotīti thalaṃ vā kaṇḍakaṭṭhānaṃ vā rathaṃ āropeti.Anādiyitvāti amanasikatvā agaṇitvā.Mukhādhānanti mukhaṭhapanatthāya dinnaṃ ayasaṅkhalikaṃ.Khīlaṭṭhāyīti cattāro pāde thambhe viya niccalaṃ ṭhapetvā khīlaṭṭhānasadisena ṭhānena tiṭṭhati. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

14. In the fourth, ‘‘pehī’’ti vutto means "having been told, 'Go.'" Piṭṭhito rathaṃ pavattetī means pressing the yoke with the shoulder bone, he withdraws, overturning the chariot with the rear part. Pacchā laṅghati, kubbaraṃ hanatī means having lifted up the two hind feet, he strikes with them, breaking the chariot's yoke. Tidaṇḍaṃ bhañjatī means the chariot has three poles in front; he breaks them. Rathīsāya satthiṃ ussajjitvā means lowering his head, dropping the yoke to the ground, striking the chariot pole with his thigh. Ajjhomaddatī means he stands slightly crushing the pole with his two front feet. Ubbaṭumaṃ rathaṃ karotī means he puts the chariot on a slope or a thorny place. Anādiyitvā means not paying attention, not regarding. Mukhādhānaṃ means an iron chain given for placing in the mouth. Khīlaṭṭhāyī means having placed the four feet motionless like pillars, he stands with a stance similar to a post. In this sutta, only the round of rebirth is discussed.

5. Malasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Malasuttavaṇṇanā

15.Pañcameasajjhāyamalāti uggahitamantānaṃ asajjhāyakaraṇaṃ malaṃ nāma hoti.Anuṭṭhānamalā gharāti uṭṭhānavīriyābhāvo gharānaṃ malaṃ nāma.Vaṇṇassāti sarīravaṇṇassa.Rakkhatoti yaṃkiñci attano santakaṃ rakkhantassa.Avijjā paramaṃ malanti tato sesākusaladhammamalato aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇabhūtā vaṭṭamūlasaṅkhātā bahalandhakāraavijjā paramaṃ malaṃ. Tato hi malataraṃ nāma natthi. Imasmimpi sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

15. In the fifth, asajjhāyamalā means the non-recitation of mantras that have been learned is called a stain. Anuṭṭhānamalā gharā means the lack of effort is called a stain on houses. Vaṇṇassa means of bodily complexion. Rakkhato means of one protecting whatever belongs to oneself. Avijjā paramaṃ malaṃ means from that remaining stain of unwholesome things, in eight places, ignorance, which is the root of the round of rebirth, the great thick darkness, is the supreme stain. For indeed, there is nothing more staining than that. In this sutta too, only the round of rebirth is discussed.

6. Dūteyyasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Dūteyyasuttavaṇṇanā

16.Chaṭṭhedūteyyanti dūtakammaṃ.Gantumarahatīti taṃ dūteyyasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanaṃ dhāretvā harituṃ arahati.Sotāti yo taṃ assa sāsanaṃ deti, tassa sotā.Sāvetāti taṃ uggaṇhitvā ‘‘idaṃ nāma tumhehi vutta’’nti paṭisāvetā.Uggahetāti suggahitaṃ katvā uggahetā.Dhāretāti sudhāritaṃ katvā dhāretā.Viññāti atthānatthassa atthaṃ jānitā.Viññāpetāti paraṃ vijānāpetā.Sahitā sahitassāti idaṃ sahitaṃ, idaṃ asahitanti evaṃ sahitāsahitassa kusalo, upagatānupagatesu cheko sāsanaṃ ārocento sahitaṃ sallakkhetvā āroceti.Na byathatīti vedhati na chambhati.Asandiddhanti nissandehaṃ vigatasaṃsayaṃ.Pucchitoti pañhatthāya pucchito.

16. In the sixth, dūteyyaṃ means the work of a messenger. Gantumarahatī means he is fit to carry and convey that message known as dūteyya. Sotā means the one who gives the message to him, the hearer. Sāvetā means having learned it, he reports back, "This was said by you." Uggahetā means having made it well-learned, the learner. Dhāretā means having well retained it, the maintainer. Viññā means the knower of the meaning of what is beneficial and not beneficial. Viññāpetā means the one who makes another understand. Sahitā sahitassa means being skilled in what is coherent and incoherent, knowing what has been approached and not approached, while communicating the message, he discerns what is coherent and conveys it. Na byathatī means he does not tremble, he is not frightened. Asandiddhaṃ means without doubt, devoid of uncertainty. Pucchito means having been asked for the sake of a question.

7-8. Bandhanasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
7-8. Bandhanasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

17-18.Sattameruṇṇenāti ruditena.Ākappenāti nivāsanapārupanādinā vidhānena.Vanabhaṅgenāti vanato bhañjitvā āhaṭena pupphaphalādipaṇṇākārena. Aṭṭhamepi eseva nayo.

17-18. In the seventh, ruṇṇenā means by weeping. Ākappenā means by demeanor, by arrangements such as clothing and covering. Vanabhaṅgenā means by flowers, fruits, and leaves brought from the forest after breaking them off. In the eighth, too, this is the method.

9. Pahārādasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Pahārādasuttavaṇṇanā

19.Navamepahārādoti evaṃnāmako.Asurindoti asurajeṭṭhako. Asuresu hi vepacitti rāhu pahārādoti ime tayo jeṭṭhakā.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti dasabalassa abhisambuddhadivasato paṭṭhāya ‘‘ajja gamissāmi sve gamissāmī’’ti ekādasa vassāni atikkamitvā dvādasame vasse satthu verañjāyaṃ vasanakāle ‘‘sammāsambuddhassa santikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā ‘‘mama ‘ajja sve’ti dvādasa vassāni jātāni, handāhaṃ idāneva gacchāmī’’ti taṅkhaṇaṃyeva asuragaṇaparivuto asurabhavanā nikkhamitvā divā divassa yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami,ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsīti so kira ‘‘tathāgataṃ pañhaṃ pucchitvā eva dhammaṃ suṇissāmī’’ti āgato, tathāgatassa pana diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya buddhagāravena pucchituṃ asakkonto api satthāraṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Tato satthā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ pahārādo mayi akathente paṭhamataraṃ kathetuṃ na sakkhissati, ciṇṇavasiṭṭhāneyeva naṃ kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti.

19. In the ninth, pahārādo means one named thus. Asurindo means chief of the asuras. For among the asuras, Vepacitti, Rāhu, and Pahārāda are the three chiefs. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means starting from the day of the ten-powered one’s Enlightenment, having passed eleven years saying, "Today I will go, tomorrow I will go," in the twelfth year, while the Teacher was staying at Verañjā, he produced the thought, "I will go to the presence of the Perfectly Enlightened One," and thinking, "Twelve years have passed for me with 'today' and 'tomorrow'," immediately, surrounded by a host of asuras, having departed from the asura-realm, during the day, he approached the Blessed One, and stood to one side. It seems he had come thinking, "Only after asking the Tathāgata a question will I listen to the Dhamma," but from the time of seeing the Tathāgata, unable to ask out of reverence for the Buddha, he instead paid homage to the Teacher and stood to one side. Then the Teacher thought, "This Pahārāda will not be able to speak first unless I speak to him; I will ask him a question in a familiar manner to initiate the conversation."

api pana pahārādātiādimāha. Tatthaabhiramantīti ratiṃ vindanti, anukkaṇṭhamānā vasantīti attho. So ‘‘pariciṇṇaṭṭhāneyeva maṃ bhagavā pucchatī’’ti attamano hutvāabhiramanti, bhanteti āha.Anupubbaninnotiādīni sabbāni anupaṭipāṭiyā ninnabhāvassa vevacanāni.Na āyatakeneva papātoti na chinnataṭamahāsobbho viya āditova papāto. So hi tīrato paṭṭhāya ekaṅguladvaṅgulavidatthiratanayaṭṭhiusabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutaaḍḍhayojanādivasena gambhīro hutvā gacchanto sinerupādamūle caturāsītiyojanasahassagambhīro hutvā ṭhitoti dasseti.

He said, beginning with, "But Pahārāda…" There, abhiramantī means they find delight, they dwell without weariness. He, thinking, "The Blessed One is asking me in a familiar manner," pleased, said, "They find delight, Venerable Sir." Anupubbaninno, etc., all are synonyms for the state of gradually inclining downwards. Na āyatakeneva papāto means it is not a precipice from the beginning like a great chasm with cut banks. For indeed, it shows that starting from the bank, going deeper by one finger-width, two finger-widths, a span, a cubit, a rod, an ox-length, half a league, a league, half a yojana, etc., it stands eighty-four thousand yojanas deep at the foot of Mount Sineru.

Ṭhitadhammoti ṭhitasabhāvo.Kuṇapenāti yena kenaci hatthiassādīnaṃ kaḷevarena.Thalaṃ ussāretīti hatthena gahetvā viya vīcipahāreneva thalaṃ khipati.

Ṭhitadhammo means of stable nature. Kuṇapenā means by any carcass of elephants, horses, etc. Thalaṃ ussāretī means he throws the land with the force of the waves, as if having taken it with his hand.

Gaṅgāyamunāti idha ṭhatvā imāsaṃ nadīnaṃ uppattikathaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ayaṃ tāva jambudīpo dasasahassayojanaparimāṇo, tattha catusahassayojanaparimāṇo padeso udakena ajjhotthaṭo mahāsamuddoti saṅkhaṃ gato, tisahassayojanappamāṇe manussā vasanti, tisahassayojanappamāṇe himavā patiṭṭhito ubbedhena pañcayojanasatiko caturāsītikūṭasahassapaṭimaṇḍito samantato sandamānapañcasatanadīvicitto, yattha āyāmavitthārena ca gambhīrato ca paṇṇāsapaṇṇāsayojanā diyaḍḍhayojanasataparimaṇḍalā anotattadaho kaṇṇamuṇḍadaho rathakāradaho chaddantadaho kuṇāladaho mandākinidaho sīhappapātadahoti satta mahāsarā patiṭṭhahanti.

Gaṅgāyamunā Having arrived here, it is fitting to relate the story of the origin of these rivers. This Jambudīpa, firstly, is ten thousand yojanas in extent; of that, a region four thousand yojanas in extent is covered with water, reckoned as the great ocean; humans live in an area of three thousand yojanas; the Himalayas are established in an area of three thousand yojanas, five hundred yojanas in height, adorned with eighty-four thousand peaks, variegated with five hundred rivers flowing on all sides, where seven great lakes are established, the Anotatta Lake, the Kaṇṇamuṇḍa Lake, the Rathakāra Lake, the Chaddanta Lake, the Kuṇāla Lake, the Mandākinī Lake, and the Sīhappapāta Lake, each fifty yojanas in length and breadth, and one and a half yojanas in depth.

anotattosudassanakūṭaṃ cittakūṭaṃ kāḷakūṭaṃ gandhamādanakūṭaṃ kelāsakūṭanti imehi pañcahi pabbatehi parikkhitto. Tattha sudassanakūṭaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ dviyojanasatubbedhaṃ antovaṅkaṃ kākamukhasaṇṭhānaṃ tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā tiṭṭhati, cittakūṭaṃ sabbaratanamayaṃ, kāḷakūṭaṃ añjanamayaṃ, gandhamādanakūṭaṃ sānumayaṃ abbhantare muggavaṇṇaṃ, mūlagandho sāragandho pheggugandho tacagandho papaṭikāgandho rasagandho pattagandho pupphagandho phalagandho gandhagandhoti imehi dasahi gandhehi ussannaṃ, nānappakāraosadhasañchannaṃ kāḷapakkhauposathadivase ādittamiva aṅgāraṃ jalantaṃ tiṭṭhati, kelāsakūṭaṃ rajatamayaṃ. Sabbāni sudassanena samānubbedhasaṇṭhānāni tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitāni. Tāni sabbāni devānubhāvena nāgānubhāvena ca vassanti, nadiyo cetesu sandanti. Taṃ sabbampi udakaṃ anotattameva pavisati. Candimasūriyā dakkhiṇena vā uttarena vā gacchantā pabbatantarena tattha obhāsaṃ karonti, ujuṃ gacchantā na karonti. Tenevassa anotatto tisaṅkhā udapādi.

anotatto is surrounded by these five mountains: Sudassana Peak, Citta Peak, Kāḷa Peak, Gandhamādana Peak, and Kelāsa Peak. There, Sudassana Peak is made of gold, two hundred yojanas in height, curved inward, shaped like a crow's beak, standing covering that very lake; Citta Peak is made of all gems, Kāḷa Peak is made of añjana (antimony), Gandhamādana Peak is hilly, the interior is the color of green lentils, abundant with these ten scents: root scent, heartwood scent, pith scent, bark scent, blister scent, sap scent, leaf scent, flower scent, fruit scent, and fragrance scent, covered with various kinds of medicines, it stands like burning embers, like a fire lit on the uposatha day of the dark fortnight; Kelāsa Peak is made of silver. All are of equal height and shape to Sudassana, standing covering that very lake. They all rain by the power of the devas and the power of the nāgas, and the rivers flow in these places. All that water flows into Anotatta itself. The moon and sun, going south or north, make light there between the mountains; going straight, they do not. Therefore, the designation Anotatta arose for it.

Tattha manoharasilātalāni nimmacchakacchapāni phalikasadisanimmalodakāni nhānatitthāni supaṭiyattāni honti, yesu buddhā khīṇāsavā ca paccekabuddhā ca iddhimantā ca isayo nhāyanti, devayakkhādayo udakakīḷaṃ kīḷanti.

There, the bathing places have delightful stone surfaces, free of fish and turtles, with crystal-like clear water, well-prepared, in which Buddhas, arahants, Paccekabuddhas, powerful sages, and devas, yakkhas, etc., play water sports.

āvattagaṅgāti vuccati. Ujukaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhānekaṇhagaṅgā,ākāsena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāneākāsagaṅgā,tiyaggaḷapāsāṇe paññāsayojanokāse ṭhitātiyaggaḷapokkharaṇī,kūlaṃ bhinditvā pāsāṇaṃ pavisitvā saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhānebahalagaṅgāti, umaṅgena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāneumaṅgagaṅgāti vuccati. Viñjhaṃ nāma tiracchānapabbataṃ paharitvā pañca dhārā hutvā pavattanaṭṭhāne pana gaṅgā, yamunā, aciravatī, sarabhū, mahīti pañca saṅkhaṃ gatā. Evametā pañca mahānadiyo himavantato pavattantīti veditabbā.

It is called āvattagaṅgā. At the place where it has gone sixty yojanas straight on a stone surface, it is kaṇhagaṅgā, at the place where it has gone sixty yojanas through the air, it is ākāsagaṅgā, situated in a space of fifty yojanas on a transverse stone bar, it is tiyaggaḷapokkharaṇī, at the place where it has broken the bank, entered the stone, and gone sixty yojanas, it is bahalagaṅgā, at the place where it has gone sixty yojanas through a tunnel, it is called umaṅgagaṅgā. But at the place where it strikes the Viñjha mountain, a transverse mountain, and flows in five streams, it has the designation of five: Gaṅgā, Yamunā, Aciravatī, Sarabhū, and Mahī. Thus, these five great rivers are to be understood as flowing from the Himalayas.

Savantiyoti yā kāci savamānā gacchantī mahānadiyo vā kunnadiyo vā.Appentīti allīyanti osaranti.Dhārāti vuṭṭhidhārā.Pūrattanti puṇṇabhāvo. Mahāsamuddassa hi ayaṃ dhammatā – ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle devo mando jāto, jālakkhipādīni ādāya macchakacchape gaṇhissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle mahantā vuṭṭhi, labhissāma nu kho piṭṭhipasāraṇaṭṭhāna’’nti vā vattuṃ na sakkā. Paṭhamakappikakālato paṭṭhāya hi yaṃ sinerumekhalaṃ āhacca udakaṃ ṭhitaṃ, tato ekaṅgulamattampi udakaṃ neva heṭṭhā osīdati, na uddhaṃ uttarati.Ekarasoti asambhinnaraso.

Savantiyo means whatever flowing great rivers or small rivers are going. Appentī means they cling, they descend. Dhārā means streams of rain. Pūrattaṃ means fullness. For this is the nature of the great ocean: it is not possible to say, "In this time, the god has become weak, we will take nets and catch fish and turtles," or "In this time, there is great rain, will we get a place to stretch our backs?" For indeed, from the time of the first cosmic epoch, the water that stood striking the girdle of Mount Sineru, from that, even a finger-width of water neither sinks down below, nor rises up above. Ekaraso means of unmixed taste.

Muttāti khuddakamahantavaṭṭadīghādibhedā anekavidhā.Maṇīti rattanīlādibhedo anekavidho.Veḷuriyoti vaṃsavaṇṇasirīsapupphavaṇṇādibhedo anekavidho.Saṅkhoti dakkhiṇāvaṭṭatambakucchikadhamanasaṅkhādibhedo anekavidho.Silāti setakāḷamuggavaṇṇādibhedo anekavidhā.Pavāḷanti khuddakamahantarattaghanarattādibhedaṃ anekavidhaṃ.Masāragallanti kabaramaṇi.Nāgāti ūmipiṭṭhavāsinopi vimānaṭṭhakā nāgāpi.

Muttā means pearls, which are of various kinds such as small, large, round, long, etc. Maṇī means gems, which are of various kinds such as sapphire, etc. Veḷuriyo means beryl, which are of various kinds such as the color of bamboo, the color of the sirisa flower, etc. Saṅkho means conch shells, which are of various kinds such as those that spiral to the right, those with red bellies, those with dhamani veins, etc. Silā means stones, which are of various kinds such as white, black, and the color of coral, etc. Pavāḷa means coral, which is of various kinds such as small, large, intensely red, etc. Masāragalla means variegated gems. Nāgā means nāgas who live in the water or on the ground, as well as nāgas who dwell in celestial mansions.

Aṭṭha pahārādāti satthā aṭṭhapi dhamme vattuṃ sakkoti, soḷasapi bāttiṃsapi catusaṭṭhipi sahassampi, pahārādena pana aṭṭha kathitā, ahampi teheva sarikkhake katvā kathessāmīti cintetvā evamāha.Anupubbasikkhātiādīsu anupubbasikkhāya tisso sikkhā gahitā, anupubbakiriyāya terasa dhutaṅgāni, anupubbapaṭipadāya satta anupassanā aṭṭhārasa mahāvipassanā aṭṭhatiṃsa ārammaṇavibhattiyo sattatiṃsa bodhapakkhiyadhammā.Na āyatakeneva aññāpaṭivedhoti maṇḍūkassa uppatitvā gamanaṃ viya āditova sīlapūraṇādiṃ akatvā arahattappaṭivedho nāma natthi, paṭipāṭiyā pana sīlasamādhipaññāyo pūretvāva sakkā arahattaṃ pattunti attho.

Aṭṭha pahārādā means the Teacher can speak on eight, sixteen, thirty-two, sixty-four, or even a thousand topics; however, here eight are spoken of by way of a 'summary blow' (pahārāda). Thinking, "I, too, will make and speak of similar things," he said this. In anupubbasikkhā etc., three trainings are included in the gradual training; thirteen dhutaṅgas in the gradual practice; seven contemplations (anupassanā), eighteen great insights (mahāvipassanā), thirty-eight divisions of objects (ārammaṇavibhattiyo), and thirty-seven qualities conducive to enlightenment (bodhapakkhiyadhammā) in the gradual path. Na āyatakeneva aññāpaṭivedho means, just as a frog cannot travel by jumping, there is no attainment of arahantship without first fulfilling morality (sīla), etc. However, it is possible to attain arahantship by fulfilling morality, concentration (samādhi), and wisdom (paññā) in due order.

Ārakāvāti dūreyeva.Na tena nibbānadhātuyā ūnattaṃ vā pūrattaṃ vāti asaṅkhyeyyepi kappe buddhesu anuppannesu ekasattopi parinibbātuṃ na sakkoti, tadāpi ‘‘tucchā nibbānadhātū’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Buddhakāle ca pana ekekasmiṃ samāgame asaṅkhyeyyāpi sattā amataṃ ārādhenti, tadāpi na sakkā vattuṃ – ‘‘pūrā nibbānadhātū’’ti.

Ārakāvā means far away indeed. Na tena nibbānadhātuyā ūnattaṃ vā pūrattaṃ vā means even if countless aeons pass without a Buddha arising, not even a single being can attain final Nibbāna; it cannot be said that "the element of Nibbāna is empty." And even when countless beings attain the deathless state (amata) in each gathering during the time of a Buddha, it cannot be said that "the element of Nibbāna is full."

10. Uposathasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Uposatha Sutta Commentary

20.Dasamenisinno hotīti uposathakaraṇatthāya upāsikāya ratanapāsāde nisinno. Nisajja pana bhikkhūnaṃ cittāni olokento ekaṃ dussīlapuggalaṃ disvā ‘‘sacāhaṃ imasmiṃ puggale nisinneyeva pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi, sattadhā tassa muddhā phalissatī’’ti tassa anukampāya tuṇhīyeva ahosi.Abhikkantāti atikkantā parikkhīṇā.Uddhaste aruṇeti uggate aruṇasīse.Nandimukhiyāti tuṭṭhamukhiyā.Aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisāti ‘‘asukapuggalo aparisuddho’’ti avatvā ‘‘aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisā’’ti āha. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

20. In the tenth [sutta], nisinno hotī means the female lay follower sat in a jeweled palace to observe the Uposatha. While sitting, as he surveyed the minds of the monks, he saw an immoral person and thought, "If I were to recite the Pātimokkha while this person is present, his head would split into seven pieces." Out of compassion for him, he remained silent. Abhikkantā means passed, diminished. Uddhaste aruṇe means when the red dawn had risen. Nandimukhiyā means with a joyful face. Aparisuddhā, ānanda, parisā means instead of saying, "Such and such a person is impure," he said, "The assembly, Ānanda, is not pure." The rest is straightforward everywhere.

3. Gahapativaggo

3. Gahapati Vagga

1. Paṭhamauggasuttavaṇṇanā
1. First Ugga Sutta Commentary

21.Tatiyassa paṭhamepaññatte āsane nisīdīti tassa kira ghare pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañca āsanasatāni niccaṃ paññattāneva honti, tesu aññatarasmiṃ āsane nisīdi.Taṃ suṇāhīti te suṇāhi, taṃ vā aṭṭhavidhaṃ acchariyadhammaṃ suṇāhi.Cittaṃ pasīdīti ‘‘buddho nu kho na buddho nu kho’’ti vitakkamattampi na uppajji, ayameva buddhoti cittuppādo pasanno anāvilo ahosi.Sakāni vā ñātikulānīti attano yāpanamattaṃ dhanaṃ gahetvā ñātigharāni gacchatu.Kassa vo dammīti katarapurisassa tumhe dadāmi, ārocetha me attano adhippāyaṃ.Appaṭivibhattāti ‘‘ettakaṃ dassāmi ettakaṃ na dassāmi, idaṃ dassāmi idaṃ na dassāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādentena hi paṭivibhattā nāma hoti, mayhaṃ pana na evaṃ. Atha kho saṅghikā viya gaṇasantakā viya ca sīlavantehi saddhiṃ sādhāraṇāyeva.Sakkaccaṃyeva payirupāsāmīti sahatthā upaṭṭhahāmi, cittīkārena upasaṅkamāmi.

21. In the first [sutta] of the third [vagga], paññatte āsane nisīdī means in his house there were always five hundred seats prepared for five hundred monks; he sat on one of those seats. Taṃ suṇāhīti means listen to that, or listen to that eightfold wonderful and marvelous quality. Cittaṃ pasīdīti means not even a thought such as "Is he a Buddha, or is he not a Buddha?" arose; the mental formation became clear and unagitated, [thinking,] "This is the Buddha indeed!" Sakāni vā ñātikulānī means having taken enough wealth for his own livelihood, let him go to the homes of relatives. Kassa vo dammī means to which person shall I give? Tell me your intention. Appaṭivibhattā means one is said to have "divided" if one generates the thought, "I will give this much, I will not give this much; I will give this, I will not give that." But I am not like that. Rather, it is common to all virtuous ones, like property belonging to the Sangha, or like property belonging to a group. Sakkaccaṃyeva payirupāsāmī means I will attend with my own hands, I will approach with due respect.

Anacchariyaṃ kho pana maṃ, bhanteti, bhante, yaṃ maṃ devatā upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ ārocenti, idaṃ na acchariyaṃ. Yaṃ panāhaṃ tatonidānaṃ cittassa uṇṇatiṃ nābhijānāmi, taṃ eva acchariyanti vadati.Sādhu sādhu, bhikkhūti ettha kiñcāpi bhikkhuṃ āmanteti, upāsakasseva pana veyyākaraṇasampahaṃsane esa sādhukāroti veditabbo.

Anacchariyaṃ kho pana maṃ, bhante means, "Venerable sir, it is not wonderful that deities approach me and inform me in this way. But it is wonderful that I do not experience conceit (uṇṇati) of mind because of that." He speaks in this way. Sādhu sādhu, bhikkhū means although he addresses a monk here, it should be understood that this expression of approval is a congratulation to the lay follower.

2. Dutiyauggasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Second Ugga Sutta Commentary

22.Dutiyenāgavaneti tassa kira seṭṭhino nāgavanaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ, so tattha purebhattaṃ gandhamālādīni gāhāpetvā uyyānakīḷikaṃ kīḷitukāmo gantvā paricāriyamāno bhagavantaṃ addasa. Saha dassanenevassa purimanayeneva cittaṃ pasīdi, surāpānena ca uppannamando taṅkhaṇaṃyeva pahīyi. Taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Oṇojesinti udakaṃ hatthe pātetvā adāsiṃ.Asukoti amuko.Samacittova demīti ‘‘imassa thokaṃ, imassa bahuka’’nti evaṃ cittanānattaṃ na karomi, deyyadhammaṃ pana ekasadisaṃ karomīti dasseti.Ārocentīti ākāse ṭhatvā ārocenti.Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti iminā upāsako attano anāgāmiphalaṃ byākaroti.

22. In the second [sutta], nāgavane means the wealthy man had a park called Nāgavana; he went there, wishing to enjoy a pleasure outing, having had perfumes and garlands, etc., brought there before the meal, being attended to [by his servants], he saw the Blessed One. With the mere sight of him, his mind became clear in the same way as before, and the intoxication that had arisen from drinking alcohol vanished immediately. With that in mind, he said this. Oṇojesinti means I poured water into his hand and gave it. Asuko means so-and-so. Samacittova demīti means I do not make any variety of mind like "a little for this one, a lot for that one;" but I show that I make the gift in an even way. Ārocentīti means standing in the sky, they announce it. Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti with this, the lay follower declares his attainment of Anāgāmi fruit.

3. Paṭhamahatthakasuttavaṇṇanā
3. First Hatthaka Sutta Commentary

23.Tatiyehatthako āḷavakoti bhagavatā āḷavakayakkhassa hatthato hatthehi sampaṭicchitattā hatthakoti laddhanāmo rājakumāro.Sīlavāti pañcasīladasasīlena sīlavā.Cāgavāti cāgasampanno.Kaccittha, bhanteti, bhante, kacci ettha bhagavato byākaraṇaṭṭhāne.Appicchoti adhigamappicchatāya appiccho.

23. In the third [sutta], hatthako āḷavako means a prince who was given the name Hatthaka because he received [offerings] from the Āḷavaka yakkha with his own hands. Sīlavā means virtuous with the five precepts or the ten precepts. Cāgavā means endowed with generosity. Kaccittha, bhante means, venerable sir, is it perhaps in the Blessed One's place of pronouncements? Appiccho means having few desires due to desiring attainment.

4. Dutiyahatthakasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Second Hatthaka Sutta Commentary

24.Catutthepañcamattehi upāsakasatehīti sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃyeva ariyasāvakaupāsakānaṃ pañcahi satehi parivuto bhuttapātarāso gandhamālavilepenacuṇṇāni gahetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.Saṅgahavatthūnīti saṅgaṇhanakāraṇāni.Tehāhanti tehi ahaṃ.Taṃ dānena saṅgaṇhāmīti naṅgalabalibaddabhattabījādīni ceva gandhamālamūlādīni ca datvā saṅgaṇhāmi.Peyyavajjenāti amma, tāta, bhātara, bhaginītiādikena kaṇṇasukhena mudukena piyavacanena saṅgaṇhāmi.Atthacariyāyāti ‘‘imassa dānena vā piyavacanena vā kiccaṃ natthi, atthacariyāya saṅgaṇhitabbayuttako aya’’nti ñatvā uppannakiccanittharaṇasaṅkhātāya atthacariyāya saṅgaṇhāmi.Samānattatāyāti ‘‘imassa dānādīhi kiccaṃ natthi, samānattatāya saṅgaṇhitabbo aya’’nti ekato khādanapivananisajjādīhi attanā samānaṃ katvā saṅgaṇhāmi.Daliddassa kho no tathā sotabbaṃ maññantīti daliddassa kiñci dātuṃ vā kātuṃ vā asakkontassa, yathā daliddassa no tathā sotabbaṃ maññanti, mama pana sotabbaṃ maññanti, dinnovāde tiṭṭhanti, na me anusāsaniṃ atikkamitabbaṃ maññanti.Yoni kho tyāyanti upāyo kho te ayaṃ. Imesu pana dvīsupi suttesu satthārā sīlacāgapaññā missakā kathitāti veditabbā.

24. In the fourth [sutta], pañcamattehi upāsakasatehī means surrounded by five hundred lay disciples who were noble disciples, stream-enterers, and once-returners, he went to the Blessed One, having eaten his morning meal and taking perfumes, garlands, unguents and powders. Saṅgahavatthūnīti means causes of binding together. Tehāhanti means by those, I. Taṃ dānena saṅgaṇhāmīti means I bind them together by giving plows, bulls, food, seeds, etc., as well as perfumes, garlands, roots, etc. Peyyavajjenāti means I bind them together with gentle, pleasing words, pleasing to the ear, such as "mother, father, brother, sister," etc. Atthacariyāyāti means knowing that "this one does not need gifts or kind words, but he is fit to be bound together by rendering service," I bind him together with the rendering of service, which is defined as fulfilling his needs when they arise. Samānattatāyāti means knowing that "this one does not need gifts, etc., but he is to be bound together by equality," I bind him together by making him equal to myself through eating, drinking, sitting, etc., together. Daliddassa kho no tathā sotabbaṃ maññantīti means they think that one who is poor, unable to give or do anything, should not be listened to as much as they think we should be listened to; they stand by my pronouncements, they do not think my instructions should be transgressed. Yoni kho tyāyanti means this is your method. In these two suttas, it should be understood that the Teacher spoke of a mixture of morality, generosity, and wisdom.

5-6. Mahānāmasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-6. Mahānāma Sutta and so on Commentary

25-26.Pañcameatthūpaparikkhitā hotīti atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ upaparikkhitā hoti. Chaṭṭhe saddhāsīlacāgā missakā kathitā.

25-26. In the fifth [sutta], atthūpaparikkhitā hotīti means he is one who investigates what is beneficial and what is not, what is a cause and what is not a cause. In the sixth [sutta], a mixture of faith, morality, and generosity is spoken of.

7. Paṭhamabalasuttavaṇṇanā
7. First Bala Sutta Commentary

27.Sattameujjhattibalāti ujjhānabalā. Bālānañhi ‘‘yaṃ asuko idañcidañca āha, maṃ so āha, na añña’’nti evaṃ ujjhānameva balaṃ.Nijjhattibalāti ‘‘na idaṃ evaṃ, evaṃ nāmeta’’nti atthānatthanijjhāpanaṃyeva balaṃ.Paṭisaṅkhānabalāti paccavekkhaṇabalā.Khantibalāti adhivāsanabalā.

27. In the seventh [sutta], ujjhattibalāti means the strength of complaining. For fools, complaining itself is strength, thinking "so-and-so said this and that, he spoke to me, not to another." Nijjhattibalāti means the strength of determining what is beneficial and what is not, thinking "this is not so, this is how it is." Paṭisaṅkhānabalāti means the strength of reviewing. Khantibalāti means the strength of enduring.

8. Dutiyabalasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Second Bala Sutta Commentary

28.Aṭṭhamebalānīti ñāṇabalāni.Āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānātīti arahattaṃ paṭijānāti.Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvākārena.Yathābhūtanti yathāsabhāvato.Sammappaññāyāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya.Aṅgārakāsūpamāti santāpanaṭṭhena aṅgārakāsuyā upamitā ime kāmāti.Vivekaninnanti phalasamāpattivasena nibbānaninnaṃ.Vivekaṭṭhanti kilesehi vajjitaṃ dūrībhūtaṃ vā.Nekkhammābhiratanti pabbajjābhirataṃ.Byantibhūtanti vigatantabhūtaṃ ekadesenāpi anallīnaṃ visaṃyuttaṃ visaṃsaṭṭhaṃ.Āsavaṭṭhāniyehīti sampayogavasena āsavānaṃ kāraṇabhūtehi, kilesadhammehīti attho. Atha vābyantibhūtanti vigatavāyanti attho. Kuto?Sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi,sabbehi tebhūmakadhammehīti attho. Imasmiṃ sutte ariyamaggo lokiyalokuttaro kathito.

28. In the eighth [sutta], balānīti means the strengths of knowledge. Āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānātīti means he claims arahantship. Aniccatoti means in the way of becoming and ceasing. Yathābhūtanti means according to reality. Sammappaññāyāti means with right wisdom, with the wisdom of the path which is accompanied by insight. Aṅgārakāsūpamāti means these sensual pleasures are likened to a pit of embers, in the sense of burning. Vivekaninnanti means inclining towards Nibbāna in the sense of the fruition attainments. Vivekaṭṭhanti means devoid of defilements, or far removed. Nekkhammābhiratanti means delighting in renunciation. Byantibhūtanti means having become devoid of limits, not clinging in any way, disconnected, disassociated. Āsavaṭṭhāniyehīti means with the causes of the āsavas, with the defilements, in the sense of association. Alternatively, byantibhūtanti means having gone beyond waning. From where? Sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi, means from all the qualities of the three realms. In this sutta, the noble path, both mundane and supramundane, is spoken of.

9. Akkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Akkhaṇa Sutta Commentary

29.Navame khaṇe kiccāni karotītikhaṇakicco,okāsaṃ labhitvāva kiccāni karotīti attho.Dhammoti catusaccadhammo.Opasamikoti kilesūpasamāvaho.Parinibbāyikoti kilesaparinibbānakaro. Catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ sambodhiṃ gacchati sampāpuṇātītisambodhagāmī. Dīghāyukaṃ devanikāyanti idaṃ asaññaṃ devanikāyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Aviññātāresūti ativiya aviññūsu.

29. In the ninth [sutta], khaṇakicco means one who does what needs to be done in the opportune moment, meaning one who does what needs to be done when the opportunity arises. Dhammoti means the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths. Opasamikoti means bringing about the subsiding of defilements. Parinibbāyikoti means causing the final cessation of defilements. Sambodhagāmī means going to or reaching enlightenment, which is synonymous with the knowledge of the four paths. Dīghāyukaṃ devanikāyanti this was said in reference to the Saññānikāya of long-lived deities. Aviññātāresūti means among those who are especially ignorant.

Suppavediteti sukathite.Antarāyikāti antarāyakarā.Khaṇo ve mā upaccagāti ayaṃ laddho khaṇo mā atikkami.Idhaceva naṃ virādhetīti sace koci pamattacārī idha imaṃ khaṇaṃ labhitvāpi saddhammassa niyāmataṃ ariyamaggaṃ virādheti na sampādeti.Atītatthoti hāpitattho.Cirattaṃ anutapissatīti cirarattaṃ socissati. Yathā hi ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne bhaṇḍaṃ samuppanna’’nti sutvā eko vāṇijo na gaccheyya, aññe gantvā gaṇheyyuṃ, tesaṃ taṃ aṭṭhaguṇampi dasaguṇampi bhaveyya. Atha itaro ‘‘mama attho atikkanto’’ti anutapeyya, evaṃ yo idha khaṇaṃ labhitvā appaṭipajjanto saddhammassa niyāmataṃ virādheti, so ayaṃ vāṇijova atītattho ciraṃ anutapissati socissati. Kiñca bhiyyoavijjānivutoti tathā.Paccavidunti paṭivijjhiṃsu.Saṃvarāti sīlasaṃvarā.Māradheyyaparānugeti māradheyyasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāraṃ anugate.Pāraṅgatāti nibbānaṃ gatā.Ye pattā āsavakkhayanti ye arahattaṃ pattā. Evamidha gāthāsu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

Suppavediteti means well-proclaimed. Antarāyikāti means causing obstacles. Khaṇo ve mā upaccagāti means may this opportunity that has been obtained not pass by. Idhaceva naṃ virādhetīti means if someone is heedless and, having obtained this opportunity here, fails to attain the fixed course of the true Dhamma, the noble path. Atītatthoti means one whose purpose is lost. Cirattaṃ anutapissatīti means he will lament for a long time. Just as if a merchant heard that "goods have arisen in such-and-such a place" and did not go, and others went and took them, and those goods became eightfold or tenfold for them. Then the other one would regret, "My purpose has passed," in the same way, one who, having obtained an opportunity here, fails to attain the fixed course of the true Dhamma, that merchant whose purpose is lost will lament for a long time. Moreover, avijjānivutoti thus. Paccavidunti means they realized. Saṃvarāti means the restraints of morality. Māradheyyaparānugeti means following the realm of Māra, which is synonymous with Saṃsāra. Pāraṅgatāti means gone to Nibbāna. Ye pattā āsavakkhayanti means those who have attained arahantship. Thus, here in the verses, the round and deliverance from the round have been spoken of.

10. Anuruddhamahāvitakkasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Anuruddha Mahāvitakka Sutta Commentary

30.Dasamecetīsūti cetināmakānaṃ rājūnaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānattā evaṃladdhavohāre raṭṭhe.Pācīnavaṃsadāyeti dasabalassa vasanaṭṭhānato pācīnadisāya ṭhite vaṃsadāye nīlobhāsehi veḷūhi sañchanne araññe.Evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādīti thero kira pabbajitvā paṭhamaantovassamhiyeva samāpattilābhī hutvā sahassalokadhātudassanasamatthaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ uppādesi. So sāriputtattherassa santikaṃ gantvā evamāha – ‘‘idhāhaṃ, āvuso sāriputta, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sahassalokaṃ olokemi. Āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ asallīnaṃ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, passaddho kāyo asāraddho, samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekaggaṃ. Atha ca pana me anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ na vimuccatī’’ti. Atha naṃ thero āha – ‘‘yaṃ kho te, āvuso anuruddha, evaṃ hoti ‘ahaṃ dibbena cakkhunā…pe… olokemī’ti, idaṃ te mānasmiṃ. Yampi te, āvuso, anuruddha evaṃ hoti ‘āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ…pe… ekagga’nti, idaṃ te uddhaccasmiṃ. Yampi te, āvuso anuruddha, evaṃ hoti ‘atha ca pana me anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ na vimuccatī’ti, idaṃ te kukkuccasmiṃ. Sādhu vatāyasmā anuruddho ime tayo dhamme pahāya ime tayo dhamme amanasikaritvā amatāya dhātuyā cittaṃ upasaṃharatū’’ti evamassa thero kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi. So kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā satthāraṃ āpucchitvā cetiraṭṭhaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ karonto aṭṭhamāsaṃ caṅkamena vītināmesi. So padhānaveganimmathitattā kilantakāyo ekassa veḷugumbassa heṭṭhā nisīdi. Athassāyaṃ evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi, esa mahāpurisavitakko uppajjīti attho.

30. In the tenth [sutta], cetīsūti means in a country with that designation, because it was the dwelling place of kings named Ceti. Pācīnavaṃsadāyeti means in a forest covered with blue-shining bamboo, situated to the east of the dwelling place of the Ten-Powered One. Evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādīti means it seems that the elder, having gone forth and attained the fruit of meditative absorption in the very first rains-retreat, developed divine-eye knowledge capable of seeing a thousand world-systems. He went to Sāriputta Thera and said, "Here, friend Sāriputta, I see a thousand worlds with the divine eye, which is purified and surpasses human [vision]. My energy is aroused and unflagging, mindfulness is present and unconfused, the body is tranquil and unperturbed, the mind is concentrated and one-pointed. Yet, my mind is not liberated from the āsavas without clinging." Then the Thera said to him, "Friend Anuruddha, the fact that you think, 'I see with the divine eye...' is conceit. And the fact that you think, 'My energy is aroused... the mind is one-pointed,' is restlessness. And the fact that you think, 'Yet, my mind is not liberated from the āsavas without clinging,' is worry. It would be good if the venerable Anuruddha were to abandon these three qualities, not attend to these three qualities, and direct his mind to the deathless element." Thus, the Thera taught him the meditation subject. Having taken the meditation subject and taken leave of the Teacher, he went to the Ceti country and, practicing the ascetic life, spent eight months walking back and forth. Because his body was exhausted from being agitated by the force of striving, he sat down at the foot of a certain bamboo grove. Then this thought arose in his mind; this great man's thought arose, meaning this thought occurred.

Appicchassāti ettha paccayappiccho, adhigamappiccho, pariyattiappiccho, dhutaṅgappicchoti cattāro appicchā. Tattha paccayappiccho bahuṃ dente appaṃ gaṇhāti, appaṃ dente appataraṃ gaṇhāti, na anavasesaggāhī hoti. Adhigamappiccho majjhantikatthero viya attano adhigamaṃ aññesaṃ jānituṃ na deti. Pariyattiappiccho tepiṭakopi samāno na bahussutabhāvaṃ jānāpetukāmo hoti sāketatissatthero viya. Dhutaṅgappiccho dhutaṅgapariharaṇabhāvaṃ aññesaṃ jānituṃ na deti dvebhātikattheresu jeṭṭhatthero viya. Vatthu visuddhimagge kathitaṃ.Ayaṃ dhammoti evaṃ santaguṇaniguhanena ca paṭiggahaṇe mattaññutāya ca appicchassa puggalassa ayaṃ navalokuttaradhammo sampajjati, no mahicchassa. Evaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ.

Appicchassāti: Here, appiccha (of few desires) has four aspects: desire for requisites, desire for attainment, desire for learning, and desire for dhutaṅga. Among them, the one with desire for requisites takes little when much is offered, takes even less when little is offered, and does not take everything without leaving anything for others. The one with desire for attainment, like the Elder of Majjhantika, does not let others know of his attainments. The one with desire for learning, even being a Tipitaka master, does not want to make known his great learning, like the Elder Sāketatissa. The one with desire for dhutaṅga does not let others know of his practice of dhutaṅga, like the elder of the two brother elders. This matter is discussed in the Visuddhimagga. Ayaṃ dhammoti: For a person of few desires, who conceals his good qualities and is moderate in receiving, this nava lokuttara dhamma (nine supramundane qualities) is achieved, not for one of great desires. Thus, it should be applied everywhere.

Santuṭṭhassāti catūsu paccayesu tīhi santosehi santuṭṭhassa.Pavivittassāti kāyacittaupadhivivekehi vivittassa. Tattha kāyaviveko nāma gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā ārambhavatthuvasena ekībhāvo. Ekībhāvamatteneva kammaṃ na nipphajjatīti kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbatteti, ayaṃ cittaviveko nāma. Samāpattimatteneva kammaṃ na nipphajjatīti jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ sabbākārato upadhiviveko nāma. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ nekkhammābhiratānaṃ, cittaviveko ca parisuddhacittānaṃ paramavodānappattānaṃ, upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatāna’’nti (mahāni. 7, 49).

Santuṭṭhassāti: To one content with three kinds of contentment regarding the four requisites. Pavivittassāti: To one secluded by bodily seclusion, mental seclusion, and seclusion from defilements. Here, bodily seclusion means eliminating association with groups and being alone in terms of the object of endeavor. Merely being alone does not accomplish the task, so after preparing the kasiṇa exercise, he develops the eight attainments; this is called mental seclusion. Merely having attainments does not accomplish the task, so having made the jhāna the basis, having contemplated the formations, he attains arahatta together with the paṭisambhidā; this is called seclusion from defilements in all respects. Therefore, the Blessed One said: "Bodily seclusion is for those who delight in renunciation and maintain the established body of seclusion; mental seclusion is for those with purified minds who have attained supreme purity; and seclusion from defilements is for those persons without defilements who have reached the unconditioned state" (mahāni. 7, 49).

Saṅgaṇikārāmassāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya ceva kilesasaṅgaṇikāya ca ratassa.Āraddhavīriyassāti kāyikacetasikavīriyavasena āraddhavīriyassa.Upaṭṭhitassatissāti catusatipaṭṭhānavasena upaṭṭhitassatissa.Samāhitassāti ekaggacittassa.Paññavatoti kammassakatapaññāya paññavato.

Saṅgaṇikārāmassāti: One who delights in association with groups and in association with defilements. Āraddhavīriyassāti: One who has aroused energy in terms of physical and mental energy. Upaṭṭhitassatissāti: One whose mindfulness is established in terms of the four foundations of mindfulness. Samāhitassāti: One with concentrated mind. Paññavatoti: One who has wisdom through wisdom in accordance with deeds.

Sādhu sādhūti therassa vitakkaṃ sampahaṃsento evamāha.Imaṃ aṭṭhamanti satta nidhī laddhapurisassa aṭṭhamaṃ dento viya, satta maṇiratanāni, satta hatthiratanāni, satta assaratanāni laddhapurisassa aṭṭhamaṃ dento viya satta mahāpurisavitakke vitakketvā ṭhitassa aṭṭhamaṃ ācikkhanto evamāha.Nippapañcārāmassāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcarahitattā nippapañcasaṅkhāte nibbānapade abhiratassa. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Papañcārāmassāti yathāvuttesu papañcesu abhiratassa. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.

Sādhu sādhūti: Praising the Elder's thought, he said thus. Imaṃ aṭṭhamanti: As if giving an eighth treasure to a person who has obtained seven treasures, as if giving an eighth thing to a person who has obtained seven jewels of elephants, seven jewels of horses, after having thought about the seven thoughts of a great man, he said, declaring the eighth. Nippapañcārāmassāti: Because of being free from the papañca of craving, conceit, and views, one who delights in the state of nibbāna, which is called nippapañca. The other is a synonym for that. Papañcārāmassāti: One who delights in the papañca as mentioned. The other is a synonym for that.

Yatoti yadā.Tatoti tadā.Nānārattānanti nilapītalohitodātavaṇṇehi nānārajanehi rattānaṃ.Paṃsukūlanti tevīsatiyā khettesu ṭhitapaṃsukūlacīvaraṃ.Khāyissatīti yathā tassa pubbaṇhasamayādīsu yasmiṃ samaye yaṃ icchati, tasmiṃ samaye taṃ pārupantassa so dussakaraṇḍako manāpo hutvā khāyati, evaṃ tuyhampi cīvarasantosamahāariyavaṃsena tuṭṭhassa viharato paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ khāyissati upaṭṭhahissati.Ratiyāti ratiatthāya.Aparitassāyāti taṇhādiṭṭhiparitassanāhi aparitassanatthāya.Phāsuvihārāyāti sukhavihāratthāya.Okkamanāya nibbānassāti amataṃ nibbānaṃ otaraṇatthāya.

Yatoti: When. Tatoti: Then. Nānārattānanti: Dyed with various colors such as blue, yellow, red, and white. Paṃsukūlanti: A discarded rag robe found in twenty-three places. Khāyissatīti: Just as that dussakaraṇḍaka (rag-robe) is pleasing to him when he wears it at whatever time he wishes, such as in the morning, so too, for you, while living content with the great lineage of contentment with robes, the paṃsukūla robe will appear, will be available. Ratiyāti: For the sake of delight. Aparitassāyāti: For the sake of not being tormented by craving and views. Phāsuvihārāyāti: For the sake of a comfortable dwelling. Okkamanāya nibbānassāti: For the sake of entering the deathless nibbāna.

Piṇḍiyālopabhojananti gāmanigamarājadhānīsu jaṅghābalaṃ nissāya gharapaṭipāṭiyā carantena laddhapiṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ.Khāyissatīti tassa gahapatino nānaggarasabhojanaṃ viya upaṭṭhahissati.Santuṭṭhassa viharatoti piṇḍapātasantosamahāariyavaṃsena santuṭṭhassa viharato.Rukkhamūlasenāsanaṃ khāyissatīti tassa gahapatino tebhūmakapāsāde gandhakusumavāsasugandhaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ viya rukkhamūlaṃ upaṭṭhahissati.Santuṭṭhassāti senāsanasantosamahāariyavaṃsena santuṭṭhassa.Tiṇasanthārakoti tiṇehi vā paṇṇehi vā bhūmiyaṃ vā phalakapāsāṇatalāni vā aññatarasmiṃ santhatasanthato.Pūtimuttanti yaṃkiñci muttaṃ. Taṅkhaṇe gahitampi pūtimuttameva vuccati duggandhattā.Santuṭṭhassa viharatoti gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārasantosena santuṭṭhassa viharato.

Piṇḍiyālopabhojananti: Eating morsels of food obtained by relying on the strength of one's legs, wandering from house to house in villages, towns, and capital cities. Khāyissatīti: It will be available like the various delicious foods of that householder. Santuṭṭhassa viharatoti: To one who lives content with the great lineage of contentment with alms food. Rukkhamūlasenāsanaṃ khāyissatīti: The root of a tree will be available like the fragrant, flower-scented pavilion in the three-storied mansion of that householder. Santuṭṭhassāti: To one content with the great lineage of contentment with lodgings. Tiṇasanthārakoti: A spread made of grass or leaves, spread on the ground or on a plank, stone slab, or any other surface. Pūtimuttanti: Any urine. Even if taken at that moment, it is called putrid urine because of its foul smell. Santuṭṭhassa viharatoti: To one who lives content with contentment with the requisites for the sick and medicinal equipment.

tena hi tvaṃ, anuruddhātiādimāha.Pavivittassa viharatoti tīhi vivekehi vivittassa viharantassa.Uyyojanikapaṭisaṃyuttanti uyyojanikeheva vacanehi paṭisaṃyuttaṃ, tesaṃ upaṭṭhānagamanakaṃyevāti attho.Papañcanirodheti nibbānapade.Pakkhandatīti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pakkhandati.Pasīdatītiādīsupi ārammaṇavaseneva pasīdanasantiṭṭhanamuccanā veditabbā. Iti bhagavā cetiraṭṭhe pācīnavaṃsadāye āyasmato anuruddhassa kathite aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakke puna bhesakaḷāvanamahāvihāre nisīditvā bhikkhusaṅghassa vitthārena kathesi.

tena hi tvaṃ, anuruddhātiādi: He said, beginning with "Then you, Anuruddha." Pavivittassa viharatoti: To one living secluded by the three seclusions. Uyyojanikapaṭisaṃyuttanti: Connected with words of encouragement, meaning connected only with their assistance and attendance. Papañcanirodheti: In the state of nibbāna. Pakkhandatīti: It inclines in terms of being an object. In pasīdatītiādi, the pacification, settling, and liberation should be understood only in terms of the object. Thus, the Blessed One, having spoken the eight thoughts of a great man to Venerable Anuruddha in the Pācīnavamsa grove in the Cetī country, sat down again in the Bhesakaḷāvana Mahāvihāra and explained it in detail to the Saṅgha of monks.

Manomayenāti manena nibbattitakāyopi manomayoti vuccati manena gatakāyopi, idha manena gatakāyaṃ sandhāyevamāha.Yathā me ahu saṅkappoti yathā mayhaṃ vitakko ahosi, tato uttari aṭṭhamaṃ mahāpurisavitakkaṃ dassento tato uttariṃ desayi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Manomayenāti: A body created by the mind is also called manomaya, and a body gone by the mind too, here he says this referring to a body gone by the mind. Yathā me ahu saṅkappoti: As my thought was, then showing the further eighth thought of a great man, he taught further. The rest is clear everywhere.

4. Dānavaggo

4. Dānavaggo

1. Paṭhamadānasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamadānasuttavaṇṇanā

31.Catutthassa paṭhameāsajja dānaṃ detīti patvā dānaṃ deti. Āgataṃ disvā taṃ muhuttaṃyeva nisīdāpetvā sakkāraṃ katvā dānaṃ deti, dassāmīti na kilameti.Bhayāti ‘‘ayaṃ adāyako akārako’’ti garahabhayā, apāyabhayā vā.Adāsimeti mayhaṃ pubbe esa idaṃ nāma adāsīti deti.Dassati meti anāgate idaṃ nāma dassatīti deti.Sāhu dānanti dānaṃ nāma sādhu sundaraṃ buddhādīhi paṇḍitehi pasatthanti deti.Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāratthaṃ dānaṃ detīti samathavipassanācittassa alaṅkāratthañceva parikkhāratthañca deti. Dānañhi cittaṃ muduṃ karoti. Yena laddho, so ‘‘laddhaṃ me’’ti muducitto hoti. Yena dinnaṃ, sopi ‘‘dinnaṃ mayā’’ti muducitto hoti. Iti ubhinnaṃ cittaṃ muduṃ karoti. Teneva ‘‘adantadamana’’nti vuccati. Yathāha –

31.In the first of the fourth, āsajja dānaṃ detīti: He gives after approaching. Having seen the one who has come, he immediately has him seated, makes an offering, and gives; he does not tire him by saying "I will give." Bhayāti: Out of fear of blame that "this one is not a giver, not a doer," or out of fear of the lower realms. Adāsi meti: He gives because "this one gave me this name before." Dassati meti: He gives because "this one will give this name in the future." Sāhu dānanti: He gives, thinking "giving is good, beautiful, praised by the Buddhas and the wise." Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāratthaṃ dānaṃ detīti: He gives for the sake of adorning and equipping the mind of samatha and vipassanā. Giving makes the mind soft. The one by whom it is obtained has a soft mind, thinking "I have obtained." The one by whom it is given also has a soft mind, thinking "I have given." Thus, it makes the mind soft for both. Therefore, it is called "taming the untamed." As it was said:

‘‘Adantadamanaṃ dānaṃ, adānaṃ dantadūsakaṃ;

"Giving tames the untamed; not-giving corrupts the tamed;
By giving and kind speech, they rise up and they bow down."

Imesu pana aṭṭhasu dānesu cittālaṅkāradānameva uttamanti.

Among these eight kinds of giving, giving for the adornment of the mind is the best.

2. Dutiyadānasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiyadānasuttavaṇṇanā

32.Dutiyesaddhāti yāya saddhāya dānaṃ deti, sā saddhā.Hiriyanti yāya hiriyā dānaṃ deti, sāva adhippetā.Kusalañca dānanti anavajjañca dānaṃ.Diviyanti divaṅgamaṃ.

32.In the second, saddhāti: The faith by which he gives, that is faith. Hiriyanti: The shame by which he gives, that is intended. Kusalañca dānanti: And the faultless giving. Diviyanti: Divine.

3. Dānavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
3. Dānavatthusuttavaṇṇanā

33.Tatiyedānavatthūnīti dānakāraṇāni.Chandā dānaṃ detīti pemena dānaṃ deti.Dosāti dosena kuddho hutvā yaṃ atthi, taṃ vegena gaṇhitvā deti.Mohāti mohena mūḷho deti.Bhayāti garahabhayena vā apāyabhayena vā, tassa tasseva vā pana bhayena deti.Kulavaṃsanti kulapaveṇiṃ.

33.In the third, dānavatthūnīti: Reasons for giving. Chandā dānaṃ detīti: He gives with affection. Dosāti: He gives out of anger, having become angry, having seized whatever there is with force. Mohāti: He gives, deluded by delusion. Bhayāti: He gives out of fear of blame or fear of the lower realms, or out of that very fear for that reason. Kulavaṃsanti: Family lineage.

4. Khettasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Khettasuttavaṇṇanā

34.Catutthena mahapphalaṃ hotīti dhaññaphalena mahapphalaṃ na hoti.Na mahassādanti yampissa phalaṃ hoti, tassa assādo na mahā hoti mandassādaṃ na madhuraṃ.Na phātiseyyanti seyyāpissa na hoti vuḍḍhi, tassa mahantaṃ vīhithambhasannivesaṃ na hotīti attho.Unnāmaninnāmīti thalaninnavasena visamatalaṃ. Tattha thale udakaṃ na saṇṭhāti, ninne atibahu tiṭṭhati.Pāsāṇasakkharikanti pattharitvā ṭhitapiṭṭhipāsāṇehi ca khuddakapāsāṇehi ca sakkharāhi ca samannāgataṃ.Ūsaranti ubbhinnaloṇaṃ.Na ca gambhīrasitanti thaddhabhūmitāya gambhīrānugataṃ, naṅgalamaggaṃ katvā kasituṃ na sakkā hoti, uttānanaṅgalamaggameva hoti.Na āyasampannanti na udakāgamanasampannaṃ.Na apāyasampannanti pacchābhāge udakaniggamanamaggasampannaṃ na hoti.Na mātikāsampannanti na khuddakamahantīhi udakamātikāhi sampannaṃ hoti.Na mariyādasampannanti na kedāramariyādāhi sampannaṃ.Na mahapphalantiādīni sabbāni vipākaphalavaseneva veditabbāni.

34.In the fourth, na mahapphalaṃ hotīti: It is not of great fruit with grain fruit. Na mahassādanti: And whatever fruit there is for it, the taste of that is not great, of little taste, not sweet. Na phātiseyyanti: And there is no increase for the crops, meaning there is no great accumulation of grain. Unnāmaninnāmīti: Uneven ground in terms of high and low places. There, water does not collect on the high ground, it stands too much in the low ground. Pāsāṇasakkharikanti: Consisting of flat stones spread out, small stones, and gravel. Ūsaranti: Leached salt. Na ca gambhīrasitanti: Because of the hard ground, it is not deeply ploughed; it is not possible to plough making a furrow, it is only a shallow furrow. Na āyasampannanti: Not endowed with a way for water to come in. Na apāyasampannanti: It is not endowed with a way for water to go out in the back part. Na mātikāsampannanti: It is not endowed with small and large water channels. Na mariyādasampannanti: It is not endowed with boundaries for rice fields. Na mahapphalantiādīni: All should be understood only in terms of the fruit of the result.

Sampanneti paripuṇṇe sampattiyutte.Pavuttā bījasampadāti sampannaṃ bījaṃ ropitaṃ.Devesampādayantamhīti deve sammā vassante.Anītisampadā hotīti kīṭakimiādipāṇakaītiyā abhāvo ekā sampadā hoti.Virūḷhīti vaḍḍhi dutiyā sampadā hoti.Vepullanti vipulabhāvo tatiyā sampadā hoti.Phalanti paripuṇṇaphalaṃ catutthī sampadā hoti.Sampannasīlesūti paripuṇṇasīlesu.Bhojanasampadāti sampannaṃ vividhabhojanaṃ.Sampadānanti tividhaṃ kusalasampadaṃ.Upanetīti sā bhojanasampadā upanayati. Kasmā?Sampannañhissa taṃ kataṃ,yasmāssa taṃ katakammaṃ sampannaṃ paripuṇṇanti attho.Sampannatthūdhāti sampanno atthu idha.Vijjācaraṇasampannoti tīhi vijjāhi ca pañcadasahi caraṇadhammehi ca samannāgato.Laddhāti evarūpo puggalo cittassa sampadaṃ avekallaparipuṇṇabhāvaṃ labhitvā.Karoti kammasampadanti paripuṇṇakammaṃ karoti.Labhati catthasampadanti atthañca paripuṇṇaṃ labhati.Diṭṭhisampadanti vipassanādiṭṭhiṃ.Maggasampadanti sotāpattimaggaṃ.Yāti sampannamānasoti paripuṇṇacitto hutvā arahattaṃ yāti.Sā hoti sabbasampadāti sā sabbadukkhehi vimutti sabbasampadā nāma hotīti.

Sampanneti: Complete, endowed with good fortune. Pavuttā bījasampadāti: Perfect seed is sown. Deve sampādayantamhīti: When the gods send rain properly. Anītisampadā hotīti: The absence of pests such as insects is one kind of good fortune. Virūḷhīti: Growth is the second kind of good fortune. Vepullanti: Abundance is the third kind of good fortune. Phalanti: Complete fruit is the fourth kind of good fortune. Sampannasīlesūti: In those complete in virtue. Bhojanasampadāti: Abundant, varied food. Sampadānanti: Threefold, good fortune of merit. Upanetīti: That abundance of food brings near. Why? Sampannañhissa taṃ kataṃ,yasmāssa: Because that deed done by him is complete, perfect, is the meaning. Sampannatthūdhāti: Good fortune is complete here. Vijjācaraṇasampannoti: Endowed with the three knowledges and the fifteen virtuous conducts. Laddhāti: Having obtained the abundance of mind, the state of complete absence of confusion. Karoti kammasampadanti: He does perfect action. Labhati catthasampadanti: He obtains complete benefit. Diṭṭhisampadanti: Insight of vipassanā. Maggasampadanti: The path of stream-entry. Yāti sampannamānasoti: Having a complete mind, he goes to arahatta. Sā hoti sabbasampadāti: That freedom from all suffering is called the abundance of all.

5. Dānūpapattisuttavaṇṇanā
5. Dānūpapattisuttavaṇṇanā

35.Pañcamedānūpapattiyoti dānapaccayā upapattiyo.Dahatīti ṭhapeti.Adhiṭṭhātīti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti.Hīne vimuttanti hīnesu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu vimuttaṃ.Uttari abhāvitanti tato uttarimaggaphalatthāya abhāvitaṃ.Tatrūpapattiyā saṃvattatīti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patthetvā kusalaṃ kataṃ, tattha nibbattanatthāya saṃvattati.Vītarāgassāti maggena vā samucchinnarāgassa samāpattiyā vā vikkhambhitarāgassa. Dānamatteneva hi brahmaloke nibbattituṃ na sakkā, dānaṃ pana samādhivipassanācittassa alaṅkāraparivāraṃ hoti. Tato dānena muducitto brahmavihāre bhāvetvā brahmaloke nibbattati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vītarāgassa no sarāgassā’’ti.

35.In the fifth, dānūpapattiyoti: Rebirths due to giving. Dahatīti: He places. Adhiṭṭhātīti: A synonym for that. Bhāvetīti: He develops. Hīne vimuttanti: Free from the five inferior sensual qualities. Uttari abhāvitanti: Not developed further for the sake of the higher path and fruit. Tatrūpapattiyā saṃvattatīti: It leads to rebirth in that place, desiring which the merit was done. Vītarāgassāti: For one who is without lust either by the path, with lust cut off, or by attainment, with lust suppressed. Indeed, it is not possible to be reborn in the Brahma world by giving alone; however, giving is an adornment and retinue for the mind of concentration and insight. Then, with his mind softened by giving, having developed the Brahma-vihāras, he is reborn in the Brahma world. Therefore, it was said: "For one without lust, not for one with lust."

6. Puññakiriyavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
6. Puññakiriyavatthusuttavaṇṇanā

36.Chaṭṭhe puññakiriyāni ca tāni tesaṃ tesaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ vatthūni cātipuññakiriyavatthūni. Dānādīnañhi lakkhaṇe cittaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘evarūpaṃ nāma amhehi dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, sīlaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ, bhāvanā bhāvetabbā’’ti sattā puññāni karonti. Dānamevadānamayaṃ,dānacetanāsu vā purimacetanāto nipphannā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanādānamayaṃsīlādīhi sīlamayādīni viya. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo.Parittaṃ kataṃ hotīti thokaṃ mandaṃ kataṃ hoti.Nābhisambhotīti na nipphajjati.Akataṃ hotīti bhāvanāyayogoyeva anāraddho hotīti attho.Manussadobhagyanti manussesu sampattirahitaṃ pañcavidhaṃ nīcakulaṃ.Upapajjatīti paṭisandhivasena upagacchati, tattha nibbattatīti attho.Mattaso katanti pamāṇena kataṃ, thokaṃ na bahu.Manussasobhagyanti manussesu subhagabhāvaṃ tividhakulasampattiṃ.Adhimattanti adhikappamāṇaṃ balavaṃ vā.Adhigaṇhantīti abhibhavitvā gaṇhanti, visiṭṭhatarā jeṭṭhakā hontīti attho.

36.In the sixth, puññakiriyavatthūni: Both meritorious deeds and the bases for those respective benefits. Indeed, having placed the mind on the characteristics of giving and so on, beings do meritorious deeds, thinking "such giving should be given by us, virtue should be protected, development should be developed." Giving itself is dānamayaṃ, or from the initial intention in the intentions of giving, the conclusive intention that arises is dānamayaṃ, like those made of virtue with virtue and so on. This is the method in the remaining two as well. Parittaṃ kataṃ hotīti: It is done little, weakly. Nābhisambhotīti: It does not come to pass. Akataṃ hotīti: The meaning is that the application to development itself is not begun. Manussadobhagyanti: Unfortunate among humans, the five kinds of low families devoid of good fortune. Upapajjatīti: He approaches by way of rebirth, meaning he is reborn there. Mattaso katanti: Done in measure, little, not much. Manussasobhagyanti: Good fortune among humans, the threefold family prosperity. Adhimattanti: Excessive measure, or strong. Adhigaṇhantīti: They take over, overpower, meaning they are superior, elders.

7. Sappurisadānasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Sappurisadānasuttavaṇṇanā

37.Sattamesucinti parisuddhaṃ vaṇṇasampannaṃ deti.Paṇītanti rasūpapannaṃ.Kālenāti yuttapattakālena.Kappiyanti yaṃ kappiyaṃ, taṃ deti.Viceyya detīti ‘‘imassa dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ bhavissati, imassa na mahapphala’’nti evaṃ paṭiggāhakapariyesanavasena dānaṃ vā paṇidhāyavasena dānaṃ vā vicinitvā deti.

37.In the seventh, sucinti: He gives pure, possessing good color. Paṇītanti: Endowed with good taste. Kālenāti: At the proper time. Kappiyanti: He gives what is allowable. Viceyya detīti: He gives after considering, thinking "giving to this one will be of great fruit, giving to this one will not be of great fruit," thus he gives after seeking out the recipient or after determining his intention.

8. Sappurisasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Sappurisasuttavaṇṇanā

38.Aṭṭhameatthāyāti atthatthāya.Hitāya sukhāyāti hitatthāya sukhatthāya.Pubbapetānanti paralokagatānaṃ ñātīnaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte anuppanne buddhe cakkavattirājāno bodhisattā paccekabuddhā labbhanti, buddhakāle buddhā ceva buddhasāvakā ca. Yathāvuttānañhi etesaṃ atthāya hitāya sukhāya saṃvattanti.Bahunnaṃvata atthāya, sappañño gharamāvasanti sappañño ghare vasanto bahūnaṃ vata atthāya hoti.Pubbeti paṭhameva.Pubbekatamanussaranti mātāpitūnaṃ pubbakāraguṇe anussaranto.Sahadhammenāti sakāraṇena paccayapūjanena pūjeti.Apace brahmacārayoti brahmacārino apacayati, nīcavuttitaṃ nesaṃ āpajjati.Pesaloti piyasīlo.

38. In the eighth, atthāyā means for the sake of benefit. Hitāya sukhāyā means for the sake of welfare and happiness. Pubbapetānaṃ means for the relatives who have passed away to the next world. In this sutta, Buddhas, Cakkavatti kings, Bodhisattas and Paccekabuddhas are obtained when a Buddha has not arisen, but in the Buddha's time, both Buddhas and Buddha's disciples are obtained. Indeed, it leads to the benefit, welfare, and happiness of those mentioned. Bahunnaṃ vata atthāya, sappañño gharamāvasa means the wise person living at home is indeed for the benefit of many. Pubbe means previously. Pubbekatamanussara means remembering the prior good deeds of the parents. Sahadhammenā means he satisfies them with reasoned offerings and requisites. Apace brahmacārayo means he reveres the brahmacārīs, he approaches them with humble conduct. Pesalo means amiable in disposition.

9. Abhisandasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Abhisandasuttavaṇṇanā

39.Navamedānānīti cetanādānāni.Aggaññānītiādīnaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.

39. In the ninth, dānānī means donations of volition. The meaning of Aggaññānī etc. has already been stated below.

10. Duccaritavipākasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Duccaritavipākasuttavaṇṇanā

40.Dasamepāṇātipātoti pāṇātipātacetanā.Sabbalahusoti sabbalahuko.Appāyukasaṃvattanikoti tena parittakena kammavipākena appāyuko hoti, dinnamattāya vā paṭisandhiyā vilīyati mātukucchito nikkhantamatte vā. Evarūpo hi na aññassa kassaci nissando, pāṇātipātasseva gatamaggo esoti.Bhogabyasanasaṃvattanikoti yathā kākaṇikāmattampi hatthe na tiṭṭhati, evaṃ bhogabyasanaṃ saṃvatteti.Sapattaverasaṃvattaniko hotīti saha sapattehi veraṃ saṃvatteti. Tassa hi sapattā ca bahukā honti. Yo ca naṃ passati, tasmiṃ verameva uppādeti na nibbāyati. Evarūpo hi parassa rakkhitagopitabhaṇḍe aparādhassa nissando.

40. In the tenth, pāṇātipāto means the volition of taking life. Sabbalahuso means very light. Appāyukasaṃvattaniko means he becomes short-lived due to that trivial kammic result, or he perishes immediately after being conceived, or immediately after emerging from the mother's womb. Such a thing is not a consequence for anyone else; this is the path gone by only for taking life. Bhogabyasanasaṃvattaniko means it leads to the ruin of wealth, such that not even a kākaṇika remains in hand. Sapattaverasaṃvattaniko hotī means he creates enmity with enemies. Indeed, he has many enemies. And whoever sees him, he only generates enmity in that person, not appeasement. Such a thing is the consequence for transgression against the guarded and protected property of another.

Abhūtabbhakkhānasaṃvattaniko hotīti abhūtena abbhakkhānaṃ saṃvatteti, yena kenaci kataṃ tasseva upari patati.Mittehibhedanasaṃvattanikoti mittehi bhedaṃ saṃvatteti. Yaṃ yaṃ mittaṃ karoti, so so bhijjatiyeva.Amanāpasaddasaṃvattanikoti amanāpasaddaṃ saṃvatteti. Yā sā vācā kaṇṭakā kakkasā kaṭukā abhisajjanī mammacchedikā, gatagataṭṭhāne tameva suṇāti, manāpasaddasavanaṃ nāma na labhati. Evarūpo pharusavācāya gatamaggo nāma.Anādeyyavācāsaṃvattanikoti aggahetabbavacanataṃ saṃvatteti, ‘‘tvaṃ kasmā kathesi, ko hi tava vacanaṃ gahessatī’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Ayaṃ samphappalāpassa gatamaggo.Ummattakasaṃvattaniko hotīti ummattakabhāvaṃ saṃvatteti. Tena hi manusso ummatto vā khittacitto vā eḷamūgo vā hoti. Ayaṃ surāpānassa nissando. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitanti.

Abhūtabbhakkhānasaṃvattaniko hotī means it leads to false accusation, and the accusation falls upon the very person who made it. Mittehi bhedanasaṃvattaniko means it leads to the separation from friends. Whatever friend he makes, that one is sure to be broken off. Amanāpasaddasaṃvattaniko means it leads to unpleasant sounds. Whatever speech is thorny, harsh, bitter, cursing, cutting to the heart, he hears just that in every place he goes; he does not obtain hearing pleasant sounds. Such a thing is the path gone by for harsh speech. Anādeyyavācāsaṃvattaniko means it leads to having unacceptable speech, leading to being told, "Why are you speaking? Who will take your word?". This is the path gone by for frivolous chatter. Ummattakasaṃvattaniko hotī means it leads to being insane. Due to that, a person becomes insane, or mentally deranged, or a deaf-mute. This is the consequence of liquor drinking. In this sutta, only the round of rebirths has been spoken of.

5. Uposathavaggo

5. Uposathavaggo

4. Vāseṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Vāseṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā

44.Pañcamassa catuttheime cepi, vāseṭṭha, mahāsālāti purato ṭhite dve sālarukkhe dassento parikappopamaṃ āha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime tāva mahāsālā acetanā. Sace etepi sacetanā hutvā aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ uposathaṃ upavaseyyuṃ, etesampi so uposathavāso dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya assa. Bhūte pana vattabbameva natthīti.

44. In the fourth of the fifth, ime cepi, vāseṭṭha, mahāsālā showing the two Sāla trees standing in front, he spoke of a simile by imagination. This was said: "These great Sāla trees are inanimate. But even if these were animate and were to observe the Uposatha with its eight factors, even that Uposatha observance would be for their long-term benefit and happiness. There is certainly no need to speak of beings."

6. Anuruddhasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Anuruddhasuttavaṇṇanā

46.Chaṭṭheyenāyasmā anuruddhoti tā kira devatā attano sampattiṃ oloketvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho nissāya ayaṃ sampatti amhehi laddhā’’ti āvajjamānā theraṃ disvā ‘‘mayaṃ amhākaṃ ayyassa pubbe cakkavattirajjaṃ karontassa pādaparicārikā hutvā tena dinnovāde ṭhatvā imaṃ sampattiṃ labhimha, gacchāma theraṃ ānetvā imaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavissāmā’’ti divā yenāyasmā anuruddho tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.Tīsu ṭhānesūti tīsu kāraṇesu.Ṭhānaso paṭilabhāmāti khaṇeneva labhāma.Saranti vacanasaddaṃ vā gītasaddaṃ vā ābharaṇasaddaṃ vā.Pītā assūtiādīni nīlā tāva jātā, pītā bhavituṃ na sakkhissantītiādinā nayena cintetvā vitakketi. Tāpi ‘‘idāni ayyo amhākaṃ pītabhāvaṃ icchati, idāni lohitabhāva’’nti tādisāva ahesuṃ.

46. In the sixth, yenāyasmā anuruddho Those devatās, reflecting on their own attainment, considered, "Through what dependence have we obtained this attainment?" Seeing the Thera, they thought, "We became attendants of our lord when he was formerly a Cakkavatti king, and having stood by the advice given by him, we obtained this attainment. Let us go, bring the Thera, and he shall experience this attainment." Thus, during the day, they approached Venerable Anuruddha. Tīsu ṭhānesū means in three ways. Ṭhānaso paṭilabhāmā means we obtain instantly. Sara means the sound of speech, or the sound of song, or the sound of ornaments. Pītā assū contemplating and considering in this way, with the thought that "they cannot become yellow", they were just like that. Even those devatās were just as he thought: "Now the Venerable One wants our yellow color, now our red color".

Accharaṃ vādesīti pāṇitalaṃ vādesi.Pañcaṅgikassāti ātataṃ, vitataṃ, ātatavitataṃ, ghanaṃ, susiranti imehi pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgatassa. Tattha ātataṃ nāma cammapariyonaddhesu bheriādīsu ekatalatūriyaṃ, vitataṃ nāma ubhayatalaṃ, ātatavitataṃ nāma sabbaso pariyonaddhaṃ, susiraṃ vaṃsādi, ghanaṃ sammādi.Suvinītassāti ākaḍḍhanasithilakaraṇādīhi samucchitassa.Suppaṭipatāḷitassāti pamāṇe ṭhitabhāvajānanatthaṃ suṭṭhu paṭipatāḷitassa.Kusalehi susamannāhatassāti ye vādetuṃ kusalā chekā, tehi vāditassa.Vaggūti cheko sundaro.Rajanīyoti rañjetuṃ samattho.Kamanīyoti kāmetabbayutto. Khamanīyoti vā pāṭho, divasampi suyyamāno khamateva, na nibbindatīti attho.Madanīyoti mānamadapurisamadajanano.Indriyāni okkhipīti ‘‘asāruppaṃ imā devatā karontī’’ti indriyāni heṭṭhā khipi, na akkhīni ummīletvā olokesi.Na khvayyo anuruddho sādiyatīti ‘‘mayaṃ naccāma gāyāma, ayyo pana anuruddho na kho sādiyati, akkhīni ummīletvā na oloketi, kiṃ mayaṃ naccitvā vā gāyitvā vā karissāmā’’ti tattheva antaradhāyiṃsu.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti tāsaṃ devatānaṃ ānubhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘katihi nu kho dhammehi samannāgato mātugāmo manāpakāyike devaloke nibbattatī’’ti imamatthaṃ pucchituṃ upasaṅkami.

Accharaṃ vādesī means he clapped his hands. Pañcaṅgikassā means possessing these five components: ātataṃ, vitataṃ, ātatavitataṃ, ghanaṃ, susiraṃ. There, ātataṃ means a one-sided drum among those covered with skin, such as the bheri, vitataṃ means two-sided, ātatavitataṃ means completely covered, susiraṃ means a flute etc., ghanaṃ means cymbals etc. Suvinītassā means well-trained with regard to tightening and loosening etc. Suppaṭipatāḷitassā means well-tuned to know the state of being in measure. Kusalehi susamannāhatassā means played by those who are skilled and clever in playing. Vaggū means eloquent, beautiful. Rajanīyo means capable of delighting. Kamanīyo means worthy of being desired. Alternatively, the reading is Khamanīyo, meaning it is agreeable even when heard every day, and one does not become weary of it. Madanīyo means generating pride and intoxication in men of pride and intoxication. Indriyāni okkhipī means he lowered his senses, thinking, "These devatās are acting inappropriately," he did not open his eyes and look. Na khvayyo anuruddho sādiyatī means "Venerable Anuruddha does not approve, we are dancing and singing, but he does not open his eyes and look; what shall we do by dancing or singing?", and they disappeared right there. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means having seen the power of those devatās, he approached to ask this matter: "With how many qualities is a woman endowed that she is reborn in the pleasing realm of the devas?".

9-10. Idhalokikasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
9-10. Idhalokikasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

49-50.Navameayaṃ’sa loko āraddho hotīti ayamassa loko idhaloke karaṇamattāya āraddhattā paripuṇṇattā āraddho hoti paripuṇṇo.Soḷasākārasampannāti sutte vuttehi aṭṭhahi, gāthāsu aṭṭhahīti soḷasahi ākārehi samannāgatā, yāni vā aṭṭhaṅgāni parampi tesu samādapetīti evampi soḷasākārasampannāti eke. Saddhāsīlapaññā panettha missikā kathitā. Dasamaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa kathitaṃ. Sabbasuttesu pana yaṃ na vuttaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā āgatanayattā uttānatthamevāti.

49-50. In the ninth, ayaṃ’sa loko āraddho hotī means this world is complete for him, complete and fulfilled because of being initiated for the sake of action in this world. Soḷasākārasampannā means endowed with sixteen aspects: eight stated in the sutta, and eight in the gāthās. Some say that it is endowed with sixteen aspects because it also establishes others in the eight factors. Here, saddhā, sīla, and paññā are spoken of mixed together. The tenth was spoken to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus. However, in all the suttas, whatever was not said is merely of obvious meaning because of the method coming below.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(6) 1. Gotamīvaggo

(6) 1. Gotamīvaggo

1. Gotamīsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Gotamīsuttavaṇṇanā

51.Chaṭṭhassa paṭhamesakkesu viharatīti paṭhamagamanena gantvā viharati.Mahāpajāpatīti puttapajāya ceva dhītupajāya ca mahantattā evaṃladdhanāmā.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti bhagavā kapilapuraṃ gantvā paṭhamameva nandaṃ pabbājesi, sattame divase rāhulakumāraṃ.Cumbaṭakakalahe(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.331; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.37) pana ubhayanagaravāsikesu yuddhatthāya nikkhantesu satthā gantvā te rājāno saññāpetvāattadaṇḍasuttaṃ(su. ni. 941 ādayo; mahāni. 170 ādayo) kathesi. Rājāno pasīditvā aḍḍhatiyasate aḍḍhatiyasate kumāre adaṃsu, tāni pañca kumārasatāni satthu santike pabbajiṃsu, atha nesaṃ pajāpatiyo sāsanaṃ pesetvā anabhiratiṃ uppādayiṃsu. Satthā tesaṃ anabhiratiyā uppannabhāvaṃ ñatvā te pañcasate daharabhikkhū kuṇāladahaṃ netvā attano kuṇālakāle nisinnapubbe pāsāṇatale nisīditvākuṇālajātakakathāya(jā. 2.21.kuṇālajātaka) tesaṃ anabhiratiṃ vinodetvā sabbepi te sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpesi, puna mahāvanaṃ ānetvā arahattaphaleti. Tesaṃ cittajānanatthaṃ punapi pajāpatiyo sāsanaṃ pahiṇiṃsu. Te ‘‘abhabbā mayaṃ gharāvāsassā’’ti paṭisāsanaṃ pahiṇiṃsu. Tā ‘‘na dāni amhākaṃ gharaṃ gantuṃ yuttaṃ, mahāpajāpatiyā santikaṃ gantvā pabbajjaṃ anujānāpetvā pabbajissāmā’’ti pañcasatāpi mahāpajāpatiṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘ayye, amhākaṃ pabbajjaṃ anujānāpethā’’ti āhaṃsu. Mahāpajāpatī tā itthiyo gahetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Setacchattassa heṭṭhā rañño parinibbutakāle upasaṅkamītipi vadantiyeva.

51. In the first of the sixth, sakkesu viharatī means he dwells having gone there by the first going. Mahāpajāpatī means so named because she is great in terms of offspring of sons and offspring of daughters. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means the Blessed One went to Kapilavatthu and first ordained Nanda, and on the seventh day, Rāhulakumāra. However, in the Cumbaṭakakalahe(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.331; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.37), when those dwelling in both cities went out for battle, the Teacher went and reconciled those kings and spoke the Attadaṇḍasuttaṃ(su. ni. 941 ādayo; mahāni. 170 ādayo). The kings, being pleased, gave half a hundred and half a hundred youths; those five hundred youths were ordained in the presence of the Teacher; then their wives sent messages, creating discontent in them. The Teacher, knowing that discontent had arisen in them, led those five hundred young bhikkhus to Kuṇāladaha and, sitting on the stone slab where he had sat in his Kuṇāla birth, having dispelled their discontent with the Kuṇālajātakakathāya(jā. 2.21.kuṇālajātaka), he established all of them in the fruit of Sotāpatti, then, having brought them back to the Mahāvana, in the fruit of Arahatta. Again, the wives sent messages to know their minds. They replied, "We are incapable of household life." Those wives thought, "Now it is not proper for us to go to our homes, we will go to Mahāpajāpatī, have ordination permitted, and get ordained." Thus, all five hundred approached Mahāpajāpatī and said, "O Lady, permit our ordination." Mahāpajāpatī, taking those women, approached the Blessed One. Some even say that she approached under the white parasol at the time of the king's passing away.

Alaṃ gotami, mā te ruccīti kasmā paṭikkhipi, nanu sabbesampi buddhānaṃ catasso parisā hontīti? Kāmaṃ honti, kilametvā pana anekavāraṃ yācite anuññātaṃ pabbajjaṃ ‘‘dukkhena laddhā’’ti sammā paripālessantīti garuṃ katvā anuññātukāmo paṭikkhipi.Pakkāmīti puna kapilapurameva pāvisi.Yathābhirantaṃviharitvāti bodhaneyyasattānaṃ upanissayaṃ olokento yathājjhāsayane viharitvā.Cārikaṃ pakkāmīti mahājanasaṅgahaṃ karonto uttamāya buddhasiriyā anopamena buddhavilāsena aturitacārikaṃ pakkāmi.

Alaṃ gotami, mā te ruccī why did he reject her, since all Buddhas have four assemblies? Indeed, they do, but he rejected her, wanting to permit the ordination that was requested after tiring her out many times, so that they would properly protect the ordination, thinking "it was obtained with difficulty," and respecting it. Pakkāmī means she entered Kapilavatthu again. Yathābhirantaṃ viharitvā means dwelling as he pleased, observing the underlying tendencies of beings capable of enlightenment. Cārikaṃ pakkāmī means going forth on tour, making a collection of the great multitude, with the supreme splendor of Buddhahood, with unparalleled Buddha-grace, and on a speedy tour.

Sambahulāhi sākiyānīhi saddhinti antonivesanamhiyeva dasabalaṃ uddissa pabbajjāvesaṃ gahetvā pañcasatā sākiyāniyo pabbajjāvesaṃyeva gāhāpetvā sabbāhipi tāhi sambahulāhi sākiyānīhi saddhiṃ.Cārikaṃ pakkāmīti gamanaṃ abhinīhari. Gamanābhinīharaṇakāle pana tā sukhumālā rājitthiyo padasā gantuṃ na sakkhissantīti sākiyakoliyarājāno sovaṇṇasivikāyo upaṭṭhāpayiṃsu. Tā pana ‘‘yāne āruyha gacchantīti satthari agāravo kato hotī’’ti ekapaṇṇāsayojanikaṃ padasāva paṭipajjiṃsu. Rājānopi purato ca pacchato ca ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahāpetvā taṇḍulasappitelādīnaṃ sakaṭāni pūrāpetvā ‘‘gataṭṭhāne gataṭṭhāne āhāraṃ paṭiyādethā’’ti purise pesayiṃsu.Sūnehi pādehīti tāsañhi sukhumālattā pādesu eko phoṭo uṭṭheti, eko bhijjati. Ubho pādā katakaṭṭhisamparikiṇṇā viya hutvā uddhumātā jātā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sūnehi pādehī’’ti.Bahidvārakoṭṭhaketi dvārakoṭṭhakato bahi. Kasmā panevaṃ ṭhitāti? Evaṃ kirassā ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ tathāgatena ananuññātā sayameva pabbajjāvesaṃ aggahesiṃ, evaṃ gahitabhāvo ca pana me sakalajambudīpe pākaṭo jāto. Sace satthā pabbajjaṃ anujānāti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Sace pana nānujānissati, mahatī garahā bhavissatī’’ti vihāraṃ pavisituṃ asakkontī rodamānāva aṭṭhāsi.

Sambahulāhi sākiyānīhi saddhi means taking the garb of ordination, aiming for the Ten-Powered One, within the inner quarters, and having made five hundred Sākiyan women take the garb of ordination, together with all those numerous Sākiyan women. Cārikaṃ pakkāmī means she set out on the journey. It is said that at the time of setting out on the journey, the Sākiya and Koliya kings provided golden palanquins, thinking that those very delicate royal women would not be able to go on foot. But they, thinking that "by going on vehicles, disrespect to the Teacher would be done," proceeded on foot for forty-nine yojanas. The kings also arranged protection in front and behind, and having filled carts with rice, ghee, oil, etc., they sent men, saying, "Prepare food in every place you go." Sūnehi pādehī means because their feet were very delicate, one blister arose on their feet, and one burst. Both feet became as if covered with thorns and splinters, and were swollen. Therefore, it was said, "with swollen feet". Bahidvārakoṭṭhake means outside the gatehouse. Why did she stand there like that? It seems she thought, "I have taken the garb of ordination on my own, without being permitted by the Tathāgata, and that my having taken it has become apparent throughout Jambudīpa. If the Teacher permits ordination, that is good. But if he does not permit it, there will be great reproach." Unable to enter the monastery, she stood weeping.

Kiṃ nu tvaṃ gotamīti kiṃ nu rājakulānaṃ vipatti uppannā, kena tvaṃ kāraṇena evaṃ vivaṇṇabhāvaṃ pattā, sūnehi pādehi…pe… ṭhitāti.Aññenapi pariyāyenāti aññenapi kāraṇena.Bahukārā, bhantetiādinā tassā guṇaṃ kathetvā puna pabbajjaṃ yācanto evamāha. Satthāpi ‘‘itthiyo nāma parittapaññā, ekayācitamattena pabbajjāya anuññātāya na mama sāsanaṃ garuṃ katvā gaṇhissantī’’ti tikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipitvā idāni garuṃ katvā gāhāpetukāmatāyasace, ānanda, mahāpajāpatī gotamīaṭṭha garudhamme paṭiggaṇhāti, sāva’ssā hotuupasampadātiādimāha. Tatthasāvassāti sā eva assā pabbajjāpi upasampadāpi hotu.

Kiṃ nu tvaṃ gotamī means what calamity has befallen the royal families, for what reason have you attained such a discolored state, with swollen feet…pe…standing? Aññenapi pariyāyenā means by another means. Bahukārā, bhante saying thus, recounting her virtues, she spoke thus again, requesting ordination. The Teacher, too, thinking, "Women are of little wisdom, if ordination is permitted with just one request, they will not respect my dispensation and take it seriously," having rejected her three times, now wanting them to take it seriously, said sace, ānanda, mahāpajāpatī gotamī aṭṭha garudhamme paṭiggaṇhāti, sāva’ssā hotu upasampadā. There, sāvassā means that itself is her ordination and higher ordination.

Tadahūpasampannassāti taṃdivasaṃ upasampannassa.Abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kattabbanti omānātimāne akatvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena abhivādanaṃ, āsanā paccuṭṭhāya paccuggamanavasena paccuṭṭhānaṃ, dasanakhe samodhānetvā añjalikammaṃ, āsanapaññāpanabījanādikaṃ anucchavikakammasaṅkhātaṃ sāmīcikammañca katabbaṃ.Abhikkhuke āvāseti yattha vasantiyā anantarāyena ovādatthāya upasaṅkamanaṭṭhāne ovādadāyako ācariyo natthi, ayaṃ abhikkhuko āvāso nāma. Evarūpe āvāse vassaṃ na upagantabbaṃ.Anvaḍḍhamāsanti anuposathikaṃ.Ovādūpasaṅkamananti ovādatthāya upasaṅkamanaṃ.Diṭṭhenāti cakkhunā diṭṭhena.Sutenāti sotena sutena.Parisaṅkāyāti diṭṭhasutavasena parisaṅkitena.Garudhammanti garukaṃ saṅghādisesāpattiṃ.Pakkhamānattanti anūnāni pannarasa divasāni mānattaṃ.Chasu dhammesūti vikālabhojanacchaṭṭhesu sikkhāpadesu.Sikkhitasikkhāyāti ekasikkhampi akhaṇḍaṃ katvā pūritasikkhāya.Akkositabbo paribhāsitabboti dasannaṃ akkosavatthūnaṃ aññatarena akkosavatthunā na akkositabbo, bhayūpadaṃsanāya yāya kāyaci paribhāsāya na paribhāsitabbo.

Tadahūpasampannassāti: to one who was ordained that day. Abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kattabbaṃ: without making disparaging comparisons, respect should be shown with the five-point prostration; rising from one's seat and going to meet them is the act of standing up in respect; bringing the ten fingernails together is the añjalikamma gesture; and arranging seats, providing water, etc., which are considered appropriate services, should be done. Abhikkhuke āvāse: an āvāsa where, for one residing there, there is no teacher who gives instruction without interruption, approaching for the purpose of receiving guidance; this is called an abhikkhuka āvāsa. One should not enter upon the rains residence in such an āvāsa. Anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ: without the uposatha. Ovādūpasaṅkamanaṃ: approaching for the purpose of receiving instruction. Diṭṭhena: by what is seen with the eye. Sutena: by what is heard with the ear. Parisaṅkāyā: by what is suspected based on what is seen or heard. Garudhammaṃ: a serious offense entailing saṅghādisesa. Pakkhamānattaṃ: mānatta for no less than fifteen days. Chasu dhammesū: in the six training rules beginning with eating at the wrong time. Sikkhitasikkhāya: by one who has fulfilled the training, having made even one training unbroken. Akkositabbo paribhāsitabbo: one should not be abused with any of the ten grounds for abuse; one should not be reviled with any kind of speech intended to cause fear or intimidation.

Ovaṭo bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūsu vacanapathoti ovādānusāsanadhammakathāsaṅkhāto vacanapatho bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūsu ovarito pihito, na bhikkhuniyā koci bhikkhu ovaditabbo anusāsitabbo vā ‘‘bhante, porāṇakattherā idaṃ cīvaravattaṃ pūrayiṃsū’’ti evaṃ pana paveṇivasena kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.Anovaṭobhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīsu vacanapathoti bhikkhūnaṃ pana bhikkhunīsu vacanapatho anivārito, yathāruci ovadituṃ anusāsituṃ dhammakathaṃ kathetunti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panesā garudhammakathā samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya (pāci. aṭṭha. 148) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.

Ovaṭo bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūsu vacanapatho: the range of speech, consisting of advice, instruction, and Dhamma talks, is closed to bhikkhunīs in regard to bhikkhus; no bhikkhunī should advise or instruct any bhikkhu, but it is permissible to speak in a traditional manner, saying, "Venerable sir, the elders of old used this robe material." Anovaṭo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīsu vacanapatho: but the range of speech for bhikkhus in regard to bhikkhunīs is unrestricted; they may advise, instruct, and give Dhamma talks as they please. This is the summary here; in detail, however, this account of the garudhammas should be understood in the same way as stated in the Vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā of the Samantapāsādikā (pāci. aṭṭha. 148).

seyyathāpi, bhantetiādikaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

Seyyathāpi, bhante, etc.: he uttered the utterance.

Kumbhatthenakehīti kumbhe dīpaṃ jāletvā tena ālokena paraghare bhaṇḍaṃ vicinitvā thenakacorehi.Setaṭṭhikā nāma rogajātīti eko pāṇako nāḷamajjhagataṃ kaṇḍaṃ vijjhati, yena viddhā kaṇḍā nikkhantampi sālisīsaṃ khīraṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti.Mañjiṭṭhikā nāma rogajātīti ucchūnaṃ antorattabhāvo.

Kumbhatthenakehī: by thieves who, after lighting a lamp in a pot and using its light, search for goods in others' houses. Setaṭṭhikā nāma rogajātī: a certain creature pierces the stalk in the middle of the stem, and stems pierced by it are unable to take up the sap even when the ears of rice have emerged. Mañjiṭṭhikā nāma rogajātī: the interior of sugar cane being red.

Mahato taḷākassa paṭikacceva āḷinti iminā pana etamatthaṃ dasseti – yathā mahato taḷākassa pāḷiyā abaddhāyapi kiñci udakaṃ tiṭṭhateva, paṭhamameva baddhāya pana yaṃ abaddhapaccayā na tiṭṭheyya, tampi tiṭṭheyya, evameva ye ime anuppanne vatthusmiṃ paṭikacceva anatikkamanatthāya garudhammā paññattā, tesu apaññattesu mātugāmassa pabbajitattā pañca vassasatāni saddhammo tiṭṭheyya. Paṭikacceva paññattattā pana aparānipi pañca vassasatāni ṭhassatīti evaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttavassasahassameva ṭhassati.Vassasahassanti cetaṃ paṭisambhidāpabhedappattakhīṇāsavānaṃ vaseneva vuttaṃ, tato pana uttaripi sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena vassasahassaṃ, anāgāmivasena vassasahassaṃ, sakadāgāmivasena vassasahassaṃ, sotāpannavasena vassasahassanti evaṃ pañcavassasahassāni paṭivedhasaddhammo ṭhassati. Pariyattidhammopi tāniyeva. Na hi pariyattiyā asati paṭivedho atthi, nāpi pariyattiyā sati paṭivedho na hoti. Liṅgaṃ pana pariyattiyā antarahitāyapi ciraṃ pavattissatīti.

Mahato taḷākassa paṭikacceva āḷi: with this, however, he shows this meaning: just as even if the embankment of a large lake is not constructed, some water still remains; but if it is constructed right from the beginning, even what would not remain due to the absence of an embankment will remain; so too, if these garudhammas that were enacted right from the beginning to prevent transgression in the event of something not arising had not been enacted, the saddhamma would have lasted five hundred years because women had gone forth. But because they were enacted right from the beginning, it will last for another five hundred years; thus, only the thousand years stated at the beginning will last. Vassasahassaṃ: this is said only from the standpoint of khīṇāsavas who have attained the discriminations; but thereafter, another thousand years due to sukkhavipassaka khīṇāsavas, a thousand years due to anāgāmins, a thousand years due to sakadāgāmins, and a thousand years due to sotāpannas; thus, the paṭivedhasaddhamma will last for five thousand years. The pariyattidhamma will also last that long. For without the pariyatti, there is no paṭivedha, nor when there is pariyatti is there no paṭivedha. The liṅga, however, will continue for a long time even if the pariyatti disappears.

2. Ovādasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ovādasuttavaṇṇanā

52.Dutiyebahussutoti idha sakalassapi buddhavacanassa vasena bahussutabhāvo veditabbo.Garudhammanti kāyasaṃsaggaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Bhikkhunovādakavinicchayo pana samantapāsādikāya (pāci. aṭṭha. 144 ādayo) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

52. In the second, bahussuto: here, being learned is to be understood in terms of the entirety of the Buddha's word. Garudhammaṃ: physical contact. This is the summary here. The ruling on the giving of advice by a bhikkhu, however, should be understood in the same way as stated in the Samantapāsādikā (pāci. aṭṭha. 144 onwards).

3. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā

53.Tatiyesarāgāyāti sarāgatthāya.Virāgāyāti virajjanatthāya.Saṃyogāyāti vaṭṭe saṃyogatthāya.Visaṃyogāyāti vaṭṭe visaṃyogabhāvatthāya.Ācayāyāti vaṭṭassa vaḍḍhanatthāya.No apacayāyāti na vaṭṭaviddhaṃsanatthāya.Dubbharatāyāti dupposanatthāya.No subharatāyāti na sukhaposanatthāya. Imasmiṃ sutte paṭhamavārena vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, dutiyavārena vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ. Iminā ca pana ovādena gotamī arahattaṃ pattāti.

53. In the third, sarāgāyā: for the sake of rāga. Virāgāyā: for the sake of detachment. Saṃyogāyā: for the sake of connection to the round. Visaṃyogāyā: for the sake of disconnection from the round. Ācayāyā: for the sake of increasing the round. No apacayāyā: not for the destruction of the round. Dubbharatāyā: for difficulty in being supported. No subharatāyā: not for ease in being supported. In this sutta, the round is spoken of in the first passage, and disengagement in the second. And with this instruction, Gotamī attained arahatta.

4. Dīghajāṇusuttavaṇṇanā
4. Dīghajāṇusuttavaṇṇanā

54.Catutthebyagghapajjāti idamassa paveṇi nāma vasena ālapanaṃ. Tassa hi pubbapurisā byagghapathe jātāti tasmiṃ kule manussā byagghapajjāti vuccanti.Issatthenāti issāsakammena.Tatrupāyāyāti ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle idaṃ nāma kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti jānane upāyabhūtāya.Vuddhasīlinoti vaḍḍhitasīlā vuddhasamācārā.Āyanti āgamanaṃ.Nāccogāḷhanti nātimahantaṃ.Nātihīnanti nātikasiraṃ.Pariyādāyāti gahetvā khepetvā. Tattha yassa vayato diguṇo āyo, tassa vayo āyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti.

54. In the fourth, Byagghapajjā: this is his customary form of address. For his ancestors were born in Byagghapatha, so people in that family are called Byagghapajja. Issatthenā: by the archery profession. Tatrupāyāyā: by the means of knowing "at this time, it is appropriate to do this." Vuddhasīlino: those whose sīla has been developed, those whose conduct is advanced. Āyaṃ: income. Nāccogāḷhaṃ: not too great. Nātihīnaṃ: not too meager. Pariyādāyā: by taking and spending. There, for one whose income is double his age, his age is unable to exhaust the income.

‘‘Catudhā vibhaje bhoge, paṇḍito gharamāvasaṃ;

"The wise householder divides his wealth into four parts;
With one part he enjoys his wealth, with two parts he invests in his work;
And the fourth he sets aside, for future adversity." (dī. ni. 3.265) –

Evaṃ paṭipajjato pana vayo āyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkotiyeva.

However, for one who behaves in this way, his age is simply unable to exhaust his income.

Udumbarakhādīvāti yathā udumbarāni khāditukāmena pakke udumbararukkhe cālite ekappahāreneva bahūni phalāni patanti, so khāditabbayuttakāni khāditvā itarāni bahutarāni pahāya gacchati, evamevaṃ yo āyato vayaṃ bahutaraṃ katvā vippakiranto bhoge paribhuñjati, so ‘‘udumbarakhādikaṃvāyaṃ kulaputto bhoge khādatī’’ti vuccati.Ajeṭṭhamaraṇanti anāyakamaraṇaṃ.Samaṃ jīvikaṃ kappetīti sammā jīvikaṃ kappeti.Samajīvitāti samajīvitāya jīvitā.Apāyamukhānīti vināsassa ṭhānāni.

Udumbarakhādīvā: just as when someone wanting to eat figs shakes a ripe fig tree, many fruits fall with a single shake, and having eaten those fit to be eaten, he leaves behind many others and goes away; just so, one who spends and squanders wealth, making his age greater than his income, is said to be "eating wealth like someone eating figs." Ajeṭṭhamaraṇaṃ: untimely death. Samaṃ jīvikaṃ kappetī: he makes a balanced living. Samajīvitā: by a balanced life. Apāyamukhānī: places of ruin.

Uṭṭhātā kammadheyyesūti kammakaraṇaṭṭhānesu uṭṭhānavīriyasampanno.Vidhānavāti vidahanasampanno.Sotthānaṃ samparāyikanti sotthibhūtaṃ samparāyikaṃ.Saccanāmenāti buddhattāyeva buddhoti evaṃ avitathanāmena.Cāgo puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti cāgo ca sesapuññañca pavaḍḍhati. Imasmiṃ sutte saddhādayo missakā kathitā. Pañcamaṃ uttānameva.

Uṭṭhātā kammadheyyesū: one who is energetic in places of work. Vidhānavā: one who is skilled in management. Sotthānaṃ samparāyikaṃ: a secure future life. Saccanāmenā: with a true name, as in "he is a Buddha because he is a Buddha." Cāgo puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī: generosity and other merit increase. In this sutta, faith and other mixed qualities are spoken of. The fifth is straightforward.

6. Bhayasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Bhayasuttavaṇṇanā

56.Chaṭṭhegabbhoti gabbhavāso.Diṭṭhadhammikāpīti sandiṭṭhikā gabbhavāsasadisā punapi manussagabbhā.Samparāyikāpīti ṭhapetvā manussagabbhe sesagabbhā.Ubhayaṃ ete kāmā pavuccantīti bhayañca dukkhañca, bhayañca rogo ca, bhayañca gaṇḍo ca, bhayañca sallañca, bhayañca saṅgo ca, bhayañca paṅko ca, bhayañca gabbho cāti evaṃ ubhayaṃ ete kāmā pavuccanti.Sātarūpenāti kāmasukhena.Palipathanti vaṭṭapalipathaṃ.Atikkammāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā assa bhikkhuno arahattappattabhāvo gahito. Evarūpaṃ pajaṃ jātijarūpetaṃ tīsu bhavesu phandamānaṃ avekkhatīti sutte vaṭṭaṃ kathetvā gāthāsu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti. Sattamaṭṭhamāni uttānatthāneva.

56. In the sixth, gabbho: dwelling in the womb. Diṭṭhadhammikāpī: even visible here and now are wombs resembling human wombs. Samparāyikāpī: setting aside human wombs, the remaining wombs. Ubhayaṃ ete kāmā pavuccantī: both fear and suffering, fear and disease, fear and tumors, fear and darts, fear and attachment, fear and mire, and fear and the womb; thus, both of these are called kāmas. Sātarūpenā: by the pleasure of kāmas. Palipathaṃ: the palipatha of the round. Atikkammā: in this place, the bhikkhu's attainment of arahatta by developing insight is taken. He observes beings of such a kind, subject to birth and decay, trembling in the three planes of existence; thus, in the sutta, the round is spoken of, and in the verses, disengagement is spoken of. The seventh and eighth are straightforward in meaning.

9-10. Puggalasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
9-10. Puggalasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

59-60.Navameujubhūtoti kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ abhāvena ujuko.Paññāsīlasamāhitoti paññāya ca sīlena ca samannāgato.Yajamānānanti dānaṃ dadantānaṃ.Puññapekkhānanti puññaṃ olokentānaṃ gavesantānaṃ.Opadhikanti upadhivipākaṃ, opadhibhūtaṃ ṭhānaṃ appamāṇaṃ. Dasamesamukkaṭṭhoti ukkaṭṭho uttamo.Sattānanti sabbasattānaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

59-60. In the ninth, ujubhūto: straightforward due to the absence of bodily crookedness, etc. Paññāsīlasamāhito: endowed with wisdom and sīla. Yajamānānaṃ: to those giving alms. Puññapekkhānaṃ: to those looking for and seeking merit. Opadhikaṃ: the result of upadhi, the immeasurable state that is the basis of upadhi. In the tenth, samukkaṭṭho: excellent, supreme. Sattānaṃ: to all beings. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

(7) 2. Bhūmicālavaggo

(7) 2. Bhūmicālavaggo

1. Icchāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Icchāsuttavaṇṇanā

61.Sattamassa paṭhamepavivittassāti kāyavivekena vivittassa.Nirāyattavuttinoti katthaci anāyattavuttino vipassanākammikassa.Lābhāyāti catupaccayalābhāya.Socī ca paridevī cāti sokī ca paridevī ca. Socicca parideviccātipi pāṭho.Cuto ca saddhammāti taṃkhaṇaṃyeva vipassanāsaddhammā cuto. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

61. In the first of the seventh, pavivittassā: one who is secluded by way of bodily seclusion. Nirāyattavuttino: one whose conduct is independent, one who is engaged in insight practice. Lābhāyā: for the sake of gaining the four requisites. Socī ca paridevī cā: sorrow and lamentation. Socicca parideviccātipi pāṭho. Cuto ca saddhammā: and he falls away from the saddhamma of insight at that very moment. In this sutta, the round and disengagement are spoken of.

2. Alaṃsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Alaṃsuttavaṇṇanā

62.Dutiyealaṃ attano alaṃ paresanti attano ca paresañca hitapaṭipattiyaṃ samattho pariyatto anucchaviko.Khippanisantīti khippaṃ upadhāreti, khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu kathiyamānesu te dhamme khippaṃ jānātīti attho. Imasmiṃ sutte samathavipassanā kathitā. Puggalajjhāsayena pana desanāvilāsena cetaṃ matthakato paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā otarantaṃ kathitanti.

62. In the second, alaṃ attano alaṃ paresaṃ: capable, sufficient, and appropriate in conduct beneficial to himself and others. Khippanisantī: quickly ascertains; when the khandhas, dhātus, āyatanas, etc., are spoken of, he quickly understands those things; this is the meaning. In this sutta, samatha and vipassanā are spoken of. However, this is spoken of from the standpoint of the individual's disposition and with the skillful means of teaching, descending from the top down.

3. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā

63.Tatiyeevamevāti nikkāraṇeneva. Yathā vā ayaṃ yācati, evameva.Moghapurisāti mūḷhapurisā tucchapurisā.Ajjhesantīti yācanti.Anubandhitabbanti iriyāpathānugamanena anubandhitabbaṃ maṃ na vijahitabbaṃ maññanti. Ājānanatthaṃ apasādento evamāha. Esa kira bhikkhu ovāde dinnepi pamādameva anuyuñjati, dhammaṃ sutvā tattheva vasati, samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ na icchati. Tasmā bhagavā evaṃ apasādetvā puna yasmā so arahattassa upanissayasampanno, tasmā taṃ ovadantotasmātiha te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbantiādimāha. Tatthaajjhattaṃ me cittaṃ ṭhitaṃ bhavissati susaṇṭhitaṃ, na ca uppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassantīti iminā tāvassa ovādena niyakajjhattavasena cittekaggatāmatto mūlasamādhi vutto.

63. In the third, evamevā: for no reason at all. Or just as this one asks, so it is. Moghapurisā: foolish people, empty people. Ajjhesantī: they ask. Anubandhitabbaṃ: they think "I must be followed by walking after them; they must not abandon me." He speaks thus, disparaging them for not understanding. It seems that this bhikkhu, even when given instruction, only pursues negligence, hears the Dhamma and stays right there, and does not wish to practice the life of a renunciate. Therefore, the Blessed One, having disparaged him in this way, then said tasmātiha te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ, etc., instructing him because he was endowed with the condition for arahatta. There, by this instruction, ajjhattaṃ me cittaṃ ṭhitaṃ bhavissati susaṇṭhitaṃ, na ca uppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassantī, only the mere concentration of mind in one's own self as the root of samādhi is stated.

yato kho te bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ ṭhitaṃ hoti susaṇṭhitaṃ, na ca uppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, tato te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ‘‘mettā me cetovimutti bhāvitā bhavissati…pe… susamāraddhā’’ti evamassa mettāvasena bhāvanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā punayato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti bahulīkato, tato tvaṃ bhikkhu imaṃ samādhiṃ savitakkasavicārampi bhāveyyāsītiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yadā te bhikkhu ayaṃ mūlasamādhi evaṃ mettāvasena bhāvito hoti, tadā tvaṃ tāvatakenapi tuṭṭhiṃ anāpajjitvāva imaṃ mūlasamādhiṃ aññesupi ārammaṇesu catukkapañcakajjhānāni pāpayamāno ‘‘savitakkasavicārampī’’tiādinā nayena bhāveyyāsīti.

yato kho te bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ ṭhitaṃ hoti susaṇṭhitaṃ, na ca uppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, tato te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ‘‘mettā me cetovimutti bhāvitā bhavissati…pe… susamāraddhā’’: having developed the bhāvana by developing it in terms of loving-kindness, he then said, yato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti bahulīkato, tato tvaṃ bhikkhu imaṃ samādhiṃ savitakkasavicārampi bhāveyyāsī, etc. Its meaning is: when, for you, bhikkhu, this root samādhi has been developed in this way in terms of loving-kindness, without becoming content with just that, you should develop this root samādhi in other objects as well, causing the fourth and fifth jhānas to arise, in the manner of "with applied and sustained thought," etc.

yato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti subhāvito, tato te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘karuṇā me cetovimuttī’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ mettāpubbaṅgamaṃ catukkapañcakajjhānabhāvanaṃ dassetvā puna kāyānupassanādipubbaṅgamaṃ dassetuṃyato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti subhāvito, tato te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’tiādiṃ vatvāyato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti subhāvito, tato tvaṃ bhikkhu yena yeneva gagghasītiādimāha. Tatthagagghasīti gamissasi.Phāsuṃyevāti iminā arahattaṃ dasseti. Arahattappatto hi sabbiriyāpathesu phāsu viharati nāma.

yato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti subhāvito, tato te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘karuṇā me cetovimuttī’’, etc. Having shown the development of the fourth and fifth jhānas with loving-kindness as the forerunner, then in order to show what has mindfulness of the body as the forerunner, he said, yato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti subhāvito, tato te bhikkhu evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’, etc., and said yato kho te bhikkhu ayaṃ samādhi evaṃ bhāvito hoti subhāvito, tato tvaṃ bhikkhu yena yeneva gagghasī, etc. There, gagghasī: you will go. Phāsuṃyeva: by this, he shows arahatta. For one who has attained arahatta dwells at ease in all postures.

4. Gayāsīsasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Gayāsīsasuttavaṇṇanā

64.Catuttheetadavocāti attano padhānabhūmiyaṃ uppannaṃ vitakkaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa ārocetuṃ – ‘‘pubbāhaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.Obhāsanti dibbacakkhuñāṇobhāsaṃ.Ñāṇadassananti dibbacakkhubhūtaṃ ñāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ.Sannivutthapubbanti ekato vasitapubbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sutte dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ, iddhividhañāṇaṃ, cetopariyañāṇaṃ, yathākammupagañāṇaṃ, anāgataṃsañāṇaṃ, paccuppannaṃsañāṇaṃ, atītaṃsañāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsañāṇanti imāni tāva aṭṭha ñāṇāni pāḷiyaṃyeva āgatāni, tehi pana saddhiṃ vipassanāñāṇāni cattāri maggañāṇāni, cattāri phalañāṇāni, cattāri paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, cattāri paṭisambhidāñāṇāni cha asādhāraṇañāṇānīti etāni ñāṇāni samodhānetvā kathentena evaṃ idaṃ suttaṃ kathitaṃ nāma hoti.

64. In the fourth, etadavocā means he spoke the words beginning with "pubbāhaṃ, bhikkhave," in order to announce to the community of monks the thought that had arisen in his place of striving. Obhāsaṃ means the light of the divine-eye knowledge. Ñāṇadassanaṃ means the seeing that is synonymous with knowledge, which is the divine eye. Sannivutthapubbaṃ means having previously lived together. In this sutta, these eight knowledges—divine-eye knowledge, knowledge of psychic power, knowledge of penetration of the minds of others, knowledge of beings passing according to their deeds, knowledge of the future, knowledge of the present, knowledge of the past, and knowledge of previous abodes—appear in the Pali text itself. However, by combining these with the four knowledges of insight, the four path knowledges, the four fruition knowledges, the four reviewing knowledges, the four knowledges of analytical expertise (paṭisambhidāñāṇa), and the six kinds of knowledge unique to a Buddha, one speaks this sutta, as it were.

5. Abhibhāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Abhibhāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā

65.Pañcameabhibhāyatanānīti abhibhavanakāraṇāni. Kiṃ abhibhavanti? Paccanīkadhammepi ārammaṇānipi. Tāni hi paṭipakkhabhāvena paccanīkadhamme abhibhavanti, puggalassa ñāṇuttariyatāya ārammaṇāni.Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññītiādīsu pana ajjhattarūpe parikammavasena ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī nāma hoti. Ajjhattañhi nīlaparikammaṃ karonto kese vā pitte vā akkhitārakāya vā karoti. Pītaparikammaṃ karonto mede vā chaviyā vā hatthatalapādatalesu vā akkhīnaṃ pītaṭṭhāne vā karoti. Lohitaparikammaṃ karonto maṃse vā lohite vā jivhāya vā akkhīnaṃ rattaṭṭhāne vā karoti. Odātaparikammaṃ karonto aṭṭhimhi vā dante vā nakhe vā akkhīnaṃ setaṭṭhāne vā karoti. Taṃ pana sunīlakaṃ supītakaṃ sulohitakaṃ suodātaṃ na hoti, avisuddhameva hoti.

65. In the fifth, abhibhāyatanāni means the causes of overcoming. What do they overcome? Opposing states and also objects. For they overcome opposing states by being counteractive, and they overcome objects by the superiority of a person’s knowledge. In ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī etc., one is called "ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī" due to internal perception of form based on preliminary work. For when doing preliminary work on internal blue, he does it on the hair, bile, or the dark part of the eye. When doing preliminary work on yellow, he does it on fat, skin, or the palms of the hands and soles of the feet, or on the yellow part of the eyes. When doing preliminary work on red, he does it on flesh, blood, or the tongue, or on the red part of the eyes. When doing preliminary work on white, he does it on bone, teeth, or nails, or on the white part of the eyes. However, that is not very blue, very yellow, very red, or very white; it is impure.

Eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatīti yassevaṃ parikammaṃ ajjhattaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, nimittaṃ pana bahiddhā, so evaṃ ajjhattaṃ parikammassa bahiddhā ca appanāya vasena ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti vuccati.Parittānīti avaḍḍhitāni.Suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānīti suvaṇṇāni vā hontu dubbaṇṇāni vā, parittavaseneva idaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.Tāni abhibhuyyāti yathā nāma sampannaggahaṇiko kaṭacchumattaṃ bhattaṃ labhitvā ‘‘kiṃ ettha bhuñjitabbaṃ atthī’’ti saṃkaḍḍhitvā ekakabaḷameva karoti, evameva ñāṇuttariko puggalo visadañāṇo ‘‘kimettha parittake ārammaṇe samāpajjitabbaṃ atthi, nāyaṃ mama bhāro’’ti tāni rūpāni abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ pāpetīti attho.Jānāmi passāmīti iminā panassa ābhogo kathito. So ca kho samāpattito vuṭṭhitassa, na antosamāpattiyaṃ.Evaṃsaññī hotīti ābhogasaññāyapi jhānasaññāyapi evaṃsaññī hoti. Abhibhavanasaññā hissa antosamāpattiyampi atthi, ābhogasaññā pana samāpattito vuṭṭhitasseva.

Eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati means that the one for whom such preliminary work has arisen internally, but the sign is external, is said to be "ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati" due to the external application of the internal preliminary work. Parittāni means undeveloped. Suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni means whether they are beautiful or ugly; this abhibhāyatana is stated only in terms of limitedness. Tāni abhibhuyyā means just as a skillful cook, having obtained only a ladleful of rice, gathers it together and makes a single mouthful, wondering, "What is there to eat here?", so too, a person with superior knowledge, with clear knowledge, overpowers those forms and attains concentration, thinking, "What is there to become absorbed in here in this limited object? This is no burden for me." That is, he attains absorption with the arising of the sign itself. Jānāmi passāmī means that his attending (ābhogo) is stated with this. And that is for one who has arisen from the attainment, not during the attainment. Evaṃsaññī hoti means he is percipient in this way (evaṃsaññī) both in the attending perception and in the perception of jhāna. For the perception of overcoming (abhibhavanasaññā) exists for him even during the attainment, but the attending perception exists only for one who has arisen from the attainment.

Appamāṇānīti vaḍḍhitappamāṇāni, mahantānīti attho.Abhibhuyyāti ettha ca pana yathā mahagghaso puriso ekaṃ bhattavaḍḍhitakaṃ labhitvā ‘‘aññāpi hotu, aññāpi hotu, kiṃ esā mayhaṃ karissatī’’ti na taṃ mahantato passati, evameva ñāṇuttaro puggalo visadañāṇo ‘‘kiṃ ettha samāpajjitabbaṃ, nayidaṃ appamāṇaṃ, na mayhaṃ cittekaggatākaraṇe bhāro atthī’’ti abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādanevettha appanaṃ pāpetīti attho.

Appamāṇāni means expanded and immeasurable, meaning large. Abhibhuyyā here also means that just as a very gluttonous person, having obtained a single bowl of rice, does not consider it to be much, thinking, "Let there be more, let there be more, what will this do for me?", so too, a person with superior knowledge, with clear knowledge, overpowers it and attains concentration, thinking, "What is there to become absorbed in here? This is not immeasurable, there is no burden for me in making the mind one-pointed." That is, he attains absorption with the arising of the sign itself.

Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññīti alābhitāya vā anatthikatāya vā ajjhattarūpe parikammasaññāvirahito.

Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī means one who lacks perception of form in himself due to not having obtained or benefited from internal form.

Eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatīti yassa parikammampi nimittampi bahiddhā uppannaṃ, so evaṃ bahiddhā parikammassa ceva appanāya ca vasena ‘‘ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti vuccati. Sesamettha catutthābhibhāyatane ca vuttanayameva. Imesu pana catūsu parittaṃ vitakkacaritavasena āgataṃ, appamāṇaṃ mohacaritavasena, suvaṇṇaṃ dosacaritavasena, dubbaṇṇaṃ rāgacaritavasena. Etesañhi etāni sappāyāni. Sā ca nesaṃ sappāyatā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.43) cariyaniddese vuttā.

Eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati means that the one for whom both the preliminary work and the sign have arisen externally is said to be "ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati" due to the external preliminary work and application. The rest here is as stated in the fourth abhibhāyatana. In these four, the limited is arrived at due to a temperament characterized by discursive thinking, the immeasurable due to a temperament characterized by delusion, the beautiful due to a temperament characterized by aversion, and the ugly due to a temperament characterized by greed. For these are suitable for them. And their suitability is stated in the chapter on conduct (cariya) in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.43).

nīlānīti sabbasaṅgāhikavasena vuttaṃ.Nīlavaṇṇānīti vaṇṇavasena.Nīlanidassanānīti nidassanavasena. Apaññāyamānavivarāni asambhinnavaṇṇāni ekanīlāneva hutvā dissantīti vuttaṃ hoti.Nīlanibhāsānīti idaṃ pana obhāsavasena vuttaṃ, nīlobhāsāni nīlappabhāyuttānīti attho. Etena nesaṃ suvisuddhataṃ dasseti. Visuddhavaṇṇavaseneva hi imāni abhibhāyatanāni vuttāni. ‘‘Nīlakasiṇaṃ uggaṇhanto nīlasmiṃ nimittaṃ gaṇhāti pupphasmiṃ vā vatthasmiṃ vā vaṇṇadhātuyā vā’’tiādikaṃ panettha kasiṇakaraṇañca parikammañca appanāvidhānañca sabbaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.55) vitthārato vuttamevāti.

Nīlāni (blue) is stated in a comprehensive way. Nīlavaṇṇāni (blue in color) is in terms of color. Nīlanidassanāni (blue in appearance) is in terms of appearance. It means that they appear as uniformly blue, with no discernible gaps, and with unmixed colors. Nīlanibhāsāni (blue in radiance) is stated in terms of radiance; it means having a blue glow, possessing blue light. With this, he shows their purity. For these abhibhāyatanas are stated only in terms of pure color. In this regard, the practice of kasiṇa, the preliminary work, and the method of attainment, such as "When learning the blue kasiṇa, he grasps the sign in the blue, whether in a flower, cloth, or colored substance," are all stated extensively in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.55).

6. Vimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Vimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā

66.Vimokkhāti kenaṭṭhena vimokkhā? Adhimuccanaṭṭhena. Ko panāyaṃ adhimuccanaṭṭho nāma? Paccanīkadhammehi ca suṭṭhu muccanaṭṭho, ārammaṇe ca abhirativasena suṭṭhu muccanaṭṭho, pituaṅke vissaṭṭhaṅgapaccaṅgassa dārakassa sayanaṃ viya aniggahitabhāvena nirāsaṅkatāya ārammaṇe pavattīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ panattho pacchime vimokkhe natthi, purimesu vimokkhesu atthi.

66. Vimokkhā (liberations): in what sense are they liberations? In the sense of resolution (adhimuccana). But what is this sense of resolution? It is the sense of being well freed from opposing states, and the sense of being well freed in terms of delight in the object, meaning that it occurs in the object without being grasped, without anxiety, like a child lying with its limbs relaxed in its father’s lap. However, this meaning is not present in the last liberation, but it is present in the earlier liberations.

Rūpī rūpāni passatīti ettha ajjhattaṃ kesādīsu nīlakasiṇādivasena uppāditaṃ rūpajjhānaṃ rūpaṃ, tadassatthīti rūpī. Bahiddhāpi nīlakasiṇādīni rūpāni jhānacakkhunā passati. Iminā ajjhattabahiddhavatthukesu kasiṇesu uppāditajjhānassa puggalassa cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni dassitāni.Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññīti ajjhattaṃ na rūpasaññī, attano kesādīsu anuppāditarūpāvacarajjhānoti attho. Iminā bahiddhā parikammaṃ katvā bahiddhāva uppāditajjhānassa rūpāvacarajjhānāni dassitāni.

Rūpī rūpāni passati means that the form jhāna produced internally in regard to the hair etc., in terms of the blue kasiṇa etc., is form, and one who possesses that is rūpī (possessing form). He also sees external forms, such as the blue kasiṇa etc., with the eye of jhāna. With this, the four form jhānas of a person who has produced jhāna in regard to internal and external objects of kasiṇa are shown. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī means not percipient of form internally, meaning one who has not produced form jhāna in his own hair etc. With this, the form jhānas of one who has produced jhāna only externally, having done preliminary work externally, are shown.

Subhanteva adhimutto hotīti iminā suvisuddhesu nīlādīsu vaṇṇakasiṇesu jhānāni dassitāni. Tattha kiñcāpi antoappanāya ‘‘subha’’nti ābhogo natthi, yo pana suvisuddhaṃ subhaṃ kasiṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā viharati, so yasmā ‘‘subhanti adhimutto hotī’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, tasmā evaṃ desanā katā. Paṭisambhidāmagge pana –

Subhanteva adhimutto hoti means that with this, the jhānas in regard to very pure blue etc. color kasiṇas are shown. Although there is no attending (ābhogo) of "beautiful" (subha) in internal application, because one who dwells having made a very pure, beautiful kasiṇa his object becomes fit to be said "he is resolved on the beautiful," therefore this teaching was given. In the Paṭisambhidāmagga, however, it is stated:

‘‘Kathaṃ subhanteva adhimutto hotīti vimokkho? Idha bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ …pe… viharati. Mettāya bhāvitattā sattā appaṭikūlā honti. Karuṇāsahagatena…pe… muditāsahagatena …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ…pe… viharati. Upekkhāya bhāvitattā sattā appaṭikūlā honti. Evaṃ subhanteva adhimutto hotīti vimokkho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.212) vuttaṃ.

"How is liberation ‘resolved on the beautiful’? Here, a bhikkhu dwells pervading one direction with a mind imbued with loving-kindness… Due to loving-kindness being cultivated, beings are unopposed. He dwells pervading one direction with a mind imbued with compassion… with a mind imbued with sympathetic joy… with a mind imbued with equanimity… Due to equanimity being cultivated, beings are unopposed. Thus, liberation is ‘resolved on the beautiful’" (Paṭi. Ma. 1.212).

Sabbaso rūpasaññānantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.276-277) vuttameva.Ayaṃ aṭṭhamo vimokkhoti ayaṃ catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ sabbaso vissaṭṭhattā vimuttattā aṭṭhamo uttamo vimokkho nāma.

In sabbaso rūpasaññāna etc., what should be stated is already stated in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.276-277). Ayaṃ aṭṭhamo vimokkho means this is called the eighth, the supreme liberation, because of the complete cessation and freedom from the four aggregates.

7-8. Anariyavohārasuttavaṇṇanā
7-8. Anariyavohārasuttavaṇṇanā

67-68.Sattameanariyavohārāti na ariyakathā sadosakathā. Yāhi cetanāhi te vohāre voharanti, tāsaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ. Aṭṭhame vuttapaṭipakkhanayena attho veditabbo.

67-68. In the seventh, anariyavohārā means not noble speech, but blameworthy speech. This is the name of the intentions (cetanā) with which they speak that speech. In the eighth, the meaning should be understood by way of the opposing method that was stated.

9. Parisāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Parisāsuttavaṇṇanā

69.Navamekhattiyaparisāti khattiyānaṃ parisānaṃ sannipāto samāgamo. Esa nayo sabbattha.Anekasataṃ khattiyaparisanti bimbisārasamāgama-ñātisamāgama-licchavisamāgamādisadisaṃ, aññesu cakkavāḷesupi labbhateva.Sallapitapubbanti ālāpasallāpo katapubbo.Sākacchāti dhammasākacchāpi samāpajjitapubbā.Yādisako tesaṃ vaṇṇoti te odātāpi honti kāḷāpi maṅguracchavīpi, satthā suvaṇṇavaṇṇo. Idaṃ pana saṇṭhānaṃ paṭicca kathitaṃ. Saṇṭhānampi ca kevalaṃ tesaṃ paññāyatiyeva. Na pana bhagavā milakkhasadiso hoti, nāpi āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalo, buddhaveseneva nisīdati. Tepi attano samānasaṇṭhānameva passanti.Yādisako tesaṃ saroti te chinnassarāpi honti gaggassarāpi kākassarāpi, satthā brahmassarova. Idaṃ pana bhāsantaraṃ sandhāya kathitaṃ. Sacepi hi satthā rājāsane nisinno katheti, ‘‘ajja rājā madhurena kathetī’’ti nesaṃ hoti. Kathetvā pakkante pana bhagavati puna rājānaṃ āgataṃ disvā ‘‘ko nu kho aya’’nti vīmaṃsā uppajjati. Tatthako nu kho ayanti ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne idāneva māgadhabhāsāya sīhaḷabhāsāya madhurena ākārena kathento ko nu kho ayaṃ antarahito, kiṃ devo udāhu manusso’’ti evaṃ vīmaṃsantāpi na jānantīti attho. Kimatthaṃ panevaṃ ajānantānaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti? Vāsanatthāya. Evaṃ sutopi hi dhammo anāgate paccayo hotīti anāgataṃ paṭicca deseti.Anekasataṃ brāhmaṇaparisantiādinaṃ soṇadaṇḍasamāgamādivasena ceva aññacakkavāḷavasena ca sambhavo veditabbo.

69. In the ninth, khattiyaparisa means an assembly or gathering of nobles (khattiya). This method applies everywhere. Anekasataṃ khattiyaparisa means similar to the assembly of Bimbisāra, the assembly of relatives, the assembly of Licchavis, etc., and it is certainly obtained in other world-systems as well. Sallapitapubba means having previously engaged in conversation. Sākacchā means having previously engaged in discussions of the Dhamma. Yādisako tesaṃ vaṇṇo means they are white, black, or the color of mañguṭṭha, but the Teacher is golden in color. However, this is said in relation to form (saṇṭhāna). And their form is perceived only by them. But the Blessed One is not like a barbarian, nor does he wear jeweled earrings; he sits only in the guise of a Buddha. And they see him in a form similar to their own. Yādisako tesaṃ saro means they have broken voices, croaking voices, or raven-like voices, but the Teacher has a Brahmā-like voice. However, this is said in reference to a different language. Even if the Teacher sits on a royal seat and speaks, they think, "Today the king is speaking sweetly." But when the Blessed One has spoken and departed, and they see the king come again, the thought arises, "Who is this?". There, ko nu kho ayaṃ means, "Who is this who just now, in this place, speaking sweetly in the Magadhan language or the Sinhala language, has disappeared? Is he a deva or a human?" Even though they investigate in this way, they do not know. Why does he teach the Dhamma to those who do not know in this way? For the sake of imbuing (vāsanatthāya). For even Dhamma heard in this way becomes a condition in the future; he teaches in regard to the future. Anekasataṃ brāhmaṇaparisa etc.: the possibility should be understood in terms of the gathering of Soṇadaṇḍa and in terms of other world-systems.

10. Bhūmicālasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Bhūmicālasuttavaṇṇanā

70.Dasamenisīdananti idha cammakhaṇḍaṃ adhippetaṃ.Udenaṃ cetiyanti udenayakkhassa vasanaṭṭhāne katavihāro vuccati.Gotamakādīsupi eseva nayo.Bhāvitāti vaḍḍhitā.Bahulīkatāti punappunaṃ katā.Yānīkatāti yuttayānaṃ viya katā.Vatthukatāti patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu viya katā.Anuṭṭhitāti adhiṭṭhitā.Paricitāti samantato citā suvaḍḍhitā.Susamāraddhāti suṭṭhu samāraddhā.

70. In the tenth, nisīdanaṃ here means a piece of hide (camma). Udenaṃ cetiyaṃ means the monastery built in the dwelling place of the yaksha Udena. The same method applies in Gotamakā etc. Bhāvitā means developed. Bahulīkatā means repeatedly done. Yānīkatā means made like a vehicle. Vatthukatā means made like a foundation in the sense of being a support. Anuṭṭhitā means established. Paricitā means accumulated all around, well-developed. Susamāraddhā means well-undertaken.

tathāgatassa khotiādimāha. Etthakappanti āyukappaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle yaṃ manussānaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, taṃ paripuṇṇaṃ karonto tiṭṭheyya.Kappāvasesaṃ vāti ‘‘appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti vuttavassasatato atirekaṃ vā. Mahāsīvatthero panāha – ‘‘buddhānaṃ aṭṭhāne gajjitaṃ nāma natthi, punappunaṃ samāpajjitvā maraṇantikavedanaṃ vikkhambhento bhaddakappameva tiṭṭheyya. Kasmā pana na ṭhitoti? Upādinnakasarīraṃ nāma khaṇḍiccādīhi abhibhuyyati, buddhā ca khaṇḍiccādibhāvaṃ appatvā pañcame āyukoṭṭhāse bahujanassa piyamanāpakāleyeva parinibbāyanti. Buddhānubuddhesu ca mahāsāvakesu parinibbutesu ekakeneva khāṇukena viya ṭhātabbaṃ hoti daharasāmaṇeraparivārena vā, tato ‘aho buddhānaṃ parisā’ti hīḷetabbataṃ āpajjeyya. Tasmā na ṭhito’’ti. Evaṃ vuttepi yo pana vuccati ‘‘āyukappo’’ti, idameva aṭṭhakathāya niyāmitaṃ.

He said tathāgatassa kho etc. Here, kappa means life-span. He should remain fulfilling the life-span of humans at that particular time. Kappāvasesaṃ vā means exceeding the hundred years stated as "a little or more." But Mahāsīvatthera said, "For Buddhas, there is no such thing as speaking out of place; repeatedly attaining concentration and suppressing the death-causing feeling, he would remain for the duration of the fortunate aeon itself. Why did he not remain? A body that has been clung to is overcome by deterioration etc., and Buddhas, without reaching a state of deterioration etc., pass away in the fifth part of their lifespan, at a time when they are still pleasing and beloved by the multitude. And when the great disciples who are Buddhas and awakened ones have passed away, it would be necessary to remain alone like a stump, or with a retinue of young novices, and then one would become subject to scorn, saying, ‘Alas, the company of Buddhas!’ Therefore, he did not remain." Even when this is said, what is called "life-span" (āyukappo) is indeed defined by the commentary.

Yathā taṃ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittoti etthatanti nipātamattaṃ, yathā mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto ajjhotthaṭacitto aññopi koci puthujjano paṭivijjhituṃ na sakkuṇeyya, evameva nāsakkhi paṭivijjhitunti attho. Māro hi yassa sabbena sabbaṃ dvādasa vipallāsā appahīnā, tassa cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti. Therassa ca cattāro vipallāsā appahīnā, tenassa māro cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāsi. So pana cittapariyuṭṭhānaṃ karonto kiṃ karotīti? Bheravaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā dasseti, saddārammaṇaṃ vā sāveti. Tato sattā taṃ disvā vā sutvā vā satiṃ vissajjetvā vivaṭamukhā honti, tesaṃ mukhena hatthaṃ pavesetvā hadayaṃ maddati, tato visaññāva hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Therassa panesa mukhe hatthaṃ pavesetuṃ kiṃ sakkhissati, bheravārammaṇaṃ pana dassesi. Taṃ disvā thero nimittobhāsaṃ nappaṭivijjhi. Bhagavā jānantoyeva kimatthaṃ yāva tatiyaṃ āmantesīti? Parato ‘‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante bhagavā’’ti yācite ‘‘tuyhevetaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, tuyhevetaṃ aparaddha’’nti dosāropanena so katanukaraṇatthaṃ.

Yathā taṃ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittoti, here, taṃ is merely a particle; it means just as another ordinary person whose mind is overwhelmed and overcome by Māra would not be able to penetrate, so too, he was unable to penetrate. For Māra overwhelms the mind of one whose twelve distortions (vipallāsa) have not been completely abandoned. And the Elder had not abandoned four distortions, therefore Māra overwhelmed his mind. But what does he do when he overwhelms the mind? He shows a terrifying visual object or causes a sound object to be heard. Then beings, seeing or hearing that, abandon mindfulness and become open-mouthed. He inserts his hand into their mouths and crushes their hearts, then they remain unconscious. But what could he possibly do to insert his hand into the Elder’s mouth? However, he showed a terrifying object. Seeing that, the Elder did not penetrate the sign and light. Knowing this himself, why did the Blessed One address him up to the third time? In order to make him do what he did, by imputing blame with the accusation, "Let it be, venerable sir, this is your fault, this is your offense," after he had requested, "Let the Blessed One remain."

Māro pāpimāti ettha satte anatthe niyojento māretītimāro. Pāpimāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. So hi pāpadhammasamannāgatattā ‘‘pāpimā’’ti vuccati. Kaṇho, antako, namuci, pamattabandhūtipi tasseva nāmāni.Bhāsitā kho panesāti ayañhi bhagavato sambodhipattiyā aṭṭhame sattāhe bodhimaṇḍeyeva āgantvā ‘‘bhagavā yadatthaṃ tumhehi pāramiyo pūritā, so vo attho anuppatto, paṭividdhaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, kiṃ te lokavicāraṇenā’’ti vatvā yathā ajja, evameva ‘‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante bhagavā’’ti yāci. Bhagavā cassa ‘‘na tāvāha’’ntiādīni vatvā paṭikkhipi. Taṃ sandhāya – ‘‘bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante’’tiādimāha.

viyattāti maggavasena byattā, tathevavinītā,tathāvisāradā. Bahussutāti tepiṭakavasena bahu sutaṃ etesantibahussutā. Tameva dhammaṃ dhārentītidhammadharā. Atha vā pariyattibahussutā ceva paṭivedhabahussutā ca. Pariyattipaṭivedhadhammānaṃyeva dhāraṇato dhammadharāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Dhammānudhammappaṭipannāti ariyadhammassa anudhammabhūtaṃ vipassanādhammaṃ paṭipannā.Sāmīcippaṭipannāti anucchavikapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā.Anudhammacārinoti anudhammaṃ caraṇasīlā.Sakaṃ ācariyakanti attano ācariyavādaṃ.Ācikkhissantītiādīni sabbāni aññamaññavevacanāni.Sahadhammenāti sahetukena sakāraṇena vacanena.Sappāṭihāriyanti yāva niyyānikaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessanti.

Brahmacariyanti sikkhāttayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ.Iddhanti samiddhaṃ jhānassādavasena.Phītanti vuddhipattaṃ sabbapāliphullaṃ viya abhiññāsampattivasena.Vitthārikanti vitthataṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ disābhāge patiṭṭhitavasena.Bāhujaññanti bahūhi ñātaṃ paṭividdhaṃ mahājanābhisamayavasena.Puthubhūtanti sabbākārena puthulabhāvappattaṃ. Kathaṃ?Yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitanti, yattakā viññujātikā devā ceva manussā ca atthi, sabbehi suṭṭhu pakāsitanti attho.Appossukkoti nirālayo. Tvañhi pāpima aṭṭhamasattāhato paṭṭhāya ‘‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato’’ti viravanto āhiṇḍittha. Ajja dāni paṭṭhāya vigatussāho hohi, mā mayhaṃ parinibbānatthaṃ vāyāmaṃ karohīti vadati.

Sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossajjīti satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā ñāṇena paricchinditvā āyusaṅkhāraṃ vissajji pajahi. Tattha na bhagavā hatthena leḍḍuṃ viya āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossaji, temāsamattameva pana phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato paraṃ na samāpajjissāmīti cittaṃ uppādesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ossajī’’ti. Ussajītipi pāṭho.Mahābhūmicāloti mahanto pathavīkampo. Tadā kira dasasahassī lokadhātu kampittha.Bhiṃsanakoti bhayajanako.Devadundubhiyo ca phaliṃsūti devabheriyo phaliṃsu, devo sukkhagajjitaṃ gajji, akālavijjulatā nicchariṃsu, khaṇikavassaṃ vassīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Udānaṃ udānesīti kasmā udānesi? Koci nāma vadeyya ‘‘bhagavā pacchato pacchato anubandhitvā ‘parinibbātu, bhante’ti upadduto bhayena āyusaṅkhāraṃ vissajjesī’’ti, tassokāso mā hotu, bhītassa hi udānaṃ nāma natthīti pītivegavissaṭṭhaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

tulaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Kāmāvacarakammaṃ. Na tulaṃ, na vā tulaṃ sadisamassa aññaṃ lokiyaṃ kammaṃ atthītiatulaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Mahaggatakammaṃ. Atha vā kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ tulaṃ, arūpāvacaraṃ atulaṃ. Appavipākaṃ vā tulaṃ, bahuvipākaṃ atulaṃ.Sambhavanti sambhavahetubhūtaṃ, rāsikārakaṃ piṇḍakārakanti attho.Bhavasaṅkhāranti punabbhavasaṅkhāraṇakaṃ.Avassajīti vissajjesi.Munīti buddhamuni.Ajjhattaratoti niyakajjhattarato.Samāhitoti upacārappanāsamādhivasena samāhito.Abhindi kavacamivāti kavacaṃ viya abhindi.Attasambhavanti attani sañjātaṃ kilesaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – savipākaṭṭhena sambhavaṃ, bhavābhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena bhavasaṅkhāranti ca laddhanāmaṃ tulātulasaṅkhātaṃ lokiyakammañca ossaji, saṅgāmasīse mahāyodho kavacaṃ viya attasambhavaṃ kilesañca ajjhattarato hutvā samāhito hutvā abhindīti.

tulanti tulento tīrento.Atulañca sambhavanti nibbānañceva sambhavañca.Bhavasaṅkhāranti bhavagāmikammaṃ.Avassaji munīti ‘‘pañcakkhandhā aniccā, pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nirodho nibbānaṃ nicca’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.37-38) nayena tulayanto buddhamuni bhave ādīnavaṃ, nibbāne ca ānisaṃsaṃ disvā taṃ khandhānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ kammaṃ ‘‘kammakkhayāya saṃvattatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.81; a. ni. 4.232-233) evaṃ vuttena kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena avassaji. Kathaṃ?Ajjhattarato samāhito, abhindi kavacamivattasambhavaṃ. So hi vipassanāvasena ajjhattarato, samathavasena samāhitoti evaṃ pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya samathavipassanābalena kavacamiva attabhāvaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ, attani sambhavattā ‘‘attasambhava’’nti laddhanāmaṃ sabbakilesajālaṃ abhindi. Kilesābhāvena ca kataṃ kammaṃ appaṭisandhikattā avassaṭṭhaṃ nāma hotīti evaṃ kilesappahānena kammaṃ pajahi. Pahīnakilesassa ca bhayaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā abhītova āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossajji, abhītabhāvañāpanatthañca udānaṃ udānesīti veditabbo.

Yaṃ mahāvātāti yena samayena yasmiṃ vā samaye mahāvātā.Vāyantīti upakkhepakavātā nāma uṭṭhahanti, te vāyantā saṭṭhisahassādhikanavayojanasatasahassabahalaṃ udakasandhārakavātaṃ upacchindanti, tato ākāse udakaṃ bhassati, tasmiṃ bhassante pathavī bhassati, puna vāto attano balena antodhammakaraṇe viya udakaṃ ābandhitvā gaṇhāti, tato udakaṃ uggacchati, tasmiṃ uggacchante pathavī uggacchati. Evaṃ udakaṃ kampitaṃ pathaviṃ kampeti. Etañca kampanaṃ yāvajjakālāpi hotiyeva, bahubhāvena pana ogacchanuggacchanaṃ na paññāyati.

Mahiddhikā mahānubhāvāti ijjhanassa mahantatāya mahiddhikā, anubhavitabbassa mahantatāya mahānubhāvā.Parittāti dubbalā.Appamāṇāti balavā.So imaṃ pathaviṃ kampetīti so iddhiṃ nibbattetvā saṃvejento mahāmoggallāno viya, vīmaṃsanto vā mahānāgattherassa bhāgineyyo saṅgharakkhitasāmaṇero viya pathaviṃ kampeti.Saṅkampetīti samantato kampeti.Sampakampetīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Iti imesu aṭṭhasu pathavikampesu paṭhamo dhātukopena, dutiyo iddhānubhāvena, tatiyacatutthā puññatejena, pañcamo ñāṇatejena, chaṭṭho sādhukāradānavasena, sattamo kāruññasabhāvena, aṭṭhamo ārodanena. Mātukucchiṃ okkamante ca tato nikkhamante ca mahāsatte tassa puññatejena pathavī akampittha, abhisambodhiyaṃ ñāṇatejābhihatā hutvā akampittha, dhammacakkappavattane sādhukārabhāvasaṇṭhitā sādhukāraṃ dadamānā akampittha, āyusaṅkhāraossajjane kāruññasabhāvasaṇṭhitā cittasaṅkhobhaṃ asahamānā akampittha, parinibbāne ārodanavegatunnā hutvā akampittha. Ayaṃ panattho pathavidevatāya vasena veditabbo. Mahābhūtapathaviyā panetaṃ natthi acetanattā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

(8) 3. Yamakavaggo

1-2. Saddhāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā

71-72.Aṭṭhamassa paṭhameno ca sīlavāti na sīlesu paripūrakārī.Samantapāsādikoti samantato pasādajanako.Sabbākāraparipūroti sabbehi samaṇākārehi samaṇadhammakoṭṭhāsehi paripūro. Dutiyesantāti paccanīkasantatāya santā.Vimokkhāti paccanīkadhammehi vimuttattā ca vimokkhā.

3-9. Maraṇassatisuttadvayādivaṇṇanā

73-79.Tatiyebhāvetha noti bhāvetha nu.Sāsananti anusiṭṭhi.Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti arahattaphalatthāya. Catutthepatihitāyāti paṭipannāya.So mamassa antarāyoti so mama jīvitantarāyopi, puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ karontassa saggantarāyopi maggantarāyopi assa.Satthakā vā me vātāti satthaṃ viya aṅgamaṅgāni kantantīti satthakā. Pañcamādīni vuttanayāneva. Navamesaṃsaggārāmatāti pañcavidhe saṃsagge ārāmatā.

10. Kusītārambhavatthusuttavaṇṇanā

80.Dasamekusītavatthūnīti kusītassa alasassa vatthūni patiṭṭhā, kosajjakāraṇānīti attho.Kammaṃ kattabbaṃ hotīti cīvaravicāraṇādikammaṃ kattabbaṃ hoti.Na vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti duvidhampi vīriyaṃ nārabhati.Appattassāti jhānavipassanāmaggaphaladhammassa appattassa pattiyā.Anadhigatassāti tasseva anadhigatassa adhigamatthāya.Asacchikatassāti tadeva asacchikatassa sacchikaraṇatthāya.Idaṃ paṭhamanti idaṃ ‘‘handāhaṃ nipajjāmī’’ti evaṃ osīdanaṃ paṭhamaṃ kusītavatthu. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo.Māsācitakaṃ maññeti ettha pana māsācitaṃ nāma tintamāso. Yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaṃ garukoti adhippāyo.Gilānā vuṭṭhito hotīti gilāno hutvā pacchā vuṭṭhito hoti.Ārambhavatthūnīti vīriyakāraṇāni. Tesampi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

(9) 4. Sativaggo

1-2. Satisampajaññasuttavaṇṇanā

81-82.Navamassa paṭhamaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Dutiyesaddhoti duvidhāya saddhāya samannāgato.No cupasaṅkamitāti na upaṭṭhahati.Noca paripucchitāti atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ paripucchitā na hoti.Samannāgatoti sāmiatthe paccattaṃ, samannāgatassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ekantapaṭibhānā tathāgataṃ dhammadesanā hotīti tathāgatassa ekantapaṭibhānā dhammadesanā hoti, ekanteneva paṭibhāti upaṭṭhātīti attho.

3. Mūlakasuttavaṇṇanā

83.Tatiyesabbe dhammāti pañcakkhandhā.Chandamūlakāti ajjhāsayacchando kattukamyatāchando taṃ mūlaṃ etesanti chandamūlakā. Manasikārato sambhavantītimanasikārasambhavā. Phassato samudenti rāsī bhavantītiphassasamudayā. Vedanāya samosarantītivedanāsamosaraṇā. Samādhi etesaṃ pamukhotisamādhippamukhā. Jeṭṭhakaṭṭhena sati adhipati etesantisatādhipateyyā,satijeṭṭhakāti attho. Paññā uttarā etesantipaññuttarā. Vimutti eva sāro etesantivimuttisārā. Ettha ca chandamūlakādayo cattāropi lokiyā kathitā, sesā lokiyalokuttaramissakāti.

4. Corasuttavaṇṇanā

84.Catutthemahācoroti rajjantare dubbhituṃ samattho mahācoro.Pariyāpajjatīti pariyādānaṃ gacchati.Na ciraṭṭhitiko hotīti addhānaṃ pālento ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti.Appaharantassa paharatīti attano averine appaharante guṇasampanne ca mahallake ca taruṇadārake ca appaharitabbayuttake paharati.Anavasesaṃ ādiyatīti nissesaṃ gaṇhāti. Byattacorānañhi idaṃ vattaṃ – parassa dvīsu sāṭakesu eko gahetabbo, ekasmiṃ sante dubbalaṃ datvā thiro gahetabbo. Puṭabhattataṇḍulādīsu ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ datvā eko gahetabboti.Accāsanne kammaṃ karotīti gāmanigamarājadhānīnaṃ āsannaṭṭhāne corikakammaṃ karoti.Na ca nidhānakusalo hotīti yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ dakkhiṇeyye nidahituṃ cheko na hoti, paralokamaggaṃ na sodheti.

5. Samaṇasuttavaṇṇanā

85.Pañcameyaṃ samaṇenāti yaṃ guṇajātaṃ samaṇena pattabbaṃ.Vusīmatāti brahmacariyavāsaṃvutena.Mutto mocemi bandhanāti ahaṃ sabbabandhanehi mutto hutvā mahājanampi rāgādibandhanato mocemi.Paramadantoti aññena kenaci asikkhāpito acodito sayambhuñāṇena paṭivijjhitvā paramadamathena dantattā paramadanto nāma.Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.

85.In the fifth, yaṃ samaṇenā means the collection of qualities to be attained by a samaṇa. Vusīmatā means by one who has lived the Brahmā’s life. Mutto mocemi bandhanā means having become freed from all bonds, I free the great multitude from the bonds of passion, etc. Paramadanto means, not being trained or urged by another, having penetrated with self-achieved wisdom, he is named paramadanto because he is tamed with supreme taming. Parinibbuto means extinguished with the extinction of defilements.

6. Yasasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Yasasutta Commentary

86.Chaṭṭhemā ca mayā yasoti yaso ca mayā saddhiṃ mā gañchi.Akasiralābhīti vipulalābhī.Sīlapaññāṇanti sīlañceva ñāṇañca.Saṅgammāti sannipatitvā.Samāgammāti samāgantvā.Saṅgaṇikavihāranti gaṇasaṅgaṇikavihāraṃ.Na hi nūnameti na hi nūna ime.Tathā hi panameti tathā hi pana ime.Aṅgulipatodakehīti aṅgulipatodayaṭṭhiṃ katvā vijjhanena.Sañjagghanteti mahāhasitaṃ hasante.Saṃkīḷanteti keḷiṃ karonte.

86.In the sixth, mā ca mayā yaso means may glory not go with me. Akasiralābhī means obtaining abundant gains. Sīlapaññāṇa means both morality and wisdom. Saṅgammā means having gathered together. Samāgammā means having come together. Saṅgaṇikavihāranti means dwelling in association with a group. Na hi nūname means surely not these. Tathā hi paname means so indeed these. Aṅgulipatodakehī means by making a finger-pricking stick for piercing. Sañjagghante means laughing with great laughter. Saṃkīḷante means playing.

7. Pattanikujjanasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Pattanikujjanasutta Commentary

87.Sattamenikkujjeyyāti tena dinnassa deyyadhammassa appaṭiggahaṇatthaṃ pattanikkujjanakammavācāya nikujjeyya, na adhomukhaṭhapanena.Alābhāyāti catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ alābhatthāya.Anatthāyāti upaddavāya avaḍḍhiyā.Ukkujjeyyāti ukkujjanakammavācāya ukkujjeyya.

87.In the seventh, nikkujjeyyā means, to not accept the alms given by him, he should turn the bowl upside down by the act of turning the bowl down, not by placing it face down. Alābhāyā means for the sake of not obtaining the four requisites. Anatthāyā means for harm and decrease. Ukkujjeyyā means he should turn it face up by the act of turning the bowl face up.

8. Appasādapavedanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Appasādapavedanīyasutta Commentary

88.Aṭṭhameappasādaṃ pavedeyyunti appasannabhāvaṃ jānāpeyyuṃ. Appasādaṃ pavedentena pana kiṃ kātabbanti? Nisinnāsanato na uṭṭhātabbaṃ na vanditabbaṃ na paccuggamanaṃ kātabbaṃ, na deyyadhammo dātabbo.Agocareti pañcavidhe agocare.

88.In the eighth, appasādaṃ pavedeyyunti means they should make known their displeasure. But what should one who declares displeasure do? One should not rise from one’s seat, should not salute, should not offer respect, and should not give alms. Agocare means in the five kinds of improper places.

9. Paṭisāraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭisāraṇīyasutta Commentary

89.Navamedhammikañca gihipaṭissavanti ‘‘imaṃ temāsaṃ idheva vasitabba’’nti vutto ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’tiādinā nayena paṭissavaṃ.Na saccāpetīti vuttaṃ na saccaṃ karoti visaṃvādeti.

89.In the ninth, dhammikañca gihipaṭissavanti means the promise of a householder in accordance with the Dhamma, such as being told "You must stay here for these three months" and replying "So be it" in this way. Na saccāpetīti means he does not make what was said true; he breaks his promise.

10. Sammāvattanasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Sammāvattanasutta Commentary

90.Dasamepaccekaṭṭhāneti adhipatiṭṭhāne jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne. Tañhi jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā kiñci saṅghakammaṃ kātuṃ na labhati.Na ca tena mūlena vuṭṭhāpetabboti taṃ mūlaṃ katvā abbhānakammaṃ kātuṃ na labhati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

90.In the tenth, paccekaṭṭhāne means in the position of authority, in the chief position. For indeed, he cannot perform any Saṅgha act by making him the chief. Na ca tena mūlena vuṭṭhāpetabboti means he cannot perform an act of suspension by making that the basis. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

(10) 5. Sāmaññavaggo

(10) 5. Sāmaññavagga

91.Ito paraṃatha kho bojjhā upāsikātiādīsu bojjhā upāsikā, sirimā upāsikā, padumā upāsikā, sutanā upāsikā, manujā upāsikā, uttarā upāsikā, muttā upāsikā, khemā upāsikā, rucī upāsikā, cundī rājakumārī, bimbī upāsikā, sumanā rājakumārī, mallikā devī, tissā upāsikā, tissāmātā upāsikā, soṇā upāsikā, soṇāya mātā upāsikā, kāṇā upāsikā, kāṇamātā upāsikā, uttarā nandamātā, visākhā migāramātā, khujjuttarā upāsikā, sāmāvatī upāsikā, suppavāsā koliyadhītā, suppiyā upāsikā, nakulamātā gahapatānīti imāsaṃ ettakānaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ uposathakammameva kathitaṃ. Icchantena vitthāretvā kathetabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

91.Hereafter, in atha kho bojjhā upāsikā etc., the laywoman Bojjhā, the laywoman Sirimā, the laywoman Padumā, the laywoman Sutanā, the laywoman Manujā, the laywoman Uttarā, the laywoman Muttā, the laywoman Khemā, the laywoman Rucī, the princess Cundī, the laywoman Bimbī, the princess Sumanā, the queen Mallikā, the laywoman Tissā, the laywoman Tissāmātā, the laywoman Soṇā, the laywoman Soṇā’s mother, the laywoman Kāṇā, the laywoman Kāṇamātā, Uttarā Nandamātā, Visākhā Migāramātā, the laywoman Khujjuttarā, the laywoman Sāmāvatī, Suppavāsā the Koliyan’s daughter, the laywoman Suppiyā, Nakulamātā the householder's wife—in these so many, only the uposatha act endowed with eight factors has been spoken of. If one wishes, one should speak of it in detail. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

The Manorathapūraṇī, commentary to the Aṅguttara Nikāya

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

Aṅguttaranikāye

In the Aṅguttara Nikāya

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. First Set of Fifty

1. Sambodhivaggo

1. Sambodhivagga

1. Sambodhisuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sambodhisutta Commentary

1.Navakanipātassa paṭhamesambodhipakkhikānanti catumaggasaṅkhātassa sambodhissa pakkhe bhavānaṃ, upakārakānanti attho. Pāḷiyaṃ āgate nava dhamme sandhāyevaṃ pucchati.Kā upanisāti ko upanissayapaccayo. Abhisallekhantītiabhisallekhikā. Samathavipassanācittassa vivaraṇe sappāyā upakārakāticetovivaraṇasappāyā. Appicchataṃ ārabbha pavattā kathāappicchakathā. Sesesupi eseva nayo.

1.In the first of the Navakanipāta, sambodhipakkhikānanti means pertaining to the side of sambodhi, which is reckoned as the four paths; meaning, those that are helpful. Having in mind the nine qualities that come in the Pāḷi, he thus asks, kā upanisā means what is the supporting condition? Abhisallekhanti means conducive to refinement. Cetovivaraṇasappāyā means suitable and helpful for the clearing of the mind by way of samatha and vipassanā. Appicchakathā means talk that proceeds in regard to wanting little. The same method applies in the remaining cases.

Asubhābhāvetabbā rāgassa pahānāyāti ayamattho sālilāyakopamāya vibhāvetabbo – eko hi puriso asitaṃ gahetvā koṭito paṭṭhāya sālikkhette sāliyo lāyati. Athassa vatiṃ bhinditvā gāvo pavisiṃsu. So asitaṃ ṭhapetvā yaṭṭhiṃ ādāya teneva maggena gāvo nīharitvā vatiṃ pākatikaṃ katvā punapi asitaṃ ādāya sāliyo lāyi. Ettha sālikkhettaṃ viya buddhasāsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sālilāyako viya yogāvacaro, asitaṃ viya paññā, lāyanakālo viya vipassanāya kammakaraṇakālo, yaṭṭhi viya asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ, vati viya saṃvaro, vatiṃ bhinditvā gāvīnaṃ pavisanaṃ viya sahasā appaṭisaṅkhāya pamādaṃ ārabbha rāgassa uppajjanaṃ, asitaṃ ṭhapetvā yaṭṭhiṃ ādāya paviṭṭhamaggeneva gāvo nīharitvā vatiṃ paṭipākatikaṃ katvā puna koṭito paṭṭhāya sālilāyanaṃ viya asubhakammaṭṭhānena rāgaṃ vikkhambhetvā puna vipassanāya kammaṃ ārabhanakālo. Imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘asubhā bhāvetabbā rāgassa pahānāyā’’ti.

Asubhā bhāvetabbā rāgassa pahānāyā means this meaning should be explained by the simile of the rice field of Sāliḷāyaka: For one man, taking a sickle, cuts rice in a rice field of Sāli from the edge onwards. Then, cows entered, breaking the fence. He, putting down the sickle, taking a stick, driving the cows out by that very path, making the fence natural, again taking the sickle, cuts the rice. Here, the Buddha’s Dispensation should be regarded as like the rice field, the practitioner as like the rice cutter, wisdom as like the sickle, the time of cutting as like the time of working with insight, the stick as like the foulness meditation subject, the fence as like restraint, the entering of the cows having broken the fence as like the arising of passion, suddenly, without reflection, having taken negligence as cause, driving the cows out by the very path they entered, having restored the fence as before, again, cutting the rice from the edge onwards, as like suppressing passion by the foulness meditation subject, again, the time of beginning the work of insight. With reference to this meaning it was said: "Foulness is to be cultivated for the abandoning of passion."

rāgassāti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa.Mettāti mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ.Byāpādassa pahānāyāti vuttanayeneva uppannassa kopassa pajahanatthāya.Ānāpānassatīti soḷasavatthukā ānāpānassati.Vitakkupacchedāyāti vuttanayeneva uppannānaṃ vitakkānaṃ upacchedanatthāya.Asmimānasamugghātāyāti asmīti uppajjanakassa mānassa samugghātatthāya.Anattasaññā saṇṭhātīti aniccalakkhaṇe diṭṭhe anattalakkhaṇaṃ diṭṭhameva hoti. Etesu hi tīsu lakkhaṇesu ekasmiṃ diṭṭhe itaradvayaṃ diṭṭhameva hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘aniccasaññino, bhikkhave, anattasaññā saṇṭhātī’’ti.Diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānanti diṭṭheyeva dhamme apaccayaparinibbānañca pāpuṇātīti imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

rāgassāti means for the passion pertaining to the five strands of sense pleasure. Mettā means the meditation subject of loving-kindness. Byāpādassa pahānāyāti means for the sake of abandoning arisen anger in the same way as stated above. Ānāpānassatī means mindfulness of breathing with sixteen objects. Vitakkupacchedāyāti means for the sake of cutting off arisen thoughts in the same way as stated above. Asmimānasamugghātāyāti means for the sake of uprooting the conceit that arises as ‘I am.’ Anattasaññā saṇṭhātīti means when the characteristic of impermanence is seen, the characteristic of non-self is already seen. For in these three characteristics, when one is seen, the other two are already seen. Therefore it was said: "For one perceiving impermanence, monks, the perception of not-self becomes established." Diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānanti means in this very life he attains both cessation of suffering and parinibbāna without remainder. In this sutta, the round of existence and its cessation have been spoken of.

2. Nissayasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Nissayasutta Commentary

2.Dutiyenissayasampannoti patiṭṭhāsampanno.Saddhanti okappanasaddhaṃ.Vīriyanti kāyikacetasikavīriyaṃ.Yaṃsāti yaṃ assa.Ariyāyapaññāyāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya.Saṅkhāyāti jānitvā.Ekaṃ paṭisevatīti sevitabbayuttakaṃ sevati.Adhivāsetīti adhivāsetabbayuttakaṃ adhivāseti.Parivajjetīti parivajjetabbayuttakaṃ parivajjeti.Vinodetīti nīharitabbayuttakaṃ nīharati.Evaṃ kho bhikkhūti evaṃ kho bhikkhu uggahaparipucchāvasena ceva dhammavavatthānavasena ca paṭisevitabbādīni suppaṭividdhāni supaccakkhāni katvā paṭisevanto adhivāsento parivajjento vinodento ca bhikkhu nissayasampanno nāma hotīti.

2.In the second, nissayasampannoti means endowed with a foundation. Saddhanti means faith that is conviction. Vīriyanti means physical and mental effort. Yaṃsāti means whatever is his. Ariyāya paññāyāti means with noble wisdom, with the wisdom of the path together with insight. Saṅkhāyāti means having known. Ekaṃ paṭisevatīti means he cultivates what is suitable to be cultivated. Adhivāsetīti means he endures what is suitable to be endured. Parivajjetīti means he avoids what is suitable to be avoided. Vinodetīti means he eliminates what is suitable to be eliminated. Evaṃ kho bhikkhūti means in this way, monks, a monk who, having made what is suitable to be cultivated etc., well ascertained and well evident, by way of learning and questioning, and by way of the discrimination of qualities, cultivates, endures, avoids, and eliminates, is said to be endowed with a foundation.

3. Meghiyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Meghiyasutta Commentary

3.Tatiyecālikāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Taṃ kira calamaggaṃ nissāya katattā olokentānaṃ calamānaṃ viya upaṭṭhāti, tasmā cālikāti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ.Cāliyapabbateti sopi pabbato sabbasetattā kāḷapakkhuposathe olokentānaṃ calamāno viya upaṭṭhāti, tasmā cāliyapabbatoti vutto. Tattha mahantaṃ vihāraṃ kārayiṃsu. Iti bhagavā taṃ nagaraṃ nissāya cālikāpabbatamahāvihāre viharati.Jantugāmanti evaṃnāmakaṃ aparampi tasseva vihārassa gocaragāmaṃ. Jattugāmantipi paṭhanti.Padhānatthikassāti padhānakammikassa.Padhānāyāti samaṇadhammakaraṇatthāya.Āgamehi tāvāti satthā therassa vacanaṃ sutvā upadhārento ‘‘na tāvassa ñāṇaṃ paripakka’’nti ñatvā paṭibāhanto evamāha.Ekakamhi tāvāti idaṃ panassa ‘‘evamayaṃ gantvāpi kamme anipphajjamāne nirāsaṅko hutvā pemavasena puna āgacchissatī’’ti cittamaddavajananatthaṃ āha.Natthi kiñci uttari karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catunnaṃ kiccānaṃ katattā aññaṃ uttari karaṇīyaṃ nāma natthi.Katassa vā paṭicayoti adhigatassa vā puna paṭicayopi natthi. Na hi bhāvitamaggo puna bhāvīyati, na pahīnakilesānaṃ puna pahānaṃ atthi.Padhānanti kho, meghiya, vadamānaṃ kinti vadeyyāmāti ‘‘samaṇadhammaṃ karomī’’ti taṃ vadamānaṃ mayaṃ aññaṃ kiṃ nāma vadeyyāma.

3.In the third, cālikāyanti means in a city of that name. It is said that because it was built relying on a shifting road, it appears to those looking at it as if it is moving; therefore, it went by the name Cālikā. Cāliyapabbateti that mountain too, because it is entirely white, appears to those looking at it on the uposatha of the dark fortnight as if it is moving; therefore, it was called Cāliyapabbata. There, they built a great monastery. Thus, the Blessed One, relying on that city, was dwelling at the great Cāliyapabbata monastery. Jantugāmanti means another village of that very monastery for alms-gathering, of that name. Some read Jattugāma. Padhānatthikassāti means one who wants to practice meditation. Padhānāyāti means for the purpose of doing the practice of a renunciate. Āgamehi tāvāti means the Teacher, hearing the elder’s words, considering, knowing that "his knowledge is not yet mature," rejecting him, spoke thus. Ekakamhi tāvāti means this was said by him for the purpose of generating tenderness of heart, thinking, "Even having gone, if his work is not accomplished, he will come back again without hesitation, out of affection." Natthi kiñci uttari karaṇīyanti means because the four tasks regarding the four truths have been done, there is nothing else to be done. Katassa vā paṭicayoti means there is no further accumulation of what has already been attained. For the path that has been cultivated is not cultivated again, there is no further abandoning of defilements that have been abandoned. Padhānanti kho, meghiya, vadamānaṃ kinti vadeyyāmāti means what else should we say to one who says that he is practicing the renunciate's Dhamma, that he is practicing meditation?

Divāvihāraṃ nisīdīti divāvihāratthāya nisīdi. Nisīdanto ca yasmiṃ maṅgalasilāpaṭṭe pubbe anupaṭipāṭiyā pañca jātisatāni rājā hutvā uyyānakīḷikaṃ kīḷanto tividhanāṭakaparivāro nisīdi, tasmiṃyeva nisīdi. Athassa nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya samaṇabhāvo jahito viya ahosi, rājavesaṃ gahetvā nāṭakavaraparivuto setacchattassa heṭṭhā mahārahe pallaṅke nisinno viya jāto. Athassa taṃ sampattiṃ assādayato kāmavitakko udapādi. So tasmiṃyeva khaṇe mahāyodhehi gahite dve core ānetvā purato ṭhapite viya addasa. Tesu ekassa vadhaṃ āṇāpanavasenassa byāpādavitakko uppajji, ekassa bandhanaṃ āṇāpanavasena vihiṃsāvitakko. Evaṃ so latājālena rukkho viya madhumakkhikāhi madhughātako viya akusalavitakkehi parikkhitto ahosi. Taṃ sandhāya –atha kho āyasmato meghiyassātiādi vuttaṃ.Anvāsattāti anubaddhā samparivāritā.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti evaṃ pāpavitakkehi samparikiṇṇo kammaṭṭhānaṃ sappāyaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto ‘‘idaṃ vata disvā dīghadassī bhagavā paṭisedhesī’’ti sallakkhetvā ‘‘idaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasabalassa ārocessāmī’’ti nisinnāsanato vuṭṭhāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.

Divāvihāraṃ nisīdīti means he sat down for the daytime dwelling. And while sitting, he sat on the same auspicious stone slab on which he, having been a king for five hundred births in the past in unbroken succession, surrounded by a threefold troupe of actors, used to sit, playing in the pleasure garden. Then, from the time he sat down, his state of being a renunciate seemed to vanish; it was as if, having taken on royal garb, surrounded by a troupe of actors, he was sitting under a white parasol, on a very valuable couch. Then, while he was savoring that prosperity, a thought of sensual pleasure arose in him. He saw two thieves brought and stationed in front of him, seized by great warriors, as if in that very moment. The thought of ill will arose in him with the command to kill one of them; the thought of harming, with the command to imprison the other. Thus, he was surrounded by unwholesome thoughts like a tree by a creeper, like a honey-killer by bees seeking honey. With reference to that, atha kho āyasmato meghiyassātiādi was said. Anvāsattāti means followed, surrounded. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti means thus, beset by evil thoughts, being unable to make the meditation subject suitable, reflecting, "The long-seeing Blessed One forbade this, having seen this," thinking, "I will report this reason to the Ten-Powered One," rising from his seat, he approached the Blessed One.

4. Nandakasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Nandakasutta Commentary

4.Catuttheupaṭṭhānasālāyanti bhojanasālāyaṃ.Yenupaṭṭhānasālāti satthā nandakattherena madhurassarena āraddhāya dhammadesanāya saddaṃ sutvā, ‘‘ānanda, ko eso upaṭṭhānasālāya madhurassarena dhammaṃ desetī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘dhammakathikanandakattherassa ajja, bhante, vāro’’ti sutvā ‘‘atimadhuraṃ katvā, ānanda, eso bhikkhu dhammaṃ katheti, mayampi gantvā suṇissāmā’’ti vatvā yenupaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami.Bahidvārakoṭṭhake aṭṭhāsīti chabbaṇṇarasmiyo cīvaragabbhe paṭicchādetvā aññātakavesena aṭṭhāsi.Kathāpariyosānaṃ āgamayamānoti ‘‘idamavocā’’ti idaṃ kathāvasānaṃ udikkhamāno dhammakathaṃ suṇanto aṭṭhāsiyeva. Athāyasmā ānando nikkhante paṭhame yāme satthu saññaṃ adāsi – ‘‘paṭhamayāmo atikkanto, bhante, thokaṃ vissamathā’’ti. Satthā tattheva aṭṭhāsi. Athāyasmā ānando majjhimayāmepi nikkhante, ‘‘bhante, tumhe pakatiyā khattiyasukhumālā, puna buddhasukhumālāti paramasukhumālā, majjhimayāmopi atikkanto, muhuttaṃ vissamathā’’ti āha. Satthā tattheva aṭṭhāsi. Tattha ṭhitakassevassa aruṇaggaṃ paññāyittha. Aruṇuggamanañca therassa ‘‘idamavocā’’ti pāpetvā kathāpariyosānañca dasabalassa chabbaṇṇasarīrasmivissajjanañca ekappahāreneva ahosi.Aggaḷaṃ ākoṭesīti agganakhena dvārakavāṭaṃ ākoṭesi.

4.In the fourth, upaṭṭhānasālāyanti means in the refectory. Yenupaṭṭhānasālāti means the Teacher, hearing the sound of the Dhamma talk begun in a sweet voice by the Elder Nandaka, asking, "Ānanda, who is that teaching the Dhamma in a sweet voice in the refectory?" and hearing, "Today is the turn of the Dhamma-preaching Elder Nandaka, Blessed One," saying, "That monk speaks the Dhamma making it very sweet, Ānanda; we too will go and listen," approached the refectory. Bahidvārakoṭṭhake aṭṭhāsīti means concealing the six-colored rays in the robe's fold, he stood in disguise. Kathāpariyosānaṃ āgamayamānoti means he stood listening to the Dhamma talk, expecting the conclusion of the talk, "This was said." Then, the venerable Ānanda, when the first watch had passed, gave a signal to the Teacher, "The first watch has passed, Blessed One; rest a little." The Teacher remained standing there. Then, when the middle watch had also passed, the venerable Ānanda said, "Blessed One, you are by nature of delicate warrior lineage, again, the Buddha is of delicate lineage, thus you are of the most delicate lineage; the middle watch has also passed; rest for a moment." The Teacher remained standing there. While he was standing there, the first light of dawn appeared to him. The rising of the dawn and the Elder’s finishing of the talk, having led to "This was said," and the releasing of the six-colored rays of the Ten-Powered One, occurred with a single burst. Aggaḷaṃ ākoṭesīti means he knocked on the door panel with his fingernail.

Sārajjamānarūpoti harāyamāno ottappamāno. Domanassasārajjaṃ panassa natthi.Ettakampi no nappaṭibhāseyyāti paṭisambhidāppattassa appaṭibhānaṃ nāma natthi. Ettakampi na katheyyanti dasseti.Sādhu sādhūti therassa dhammadesanaṃ sampahaṃsanto āha. Ayañhettha attho ‘‘sugahitā ca te dhammadesanā sukathitā cā’’ti.Kulaputtānanti ācārakulaputtānañceva jātikulaputtānañca.Ariyo ca tuṇhibhāvoti dutiyajjhānasamāpattiṃ sandhāyevamāha.Adhipaññādhammavipassanāyāti saṅkhārapariggahavipassanāñāṇassa.Catuppādakoti assagoṇagadrabhādiko.Idaṃ vatvāti imaṃ catūhaṅgehi samannāgataṃ dhammaṃ kathayitvā.Vihāraṃ pāvisīti gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭho.

Sārajjamānarūpoti agitated, shrinking back with aversion. But he has no mental distress or agitation. Ettakampi no nappaṭibhāseyyāti for one who has attained Paṭisambhidā, there is no such thing as lack of eloquence. It shows that he would not say even this much. Sādhu sādhūti rejoicing at the Thera's Dhamma talk, he said. For here, the meaning is, "well grasped and well spoken is your Dhamma talk." Kulaputtānanti for sons of good families in conduct and sons of good families by birth. Ariyo ca tuṇhibhāvoti he spoke thus referring to the attainment of the second jhāna. Adhipaññādhammavipassanāyāti of insight knowledge of contemplation on formations (saṅkhārapariggahavipassanāñāṇa). Catuppādakoti such as horses, cattle, donkeys, etc. Idaṃ vatvāti having spoken this Dhamma consisting of four factors. Vihāraṃ pāvisīti he entered the Perfumed Chamber.

Kālena dhammassavaneti kāle kāle dhammassavanasmiṃ.Dhammasākacchāyāti pañhakathāya.Gambhīraṃ atthapadanti gambhīraṃ guḷhaṃ rahassaṃ atthaṃ.Paññāyāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya. Sammasanapaṭivedhapaññāpi uggahaparipucchāpaññāpi vaṭṭatiyeva.Patto vā pajjati vāti arahattaṃ patto vā pāpuṇissati vāti evaṃ guṇasambhāvanāya sambhāveti.Appattamānasāti appattaarahattā, arahattaṃ vā appattaṃ mānasaṃ etesantipi appattamānasā.Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāranti ettha diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro lokiyopi vaṭṭati lokuttaropi.

Kālena dhammassavaneti at times for hearing the Dhamma. Dhammasākacchāyāti for talk about the questions. Gambhīraṃ atthapadanti the profound, hidden, and secret meaning. Paññāyāti with the insight of the path accompanied by Vipassanā. The insight of reviewing and penetrating insight, and the insight of learning and questioning are suitable. Patto vā pajjati vāti either he has attained arahatship or will attain it, thus he esteems him with the expectation of virtue. Appattamānasāti those whose minds have not attained, or those whose minds have not attained arahatship. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāranti here, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāra can be both mundane and supramundane.

5. Balasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Balasuttavaṇṇanā

5.Pañcame avijjākosajjasāvajjaassaddhiyesu akampanatopaññābalādīni daṭṭhabbāni.Akusalasaṅkhātāti akusalāti ñātā. Esa nayo sabbattha.Nālamariyāti ariyabhāvaṃ kātuṃ asamatthā, ariyānaṃ vā ananucchavikā.Vodiṭṭhāti suṭṭhu diṭṭhā.Vocaritāti manodvāre samudācārappattā.Atthikassāti dhammadesanāya atthikassa.Ājīvikābhayanti jīvitavuttibhayaṃ.Asilokabhayanti garahābhayaṃ.Parisāsārajjabhayanti parisaṃ patvā sārajjaṃ okkamanabhayaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

5.In the fifth, one should see the paññābalā, etc., as unshakable in ignorance, sloth, fault, and lack of faith. Akusalasaṅkhātāti known as unwholesome. This is the method everywhere. Nālamariyāti unable to do the state of noble ones, or not suitable for the noble ones. Vodiṭṭhāti well seen. Vocaritāti having reached the stage of behavior at the mind-door. Atthikassāti for one who desires the Dhamma talk. Ājīvikābhayanti fear for one's livelihood. Asilokabhayanti fear of blame. Parisāsārajjabhayanti fear of venturing confidently into the assembly. In this sutta, vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ is spoken.

6. Sevanāsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sevanāsuttavaṇṇanā

6.Chaṭṭhejīvitaparikkhārāti jīvitasambhārā.Samudānetabbāti samāharitabbā.Kasirena samudāgacchantīti dukkhena uppajjanti.Rattibhāgaṃ vā divasabhāgaṃ vāti ettha rattibhāge ñatvā rattibhāgeyeva pakkamitabbaṃ, rattiṃ caṇḍavāḷādiparipanthe sati aruṇuggamanaṃ āgametabbaṃ. Divasabhāge ñatvā divā pakkamitabbaṃ, divā paripanthe sati sūriyatthaṅgamanaṃ āgametabbaṃ.Saṅkhāpīti sāmaññatthassa bhāvanāpāripūriāgamanaṃ jānitvā.So puggaloti padassa pana ‘‘nānubandhitabbo’’ti iminā sambandho.Anāpucchāti idha pana taṃ puggalaṃ anāpucchā pakkamitabbanti attho.Api panujjamānenāti api nikkaḍḍhiyamānena. Evarūpo hi puggalo sacepi dārukalāpasataṃ vā udakaghaṭasataṃ vā vālikāghaṭasataṃ vā daṇḍaṃ āropeti, mā idha vasīti nikkaḍḍhāpeti vā, taṃ khamāpetvāpi yāvajīvaṃ so anubandhitabbova, na vijahitabbo.

6.In the sixth, jīvitaparikkhārāti requisites for life. Samudānetabbāti should be accumulated. Kasirena samudāgacchantīti they arise with difficulty. Rattibhāgaṃ vā divasabhāgaṃ vāti here, having known the night portion, one should leave in the night portion itself, and when there is danger from wild animals, etc. at night, the rising of the dawn should be awaited. Having known the day portion, one should leave during the day, and when there is danger during the day, the setting of the sun should be awaited. Saṅkhāpīti also, having known the attainment of the completion of the development of the meaning of sāmañña. So puggaloti but the word "that person" is related to this: "should not be followed." Anāpucchāti here, however, the meaning is that one should leave without asking that person. Api panujjamānenāti even when being pushed away. For if such a person heaps up a hundred bundles of wood, or a hundred water pots, or a hundred sand pots, or inflicts punishment, or drives one away saying, "do not live here," even after asking forgiveness, he should be followed as long as life lasts, and should not be abandoned.

7. Sutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Sutavāsuttavaṇṇanā

7.Sattamepañca ṭhānāni ajjhācaritunti pañca kāraṇāni atikkamituṃ.Pāṇanti antamaso kunthakipillikaṃ.Adinnanti antamaso tiṇasalākampi parasantakaṃ.Theyyasaṅkhātanti theyyacittena.Sannidhikārakaṃ kāme paribhuñjitunti sannidhiṃ katvā ṭhapetvā vatthukāmakilesakāme paribhuñjituṃ abhabbo. Akappiyaṃ kāmaguṇaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Buddhaṃ paccakkhātunti ‘‘na buddho aya’’nti evaṃ paṭikkhipituṃ.Dhammādīsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ tāva aṭṭhakathāya āgataṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana imasmiṃ sutte agatigamanāni kathitāni.

7.In the seventh, pañca ṭhānāni ajjhācaritunti to transgress five reasons. Pāṇanti even a small ant or insect. Adinnanti even a grass stalk belonging to another. Theyyasaṅkhātanti with the thought of stealing. Sannidhikārakaṃ kāme paribhuñjitunti one is incapable of enjoying object-kāma and kilesa-kāma after making and keeping a store. This is said referring to unallowable sense pleasures. Buddhaṃ paccakkhātunti to reject, saying, "this is not a Buddha." The same method applies to Dhamma, etc. So far, this has come in the commentary. But in the Pali, in this sutta, the courses of misconduct are spoken.

8-10. Sajjhasuttādivaṇṇanā
8-10. Sajjhasuttādivaṇṇanā

8-10.Aṭṭhame buddhādīnaṃ paccakkhānaṃ kathitaṃ. Navame puthujjanena saddhiṃ gahitattā ‘‘āhuneyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dasamegotrabhūti sotāpattimaggassa anantarapaccayena sikhāpattabalavavipassanācittena samannāgato. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

8-10.In the eighth, the rejection of the Buddha, etc., is spoken. In the ninth, because it is taken together with an ordinary person, it is said to be "āhuneyyā". In the tenth, gotrabhūti is one who is endowed with strong insight consciousness of attaining the fruit, with the immediately preceding condition of the Sotāpatti path. The rest is easy to understand everywhere.

2. Sīhanādavaggo

2. Sīhanādavaggo

1. Sīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā

11.Dutiyassa paṭhameyena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti ‘‘sace satthā cārikaṃ pakkamitukāmo assa, imasmiṃ kāle pakkameyya. Handāhaṃ cārikaṃ gamanatthāya satthāraṃ āpucchāmī’’ti cintetvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto upasaṅkami.Āyasmā maṃ, bhanteti so kira bhikkhu theraṃ mahatā bhikkhuparivārena gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘ime bhikkhū tathāgataṃ pahāya sāriputtaṃ parivāretvā nikkhantā, gamanavicchedamassa karissāmī’’ti aṭṭhāne kopaṃ bandhitvā evamāha. Tatthaāsajjāti ghaṭṭetvā.Appaṭinissajjāti akkhamāpetvā accayaṃ adesetvā. Kismiṃ pana so kāraṇe āghātaṃ bandhīti? Therassa kira dasabalaṃ vanditvā uṭṭhāya gacchato cīvarakaṇṇo tassa sarīraṃ phusi, vāto paharītipi vadanti. Ettakena āghātaṃ bandhitvā theraṃ mahatā parivārena gacchantaṃ disvā usūyamāno ‘‘gamanavicchedamassa karissāmī’’ti evamāha.Ehi tvaṃ bhikkhūti satthā tassa bhikkhuno vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘na taṃ bhikkhu sāriputto paharīti vutte, ‘bhante, tumhe attano aggasāvakasseva pakkhaṃ vahatha, na mayha’nti mayi manopadosaṃ katvā apāye nibbatteyyā’’ti ñatvā ‘‘sāriputtaṃ pakkosāpetvā imamatthaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantetvā evamāha.Avāpuraṇaṃ ādāyāti kuñcikaṃ gahetvā.Sīhanādanti seṭṭhanādaṃ pamukhanādaṃ appaṭivattiyanādaṃ. Evaṃ dvīhi mahātherehi ārocito bhikkhusaṅgho rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni pahāya satthu santikaṃ agamāsi.Khīyanadhammanti kathādhammaṃ.

11.In the first of the second, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti thinking, "if the Teacher intends to go on tour, let him go at this time. Now, I will ask the Teacher in order to go on tour," he approached surrounded by the Saṅgha of bhikkhus. Āyasmā maṃ, bhanteti it seems that bhikkhu, seeing the Thera going with a large company of bhikkhus, bound anger in an unsuitable place thinking, "these bhikkhus, having abandoned the Tathāgata, have gone out surrounding Sāriputta; I will cause a break in his going." There, āsajjāti having collided. Appaṭinissajjāti without asking forgiveness, without confessing the offense. In what reason did he bind anger? It seems that when the Thera, after worshiping the Ten-Powered One, was getting up to leave, the edge of his robe touched his body; some say that the wind struck it. Having bound anger with just this much, seeing the Thera going with a large company, envying him, he said thus, "I will cause a break in his going." Ehi tvaṃ bhikkhūti the Teacher, hearing that bhikkhu's words, knowing that "if it is said that Sāriputta did not strike him, he might get angry with me, thinking 'venerable sir, you take the side of your chief disciple, not mine,' and be reborn in the lower realms," calling a bhikkhu, said thus, "I will ask Sāriputta about this matter." Avāpuraṇaṃ ādāyāti having taken the key. Sīhanādanti the best roar, the foremost roar, the unretreating roar. Thus, having been informed by two great Theras, the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, abandoning places for staying at night and places for staying during the day, went to the Teacher's presence. Khīyanadhammanti the subject of talk.

Gūthagatanti gūthameva. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Pathavīsamenāti akujjhanaṭṭhena pathaviyā samānena. Na hi pathavī ‘‘mayi suciṃ nikkhipantī’’ti somanassaṃ karoti, na ‘‘asuciṃ nikkhipantī’’ti domanassaṃ. Mayhampi evarūpaṃ cittanti dasseti.Vipulenāti aparittena.Mahaggatenāti mahantabhāvaṃ gatena.Appamāṇenāti vaḍḍhitappamāṇena.Averenāti akusalaverapuggalaverarahitena.Abyāpajjhenāti niddukkhena vigatadomanassena.So idhāti so anupaṭṭhitakāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhāno bhikkhu evaṃ kareyya, mādiso kathaṃ evarūpaṃ karissati, bhanteti paṭhamaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadi. Evaṃ sabbattha yojanā veditabbā.

Gūthagatanti only excrement. The same method applies to the rest. Pathavīsamenāti by being equal to the earth in the sense of not being angry. For the earth does not feel pleasure thinking, "they are putting something pure on me," nor does it feel displeasure thinking, "they are putting something impure on me." It shows that my mind is also like that. Vipulenāti unconfined. Mahaggatenāti having reached a state of greatness. Appamāṇenāti with expanded measure. Averenāti without unwholesome enmity, without personal enmity. Abyāpajjhenāti without suffering, without gone mental distress. So idhāti that bhikkhu who did not practice mindfulness of the body in the proper way might do this; how could someone like me do such a thing, venerable sir? Thus he roared the first lion's roar. Thus, the connection should be understood everywhere.

Rajoharaṇanti rajasammajjanacoḷakaṃ, pādapuñchanti, tasseva nāmaṃ.Kaḷopihatthoti pacchihattho ukkhalihattho vā.Nantakavāsīti antacchinnapilotikavasano.Sūratoti sucisīlo soraccena samannāgato.Sudantoti suṭṭhu damathaṃ upagato.Suvinītoti suṭṭhu sikkhito.Na kañci hiṃsatīti visāṇādīsu gaṇhantampi piṭṭhiṃ parimajjantampi na kañci viheṭheti.Usabhachinnavisāṇasamenāti usabhassa chinnavisāṇassa cittasadisena.

Rajoharaṇanti the cloth for wiping away dust, the foot-wiper, is its name. Kaḷopihatthoti with a pot in his hand, or with a cooking pot in his hand. Nantakavāsīti wearing clothes made of rags cut at the edges. Sūratoti of pure virtue, endowed with gentleness. Sudantoti well tamed. Suvinītoti well trained. Na kañci hiṃsatīti he does not harm anyone, even when grasping horns, even when rubbing his back. Usabhachinnavisāṇasamenāti similar to the mind of an ox with cut horns.

Aṭṭīyeyyāti aṭṭo pīḷito bhaveyya.Harāyeyyāti lajjeyya.Jiguccheyyāti jigucchaṃ āpajjeyya.

Aṭṭīyeyyāti he would be afflicted, oppressed. Harāyeyyāti he would be ashamed. Jiguccheyyāti he would fall into disgust.

Medakathālikanti medakathālikā vuccati sūnakārakehi yūsanikkhamanatthāya tattha tattha katachiddā thālikā.Parihareyyāti maṃsassa pūretvā ukkhipitvā gaccheyya.Chiddāvachiddanti parittamahantehi chiddehi samannāgataṃ.Uggharantanti uparimukhehi chiddehi nikkhamamānayūsaṃ.Paggharantanti adhomukhehi nikkhamamānayūsaṃ. Evamassa sakalasarīraṃ yūsamakkhitaṃ bhaveyya.Chiddāvachiddanti navahi vaṇamukhehi parittamahanta chiddaṃ. Evamettha aṭṭhamanavamehi dvīhi aṅgehi thero attano sarīre nicchandarāgataṃ kathesi.

Medakathālikanti medakathālikā is called a plate with holes made here and there by dog trainers for the purpose of draining broth. Parihareyyāti filling it with meat, he would lift it up and go. Chiddāvachiddanti endowed with small and large holes. Uggharantanti with broth dripping from the upward-facing holes. Paggharantanti with broth dripping from the downward-facing holes. Thus his entire body would be smeared with broth. Chiddāvachiddanti small and large holes from the nine wound openings. Here, with these two factors, the eighth and ninth, the Thera spoke of his body's lack of desire and passion.

Atha kho so bhikkhūti evaṃ therena navahi kāraṇehi sīhanāde nadite atha so bhikkhu.Accayoti aparādho.Maṃ accagamāti maṃ atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto.Patiggaṇhatūti khamatu.Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaraṇatthāya, puna evarūpassa aparādhassa akaraṇatthāya.Tagghāti ekaṃsena.Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarosīti yathā dhammo ṭhito, tatheva karosi, khamāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti.Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti taṃ tava aparādhaṃ mayaṃ khamāma.Vuddhihesā bhikkhu ariyassa vinayeti esā bhikkhu ariyassa vinaye buddhassa bhagavato sāsane vuḍḍhi nāma. Katamā? Accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaritvā āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā. Desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karontoyo accayaṃ accayatodisvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatīti āha.Phalatīti sace hi thero na khameyya, tassa bhikkhuno tattheva sattadhā muddhā phaleyya. Tasmā bhagavā evamāha.Sace maṃ soti sace maṃ ayaṃ bhikkhu khamāhīti evaṃ vadati.Khamatu ca me soti ayampi cāyasmā mayhaṃ khamatūti evaṃ thero tassa accayaṃ paṭiggaṇhitvā sayampi taṃ satthu sammukhe khamāpesīti.

Atha kho so bhikkhūti then that bhikkhu, when the lion's roar was roared by the Thera with nine reasons. Accayoti offense. Maṃ accagamāti having transgressed against me, having overcome and prevailed. Patiggaṇhatūti may he forgive. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti for restraint in the future, for the non-doing of such an offense again. Tagghāti certainly. Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarosīti as the Dhamma stands, so you do; it is said that he asked for forgiveness. Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti that offense of yours, we forgive. Vuddhihesā bhikkhu ariyassa vinayeti this, bhikkhu, is called growth in the Discipline of the Noble One, in the Dispensation of the Buddha, the Blessed One. Which one? Seeing an offense as an offense, confessing it according to the Dhamma, and undertaking restraint in the future. But when making the discourse with reference to the individual, he said, yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatīti "whoever sees an offense as an offense, confesses it according to the Dhamma, and undertakes restraint in the future." Phalatīti if the Thera did not forgive, that bhikkhu's head would split into seven pieces right there. Therefore, the Blessed One said thus. Sace maṃ soti if this bhikkhu says, "may he forgive me." Khamatu ca me soti and may this venerable one forgive me too; thus the Thera, having accepted his offense, himself asked forgiveness from the Teacher in his presence.

2. Saupādisesasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Saupādisesasuttavaṇṇanā

12.Dutiyesaupādisesanti saupādānasesaṃ.Anupādisesanti upādānasesarahitaṃ niggahaṇaṃ.Mattaso kārīti pamāṇakārī na paripūrakārī.Na tāvāyaṃ, sāriputta, dhammapariyāyo paṭibhāsīti appaṭibhānaṃ nāma bhagavato natthi, na tāvāhaṃ imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ kathesinti ayaṃ panettha attho.Māyimaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sutvā pamādaṃ āhariṃsūti ‘‘mayaṃ kira catūhi apāyehi muttā’’ti upari arahattatthāya vīriyaṃ akarontā mā pamādaṃ āpajjiṃsu.Pañhādhippāyena bhāsitoti tayā pucchitapañhassa sabhāvena kathitoti dasseti. Imesaṃ pana navannaṃ puggalānaṃ bhavesu chandarāgavinodanatthaṃ etameva atthuppattiṃ katvā – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, appamattakopi gūtho duggandho hoti, evameva kho khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, appamattakampi bhavaṃ na vaṇṇemi antamaso accharāsaṅghātamattampī’’ti imaṃ suttaṃ (a. ni. 1.321) abhāsi. Na kevalañca etesaṃyeva navannaṃ puggalānaṃ gati nibaddhā, yesaṃ pana kulānaṃ tīṇi saraṇāni pañca sīlāni ekaṃ salākabhattaṃ ekaṃ pakkhiyabhattaṃ ekaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ ekā pokkharaṇī eko āvāso, evarūpāni nibaddhapuññāni atthi. Tesampi gati nibaddhā, sotāpannasadisāneva tāni kulāni.

12.In the second, saupādisesanti with a remainder of clinging. Anupādisesanti without a remainder of clinging, cessation. Mattaso kārīti one who does a little, not one who does completely. Na tāvāyaṃ, sāriputta, dhammapariyāyo paṭibhāsīti there is no such thing as lack of eloquence for the Blessed One; but this is the meaning here: "I have not yet spoken this method of Dhamma." Māyimaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sutvā pamādaṃ āhariṃsūti lest, hearing this method of Dhamma, they incur negligence, thinking, "we are freed from the four lower realms," and not do effort for the sake of arahatship above. Pañhādhippāyena bhāsitoti he shows that it is spoken according to the nature of the question asked by you. Moreover, for the purpose of removing passion and lust in the existences of these nine individuals, having made just this origination of meaning—"Just as, bhikkhus, even a small amount of excrement is foul-smelling, so too, bhikkhus, I do not praise even a small amount of existence, even as little as a snap of the fingers"—he spoke this sutta (A. Ni. 1.321). And not only the destination of these nine individuals is fixed, but also those families that have the three refuges, the five precepts, a regular offering of food by ticket, a regular offering of food every half-month, a regular offering of robes for the rainy season, a pond, a monastery—such regular meritorious deeds exist. The destination of those too is fixed; those families are just like Sotāpannas.

3. Koṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Koṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā

13.Tatiyediṭṭhadhammavedanīyanti imasmiṃ yevattabhāve vipaccanakakammaṃ.Samparāyavedanīyanti dutiye attabhāve vipaccanakakammaṃ.Sukhavedanīyanti sukhavedanājanakakammaṃ.Dukkhavedanīyanti dukkhavedanājanakakammaṃ.Paripakkavedanīyanti laddhavipākavāraṃ.Aparipakkavedanīyanti aladdhavipākavāraṃ.Bahuvedanīyanti bahuvipākadāyakaṃ.Appavedanīyanti na bahuvipākadāyakaṃ.Avedanīyanti vipākavedanāya adāyakaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

13.In the third, diṭṭhadhammavedanīyanti kamma ripening in this very existence. Samparāyavedanīyanti kamma ripening in the second existence. Sukhavedanīyanti kamma generating pleasant feeling. Dukkhavedanīyanti kamma generating painful feeling. Paripakkavedanīyanti having received its turn to ripen. Aparipakkavedanīyanti not having received its turn to ripen. Bahuvedanīyanti giving much result. Appavedanīyanti not giving much result. Avedanīyanti not giving a result of feeling. In this sutta, vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ is spoken.

4. Samiddhisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Samiddhisuttavaṇṇanā

14.Catutthesamiddhīti attabhāvasamiddhatāya evaṃladdhanāmo therassa saddhivihārikatthero.Kimārammaṇāti kiṃpaccayā.Saṅkappavitakkāti saṅkappabhūtā vitakkā.Nāmarūpārammaṇāti nāmarūpapaccayā. Iminā cattāro arūpakkhandhā bhūtupādāyarūpañca vitakkānaṃ paccayoti dasseti.Kva nānattaṃ gacchantīti kasmiṃ ṭhāne nānāsabhāvataṃ vemattaṃ gacchanti.Dhātusūti rūpadhātuādīsu. Aññoyeva hi rūpavitakko, aññe saddavitakkādayoti.Phassasamudayāti sampayuttaphassapaccayā.Vedanāsamosaraṇāti tisso vedanā samosaraṇā. Ettakena kusalākusalamissakā kathitā.Samādhippamukhātiādayo pana apacayapakkhikāti veditabbā. Tattha pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena jeṭṭhakaṭṭhena vā samādhi pamukhaṃ etesantisamādhippamukhā. Jeṭṭhakakāraṇaṭṭhena sati adhipateyyā etesantisatādhipateyyā. Maggapaññā uttarā etesantipaññuttarā. Phalavimuttiṃ patvā sārappattā hontītivimuttisārā. Ārammaṇavasena amataṃ nibbānaṃ ogāhitvā tattha patiṭṭhitātiamatogadhā. Tena ca mā maññīti tena vissajjanena ‘‘ahaṃ aggasāvakena pucchite pañhe vissajjesi’’nti mā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akāsi.

14.In the fourth, samiddhi means the Elder whose name was thus acquired due to the perfection of his individual existence; the Elder who was the co-resident disciple of that Elder. Kimārammaṇā means what is the condition? Saṅkappavitakkā means thoughts that are of the nature of conception. Nāmarūpārammaṇā means conditioned by name and form. By this, he shows that the four immaterial aggregates and the materiality derived from the great elements are conditions for thoughts. Kva nānattaṃ gacchantī means in what place do they go to diversity, to difference? Dhātusū means in the elements such as the element of form, etc. For the thought of form is different, and the thoughts of sound, etc., are different. Phassasamudayā means conditioned by the contact associated with them. Vedanāsamosaraṇā means the three kinds of feeling converge. So far, those mixed with wholesome and unwholesome qualities have been spoken of. However, samādhippamukhā etc., should be understood as belonging to the diminishing side. There, samādhippamukhā means that concentration is foremost or chief among them in the sense of being a forerunner. Satādhipateyyā means that mindfulness is dominant among them in the sense of being a chief cause. Paññuttarā means that wisdom, the wisdom of the path, is superior among them. Vimuttisārā means having attained the fruition of liberation, they become essential in liberation. Amatogadhā means having plunged into the Deathless, Nibbāna, by way of object, they are established there. Tena ca mā maññī means by that explanation, "May he not have conceit or arrogance, thinking, 'I have explained a question asked by the chief disciple.'"

5-6. Gaṇḍasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-6. Commentary on the Gaṇḍa Sutta, etc.

15-16.Pañcame tīṇi cattāri vassāni vassagaṇā, aneke vassagaṇā uppannā assātianekavassagaṇiko. Tassassūti tassa bhaveyyuṃ.Abhedanamukhānīti na kenaci bhinditvā katāni, kevalaṃ kammasamuṭṭhitāneva vaṇamukhāni.Jegucchiyaṃyevāti jigucchitabbameva paṭikūlameva.Cātumahābhūtikassāti catumahābhūtamayassa.odanakummāsūpacayassāti odanena ceva kummāsena ca upacitassa vaḍḍhitassa.Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammassāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccadhammassa, duggandhavighātatthāya tanuvilepanena ucchādanadhammassa, aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāya khuddakasambāhanena parimaddanadhammassa, daharakāle vā ūrūsu sayāpetvā gabbhavāsena dussaṇṭhitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ añchanapīḷanādivasena parimaddanadhammassa, evaṃ pariharitassāpi ca bhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammassa, bhijjanavikiraṇasabhāvassevāti attho. Ettha ca aniccapadena ceva bhedanaviddhaṃsanapadehi cassa atthaṅgamo kathito, sesehi samudayo.Nibbindathāti ukkaṇṭhatha pajahatha imaṃ kāyanti dasseti. Evamimasmiṃ sutte balavavipassanā kathitā. Chaṭṭhaṃ vuttanayameva. Saññāsīsena panettha ñāṇameva kathitaṃ.

15-16.In the fifth, anekavassagaṇiko means that groups of three or four years, many groups of years, have arisen for him. Tassassū means that they would be for him. Abhedanamukhānī means not made by breaking with anything; the openings of the sores are merely arisen from kamma. Jegucchiyaṃyevā means it is truly repulsive, truly disgusting. Cātumahābhūtikassā means consisting of the four great elements. odanakummāsūpacayassā means increased, grown by means of rice and gruel. Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammassā means being of the nature of impermanence in the sense of non-existence after having been; being of the nature of rubbing with unguents for the purpose of dispelling bad smells; being of the nature of massage with slight manipulation for the purpose of relieving diseases of the limbs; being of the nature of massage in the form of application of collyrium and pressure for the purpose of producing proper shape of those limbs which are misshapen from dwelling in the womb, after having been made to lie on the thighs in childhood; and even for that which has been so cared for, being of the nature of breaking and decay, being of the nature of dissolution and disintegration. Here, its passing away is spoken of by the term 'impermanent' and by the terms 'breaking' and 'decay', and its arising is spoken of by the rest. Nibbindathā means be disgusted, abandon this body, he shows. Thus, in this sutta, strong insight is spoken of. The sixth is in the same manner as stated. Here, only wisdom is spoken of with the Saññāsīsa.

7-8. Kulasuttādivaṇṇanā
7-8. Commentary on the Kula Sutta, etc.

17-18.Sattamena manāpena paccuṭṭhentīti manavaḍḍhanena manaṃ allīyanākārena āsanā vuṭṭhāya paccuggamanaṃ na karonti.Na manāpena abhivādentīti na pañcapatiṭṭhitena vandanti.Asakkaccaṃ dentīti acittīkārena denti.No sakkaccanti sahatthā na denti.Na upanisīdanti dhammasavanāyāti ‘‘dhammaṃ suṇissāmā’’ti na samīpe nisīdanti.Na sussūsantīti ghaṭapiṭṭhe āsittaudakaṃ viya vivaṭṭetvā gacchati. Aṭṭhame veneyyajjhāsayavasena mettābhāvanaṃ pakkhipitvānavaṅgasamannāgatoti vuttaṃ.

17-18.In the seventh, na manāpena paccuṭṭhentī means they do not rise from their seats to greet (the monks) in a manner that increases satisfaction, in a manner that makes the mind cling. Na manāpena abhivādentī means they do not salute with the five-point prostration. Asakkaccaṃ dentī means they give in a disrespectful manner. No sakkacca means they do not give with their own hands. Na upanisīdanti dhammasavanāyā means they do not sit nearby thinking, "We will listen to the Dhamma." Na sussūsantī means like water poured on a hot plate, it goes away, turning away. In the eighth, having inserted the meditation on loving-kindness according to the disposition of those to be trained, it is said navaṅgasamannāgato.

9. Devatāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Devatā Sutta

19.Navamevippaṭisāriniyoti vippaṭisāritaṃ maṅkubhāvaṃ āpajjimha.Hīnaṃ kāyanti uparidevalokaṃ upādāya heṭṭhimo hīnoti vuccati.No ca kho yathāsatti yathābalaṃ saṃvibhajimhāti attano sattiyā ca balassa ca anurūpena sīlavantānaṃ saṃvibhāgaṃ katvā na bhuñjimhā.

19.In the ninth, vippaṭisāriniyo means we fell into a state of remorse. Hīnaṃ kāya means the lower is called inferior (hīna), starting from the upper deva world. No ca kho yathāsatti yathābalaṃ saṃvibhajimhā means we did not enjoy after making a distribution to the virtuous according to our capacity and strength.

10. Velāmasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Velāma Sutta

20.Dasameapi nu te, gahapati, kule dānaṃ dīyatīti nayidaṃ bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ sandhāya pucchati. Seṭṭhissa hi ghare bhikkhusaṅghassa niccaṃ paṇītadānaṃ dīyati, na taṃ satthā na jānāti. Lokiyamahājanassa pana diyyamānadānaṃ atthi, taṃ lūkhaṃ hoti, seṭṭhissa cittaṃ na pīṇeti. Taṃ pucchāmīti pucchati.Kaṇājakanti sakuṇḍakabhattaṃ, sakuṇḍakehipi kaṇikataṇḍuleheva pakkaṃ.Biḷaṅgadutiyanti kañjiyadutiyaṃ.Asakkaccaṃ detīti asakkaritvā deti.Acittīkatvāti acittīkārena dakkhiṇeyya agāravena deti.Asahatthā detīti sahatthena adatvā parahatthena deti, āṇattimattameva karotīti attho.Apaviddhaṃ detīti na nirantaraṃ deti, saṃvaccharikaṃ soṇḍabali viya hoti.Anāgamanadiṭṭhiko detīti na kammañca phalañca saddahitvā deti.

20.In the tenth, api nu te, gahapati, kule dānaṃ dīyatī means the Blessed One does not ask this referring to the gift to the Sangha of monks. For excellent alms are constantly given to the Sangha of monks in the house of the wealthy man; the Teacher does not not know that. However, there is giving to the ordinary people in the world, but it is crude and does not please the wealthy man's mind. He asks, thinking, "I am asking about that." Kaṇājaka means rice cooked with broken rice, cooked even with grains of broken rice. Biḷaṅgadutiya means with sour gruel as the second. Asakkaccaṃ detī means he gives disrespectfully. Acittīkatvā means he gives without respect for those worthy of offerings, without reverence. Asahatthā detī means he gives not with his own hand, but with another's hand; the meaning is that he merely makes a command. Apaviddhaṃ detī means he does not give continuously; it is like an annual offering to spirits. Anāgamanadiṭṭhiko detī means he gives not believing in kamma and its result.

Yattha yatthāti tīsu kulasampadāsu yasmiṃ yasmiṃ kule.Na uḷārāya bhattabhogāyātiādīsu nānaggarasasugandhasālibhojane upanīte cittaṃ na namati, ‘‘harathetaṃ rogavaḍḍhana’’nti vatvā yena vā tena vā ḍākena saddhiṃ sakuṇḍakabhattaṃ amataṃ viya sampiyāyamāno bhuñjati. Kāsikādīsu varavatthesu upanītesu ‘‘harathetāni nivāsentassa paṭicchādetumpi na sakkonti, gattesupi na saṇṭhahantī’’ti vatvā nāḷikerasāṭakamūlatacasadisāni pana thūlavatthāni ‘‘imāni nivāsento nivatthabhāvampi jānāti, paṭicchādetabbampi paṭicchādentī’’ti sampiyāyamāno nivāseti. Hatthiyānaassayānarathayānasuvaṇṇasivikādīsu upanītesu ‘‘harathetāni calācalāni, na sakkā ettha nisīditu’’nti vatvā jajjararathake upanīte ‘‘ayaṃ niccalo, ettha sukhaṃ nisīditu’’nti taṃ sādiyati.Na uḷāresu pañcasu kāmaguṇesūti alaṅkatapaṭiyattā rūpavatiyo itthiyo disvā ‘‘yakkhiniyo maññe, etā khāditukāmā, kiṃ etāhī’’ti yathāphāsukeneva vītināmeti.Na sussūsantīti sotuṃ na icchanti, na saddahantīti attho.Na sotaṃ odahantīti kathitassa savanatthaṃ na sotapasādaṃ odahanti.Sakkaccantiādīni vuttavipariyāyena veditabbāni.

Yattha yatthā means in whichever family among the three kinds of family prosperity. Na uḷārāya bhattabhogāyā means when excellent food of rice with various tastes and fragrances is brought near, his mind does not incline, saying, "Take this away, it increases disease," and enjoying broken rice with gruel like ambrosia together with whatever gruel there is. When excellent cloths such as those from Kāsika are brought near, he says, "Take these away, they are not even able to cover and conceal him; they do not even stay on the body," but enjoying rough cloths like the inner bark of coconut cloth, thinking, "When one wears these, one knows the state of being clothed, and they also conceal what should be concealed," he puts them on. When excellent elephant vehicles, horse vehicles, chariot vehicles, palanquins of gold, etc., are brought near, he says, "Take these away, they are unsteady; it is not possible to sit here," and when a rickety cart is brought near, he approves of it, thinking, "This is steady; it is comfortable to sit here." Na uḷāresu pañcasu kāmaguṇesū means having seen women with beautiful forms, adorned and dressed, he passes the time as is comfortable, (thinking,) "I think they are ogresses; they want to eat (me); what is the use of these?" Na sussūsantī means they do not want to hear, the meaning is that they do not believe. Na sotaṃ odahantī means they do not lend the ear-faculty for the purpose of hearing what is said. Sakkacca etc., should be understood in the opposite way to what has been said.

Velāmoti jātigottarūpabhogasaddhāpaññādīhi mariyādavelaṃ atikkantehi uḷārehi guṇehi samannāgatattā evaṃladdhanāmo.So evarūpaṃ dānaṃ adāsi mahādānanti ettha ayaṃ anupubbīkathā – so kira atīte bārāṇasiyaṃ purohitagehe paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi, velāmakumārotissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. So soḷasavassakāle bārāṇasirājakumārena saddhiṃ sippuggahaṇatthaṃ takkasilaṃ agamāsi. Te ubhopi disāpāmokkhassa ācariyassa santike sippaṃ paṭṭhapayiṃsu. Yathā ca te, evaṃ aññepi jambudīpe caturāsītisahassarājakumārā. Bodhisatto attanā gahitaṭṭhāne piṭṭhiācariyo hutvā caturāsīti rājakumārasahassāni sikkhāpeti, sayampi soḷasavassehi gahetabbasippaṃ tīhi vassehi uggaṇhi. Ācariyo ‘‘velāmakumārassa sippaṃ paguṇa’’nti ñatvā, ‘‘tātā, velāmo mayā ñātaṃ sabbaṃ jānāti, tumhe sabbepi samaggā gantvā etassa santike sippaṃ uggaṇhathā’’ti caturāsīti kumārasahassāni bodhisattassa niyyādesi.

Velāmo means so named because he was endowed with excellent qualities surpassing the limit by way of birth, lineage, form, wealth, faith, wisdom, etc. So evarūpaṃ dānaṃ adāsi mahādāna means here is the connected account: It is said that in the past, he took rebirth in the house of a chaplain in Bārāṇasī, and they gave him the name Velāmakumāra. At the age of sixteen, he went to Takkasilā with the prince of Bārāṇasī to learn the arts. Both of them began to learn the arts in the presence of a teacher who was pre-eminent in all directions. Just as they did, so also did eighty-four thousand princes in Jambudīpa. The Bodhisatta, becoming the assistant teacher in the place taken by himself, taught eighty-four thousand princes, and he himself learned in three years the arts that should be learned in sixteen years. The teacher, knowing that Velāmakumāra was skilled in the arts, entrusted the eighty-four thousand princes to the Bodhisatta, (saying,) "Dear ones, Velāma knows everything that I know; all of you should go together and learn the arts in his presence."

Bodhisatto ācariyaṃ vanditvā caturāsīti kumārasahassaparivāro nikkhamitvā ekaṃ āsannanagaraṃ patvā nagarasāmikaṃ rājakumāraṃ uggaṇhāpetvā tassa sippe paguṇe jāte taṃ tattheva nivattesi. Etenupāyena caturāsīti nagarasahassāni gantvā caturāsītiyā rājakumārānaṃ sippaṃ paguṇaṃ kāretvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ nagare taṃ taṃ nivattetvā bārāṇasirājakumāraṃ ādāya bārāṇasiṃ paccāgañchi. Manussā kumāraṃ pariyositasippaṃ rajje abhisiñciṃsu, velāmassa purohitaṭṭhānaṃ adaṃsu. Tepi caturāsītisahassarājakumārā sakesu sakesu rajjesu abhisekaṃ patvā anusaṃvaccharaṃ bārāṇasirañño upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchanti. Te rājānaṃ disvā velāmassa santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘ācariya, amhe rajjesu patiṭṭhitā, vadeyyātha yenattho’’ti vatvā gacchanti. Tesaṃ gamanāgamanakāle sakaṭasandamānikagāvigoṇakukkuṭasūkarādayo gaṇhantānaṃ janapado ativiya upadduto hoti, mahājano sannipatitvā rājaṅgaṇe kandati.

Having paid homage to the teacher, the Bodhisatta, accompanied by eighty-four thousand princes, went out and reached a nearby city, and having made the prince who was the owner of the city learn and become skilled in the arts, he sent him back there. By this method, having gone to eighty-four thousand cities, and having made eighty-four thousand princes skilled in the arts, having sent back each one to that city, taking the prince of Bārāṇasī, he returned to Bārāṇasī. The people consecrated the prince, who had completed his training in the arts, to the kingdom, and they gave Velāma the position of chaplain. Those eighty-four thousand princes also, having obtained consecration in their respective kingdoms, used to come to attend upon the king of Bārāṇasī every year. Having seen the king, they would go to Velāma and, saying, "Teacher, we are established in our kingdoms; say what is needed," they would go away. At the time of their coming and going, the countryside was exceedingly oppressed by those taking carts, pack animals, cows, bulls, chickens, pigs, etc., and a great crowd gathered and wept in the royal courtyard.

Rājā velāmaṃ pakkositvā, ‘‘ācariya, upadduto janapado, rājāno gamanāgamanakāle mahāvilopaṃ karonti, manussā sandhāretuṃ na sakkonti, janapadapīḷāya upasamaṃ ekaṃ upāyaṃ karothā’’ti. Sādhu mahārāja, upāyaṃ karissāmi, tumhākaṃ yattakena janapadena attho, taṃ paricchinditvā gaṇhathāti. Rājā tathā akāsi. Velāmo caturāsītiyā rājasahassānaṃ janapade vicāretvā cakkanābhiyaṃ are viya rañño janapadasmiṃ oropesi. Tato paṭṭhāya te rājāno āgacchantāpi gacchantāpi attano attano janapadeneva sañcaranti, amhākaṃ janapadoti vilopaṃ na karonti. Rājagāravena rañño janapadampi na pīḷenti. Janapadā sannisinnā nissaddā niravā ahesuṃ. Sabbe rājāno haṭṭhatuṭṭhā ‘‘yena vo, ācariya, attho, taṃ amhākaṃ vadethā’’ti pavārayiṃsu.

The king summoned Velāma and said, "Teacher, the countryside is oppressed; the kings cause great devastation at the time of coming and going; people are not able to endure it; do something to allay the oppression of the countryside." "Good, great king, I will do something; take and demarcate as much of the countryside as is needed by you." The king did so. Velāma, having surveyed the countryside of the eighty-four thousand kings, inserted it into the king's countryside like spokes into a wheel's hub. From then on, those kings, even when coming and going, traveled only in their own countryside; they did not cause devastation, saying, "This is our countryside." Out of respect for the king, they did not even oppress the king's countryside. The countrysides were settled, silent, and free from disturbance. All the kings, delighted and pleased, offered, "Say, teacher, what is needed by you from us."

Velāmo sīsaṃnhāto attano antonivesane sattaratanaparipūrānaṃ gabbhānaṃ dvārāni vivarāpetvā yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā ṭhapitaṃ dhanaṃ oloketvā āyavayaṃ upadhāretvā ‘‘mayā sakalajambudīpaṃ khobhentena dānaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti rañño ārocetvā gaṅgātīre dvādasayojanikā uddhanapantiyo kāretvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne sappimadhuphāṇitatelatilataṇḍulādīnaṃ ṭhapanatthāya mahākoṭṭhāgārāni patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘ekekasmiṃ ṭhāne ettakā ettakā janā saṃvidahatha, yaṃkiñci manussānaṃ laddhabbaṃ nāma atthi, tato ekasmimpi asati mayhaṃ āroceyyāthā’’ti manusse saṃvidhāya ‘‘asukadivasato paṭṭhāya velāmabrāhmaṇassa dānaṃ bhuñjantū’’ti nagare bheriṃ carāpetvā ‘‘dānaggaṃ pariniṭṭhita’’nti dānayuttehi ārocite sahassagghanakaṃ vatthaṃ nivāsetvā pañcasatagghanakaṃ ekaṃsaṃ katvā sabbālaṅkārabhūsito dānavīmaṃsanatthāya phalikavaṇṇassa udakassa suvaṇṇabhiṅgāraṃ pūretvā ‘‘imasmiṃ loke sace imaṃ dānaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yuttarūpā dakkhiṇeyyapuggalā atthi, idaṃ udakaṃ nikkhamitvā pathaviṃ gaṇhātu. Sace natthi, evameva tiṭṭhatū’’ti saccakiriyaṃ katvā bhiṅgāraṃ adhomukhaṃ akāsi. Udakaṃ dhamakaraṇena gahitaṃ viya ahosi. Bodhisatto ‘‘suñño vata, bho, jambudīpo, ekapuggalopi dakkhiṇaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yuttarūpo natthī’’ti vippaṭisāraṃ akatvā ‘‘sace dāyakassa vasenāyaṃ dakkhiṇā visujjhissati, udakaṃ nikkhamitvā pathaviṃ gaṇhātū’’ti cintesi. Phalikavaṇṇasadisaṃ udakaṃ nikkhamitvā pathaviṃ gaṇhi. ‘‘Idāni dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti dānaggaṃ patvā dānaṃ oloketvā yāguvelāya yāguṃ, khajjakavelāya khajjakaṃ, bhojanavelāya bhojanaṃ dāpesi. Eteneva nīhārena divase divase dānaṃ dīyati.

Velāma, having bathed his head, opened the doors of the seven jewel-filled storehouses in his inner residence, and having looked at the wealth placed there for seven generations, having ascertained the income and expenditure, thinking, "It is fitting for me to give a gift that would stir up the whole of Jambudīpa," having informed the king, having had rows of raised platforms made for twelve yojanas along the bank of the Ganges, and having established great storehouses in that place for the storing of clarified butter, honey, molasses, oil, sesame, rice, etc., having arranged for people, (saying,) "So many people should manage in each place; if there is anything at all that should be obtained by people and it is not there, you should inform me," having had a drum paraded in the city (saying,) "Let people enjoy the alms of Velāma the brahmin from such and such a day," when it was reported by those engaged in almsgiving that "the alms hall is completed," having dressed himself in a cloth worth a thousand (gold coins) and having made an upper robe worth five hundred (gold coins), adorned with all kinds of ornaments, filling a golden pitcher of water of the color of crystal for the purpose of examining the gift, having made a declaration of truth, (saying,) "If in this world there are suitable individuals worthy of receiving this gift, may this water come out and touch the earth. If there are not, may it remain just so," he turned the pitcher upside down. The water was as if held by Dhamma. The Bodhisatta, without feeling remorse (thinking,) "Empty indeed, good sir, is Jambudīpa; there is not even one individual fit to receive alms," considered, "If this offering will be purified by virtue of the giver, may the water come out and touch the earth." Water resembling crystal came out and touched the earth. "Now I will give alms," having reached the alms hall, having looked at the alms, he gave gruel at gruel time, hard food at hard-food time, and staple food at food time. Alms were given day by day in just this manner.

Tasmiṃ kho pana dānagge ‘‘idaṃ nāma atthi, idaṃ nāma natthī’’ti vattabbaṃ natthi. Idāni taṃ dānaṃ ettakamatteneva na niṭṭhaṃ gamissatīti rattasuvaṇṇaṃ nīharāpetvā suvaṇṇapātiyo kāretvā caturāsītisuvaṇṇapātisahassādīnaṃ atthāya caturāsītirājasahassānaṃ sāsanaṃ pahiṇi. Rājāno ‘‘cirassaṃ vata mayaṃ ācariyena anuggahitā’’ti sabbaṃ sampādetvā pesesuṃ. Dāne diyyamāneyeva satta vassāni satta māsā atikkantā. Atha brāhmaṇo ‘‘hiraññaṃ bhājetvā dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti mahante okāse dānaṃ sajjāpesi. Sajjāpetvā caturāsīti suvaṇṇapātisahassāni ādiṃ katvā koṭito paṭṭhāya adāsi.

However, in that alms hall, there was nothing that should be said, "This exists, this does not exist." Now, thinking that that alms will not be completed with just this much, having had red gold extracted and having had golden bowls made, he sent a message to the eighty-four thousand kings for the sake of eighty-four thousand golden bowls, etc. The kings, (thinking,) "After a long time we have been favored by the teacher," having prepared everything, sent (the bowls). Even while the alms were being given, seven years and seven months had passed. Then the brahmin, thinking, "I will divide the gold and give alms," prepared the alms in a large open space. Having prepared (them), beginning with eighty-four thousand golden bowls, he gave from the heap.

rūpiyapūrānīti rajatataṭṭirajataphālarajatamāsakehi pūrāni. Pātiyo pana khuddikāti na sallakkhetabbā, ekakarīsappamāṇe bhūmibhāge catassova pātiyo ṭhapayiṃsu. Pātimakuḷaṃ navaratanaṃ hoti, mukhavaṭṭito paṭṭhāya aṭṭharatanaṃ, pātimukhavaṭṭiyā chayutto ājaññaratho anupariyāyati, dadamāno pātiyā bāhirantena vaggavagge paṭiggāhake ṭhapetvā paṭhamaṃ pātiyā pakkhittaṃ datvā pacchā sandhisandhito viyojetvā pātinti evaṃ caturāsīti pātisahassāni adāsi.Rūpiyapātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Etthapi casuvaṇṇapūrānīti suvaṇṇataṭṭisuvaṇṇaphālasuvaṇṇamāsakehi pūrāni.Hiraññapūrānīti sattavidharatanapūrāni.Sovaṇṇālaṅkārānīti suvaṇṇālaṅkārāni.Kaṃsūpadhāraṇānīti rajatamayakhīrapaṭicchakāni. Tāsaṃ pana dhenūnaṃ siṅgāni suvaṇṇakosakapariyonaddhāni ahesuṃ, gīvāya sumanadāmaṃ piḷandhiṃsu, catūsu pādesu nupūrāni, piṭṭhiyaṃ varadukūlaṃ pārutaṃ, kaṇṭhe suvaṇṇaghaṇṭaṃ bandhiṃsu.Vatthakoṭisahassānīti lokavohārato vīsativatthayugāni ekā koṭi, idha pana dasa sāṭakāti vuttaṃ.Khomasukhumānantiādimhi khomādīsu yaṃ yaṃ sukhumaṃ, taṃ tadeva adāsi. Yāni panetāni itthidānaṃ usabhadānaṃ majjadānaṃ samajjādānanti adānasammatāni, tānipi esa ‘‘velāmassa dānamukhe idaṃ nāma natthī’’ti vacanapathaṃ pacchindituṃ parivāratthāya adāsi.Najjo maññe vissandantīti nadiyo viya vissandanti.

rūpiyapūrānīti filled with silver trays, silver chips, and silver coins. However, the pātiyo should not be considered small; they placed only four pātiyo in an area the size of one karīsa. The pātimakuḷa consisted of nine jewels: eight jewels starting from the mouth's rim, and an ājaññaratha encircled the mouth's rim, constantly giving, placing recipients group by group on the outer edge of the pāti, first giving what was placed in the pāti, then separating joint by joint, thus he gave eighty-four thousand pātiyo. The same method applies to rūpiyapāti and others. Also, in this context, suvaṇṇapūrānīti filled with gold trays, gold chips, and gold coins. Hiraññapūrānīti filled with seven kinds of jewels. Sovaṇṇālaṅkārānīti golden ornaments. Kaṃsūpadhāraṇānīti silver milk-receiving bowls. The cows' horns were covered with golden sheaths, they wore garlands of jasmine around their necks, anklets on all four feet, fine varadukūla cloth draped on their backs, and golden bells tied around their necks. Vatthakoṭisahassānīti according to common usage, twenty pairs of cloths make one koṭi; here, however, it is said to be ten sāṭaka. In khomasukhumānanti etc., whatever was fine among khoma etc., that itself was given. Those gifts that are not approved, namely gifts to women, gifts of bulls, gifts of alcohol, gifts of entertainment, these he gave as entourage gifts to cut off the path of the statement, "There is no such thing as the face of Velāma's giving." Najjo maññe vissandantīti they flowed like rivers.

siyā kho pana tetiādimāha. Nanu ca yāni tadā ahesuṃ rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇāni, tāni niruddhāni? Kasmā ‘‘ahaṃ tena samayena velāmo brāhmaṇo’’ti āhāti? Paveṇiyā avicchinnattā. Tāni hi rūpādīni nirujjhamānāni imesaṃ paccaye datvā niruddhāni aparāparaṃ avicchinnaṃ paveṇiṃ gahetvā evamāha.Na taṃ koci dakkhiṇaṃ sodhetīti koci samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā uṭṭhāya taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ sodhetīti vattabbo nāhosi. Tañhi dakkhiṇaṃ sodhento uttamakoṭiyā buddho, heṭṭhimakoṭiyā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherasadiso sāvako sodheyya.

He spoke beginning with siyā kho pana teti. But aren't those rūpa, vedanā, saññā, saṅkhāra, and viññāṇa that existed then, ceased? Why does he say, "I was Velāma the Brahmin at that time"? Because of the unbroken continuity. Those rūpa, etc., having ceased, having given the conditions to these, ceased, taking an uninterrupted continuity again and again, thus he speaks. Na taṃ koci dakkhiṇaṃ sodhetīti no ascetic, brahmin, deva, or Māra could stand up and say that that gift is to be purified. For one purifying that gift, at the highest level it would be a Buddha, at the lowest level, a disciple similar to the Dhamma Commander Sāriputta Thera could purify it.

Diṭṭhisampannanti dassanasampannaṃ sotāpannaṃ.Idaṃ tato mahapphalataranti idaṃ sotāpannassa dinnadānaṃ lokiyamahājanassa sattamāsādhikāni satta saṃvaccharāni ettakaṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ pariccajantena dinnadānato mahapphalaṃ.

Diṭṭhisampannanti possessor of vision, a sotāpanna. Idaṃ tato mahapphalataranti this gift given to a sotāpanna is more fruitful than the gift given by a worldly person sacrificing so much gold and silver for seven years and seven months.

Yo ca sataṃ diṭṭhisampannānanti ettha ekassa sakadāgāmissa vasena ekuttarasataṃ sotāpanne katvā sotāpannagaṇanā veditabbā. Iminā upāyena sabbavāresu heṭṭhā heṭṭhā āgate anantarena sataguṇaṃ katvā puggalagaṇanā veditabbā.

Yo ca sataṃ diṭṭhisampannānanti here, by making one sakadāgāmī into one hundred sotāpannas, the calculation of sotāpannas should be understood. By this method, in all instances, having multiplied by one hundred times what comes below, the calculation of individuals should be understood.

Buddhappamukhanti ettha sammāsambuddhaṃ saṅghattheraṃ katvā nisinno saṅgho buddhappamukho saṅghoti veditabbo.Cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissāti ettha cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa katavihāro nāma yattha cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ hoti, dhammassavanaṃ karīyati, catūhi disāhi anudisāhi ca bhikkhū āgantvā appaṭipucchitvāyeva pāde dhovitvā kuñcikāya dvāraṃ vivaritvā senāsanaṃ paṭijaggitvā vasitvā yathāphāsukaṃ gacchanti. So antamaso caturataniyā paṇṇasālāpi hotu, cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa katavihārotveva vuccati.

Buddhappamukhanti here, the Saṅgha with the Sammāsambuddha as the Sangha's elder should be understood as the Saṅgha headed by the Buddha. Cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissāti here, a monastery built dedicating to the Sangha of the four directions is named where a cetiya is established, the Dhamma is heard, and bhikkhus come from the four directions and intermediate directions, and without asking anyone, having washed their feet, having opened the door with a key, having prepared the lodging, having lived there, they leave as they please. Even if it is at least a four-cubit leaf hut, it is still called a monastery built dedicating to the Sangha of the four directions.

Saraṇaṃ gaccheyyāti ettha maggenāgataṃ anivattanasaraṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Apare panāhu – attānaṃ niyyādetvā dinnattā saraṇāgamanaṃ tato mahapphalataranti vuttaṃ.Sikkhāpadāni samādiyeyyāti pañca sīlāni gaṇheyya. Sīlampi maggena āgataṃ anivattanasīlameva kathitaṃ. Apare panāhu – sabbasattānaṃ abhayadānassa dinnattā sīlaṃ tato mahapphalataranti vuttaṃ.Gandhohanamattanti gandhaūhanamattaṃ, dvīhaṅgulīhi gaṇḍapiṇḍaṃ gahetvā upasiṅghanamattaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘gaddohanamatta’’nti pāḷiṃ vatvā gāviyā ekavāraṃ thanaañchanamattanti atthaṃ vadanti.Mettacittanti sabbasattānaṃ hitānupharaṇacittaṃ. Taṃ pana appanāvaseneva gahitaṃ.Aniccasaññanti maggassa anantarapaccayabhāvena sikhāpattabalavavipassanaṃ.

Saraṇaṃ gaccheyyāti here, the irreversible refuge that comes with the path is intended. Others say – because of offering oneself having given, taking refuge is said to be more fruitful than that. Sikkhāpadāni samādiyeyyāti should take the five precepts. The sīla also spoken of is the irreversible sīla that comes with the path. Others say – because of giving the gift of safety to all beings, sīla is said to be more fruitful than that. Gandhohanamattanti just the amount of smelling, just the amount of lifting up fragrance, just the amount of taking a lump of paste with two fingers and smelling it. Others, however, saying the reading is "gaddohanamatta," say the meaning is just the amount of one milking of a cow. Mettacittanti the mind that spreads benefit to all beings. That, however, is taken only at the level of appanā. Aniccasaññanti strong vipassanā that has reached the peak, due to being the immediately preceding condition for the path.

Upamāto pana imāni dānādīni puññāni evaṃ veditabbāni – sacepi hi jambudīpaṃ bheritalasadisaṃ samatalaṃ katvā koṭito paṭṭhāya pallaṅke attharitvā ariyapuggale nisīdāpeyya, tattha sotāpannānaṃ dasa pantiyo assu, sakadāgāmīnaṃ pañca, anāgāmīnaṃ aḍḍhateyyā, khiṇāsavānaṃ diyaḍḍhā, paccekabuddhānaṃ ekā panti bhaveyya, sammāsambuddho ekakova. Ettakassa janassa dinnadānato sammāsambuddhassa dinnameva mahapphalaṃ. Itaraṃ pana –

From the simile, however, these gifts, etc., should be understood thus – even if Jambudīpa were made level like a drum, and having spread out couches starting from the edge, and seated noble individuals, there would be ten rows of sotāpannas, five of sakadāgāmīs, one and a half of anāgāmīs, one and a half of khīṇāsavas, and one row of paccekabuddhas, the Sammāsambuddha is only one. From the gift given to such a crowd, only the gift given to the Sammāsambuddha is more fruitful. The other, however –

‘‘Vihāradānaṃ paṇipāto, sikkhā mettāya bhāvanā;

"A gift of a monastery, reverence, training, and the development of mettā;
Compared to the destruction by one who correctly understands, is not worth a sixteenth part."

Teneva bhagavā parinibbānasamaye ‘‘dhammānudhammappaṭipatti anuttarā pūjā’’ti āha. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Therefore, the Blessed One at the time of Parinibbāna said, "The practice of Dhamma in accordance with the Dhamma is the unsurpassed worship." The rest is clear in meaning everywhere.

3. Sattāvāsavaggo

3. Sattāvāsavaggo

1. Tiṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Tiṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā

21.Tatiyassa paṭhameuttarakurukāti uttarakuruvāsino.Adhiggaṇhantīti adhibhavanti, adhikā visiṭṭhā jeṭṭhakā honti.Amamāti nittaṇhā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana niddukkhāti vuttaṃ.Apariggahāti ‘‘idaṃ mayha’’nti pariggaharahitā.Niyatāyukāti tesañhi nibaddhaṃ āyu vassasahassameva, gatipi nibaddhā, tato cavitvā saggeyeva nibbattanti.Satimantoti devatānañhi ekantasukhitāya sati thirā na hoti, nerayikānaṃ ekantadukkhitāya. Imesaṃ pana vokiṇṇasukhadukkhattā sati thirā hoti.Idha brahmacariyavāsoti jambudīpe buddhapaccekabuddhānaṃ uppajjanato aṭṭhaṅgikamaggabrahmacariyavāsopi idheva hoti.

21.In the first of the third, uttarakurukāti inhabitants of Uttarakuru. Adhiggaṇhantīti they overcome, are superior, are excellent, are elders. Amamāti without craving. In the commentary, however, it is said to be without suffering. Apariggahāti without possession, without "this is mine." Niyatāyukāti for them, their fixed lifespan is only one thousand years, and their destination is also fixed; having passed away from there, they are reborn only in the heavens. Satimantoti for devas, their mindfulness is not stable because they are only happy, for hell beings because they are only suffering. But for these ones, because of mixed happiness and suffering, mindfulness is stable. Idha brahmacariyavāsoti in Jambudīpa, because Buddhas and Paccekabuddhas arise, the Brahmacariya life of the Noble Eightfold Path also exists here.

2. Assakhaḷuṅkasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Assakhaḷuṅkasuttavaṇṇanā

22.Dutiyejavasampannoti padajavena sampanno.Na vaṇṇasampannoti na sarīravaṇṇena sampanno. Purisakhaḷuṅkesujavasampannoti ñāṇajavena sampanno.Na vaṇṇasampannoti na guṇavaṇṇena sampanno. Sesaṃ pāḷinayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yañhettha vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ tikanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.

22.In the second, javasampannoti endowed with speed of foot. Na vaṇṇasampannoti not endowed with beauty of body. Among male foals, javasampannoti endowed with speed of knowledge. Na vaṇṇasampannoti not endowed with beauty of virtue. The rest should be understood according to the Pali method. Whatever there may be to say here has already been said in the Tikanipāta commentary.

3. Taṇhāmūlakasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Taṇhāmūlakasuttavaṇṇanā

23.Tatiyetaṇhaṃ paṭiccāti dve taṇhā esanataṇhā esitataṇhā ca. Yāya taṇhāya ajapathasaṅkupathādīni paṭipajjitvā bhoge esati gavesati, ayaṃ esanataṇhā nāma. Yā tesu esitesu gavesitesu paṭiladdhesu taṇhā, ayaṃ esitataṇhā nāma. Idha pana esanataṇhā daṭṭhabbā.Pariyesanāti rūpādiārammaṇapariyesanā. Sā hi esanataṇhāya sati hoti.Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇapaṭilābho. So hi pariyesanāya sati hoti.

23.In the third, taṇhaṃ paṭiccāti two kinds of craving: searching craving and searched craving. By whichever craving, having undertaken rough paths and crooked paths, one seeks and searches for enjoyments, this is called searching craving. Whatever craving is in those sought and searched for, upon obtaining them, this is called searched craving. Here, however, searching craving should be seen. Pariyesanāti searching for objects such as rūpa, etc. For that happens when there is searching craving. Lābhoti obtaining objects such as rūpa, etc. For that happens when there is searching.

Vinicchayopana ñāṇataṇhādiṭṭhivitakkavasena catubbidho. Tattha ‘‘sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā, sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.323) ayaṃ ñāṇavinicchayo. ‘‘Vinicchayāti dve vinicchayā taṇhāvinicchayo ca diṭṭhivinicchayo cā’’ti (mahāni. 102) evaṃ āgatāni aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni taṇhāvinicchayo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhivinicchayo. ‘‘Chando kho, devānaminda, vitakkanidāno’’ti (dī. ni. 2.358) imasmiṃ pana sutte idha vinicchayoti vutto vitakkoyeva āgato. Lābhaṃ labhitvā hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ sundarāsundaraṃ vitakkeneva vinicchinanti ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddhārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissati, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ –lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayoti.

Vinicchayo, however, is fourfold in terms of knowledge, craving, views, and thought. Therein, "One should know the determination of happiness; having known the determination of happiness, one should devote oneself to internal happiness" (ma. ni. 3.323); this is the determination of knowledge. "Determinations are two kinds of determinations: determination of craving and determination of views" (mahāni. 102); the craving determinations are the craving operations that come thus, in eight hundreds. The sixty-two views are the view determinations. "Desire, O Devas' King, is the basis of thought" (dī. ni. 2.358); in this sutta, however, what is said to be determination here comes as only thought. For having obtained gain, they determine what is desirable and undesirable, beautiful and unbeautiful only by thought, "So much will be for the purpose of rūpa objects for me, so much for the purpose of sadda objects, so much will be for me, so much for others, so much I will enjoy, so much I will store away." Therefore, it was said – lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayoti.

Chandarāgoti evaṃ akusalavitakkena vitakkite vatthusmiṃ dubbalarāgo ca balavarāgo ca uppajjati. Idañhi idha chandoti dubbalarāgassādhivacanaṃ.Ajjhosānanti ahaṃ mamanti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ.Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇaṃ.Macchariyanti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti – ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti.Ārakkhoti dvārapidahanamañjūsāgopanādivasena suṭṭhu rakkhanaṃ. Adhikarotītiadhikaraṇaṃ,kāraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, ārakkhāhetūti attho.Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃdaṇḍādānaṃ. Ekato dhārādino satthassa ādānaṃsatthādānaṃ. Kalahoti kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi. Purimoviggaho,pacchimovivādo(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103). Tuvaṃtuvanti agāravavasenatuvaṃtuvaṃvacanaṃ.

Chandarāgoti thus, in an object thought about with unwholesome thought, both weak lust and strong lust arise. Here, desire is a term for weak lust. Ajjhosānanti the strong determination of "I" and "mine". Pariggahoti the act of possessing in terms of craving and views. Macchariyanti intolerance of others having a common share. Therefore, the ancients say its meaning is thus – "Because it proceeds with 'let this wonderful thing be mine alone, let there not be a wonderful thing for another,' it is called macchariya." Ārakkhoti well protecting in terms of guarding the doorway, guarding the box, etc. Adhikarotīti adhikaraṇaṃ, this is a name for cause. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti is neuter gender, the meaning is because of protection. In daṇḍādānādi, taking up a stick for the purpose of preventing others is daṇḍādānaṃ. Taking up a weapon with a sharp edge on one side is satthādānaṃ. Kalahoti is either a bodily quarrel or a verbal quarrel. The former is viggaho, the latter is vivādo (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103). Tuvaṃtuvaṃvacanaṃ is the utterance of "you, you" in a disrespectful manner.

4. Sattāvāsasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Sattāvāsasuttavaṇṇanā

24.Catutthesattāvāsāti sattānaṃ āvāsā, vasanaṭṭhānānīti attho. Tattha suddhāvāsāpi sattāvāsova, asabbakālikattā pana na gahitā. Suddhāvāsā hi buddhānaṃ khandhāvāraṭṭhānasadisā, asaṅkheyyakappe buddhesu anibbattesu taṃ ṭhānaṃ suññaṃ hoti. Iti asabbakālikattā na gahitā. Sesamettha viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

24.In the fourth, sattāvāsāti abodes of beings, meaning places of dwelling. Therein, the Suddhāvāsas are also abodes of beings, but because they are not constant, they are not included. For the Suddhāvāsas are similar to the Buddha's rest stops; in asamkhyeya aeons, when Buddhas have not arisen, that place is empty. Thus, because they are not constant, they are not included. The rest here should be understood in the same way as said in the viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

5. Paññāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Paññāsuttavaṇṇanā

25.Pañcameyatoti yasmiṃ kāle.Suparicitaṃ hotīti suṭṭhu upacitaṃ suvaḍḍhitaṃ hoti.Kallaṃ vacanāyāti yuttaṃ vattuṃ.Vītarāganti vigatarāgaṃ.Asarāgadhammanti na sarajjanasabhāvaṃ.Anāvattidhammanti anāvattanasabhāvaṃ anibbattārahaṃ, appaṭisandhikabhāveneva nirujjhanasabhāvanti attho. Imasmiṃ sutte khīṇāsavova kathito.

25.In the fifth, yatoti at which time. Suparicitaṃ hotīti is well accumulated, well developed. Kallaṃ vacanāyāti fit to speak. Vītarāganti devoid of rāga. Asarāgadhammanti not of a nature to be attached. Anāvattidhammanti of a nature not to return, not fit to be reborn, of a nature to cease only by way of non-relinking. In this sutta, only the khīṇāsava is spoken of.

6. Silāyūpasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Silāyūpasuttavaṇṇanā

26.Chaṭṭhecandikāputtoti mātu nāmavasena paññāto candikāputtatthero.Cetasā cittaṃ hotīti cittavārapariyāyena cittavārapariyāyo cito vaḍḍhito hoti.Cetasā cittaṃ suparicitanti cittavārapariyāyena cittavārapariyāyo uparūpari sucito suvaḍḍhito hoti.Nevassa cittaṃ pariyādiyantīti tāni ārammaṇāni tassa khīṇāsavassa cittuppādaṃ gahetvā khepetvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti.Amissīkatanti tāni ārammaṇāni anallīnattā tehi amissīkataṃ.Āneñjappattanti aniñjanabhāvaṃ nipphandanabhāvaṃ pattaṃ.

26.In the sixth, candikāputtoti Candikāputta Thera, known by the name of his mother. Cetasā cittaṃ hotīti the cittavārapariyāyo with respect to the cittavārapariyāyo is accumulated, developed. Cetasā cittaṃ suparicitanti the cittavārapariyāyo with respect to the cittavārapariyāyo is thoroughly accumulated on top of each other, well developed. Nevassa cittaṃ pariyādiyantīti those objects are not able to take hold of and exhaust the mind-moment of that khīṇāsava. Amissīkatanti because those objects are not attached, it is unmixed with them. Āneñjappattanti having attained the state of non-wavering, the state of non-moving.

Silāyūpoti silāthambho.Soḷasakukkukoti dīghato soḷasahattho.Heṭṭhānemaṅgamāti āvāṭassa heṭṭhāgatā.Upari nemassāti upari āvāṭassa.Sunikhātattāti ayamusalehi koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā suṭṭhu nikhātattā.Evameva khoti ettha silāyūpo viya khīṇāsavo daṭṭhabbo, mahāvātā viya chasu dvāresu uppajjanakā kilesā, catūhi disāhi āgantvā vātānaṃ silāyūpaṃ cāletuṃ asamatthabhāvo viya chasu dvāresu uppajjanakakilesānaṃ khīṇāsavassa cittaṃ cāletuṃ asamatthabhāvo veditabbo. Imasmimpi sutte khīṇāsavova kathito.

Silāyūpoti a stone pillar. Soḷasakukkukoti sixteen cubits in height. Heṭṭhānemaṅgamāti gone below the pit. Upari nemassāti above the pit. Sunikhātattāti because it is well fixed by pounding and pounding with mallets. Evameva khoti here, the khīṇāsava should be seen like the stone pillar, the defilements arising at the six doors like the great winds, just as the winds coming from the four directions are unable to shake the stone pillar, so too the inability of the defilements arising at the six doors to shake the khīṇāsava's mind should be understood. In this sutta too, only the khīṇāsava is spoken of.

7-8. Verasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
7-8. Verasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

27-28.Sattamebhayaṃ veraṃ pasavatīti cittutrāsabhayañca puggalaverañca paṭilabhati.Cetasikanti cittanissitaṃ.Dukkhanti kāyavatthukaṃ.Domanassanti paṭighasampayuttadukkhaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte sotāpattimaggo kathito. Aṭṭhamaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa kathitaṃ, imasmiṃ pana sotāpannova kathitoti vuttaṃ.

27-28.In the seventh, bhayaṃ veraṃ pasavatīti obtains both the fear of mental agitation and personal animosity. Cetasikanti dependent on the mind. Dukkhanti physical. Domanassanti suffering associated with aversion. In this sutta, the sotāpattimagga is spoken of. The eighth was spoken to the bhikkhu Saṅgha; in this one, however, it is said that only the sotāpanna is spoken of.

9. Āghātavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
9. Āghātavatthusuttavaṇṇanā

29.Navameāghātavatthūnīti āghātakāraṇāni.Āghātaṃ bandhatīti kopaṃ bandhati uppādeti.

29. In the ninth, āghātavatthūni means the causes of resentment. Āghātaṃ bandhati means he binds or generates anger.

10-11. Āghātapaṭivinayasuttādivaṇṇanā
10-11. Explanation of the Āghātapaṭivinayasutta, etc.

30-31.Dasameāghātapaṭivinayāti āghātassa paṭivinayakāraṇāni.Taṃkutettha labbhāti ‘‘taṃ anatthacaraṇaṃ mā ahosī’’ti etasmiṃ puggale kuto labbhā, kena kāraṇena sakkā laddhuṃ, ‘‘paro nāma parassa attano cittaruciyā anatthaṃ karotī’’ti evaṃ cintetvā āghātaṃ paṭivineti. Atha vā sacāhaṃ kopaṃ kareyyaṃ, taṃ kopakaraṇaṃ ettha puggale kuto labbhā, kena kāraṇena laddhabbanti attho. Kuto lābhātipi pāṭho. Sacāhaṃ ettha kopaṃ kareyyaṃ, tasmiṃ me kopakaraṇe kuto lābhā lābhā, nāma ke siyunti attho. Imasmiñca atthetanti nipātamattameva hoti. Ekādasameanupubbanirodhāti anupaṭipāṭinirodhā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

30-31. In the tenth, āghātapaṭivinayā means the causes for the removal of resentment. Taṃ kutettha labbhā means, "From where can that be obtained in this person such that this person does not perform what is harmful?" By what means is it possible to obtain, thinking, "Another person harms another according to their own inclinations?" Thus, he removes resentment. Or, if I were to get angry, from where could that cause of anger be obtained in this person? By what means could it be obtained? That is the meaning. "Kuto lābhātipi" is also a reading. If I were to get angry here, from where would there be gain, what would be the gains in that cause of anger for me? That is the meaning. And in this meaning, ta is merely an expletive. In the eleventh, anupubbanirodhā means gradual cessation. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

4. Mahāvaggo

4. The Great Chapter

1-2. Anupubbavihārasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-2. Explanation of the Anupubbavihārasutta, etc.

32-33.Catutthassa paṭhameanupubbavihārāti anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbavihārā. Dutiyeyattha kāmā nirujjhantīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne kāmā vūpasammanti.Nirodhetvāti appaṭivatte katvā.Nicchātāti taṇhādiṭṭhicchātānaṃ abhāvena nicchātā.Nibbutāti attaparitāpanakilesānaṃ abhāvena nibbutā.Tiṇṇāti kāmato tiṇṇā.Pāraṃgatāti kāme pāraṃ gatā.Tadaṅgenāti tena jhānaṅgena.Etthakāmā nirujjhantīti ettha paṭhamajjhāne kāmā nirujjhanti.Te cāti ye paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjanti, te kāme nirodhetvā nirodhetvā viharanti nāma.Pañjalikoti paggahitaañjaliko hutvā.Payirupāseyyāti upaṭṭhāpeyya. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

32-33. In the first of the fourth (chapter), anupubbavihārā means the abodes to be attained in sequence. In the second, yattha kāmā nirujjhantī means the place where sensual pleasures cease. Nirodhetvā means having made them non-recurring. Nicchātā means without hunger due to the absence of craving and wrong views. Nibbutā means extinguished due to the absence of self-tormenting defilements. Tiṇṇā means having crossed over sensual pleasures. Pāraṃgatā means having gone beyond sensual pleasures. Tadaṅgenā means by that factor of jhāna. Ettha kāmā nirujjhantī means sensual pleasures cease in this first jhāna. Te cā means those who attain the first jhāna, they live having ceased sensual pleasures again and again. Pañjalikoti means having raised the joined palms. Payirupāseyyā means should attend upon. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

3. Nibbānasukhasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Nibbānasukhasuttavaṇṇanā

34.Tatiyeudāyīti lāḷudāyitthero.Etadeva khvetthāti etadeva kho ettha.Kāmasahagatāti kāmanissitā.Samudācarantīti manodvāre sañcaranti.Ābādhāyāti ābādhanāya pīḷanāya.Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena. Evaṃ sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Imasmiṃ sutte avedayitasukhaṃ nāma kathitaṃ.

34. In the third, udāyī means the Elder Lāḷudāyī. Etadeva khvetthā means just this here. Kāmasahagatā means associated with sensual pleasure. Samudācarantī means they circulate in the mind-door. Ābādhāyā means for afflicting, for tormenting. Pariyāyenā means by way of cause. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances. In this sutta, happiness that is not to be experienced has been spoken of.

4. Gāvīupamāsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Gāvīupamāsuttavaṇṇanā

35.Catutthepabbateyyāti pabbatacārinī.Na suppatiṭṭhitaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvāti yathā suppatiṭṭhitā hoti, evaṃ na patiṭṭhāpetvā.Taṃ nimittanti taṃ paṭhamajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ nimittaṃ.Na svādhiṭṭhitaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti yathā suṭṭhu adhiṭṭhitaṃ hoti, na evaṃ adhiṭṭhāti.Anabhihiṃsamānoti apothento aviheṭhento.Mudu cittaṃ hoti kammaññanti yathā vipassanācittaṃ lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe mudu kammakkhamaṃ kammayoggaṃ hoti, evamassa abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ mudu hoti kammaññaṃ.Appamāṇo samādhīti catubrahmavihārasamādhipi maggaphalasamādhipi appamāṇo samādhi nāma, idha pana ‘‘appamāṇaṃ appamāṇārammaṇa’’nti iminā pariyāyena suppaguṇasamādhi appamāṇasamādhīti daṭṭhabbo.So appamāṇena samādhinā subhāvitenāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne ayaṃ bhikkhu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ patto. Idāni khīṇāsavassa abhiññāpaṭipāṭiṃ dassentoyassa yassa cātiādimāha.

35. In the fourth, pabbateyyā means dwelling on a mountain. Na suppatiṭṭhitaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā means not establishing it in such a way that it is well-established. Taṃ nimitta means that sign which is reckoned as the first jhāna. Na svādhiṭṭhitaṃ adhiṭṭhātī means he does not resolve in such a way that it is well-resolved. Anabhihiṃsamāno means not striking, not harming. Mudu cittaṃ hoti kammañña means just as the mind in insight (vipassanā) is pliant and workable at the moment of the supramundane path, so his fourth jhāna mind, which is the basis for the supernormal knowledges (abhiññā), is pliant and workable. Appamāṇo samādhī means the concentration of the four Brahmā-vihāras and the concentration of the paths and fruits are also called immeasurable concentration, but here, the well-developed concentration with "immeasurable as the object of the immeasurable" should be seen as immeasurable concentration. So appamāṇena samādhinā subhāvitenā means in this place, this bhikkhu, having developed insight, attained arahantship. Now, showing the sequence of supernormal knowledges of one whose taints are destroyed, he said, beginning with yassa yassa cā.

5. Jhānasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Jhānasuttavaṇṇanā

36.Pañcameāsavānaṃ khayanti arahattaṃ.Yadeva tattha hoti rūpagatanti tasmiṃ paṭhamajjhānakkhaṇe vatthuvasena vā cittasamuṭṭhānikādivasena vā yaṃ rūpaṃ nāma pavattati.Vedanāgatādīni sampayuttavedanādīnaṃ vasena veditabbāni.Te dhammeti te rūpādayo pañcakkhandhadhamme.Aniccatotiādīsu hutvā abhāvākārenaaniccato,paṭipīḷanākārenadukkhato,rujjanākārenarogato,antodussanaṭṭhenagaṇḍato,anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena anukantanaṭṭhena casallato,dukkhaṭṭhenaaghato,ābādhanaṭṭhenaābādhato,asakaṭṭhenaparato,palujjanaṭṭhenapalokato,assāmikaṭṭhenasuññato,avasavattanaṭṭhenaanattato.Samanupassatīti balavavipassanāpaññāya passati.

36. In the fifth, āsavānaṃ khaya means arahantship. Yadeva tattha hoti rūpagata means whatever form, in terms of substance or as arising from mind, etc., occurs at that moment of the first jhāna. Vedanāgatā, etc., should be understood in terms of associated feeling, etc. Te dhamme means those five aggregates of existence beginning with form. Aniccato, etc., in the mode of non-existence, as anicccato, in the mode of affliction as dukkhato, in the mode of decay as rogato, in the sense of inner corruption as gaṇḍato, in the sense of not being entered into and in the sense of cutting off as sallato, in the sense of painfulness as aghato, in the sense of oppressing as ābādhato, in the sense of being not one’s own as parato, in the sense of dissolution as palokato, in the sense of ownerlessness as suññato, in the sense of not being under control as anattato. Samanupassatī means he sees with the strong wisdom of insight.

Tehi dhammehīti tehi pañcakkhandhadhammehi.Paṭivāpetīti nibbānavasena nivatteti.Amatāyadhātuyāti nibbānadhātuyā.Cittaṃ upasaṃharatīti ñāṇena ānisaṃsaṃ disvā otāreti.Santanti paccanīkasantatāya santaṃ.Paṇītanti atappakaṃ.So tattha ṭhito āsavānaṃ khayaṃ pāpuṇātīti so tasmiṃ paṭhamajjhāne ṭhito taṃ balavavipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Aparo nayo –so tehi dhammehīti yasmā aniccatotiādīsu aniccato palokatoti dvīhi padehi aniccalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ, dukkhatotiādīhi chahi dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ, parato, suññato, anattatoti tīhi anattalakkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā so tehi evaṃ tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā diṭṭhehi antosamāpattiyaṃ pañcakkhandhadhammehi.Cittaṃ paṭivāpetīti cittaṃ paṭisaṃharati moceti apaneti.Upasaṃharatīti vipassanācittaṃ tāva savanavasena thutivasena pariyattivasena paññattivasena ca santaṃ nibbānanti evaṃ asaṅkhatāya amatāya dhātuyā upasaṃharati. Maggacittaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavaseneva ‘‘etaṃ santaṃ etaṃ paṇīta’’nti na evaṃ vadati. Iminā panākārena taṃ paṭivijjhanto tattha cittaṃ upasaṃharatīti attho.

Tehi dhammehī means by those five aggregates of existence. Paṭivāpetī means he turns it away in the sense of nibbāna. Amatāya dhātuyā means to the element of nibbāna. Cittaṃ upasaṃharatī means having seen the benefit with knowledge, he inclines his mind. Santa means peaceful, being peaceful from opposing forces. Paṇīta means not burning. So tattha ṭhito āsavānaṃ khayaṃ pāpuṇātī means he, standing in that first jhāna, having developed that strong insight, attains arahantship. Another method: so tehi dhammehī means since, among aniccato, etc., impermanence was spoken of with the two terms aniccato and palokato; suffering with the six terms dukkhato, etc.; and not-self with the three terms parato, suññato, anattato. Therefore, he turns away cittaṃ paṭivāpetī, his mind from the five aggregates of existence that have been seen in internal attainment, by imposing these three characteristics. Upasaṃharatī means he directs (upasaṃharati) his mind toward the unconditioned deathless element, nibbāna, which is peaceful, in terms of savoring, praising, determining, and designating the insight mind. The path mind does not say, "This is peaceful, this is excellent," in the way of making nibbāna the object. But in this way, by discerning that, he directs the mind there. That is the meaning.

So tattha ṭhitoti tassā tilakkhaṇārammaṇāya vipassanāya ṭhito.Āsavānaṃ khayaṃ pāpuṇātīti anukkamena cattāro magge bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti.Teneva dhammarāgenāti samathavipassanādhamme chandarāgena.Dhammanandiyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Samathavipassanāsu hi sabbaso chandarāgaṃ pariyādātuṃ sakkonto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, asakkonto anāgāmī hoti.

So tattha ṭhito means standing in that insight whose object is the three characteristics. Āsavānaṃ khayaṃ pāpuṇātī means having developed the four paths in sequence, he attains arahantship. Teneva dhammarāgenā means by the desire-passion (chandarāga) for the qualities of serenity and insight. Dhammanandiyā is a synonym for that itself. For one who is able to completely consume desire-passion for serenity and insight attains arahantship; one who is unable becomes a Non-Returner (anāgāmī).

Tiṇapurisarūpaketi tiṇapotthakarūpe vā. Dūre kaṇḍe pātetītidūrepātī. Avirādhitaṃ vijjhatītiakkhaṇavedhī. Yadeva tattha hoti vedanāgatanti idha rūpaṃ na gahitaṃ. Kasmā? Samatikkantattā. Ayañhi heṭṭhā rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā rūpaṃ atikkamitvā arūpāvacarasamāpattiṃ samāpannoti samathavasenāpi anena rūpaṃ samatikkantaṃ, heṭṭhā rūpaṃ sammasitvā taṃ atikkamma idāni arūpaṃ sammasatīti vipassanāvasenāpi anena rūpaṃ atikkantaṃ. Āruppe pana sabbasopi rūpaṃ natthīti taṃ sandhāyapi rūpaṃ na gahitaṃ. Atha nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ kasmā na gahitanti? Sukhumattā. Tasmiñhi cattāropi arūpakkhandhā sukhumā na sammasanūpagā. Tenevāha – ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave, yāvatā saññāsamāpatti tāvatā aññāpaṭivedho’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yāvatā sacittakasamāpatti nāma atthi, tāvatā oḷārike dhamme sammasato aññāpaṭivedho hoti, arahattaṃ sampajjati. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ pana sukhumattā saññāsamāpattīti na vuccati.Jhāyīheteti jhāyīhi jhānābhiratehi etāni.Vuṭṭhahitvāti tato samāpattito vuṭṭhāya.Samakkhātabbānīti sammā akkhātabbāni, ‘‘santāni paṇītānī’’ti evaṃ kevalaṃ ācikkhitabbāni thometabbāni vaṇṇetabbānīti.

Tiṇapurisarūpake vā means in the form of a straw man. Dūre kaṇḍe pātetīti means one who shoots arrows from afar. Avirādhitaṃ vijjhatīti means one who pierces without missing. Yadeva tattha hoti vedanāgata means here, form is not included. Why? Because it has been transcended. For this one, having attained the rūpāvacara jhāna below and having transcended form, has attained the arūpāvacara attainment. Thus, form has been transcended by him through serenity. And having contemplated form below and having transcended it, he now contemplates the formless. Thus, form has been transcended by him through insight as well. But in the immaterial sphere, there is no form at all. Therefore, form is not included, bearing this in mind. Then why is the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception not included? Because of its subtlety. For in that, all four immaterial aggregates are subtle and not accessible to contemplation. Therefore, he said, "Thus, bhikkhus, as far as the attainment of perception is concerned, so far does the breakthrough to knowledge extend." This has been said: As far as there is an attainment with consciousness, so far does the breakthrough to knowledge occur when one contemplates the gross phenomena; arahantship is attained. But the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception is not called an attainment of perception due to its subtlety. Jhāyīhete means these should be asked of those who are meditators, those who delight in jhāna. Vuṭṭhahitvā means having arisen from that attainment. Samakkhātabbānī means they should be rightly explained, they should be simply described, praised, and extolled as, "peaceful and excellent."

6. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā

37.Chaṭṭhesambādheti pañcakāmaguṇasambādhe.Okāsādhigamoti okāsassa adhigamo.Sattānaṃ visuddhiyāti sattānaṃ visuddhiṃ pāpanatthāya.Samatikkamāyāti samatikkamanatthāya.Atthaṅgamāyāti atthaṃ gamanatthāya.Ñāyassa adhigamāyāti sahavipassanakassa maggassa adhigamanatthāya.Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti apaccayanibbānassa paccakkhakaraṇatthāya.Tadeva nāma cakkhuṃ bhavissatīti taññeva pasādacakkhu asambhinnaṃ bhavissati.Te rūpāti tadeva rūpārammaṇaṃ āpāthaṃ āgamissati.Tañcāyatanaṃ no paṭisaṃvedissatīti tañca rūpāyatanaṃ na jānissati. Sesesupi eseva nayo.

37. In the sixth, sambādhe means in the confinement of the five strands of sensual pleasure. Okāsādhigamo means the attainment of opportunity. Sattānaṃ visuddhiyā means for the purpose of bringing about the purification of beings. Samatikkamāyā means for the purpose of transcending. Atthaṅgamāyā means for the purpose of setting aside. Ñāyassa adhigamāyā means for the purpose of attaining the path together with insight. Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā means for the purpose of realizing the unconditioned nibbāna. Tadeva nāma cakkhuṃ bhavissatī means just that eye will be clear. Te rūpā means just that object of form will come into range. Tañcāyatanaṃ no paṭisaṃvedissatī means and he will not cognize that form-āyatana. This is the method in the remaining instances as well.

Udāyīti kāḷudāyitthero.Saññīmeva nu khoti sacittakoyeva nu kho. Makāro padasandhimattaṃ.Kiṃsaññīti katarasaññāya saññī hutvā.Sabbasorūpasaññānanti idaṃ kasmā gaṇhi, kiṃ paṭhamajjhānādisamaṅgino rūpādipaṭisaṃvedanā hotīti? Na hoti, yāva pana kasiṇarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ hoti, tāva rūpaṃ samatikkantaṃ nāma na hoti. Asamatikkantattā paccayo bhavituṃ sakkhissati. Samatikkantattā pana taṃ natthi nāma hoti, natthitāya paccayo bhavituṃ na sakkotīti dassetuṃ idameva gaṇhi.

Udāyī means the Elder Kāḷudāyī. Saññīmeva nu kho means is it indeed with consciousness? The "ma" is merely for euphonic connection. Kiṃsaññī means with what kind of perception is he conscious? Sabbaso rūpasaññāna means why did he include this? Is there a sense of form, etc., for one possessing the first jhāna, etc.? There is not, but as long as the kasiṇa-form is the object, form is not said to have been transcended. Because it has not been transcended, it will be able to be a condition. But because it has been transcended, it is as if it does not exist; because it does not exist, it is not able to be a condition. To show this, he included this alone.

Jaṭilavāsikāti jaṭilanagaravāsinī.Na cābhinatotiādīsu rāgavasena naabhinato,dosavasena naapanato. Sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilese niggaṇhitvā vāretvā ṭhito, kilesānaṃ pana chinnante uppannotina sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato. Vimuttattā ṭhitoti kilesehi vimuttattāyeva ṭhito.Ṭhitattā santusitoti ṭhitattāyeva santuṭṭho nāma jāto.Santusitattāno paritassatīti santuṭṭhattāyeva paritāsaṃ nāpajjati.Ayaṃ, bhante ānanda, samādhi kiṃ phaloti iminā ayaṃ therī tālaphalaññeva gahetvā ‘‘idaṃ phalaṃ kiṃ phalaṃ nāmā’’ti pucchamānā viya arahattaphalasamādhiṃ gahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ, bhante ānanda, samādhi kiṃ phalo vutto bhagavatā’’ti pucchati.Aññāphalo vuttoti aññā vuccati arahattaṃ, arahattaphalasamādhi nāmeso vutto bhagavatāti attho.Evaṃsaññīpīti imāya arahattaphalasaññāya saññīpi tadāyatanaṃ no paṭisaṃvedetīti evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte arahattaphalasamādhi kathitoti.

Jaṭilavāsikā means dwelling in Jaṭila-town. In na cābhinato, etc., not abhinato because of lust, not apanato because of aversion. He stands having suppressed and warded off the defilements with effort and application, but the defilements are cut off at the point where they arise; therefore, na sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato. Vimuttattā ṭhito means he stands simply because of being freed from the defilements. Ṭhitattā santusito means he becomes content simply because of standing. Santusitattā no paritassatī means he does not experience anguish simply because of being content. Ayaṃ, bhante ānanda, samādhi kiṃ phalo means this theri, having taken hold of the fruit of the palmyra, just as if she were asking, "What kind of fruit is this?", takes hold of the concentration that is the fruit of arahantship and asks, "What kind of fruit, Venerable Ānanda, is this concentration said to be?" Aññāphalo vutto means ñāṇa (knowledge) is called arahantship; this is said to be the concentration that is the fruit of arahantship. Evaṃsaññīpī means even one conscious with this perception of the fruit of arahantship will not cognize that āyatana. Thus, in this sutta, the concentration that is the fruit of arahantship is spoken of.

7. Lokāyatikasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Lokāyatikasuttavaṇṇanā

38.Sattamelokāyatikāti lokāyatavādakā.Satatanti sadā.Samitanti nirantaraṃ.Tiṭṭhatetanti tiṭṭhatu etaṃ, mā etaṃ paṭṭhapetha, ko vo etena attho.Dhammaṃ vo brāhmaṇā desessāmīti ahaṃ vo catusaccadhammaṃ desessāmi.

38. In the seventh, lokāyatikā means those who espouse the Lokāyata doctrine. Satata means always. Samita means uninterruptedly. Tiṭṭhateta means let this stand, do not establish this, what is the use of this for you? Dhammaṃ vo brāhmaṇā desessāmī means I will teach you the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths.

Daḷhadhammoti daḷhadhanuṃ gahetvā ṭhito.Dhanuggahoti issāso. Daḷhadhanu nāma dvisahassathāmaṃ vuccati. Dvisahassathāmaṃ nāma yassa āropitassa jiyābaddho lohasīsādīnaṃ bhāro daṇḍe gahetvā yāva kaṇḍappamāṇā ukkhittassa pathavito muccati.Sikkhitoti dasa dvādasa vassāni ācariyakule uggahitasippo.Katahatthoti eko sippameva uggaṇhāti, katahattho na hoti ayaṃ pana katahattho ciṇṇavasibhāvo.Katūpāsanoti rājakulādīsu dassitasippo.Lahukena asanenāti anto susiraṃ katvā tūlādīhi pūretvā katalakkhaparikammena sallahukakaṇḍena. Evaṃ katañhi ekausabhagāmī dve usabhānipi gacchati…pe… aṭṭhusabhagāmī soḷasa usabhānipi gacchati.Appakasirenāti niddukkhena.Atipāteyyāti atikkameyya. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā so dhanuggaho taṃ vidatthicaturaṅgulaṃ chāyaṃ sīghameva atikkāmeti, evaṃ sakalacakkavāḷaṃ sīghaṃ sīghaṃ atikkamanasamatthena javena samannāgato.Sandhāvanikāyāti padasā dhāvanena.Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti.

Daḷhadhammo means one who stands holding a strong bow. Dhanuggaho means archer. A strong bow is said to have the strength of two thousand (men). The strength of two thousand (men) means the weight of iron-lead, etc., bound to the string of a bow that has been strung, is released from the earth when lifted, holding the rod up to the measure of an arrow. Sikkhito means one who has learned a craft in the teacher's home for ten or twelve years. Katahattho means he learns only one craft; he is not skilled. But this one is skilled, one who has acquired mastery. Katūpāsano means one who has displayed skill in royal families, etc. Lahukena asanenā means with a light arrow made by hollowing it out inside, filling it with cotton, etc., and performing the coating work of lacquer. For indeed, one that is made in this way travels one usabha…pe…one that travels eight usabhas travels sixteen usabhas. Appakasirenā means without difficulty. Atipāteyyā means he would cross over. This has been said: Just as that archer quickly crosses over that shadow of a span and four finger-breadths, he is endowed with speed by which he is able to quickly, quickly cross over the entire universe. Sandhāvanikāyā means by running on foot. Evamāhaṃsū means thus they say.

8. Devāsurasaṅgāmasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Devāsurasaṅgāmasuttavaṇṇanā

39.Aṭṭhamesamupabyūḷho ahosīti paccupaṭṭhito ahosi.Saṅgāmeyyāmāti saṅgāmaṃ kareyyāma yujjheyyāma.Apayiṃsuyevāti palāyiṃsuyeva.Uttarenābhimukhāti uttarāmukhā hutvā.Abhiyante vāti anubandhantiyeva.Bhīruttānagatenāti bhīruttānaṃ bhayanivāraṇaṃ patiṭṭhānaṃ gatena.Akaraṇīyāti yuddhena kiñci akattabbā. Kasmā pana nesaṃ saṅgāmo hotīti? Asurā hi pubbe tāvatiṃsavāsino, te cittapāṭaliyā pupphanakāle dibbapāricchattakapupphaṃ anussaranti. Tato uppannakodhā ‘‘gaṇhatha deve’’ti sammukhasammukhaṭṭhāneneva sineruṃ abhiruhanti, devāpi nikkhamanti. Tesaṃ gopālakadārakānaṃ aññamaññaṃ daṇḍakehi paharaṇasadisaṃ yuddhaṃ hoti. Sakko devarājā heṭṭhā pañcasu ṭhānesu ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā upari devapuraṃ parivāretvā attasadisā vajirahatthā paṭimā ṭhapāpesi. Asurā heṭṭhā pañca ṭhānāni paṭibāhitvā abhiruḷhā indapaṭimāyo disvā nivattitvā asurapurameva gacchanti.

39. In the eighth: samupabyūḷho ahosīti means he was present. Saṅgāmeyyāmāti means let us make war, let us fight. Apayiṃsuyevāti means they fled indeed. Uttarenābhimukhāti means having their faces to the north. Abhiyante vāti means while pursuing. Bhīruttānagatenāti means by that which goes to the refuge for the fearful, the foundation. Akaraṇīyāti means nothing to be done with war. But why does a battle occur for them? The asuras formerly lived in Tāvatiṃsa. At the time of the Cittapāṭali flower, they remember the divine Pāricchattaka flower. Then, with anger arisen, saying "Seize the devas," they ascend Mount Sineru face to face. The devas also come out. Their battle is like young cowherds striking each other with sticks. Sakka, the King of the Devas, places guards in the five places below and surrounds the deva city above, and has Vajirahattha images made similar to himself. The asuras, having repelled the five places below and ascended, seeing the Indra images, turn back and go to their own asura city.

Dakkhiṇenābhimukhāti dakkhiṇāmukhā hutvā.Apadaṃ vadhitvāti nippadaṃ niravasesaṃ vadhitvā.Adassanaṃ gatoti māropi vaṭṭapādakaṃ katvā rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ samāpannassa cittaṃ jānāti, tadeva vipassanāpādakaṃ katvā samāpannassa cittaṃ jānāti. Arūpāvacarasamāpatti pana vaṭṭapādā vā hotu vipassanāpādā vā, taṃ samāpannassa māro cittaṃ na jānāti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘adassanaṃ gato pāpimato’’ti.

Dakkhiṇenābhimukhāti means having their faces to the south. Apadaṃ vadhitvāti means having killed without remainder, completely. Adassanaṃ gatoti means Māra also knows the mind of one who has attained the fourth jhāna of the form realm, having made a stepping stone (vaṭṭapādakaṃ). He also knows the mind of one who has attained it, having made it the basis of insight (vipassanā). However, Māra does not know the mind of one who has attained an attainment of the formless realm, whether it is a vaṭṭapāda or a vipassanāpāda. Therefore, it was said: "gone out of sight of the Evil One."

9. Nāgasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Nāgasutta Commentary

40.Navameāraññakassāti araññavāsino.Gocarapasutassāti gocaraggahaṇatthāya gacchantassa.Hatthikalabhāti mahantā mahantā nāgā.Hatthicchāpāti taruṇapotakā.Obhaggobhagganti nāmetvā nāmetvā ṭhapitaṃ.Ogāhaṃ otiṇṇassāti ogāhitabbattā ogāhanti laddhanāmaṃ udakatitthaṃ otiṇṇassa.Ogāhā uttiṇṇassāti udakatitthato uttiṇṇassa.Vūpakaṭṭhoti vūpakaṭṭho hutvā. Idāni yasmā dasabalassa hatthināgena kiccaṃ natthi, sāsane pana taṃsarikkhakaṃ puggalaṃ dassetuṃ idamāhaṭaṃ, tasmā taṃ puggalaṃ dassentoevameva khotiādimāha.

40. In the ninth: āraññakassāti means one who dwells in the forest. Gocarapasutassāti means while going for the purpose of obtaining food (gocara). Hatthikalabhāti means large, great elephants. Hatthicchāpāti means young calves. Obhaggobhagganti means having bent down and bent down, it is placed. Ogāhaṃ otiṇṇassāti means of one who has entered the ford, having the name ogāha because it is to be entered. Ogāhā uttiṇṇassāti means of one who has emerged from the ford. Vūpakaṭṭhoti means having become secluded. Now, since the Ten-Powered One has no need of an elephant, but this is brought to show a person similar to that in the Teaching, therefore, showing that person, he said evameva kho etc.

10. Tapussasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Tapussa Sutta Commentary

41.Dasamemallesūti mallaraṭṭhe.Idheva tāva tvaṃ, ānanda, hotīti idha bhagavā ‘‘tapussagahapatino idha ṭhitena ānandena saddhiṃ kathāsallāpo bhavissati, tatonidānaṃ ahaṃ mahantaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ desessāmī’’ti ñatvā āha.Upasaṅkamīti so kira bhuttapātarāso ‘‘dasabalassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gamissāmī’’ti nikkhamanto dūratova theraṃ disvā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami.Papāto viya khāyati, yadidaṃ nekkhammanti yamidaṃ pabbajjāsaṅkhātaṃ nekkhammaṃ, taṃ amhākaṃ mahāpapāto viya ogāhitvā upaṭṭhāti.Nekkhamme cittaṃ pakkhandatīti pabbajjāya cittaṃ ārammaṇavasena pakkhandati, tadeva ārammaṇaṃ katvāpasīdati,tadevapatiṭṭhāti,paccanīkadhammehi cavimuccati. ‘Etaṃ santa’nti passatoti etaṃ nekkhammaṃ santaṃ vigatadarathapariḷāhanti evaṃ passantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ.Bahunā janena visabhāgoti tayidaṃ bahunā mahājanena saddhiṃ bhikkhūnaṃ visabhāgaṃ, asadisanti attho.

41. In the tenth: mallesūti means in the Malla country. Idheva tāva tvaṃ, ānanda, hotīti, here the Buddha, knowing that "here, with Ānanda standing, a conversation will take place with Tapussa the householder, and because of that, I will teach a great discourse on the Dhamma," said it. Upasaṅkamīti it seems that, having finished his morning meal, as he was going out thinking "I will go to attend upon the Ten-Powered One," he saw the Elder from afar and approached the venerable Ānanda. Papāto viya khāyati, yadidaṃ nekkhammanti this renunciation, which is called going forth, appears to us like a great precipice, having plunged into it. Nekkhamme cittaṃ pakkhandatīti the mind inclines towards renunciation in terms of object (ārammaṇa). Having made that itself the object, it becomes clear (pasīdati), that itself becomes established (patiṭṭhāti), and it is freed from opposing conditions (vimuccati). ‘Etaṃ santa’nti passatoti of bhikkhus seeing thus: "this renunciation is peaceful, devoid of torment and distress." Bahunā janena visabhāgoti this is dissimilar for bhikkhus together with the great crowd, it is unlike, is the meaning.

Kathāpābhatanti kathāmūlaṃ.Tassa mayhaṃ, ānanda, nekkhamme cittaṃ na pakkhandatīti tassa evaṃ vitakkentassāpi mayhaṃ pabbajjāya cittaṃ na otarati.‘‘Etaṃsanta’’nti passatoti ‘‘sādhu nekkhamma’’nti parivitakkanavasena ‘‘etaṃ nekkhammaṃ santa’’nti passantassapi.Anāsevitoti na āsevito na phassito na sacchikato.Adhigammāti adhigantvā patvā sacchikatvā.Tamāseveyyanti taṃ ānisaṃsaṃ seveyyaṃ bhajeyyaṃ.Yaṃmeti yena kāraṇena mayhaṃ.Adhigammāti adhigantvā.Svāssa me hoti ābādhoti so mayhaṃ ābādhanaṭṭhena ābādho hoti.Avitakke cittaṃ na pakkhandatīti avitakkavicāre dutiyajjhāne ārammaṇavasena cittaṃ na pakkhandati.Vitakkesūti vitakkavicāresu. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Kathāpābhatanti the basis of conversation. Tassa mayhaṃ, ānanda, nekkhamme cittaṃ na pakkhandatīti even for me, thinking thus, the mind does not descend upon renunciation. ‘‘Etaṃ santa’’nti passatoti even for one seeing "this renunciation is peaceful" in terms of thinking "good is renunciation." Anāsevitoti not cultivated, not touched, not realized. Adhigammāti having attained, having reached, having realized. Tamāseveyyanti one should cultivate, one should practice that benefit. Yaṃ meti because of which, for me. Adhigammāti having attained. Svāssa me hoti ābādhoti that becomes an affliction for me in the sense of afflicting. Avitakke cittaṃ na pakkhandatīti the mind does not incline in terms of object in the second jhāna which is without vitakka. Vitakkesūti in vitakka and vicāra. The rest is easy to understand everywhere.

5. Sāmaññavaggo

5. Sāmañña Vagga

1. Sambādhasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sambādha Sutta Commentary

42.Pañcamassa paṭhameudāyīti kāḷudāyitthero.Avidvāti aññāsi.Bhūrimedhasoti mahāpañño.Yo jhānamabujjhīti yo jhānaṃ abujjhi.Paṭilīnanisabhoti ekībhāvavasena paṭilīno ceva uttamaṭṭhena ca nisabho.Munīti buddhamuni.Pariyāyenāti ekena kāraṇena. Kāmasambādhassa hi abhāvamatteneva paṭhamajjhānaṃ okāsādhigamo nāma, na sabbathā sabbaṃ.Tatrāpatthi sambādhoti tasmimpi paṭhamajjhāne sambādho paṭipīḷanaṃ atthiyeva. Tatrāpitthītipi pāṭho.Kiñca tattha sambādhoti tasmiṃ pana jhāne kiṃ sambādho nāma.Ayamettha sambādhoti ayaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ aniruddhabhāvo sambādho saṃpīḷā nāma. Iminā upāyena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.Nippariyāyenāti na ekena kāraṇena, atha kho āsavakkhayo nāma sabbasambādhānaṃ pahīnattā sabbena sabbaṃ okāsādhigamo nāmāti.

42. In the first of the fifth: udāyīti refers to Kāḷudāyi Thera. Avidvāti means he did not know. Bhūrimedhasoti means one of great wisdom. Yo jhānamabujjhīti means he did not understand jhāna. Paṭilīnanisabhoti means one who is secluded due to unification and also matchless in terms of excellence. Munīti means the Buddha-sage. Pariyāyenāti means by one reason. Indeed, the attainment of space (okāsādhigamo) is only through the absence of the crowding of sense pleasures (kāmasambādha), not completely in every way. Tatrāpatthi sambādhoti even in that first jhāna, crowding, oppression exists. Tatrāpitthītipi pāṭho - there is also a reading "tatrāpitthīti". Kiñca tattha sambādhoti but what is crowding in that jhāna? Ayamettha sambādhoti this unsuppressed state of vitakka and vicāra is crowding, is oppression. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances. Nippariyāyenāti not by one reason, but rather the destruction of the āsavas is called the complete attainment of space because of the abandonment of all crowding.

2. Kāyasakkhisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Kāyasakkhi Sutta Commentary

43.Dutiyeyathā yathā ca tadāyatananti yena yena kāraṇena yena yenākārena taṃ paṭhamajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ āyatanaṃ hoti.Tathā tathā naṃ kāyena phusitvā viharatīti tena tena kāraṇena tena tenākārena taṃ samāpattiṃ sahajātanāmakāyena phusitvā viharati, samāpajjatīti attho.Kāyasakkhi vutto bhagavatā pariyāyenāti yasmā tena nāmākāyena paṭhamajjhānaṃ sacchikataṃ, tasmā iminā pariyāyena kāyasakkhi vutto.Nippariyāyenāti yattakaṃ kāyena sacchikātabbaṃ, sabbassa katattā ayaṃ nippariyāyena kāyasakkhi nāma.

43. In the second: yathā yathā ca tadāyatananti by whatever reason, by whatever manner, that which is the sense sphere (āyatana) called the first jhāna. Tathā tathā naṃ kāyena phusitvā viharatīti by that reason, by that manner, he dwells having touched that attainment with the body which is born together (sahajāta), meaning he attains. Kāyasakkhi vutto bhagavatā pariyāyenāti because the first jhāna is realized by that body of name (nāmakāya), therefore, by this reason, he is called a body-witness. Nippariyāyenāti since all that can be realized by the body has been done, this is called a body-witness without qualification.

3. Paññāvimuttasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Paññāvimutta Sutta Commentary

44.Tatiyepaññāya ca naṃ pajānātīti taṃ paṭhamajjhānavipassanāpaññāya jānāti. Idhāpi pariyāyanippariyāyā purimanayeneva veditabbā. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ ito paresupi.

44. In the third: paññāya ca naṃ pajānātīti he knows that first jhāna by the wisdom of insight. Here also, 'with qualification' and 'without qualification' should be understood in the same way as before. And as here, so also in the rest from here on.

4. Ubhatobhāgavimuttasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Ubhatobhāgavimutta Sutta Commentary

45.Catutthaṃ ubhayena veditabbaṃ. Ettha caubhatobhāgavimuttoti ubhatobhāgehi samathavipassanānaṃ paccanīkakilesehi vimutto. Pariyosāne pana samāpattiyā rūpakāyato, ariyamaggena nāmakāyato vimuttoyeva ubhatobhāgavimuttoti veditabbo.

45. The fourth should be understood in two ways. Here, ubhatobhāgavimuttoti means one who is freed from the opposing defilements of both parts, serenity and insight. At the end, however, one should understand that "ubhatobhāgavimutta" means one who is freed from the body of form by attainment, and from the body of name by the noble path.

5-10. Sandiṭṭhikadhammasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-10. Sandiṭṭhikadhamma Suttādi Commentary

46-51.Pañcamādīsusandiṭṭhikoti sayaṃ passitabbako.Nibbānanti kilesanibbānaṃ.Parinibbānanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Tadaṅganibbānanti paṭhamajjhānādinā tena tena aṅgena nibbānaṃ.Diṭṭhadhammanibbānanti ismiṃyeva attabhāve nibbānaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

46-51. In the fifth etc.: sandiṭṭhikoti means to be seen by oneself. Nibbānanti means the extinction of defilements. Parinibbānanti means a synonym for that itself. Tadaṅganibbānanti means extinction by that factor (aṅga), by the first jhāna etc. Diṭṭhadhammanibbānanti means extinction in this very existence. The rest is easy to understand everywhere.

Sāmaññavaggo pañcamo.

The fifth Sāmañña Vagga.

Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The first fifty (Paṇṇāsaka) is complete.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakavaṇṇanā

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsaka Commentary

52.Ito paresukhemanti nirupaddavaṃ.Khemappattoti khemabhāvaṃ patto.Sikkhādubbalyānīti sikkhāya dubbalabhāvakaraṇāni. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

52. In the rest from here: khemanti means without danger. Khemappattoti means one who has attained safety. Sikkhādubbalyānīti means things that cause weakness in the training. The rest is easy to understand everywhere.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

The Manorathapūraṇī, commentary to the Aṅguttara Nikāya.

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Fully Enlightened One.

Aṅguttaranikāye

In the Aṅguttara Nikāya

Dasakanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Dasaka Nipāta Commentary

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. Paṭhama Paṇṇāsaka

1. Ānisaṃsavaggo

1. Ānisaṃsa Vagga

1. Kimatthiyasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Kimatthiya Sutta Commentary

1.Dasakanipātassa paṭhamekusalāni sīlānīti anavajjasīlāni. Amaṅkubhāvassa avippaṭisārassa atthāya saṃvattantītiavippaṭisāratthāni. So nesaṃ ānisaṃsotiavippaṭisārānisaṃsāni. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanatthotiādīsuyathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃnāma taruṇavipassanā,nibbidānāma balavavipassanā,virāgonāma maggo,vimuttināma arahattaphalaṃ,ñāṇadassanaṃnāma paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ.Aggāya parentīti arahattatthāya gacchanti.

1. In the first of the Dasaka Nipāta: kusalāni sīlānīti means faultless sīla. They lead to the purpose of non-anguish, of non-remorse, therefore avippaṭisāratthāni. That is their benefit, therefore avippaṭisārānisaṃsāni. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanatthoti etc.: yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ means immature insight, nibbidā means strong insight, virāgo means the path, vimutti means the fruit of arahatship, ñāṇadassanaṃ means the reviewing knowledge (paccavekkhaṇañāṇa). Aggāya parentīti means they go for the purpose of arahatship.

2. Cetanākaraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Cetanākaraṇīya Sutta Commentary

2.Dutiyena cetanāya karaṇīyanti na cetetvā kappetvā pakappetvā kātabbaṃ.Dhammatā esāti dhammasabhāvo eso kāraṇaniyamo ayaṃ.Abhisandentīti pavattenti.Paripūrentīti paripuṇṇaṃ karonti.Apārā pāraṃ gamanāyāti orimatīrabhūtā tebhūmakavaṭṭā nibbānapāraṃ gamanatthāya.

2. In the second: na cetanāya karaṇīyanti means it should not be done by intending, planning, or projecting. Dhammatā esāti this is the nature of things, this is the causal principle. Abhisandentīti means they cause to flow. Paripūrentīti means they make full. Apārā pāraṃ gamanāyāti in order to go from the near shore which is the three-realm round of existence (tebhūmakavaṭṭa) to the further shore of Nibbāna.

3-5. Upanisasuttattayavaṇṇanā
3-5. Upanisa Sutta Ttaya Commentary

3-5.Tatiyehatūpanisoti hatakāraṇo. Catutthapañcamesu dvīhi therehi kathitabhāvova viseso.

3-5. In the third: hatūpanisoti means with a destroyed cause. In the fourth and fifth, the only difference is that they were spoken by two elders.

6. Samādhisuttavaṇṇanā
6. Samādhi Sutta Commentary

6.Chaṭṭheneva pathaviyaṃ pathavīsaññī assāti pathaviṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pathavīti evaṃ uppannāya saññāya saññī na bhaveyya.Āpādīsupi eseva nayo.Na idhaloketi idhaloke uppajjanakacatukkapañcakajjhānasaññāya na saññī bhaveyya.Na paraloketi paraloke uppajjanakacatukkapañcakajjhānasaññāya na saññī bhaveyya.Saññī ca pana assāti atha ca panassa samāpatti savitakkasamāpattiyeva assāti vuccati.Etaṃ santaṃ etaṃ paṇītanti santaṃ santanti appetvā nisinnassa divasampi cittuppādo ‘‘santaṃ santa’’nteva pavattati, paṇītaṃ paṇītanti appetvā nisinnassa divasampi cittuppādo ‘‘paṇītaṃ paṇīta’’nteva pavattati.Yadidaṃ sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti nibbānaṃ nibbānanti appetvā nisinnassa divasampi cittuppādo ‘‘nibbānaṃ nibbāna’’nteva pavattatīti sabbampetaṃ phalasamāpattisamādhiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

6. In the sixth: neva pathaviyaṃ pathavīsaññī assāti he should not be conscious with the perception of earth, having made earth the object, thinking "earth". The same method applies to Āpā etc. Na idhaloketi he should not be conscious with the perception of the fourth or fifth jhāna arising in this world. Na paraloketi he should not be conscious with the perception of the fourth or fifth jhāna arising in the next world. Saññī ca pana assāti but it is said that his attainment is only an attainment with vitakka. Etaṃ santaṃ etaṃ paṇītanti for one who has relinquished and is sitting, thinking "peaceful, peaceful", even the arising of the mind during the day proceeds as "peaceful, peaceful". For one who has relinquished and is sitting, thinking "exquisite, exquisite," even the arising of the mind during the day proceeds as "exquisite, exquisite." Yadidaṃ sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti for one who has relinquished and is sitting, thinking "Nibbāna, Nibbāna," even the arising of the mind during the day proceeds as "Nibbāna, Nibbāna." All this was said in reference to the fruition attainment samādhi.

7. Sāriputtasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Sāriputta Sutta Commentary

7.Sattamesaññī ca panāhaṃ, āvuso, tasmiṃ samaye ahosinti, āvuso, tasmiṃ samaye ahaṃ ‘‘bhavanirodho nibbāna’’nti imāya phalasamāpattisaññāya saññī ahosiṃ. Sacittakā me sā samāpatti ahosīti paccavekkhaṇā kathitā.

7. In the seventh: saññī ca panāhaṃ, āvuso, tasmiṃ samaye ahosinti, Āvuso, at that time, I was conscious with this perception of fruition attainment: "the cessation of existence is Nibbāna." The reviewing was spoken of: "that attainment was with my mind."

8. Jhānasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Jhāna Sutta Commentary

8.Aṭṭhamesamantapāsādikoti pasādāvahānaṃyeva kāyakammādīnaṃ sabbhāvato samanto pāsādiko.Sabbākāraparipūroti sabbehi kāraṇehi paripuṇṇo.

8. In the eighth: samantapāsādikoti because of the existence of all that causes pleasure, such as bodily actions, he is pleasing all around. Sabbākāraparipūroti he is completely full in every way.

9. Santavimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Santavimokkha Sutta Commentary

9.Navamesantāti ārammaṇasantatāyapi aṅgasantatāyapi santā.Vimokkhāti paccanīkadhammehi vimuttattā ārammaṇe ca nirāsaṅkabhāvena suṭṭhu muttattā evaṃladdhanāmā.Atikkamma rūpeti rūpajjhānāni atikkamitvā pavattā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

9. In the ninth: santāti means peaceful in the sense of peacefulness of the object and also peaceful in the sense of peacefulness of the factors (aṅga). Vimokkhāti means thus named because they are freed from opposing conditions and well-freed because of being without longing for the object. Atikkamma rūpeti means proceeding having transcended the form jhānas. The rest is easy to understand everywhere.

2. Nāthavaggo

2. Nātha Vagga

1. Senāsanasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Senāsana Sutta Commentary

11.Dutiyassa paṭhamepañcaṅgasamannāgatoti pañcahi guṇaṅgehi samannāgato.Nātidūraṃ hoti nāccāsannanti yañhi atidūre hoti, piṇḍāya caritvā tattha gacchantassa kāyacittadarathā hoti, tato anuppannaṃ vā samādhiṃ uppādetuṃ uppannaṃ vā thiraṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Accāsannaṃ bahujanākiṇṇaṃ hoti. Cattālīsausabhamatte pana padese vasataṃ dūrāsannadosavimuttañca gamanāgamanasampannaṃ nāma hoti.Divāappākiṇṇanti divasabhāge mahājanena anākiṇṇaṃ.

11. In the first of the second: pañcaṅgasamannāgatoti means endowed with five qualities. Nātidūraṃ hoti nāccāsannanti because if it is too far, there is fatigue of body and mind for one who goes there having wandered for alms, therefore he is not able to generate unarisen samādhi or to make arisen samādhi stable. If it is too near, it is crowded with many people. But dwelling in a place approximately forty usabhas in size is called being free from the faults of being too far or too near and being endowed with going and coming. Divāappākiṇṇanti means not crowded with many people during the day.

2. Pañcaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Pañcaṅga Sutta Commentary

12.Dutiyekevalīti kevalehi sakalehi guṇehi samannāgato.Vusitavāti vutthabrahmacariyavāso.Asekhenāti asekhadhammapariyāpannena lokuttarena.Sīlakkhandhenāti sīlarāsinā.Vimuttikkhandhenāti ettha ṭhapetvā sīlādayo tayo sesā phaladhammā vimutti nāma, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ, taṃ lokiyameva.

12. In the second, kevalī means endowed with all complete qualities. Vusitavā means one who has lived the Brahmā life. Asekhena means supramundane, pertaining to the Asekha Dhamma. Sīlakkhandhena means the aggregate of virtue. Vimuttikkhandhena: here, except for the first three, namely virtue and so on, the remaining fruition-knowledges are called vimutti (deliverance). Vimuttiñāṇadassana (knowledge and vision of deliverance) is the reviewing knowledge, and that is only mundane.

3-4. Saṃyojanasuttādivaṇṇanā
3-4. Commentary on the Saṃyojana Sutta and Others

13-14.Tatiyeorambhāgiyānīti heṭṭhābhāgiyāni.Uddhambhāgiyānīti uparibhāgiyāni. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Catutthekhilavinibandhāpañcakanipāte vitthāritāyeva.Ārohapariṇāhenāti dīghaputhulantena.

13-14. In the third, orambhāgiyānī means pertaining to the lower division. Uddhambhāgiyānī means pertaining to the upper division. In this sutta, only the round of existence (vaṭṭa) is discussed. In the fourth, khilavinibandhā are already explained in detail in the Pañcaka Nipāta. Ārohapariṇāhenā means with length and breadth of growth.

5. Appamādasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Appamāda Sutta

15.Pañcameevameva khoti yathā sabbasattānaṃ sammāsambuddho aggo, evaṃ sabbesaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ kārāpakaappamādo aggoti daṭṭhabbo. Nanu cesa lokiyova, kusaladhammā pana lokuttarāpi. Ayañca kāmāvacarova, kusaladhammā pana catubhūmakā. Kathamesa tesaṃ aggoti? Paṭilābhakattena. Appamādena hi te paṭilabhanti, tasmā so tesaṃ aggo. Teneva vuttaṃ –sabbe te appamādamūlakāti.

15. In the fifth, evameva kho, just as the Sammāsambuddha is the foremost of all beings, so also, heedfulness, which causes the performance of all wholesome states, should be seen as the foremost. But is this not mundane, while wholesome states are supramundane as well? And is this not confined to the sense-sphere, while wholesome states extend to all four planes of existence? How can this be their foremost? Because it causes their attainment. For they are attained through heedfulness, therefore it is their foremost. Hence it was said: sabbe te appamādamūlakā (all of them have heedfulness as their root).

Jaṅgalānanti pathavitalacārīnaṃ.Pāṇānanti sapādakapāṇānaṃ.Padajātānīti padāni.Samodhānaṃ gacchantīti odhānaṃ pakkhepaṃ gacchanti.Aggamakkhāyatīti seṭṭhamakkhāyati.Yadidaṃmahantattenāti mahantabhāvena aggamakkhāyati, na guṇaggenāti attho.Vassikanti sumanapupphaṃ. Idaṃ kira suttaṃ sutvā bhātiyamahārājā vīmaṃsitukāmatāya ekasmiṃ gabbhe catujātigandhehi paribhaṇḍaṃ katvā sugandhapupphāni āharāpetvā ekassa samuggassa majjhe sumanapupphamuṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetvā sesāni tassa samantato muṭṭhiṃ katvā ṭhapetvā dvāraṃ pidhāya bahi nikkhanto. Athassa muhuttaṃ bahi vītināmetvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā pavisantassa sabbapaṭhamaṃ sumanapupphagandho ghānaṃ pahari. So mahātalasmiṃyeva mahācetiyābhimukho nipajjitvā ‘‘vassikaṃ tesaṃ agganti kathentena sukathitaṃ sammāsambuddhenā’’ti cetiyaṃ vandi.Khuddarājānoti khuddakarājāno. Kūṭarājānotipi pāṭho.

Jaṅgalāna means those that move on the surface of the earth. Pāṇāna means beings with feet. Padajātānī means footprints. Samodhānaṃ gacchantī means they go to inclusion. Aggamakkhāyatī means it is called the best. Yadidaṃ mahantattenā means it is called the best due to its magnitude, not due to its excellent qualities, is the meaning. Vassika means jasmine flower. It is said that after hearing this sutta, King Bhātiya, wishing to investigate, filled a room with the four kinds of scents, brought fragrant flowers, placed a handful of jasmine flowers in the middle of a box, placed the remaining flowers around it in handfuls, closed the door, and went outside. Then, after spending a moment outside, as he opened the door and entered, the scent of jasmine flowers struck his nose first. He lay down on the ground facing the Great Cetiya and worshipped the cetiya, saying, "It was well spoken by the Sammāsambuddha who said, 'jasmine is the foremost of them.'" Khuddarājāno means minor kings. Kūṭarājānotipi is also a reading.

6. Āhuneyyasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Āhuneyya Sutta

16.Chaṭṭhegotrabhūti sikhāpattavipassanābhūtena nibbānārammaṇena gotrabhuñāṇena samannāgato.

16. In the sixth, gotrabhū means endowed with the Gotrabhu-ñāṇa with Nibbāna as its object, which is the Vipassanā-knowledge that has reached the peak.

7. Paṭhamanāthasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Paṭhamanātha Sutta

17.Sattamesanāthāti sañātakā bahuñātivaggā hutvā viharatha. Nāthaṃ karontītināthakaraṇā,attano sanāthabhāvakarā patiṭṭhākarāti attho.Kalyāṇamittotiādīsu sīlādiguṇasampannā kalyāṇā mittā assātikalyāṇamitto. Tevassa ṭhānanisajjādīsu saha ayanato sahāyātikalyāṇasahāyo. Cittena ceva kāyena ca kalyāṇamittesuyeva sampavaṅko oṇatotikalyāṇasampavaṅko. Suvacohotīti sukhena vattabbo hoti, sukhena anusāsitabbo.Khamoti gāḷhena pharusena kakkhaḷena vutto khamati na kuppati.Padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaninti yathā ekacco ovadiyamāno vāmato gaṇhāti, paṭippharati vā, assuṇanto vā gacchati, evaṃ akatvā ‘‘ovadatha, bhante, anusāsatha, tumhesu anovadantesu ko añño ovadissatī’’ti padakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhāti.

17. In the seventh, sanāthā means you live having relatives and a large group of kin. Nāthaṃ karontīti nāthakaraṇā, meaning they make themselves have protectors, they make a support. Kalyāṇamitto means that good friends possess qualities such as virtue, hence he is called kalyāṇamitto. Kalyāṇasahāyo means he is a companion in places for him such as standing and sitting. Kalyāṇasampavaṅko means he is wholly inclined and devoted to good friends in mind and body. Suvaco hotī means he is easy to speak to, easy to instruct. Khamo means he is patient, he does not get angry when spoken to harshly, severely, or roughly. Padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsani means that when being advised, some take it from the left, or retort, or go away without listening, but without doing that, he takes it respectfully, saying, "Advise me, venerable sir, instruct me; if you do not advise, who else will advise?"

Uccāvacānīti uccanīcāni.Kiṃkaraṇīyānīti ‘‘kiṃ karomī’’ti evaṃ vatvā kattabbakammāni. Tattha uccakammaṃ nāma cīvarassa karaṇaṃ rajanaṃ, cetiye sudhākammaṃ, uposathāgāracetiyagharabodhigharesu kattabbakammanti evamādi. Avacakammaṃ nāma pādadhovanamakkhanādikhuddakakammaṃ.Tatrūpāyāyāti tatrupagamaniyāya.Alaṃ kātunti kātuṃ samattho hoti.Alaṃ saṃvidhātunti vicāretuṃ samattho hoti.

Uccāvacānī means high and low. Kiṃkaraṇīyānī means tasks to be done after saying, "What shall I do?" Among them, uccakammaṃ means making robes and dyeing them, doing plaster work on cetiyas, tasks to be done in the Uposathāgāra, Cetiya-ghara, and Bodhi-ghara, and so on. Avacakammaṃ means minor tasks such as washing and anointing the feet. Tatrūpāyāyā means for approaching that. Alaṃ kātu means he is capable of doing. Alaṃ saṃvidhātu means he is capable of deliberating.

dhammakāmo,tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ piyāyatīti attho.Piyasamudāhāroti parasmiṃ kathente sakkaccaṃ suṇāti, sayañca paresaṃ desetukāmo hotīti attho.Abhidhamme abhivinayeti ettha dhammo abhidhammo, vinayo abhivinayoti catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tatthadhammoti suttantapiṭakaṃ.Abhidhammoti satta pakaraṇāni.Vinayoti ubhatovibhaṅgo.Abhivinayoti khandhakaparivārā. Atha vā suttantapiṭakampi abhidhammapiṭakampi dhammo eva, maggaphalāni abhidhammo. Sakalavinayapiṭakaṃ vinayo, kilesavūpasamakaraṇaṃ abhivinayo. Iti sabbasmimpi ettha dhamme ca abhidhamme ca vinaye ca abhivinaye ca uḷārapāmojjo hotīti attho.Kusalesu dhammesūti kāraṇatthe bhummaṃ, cātubhūmakakusaladhammakāraṇā tesaṃ adhigamatthāya anikkhittadhuro hotīti attho.

dhammakāmo, meaning he cherishes the Tipiṭaka, the Buddha's teaching. Piyasamudāhāro means when another speaks, he listens respectfully, and he himself desires to teach others. Abhidhamme abhivinaye: here, the fourfold distinction should be understood: Dhamma is Abhidhamma, and Vinaya is Abhivinaya. Here, dhammo means the Suttanta Piṭaka. Abhidhammo means the seven treatises. Vinayo means the Ubhatovibhaṅga. Abhivinayo means the Khandhaka and Parivāra. Alternatively, both the Suttanta Piṭaka and the Abhidhamma Piṭaka are Dhamma, and the paths and fruits are Abhidhamma. The entire Vinaya Piṭaka is Vinaya, and that which makes for the subsiding of defilements is Abhivinaya. Thus, in all these, in Dhamma, Abhidhamma, Vinaya, and Abhivinaya, he has abundant joy, is the meaning. Kusalesu dhammesū means the locative case is in the sense of cause; because of the wholesome states belonging to the four planes of existence, he does not lay down the burden for the sake of their attainment, is the meaning.

8. Dutiyanāthasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Dutiyanātha Sutta

18.Aṭṭhametherānukampitassāti therehi ovādānusāsanidānasamussāhitāya hitapharaṇāya anukampitassa.

18. In the eighth, therānukampitassā means one who is shown compassion by the elders, with loving-kindness generated by advice and instruction.

9. Paṭhamaariyāvāsasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Paṭhamaariyāvāsa Sutta

19.Navameariyavāsāti ariyānaṃ āvāso, te āvasiṃsu āvasanti āvasissantīti ariyāvāsā.Yadariyāti ye vāse ariyā.

19. In the ninth, ariyavāsā means the dwelling of the Noble Ones; because they dwelt, dwell, and will dwell, they are called the dwellings of the Noble Ones (ariyāvāsā). Yadariyā means in which dwellings the Noble Ones dwell.

10. Dutiyaariyāvāsasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Dutiyaariyāvāsa Sutta

20.Dasamaṃ yasmā kururaṭṭhavāsino bhikkhū gambhīrapaññākārakā yuttappayuttā, tasmā yathā tesaṃ dīghanikāyādīsu mahānidānādīni kathitāni, evamidampi gambhīraṃ sukhumaṃ tilakkhaṇāhataṃ suttaṃ tattheva avoca. Tatthapañcaṅgavippahīnoti pañcahi aṅgehi vippayutto hutvā khīṇāsavo avasi vasati vasissati. Tasmā ayaṃ pañcaṅgavippahīnatā ariyāvāsoti vutto. Esa nayo sabbattha.Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hotīti chaḷaṅgupekkhāya samannāgato hoti. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā dhammā nāma keti? Ñāṇādayo. ‘‘Ñāṇa’’nti vutte kiriyato cattāri ñāṇasampayuttacittāni labbhanti, ‘‘satatavihāro’’ti vutte aṭṭha mahācittāni, ‘‘rajjanadussanaṃ natthī’’ti vutte dasa cittāni labbhanti. Somanassaṃ āsevanavasena labbhati.Satārakkhena cetasāti khīṇāsavassa hi tīsu dvāresu sabbakāle sati ārakkhakiccaṃ sādheti. Tenevassa carato ca tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṃ samitaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hotīti vuccati.

20. Tenth: Since the monks residing in the Kuru country were profound in wisdom, capable, and diligent, therefore, just as the Mahānidāna and other suttas were taught in the Dīgha Nikāya and others, so too, this profound and subtle sutta, marked by the three characteristics, was spoken there. Here, pañcaṅgavippahīno means having been disjoined from the five factors, the Āsava-free one has lived, lives, and will live. Therefore, this state of being disjoined from the five factors is called the dwelling of the Noble Ones. This method applies everywhere. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hotī means a monk is endowed with sixfold equanimity. What are the sixfold equanimity-dhammas? They are knowledge and so on. When "knowledge" is mentioned, four consciousnesses associated with knowledge are obtained in terms of function; when "constant abiding" is mentioned, eight great consciousnesses are obtained; when "there is no passion or aversion" is mentioned, ten consciousnesses are obtained. Gladness is obtained by way of cultivation. Satārakkhena cetasā means that for the Āsava-free one, mindfulness constantly performs the function of guarding at all times in the three doors. Therefore, it is said that knowledge and vision are constantly and continuously present for him whether he is walking, standing, sleeping, or awake.

Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti bahūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Etthasamaṇāti pabbajjūpagatā,brāhmaṇāti bhovādino.Puthupaccekasaccānīti bahūni pāṭekkasaccāni. ‘‘Idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitāni bahūni saccānīti attho.Nuṇṇānīti nīhaṭāni.Panuṇṇānīti suṭṭhu nīhaṭāni.Cattānīti vissaṭṭhāni.Vantānīti vamitāni.Muttānīti chinnabandhanāni katāni.Pahīnānīti pajahitāni.Paṭinissaṭṭhānīti yathā na puna cittaṃ ārohanti, evaṃ paṭinissajjitāni. Sabbāneva tāni gahitaggahaṇassa vissaṭṭhabhāvavevacanāni.

Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇāna means of many ascetics and brahmins. Here, samaṇā means those who have undertaken ordination, brāhmaṇā means those who use the term "bho". Puthupaccekasaccānī means many individual truths. "This very view is the truth, this alone is the truth"—thus, many truths are individually grasped, is the meaning. Nuṇṇānī means driven out. Panuṇṇānī means completely driven out. Cattānī means abandoned. Vantānī means vomited out. Muttānī means made unbound. Pahīnānī means abandoned. Paṭinissaṭṭhānī means relinquished in such a way that they do not rise to the mind again. All of these are synonyms for the state of abandoning the grasped grasp.

Samavayasaṭṭhesanoti etthaavayāti anūnā,saṭṭhāti vissaṭṭhā. Sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assāti samavayasaṭṭhesano, suṭṭhuvissaṭṭhasabbaesanoti attho.Rāgā cittaṃ vimuttantiādīhi maggassa kiccanipphatti kathitā.Rāgo me pahīnotiādīhi paccavekkhaṇaphalaṃ kathitaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Samavayasaṭṭhesano: here, avayā means not deficient, saṭṭhā means detached. Sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assāti samavayasaṭṭhesano, meaning one whose search is rightly complete and detached, is the meaning. Rāgā cittaṃ vimuttanti and so on speak of the accomplishment of the task of the path. Rāgo me pahīnoti and so on speak of the fruit of reviewing. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

3. Mahāvaggo

3. Mahāvagga

1. Sīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sīhanāda Sutta Commentary

21.Tatiyassa paṭhamevisamagateti visamaṭṭhānesu gocaresu gate.Saṅghātaṃ āpādesinti ghātaṃ vadhaṃ pāpesiṃ. Tassa hi ussannatejatāya khuddakesu pāṇesu anukampā hoti. Tasmā ye paṭisattubhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ sakkhissanti, ye dubbalā palāyitukāmā bhavissanti, te palāyissantīti sīhanādaṃ naditvāva gocarāya pakkamati.Tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacananti yadi hi sahanatāya hananatāya ca sīho, tathāgato hi sabbāni ca iṭṭhāniṭṭhāni sahati, sabbaparappavādino ca vādānaṃ nimmathanena hanati.Idamassa hoti sīhanādasminti ayamassa sīhanādo.

21. In the first of the third, visamagate means moving in uneven places and pastures. Saṅghātaṃ āpādesi means he brought about slaughter and killing. For due to his exceeding power, there is compassion for small creatures. Therefore, after roaring the lion's roar, thinking, "Those who are able to stand as enemies will stand, those who are weak and wish to flee will flee," he proceeds to his pasture. Tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana means if the lion is such because of his endurance and his killing, the Tathāgata, indeed, endures all desirable and undesirable things, and he destroys all opponents by crushing their doctrines. Idamassa hoti sīhanādasmi means this is his lion's roar.

Tathāgatabalānīti aññehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatasseva balāni. Yathā vā pubbabuddhānaṃ balāni puññasampattiyā āgatāni, tathā āgatabalānītipi attho. Tattha duvidhaṃ tathāgatassa balaṃ kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –

Tathāgatabalānī means the powers unique to the Tathāgata, not shared by others. Or, it also means powers that have come through the accumulation of merit, just like the powers of previous Buddhas. Here, there are two kinds of power of the Tathāgata: physical power and knowledge-power. Among these, physical power should be understood according to the lineage of elephants. This was said by the ancients:

‘‘Kālāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ;

‘‘Kālāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ;
Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti.

kālāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kālāvakassa hatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kālāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassānaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassakāyabalaṃ.

kālāvaka should be seen as the natural elephant lineage. The physical power of ten men is equal to that of one Kālāvaka elephant. The power of ten Kālāvaka elephants is equal to that of one Gaṅgeyya elephant. The power of ten Gaṅgeyya elephants is equal to that of one Paṇḍara elephant. The power of ten Paṇḍara elephants is equal to that of one Tamba elephant. The power of ten Tamba elephants is equal to that of one Piṅgala elephant. The power of ten Piṅgala elephants is equal to that of one Gandha elephant. The power of ten Gandha elephants is equal to that of one Maṅgala elephant. The power of ten Maṅgala elephants is equal to that of one Hema elephant. The power of ten Hema elephants is equal to that of one Uposatha elephant. The power of ten Uposatha elephants is equal to that of one Chaddanta elephant. The power of ten Chaddanta elephants is equal to that of one Tathāgata. This is also called Nārāyanasaṅghātabala. This, according to the natural calculation of elephants, is the power of hundreds of thousands of elephants, and according to the calculation of men, it is the power of ten hundred thousand men. This, then, is the physical power of the Tathāgata.

ñāṇabalaṃnāma. Idhāpi ñāṇabalameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāṇañhi akampiyaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena ca balanti vuttaṃ.

ñāṇabalaṃ (knowledge-power): Here, too, knowledge-power is what is intended. For knowledge is called power because of its unwavering nature and its supportive nature.

Āsabhaṃṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uttamaṭṭhānaṃ. Āsabhā vā pubbabuddhā, tesaṃ ṭhānanti attho. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho. Vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho. Sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi asampakampiyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idantiāsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānaṃ. Idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ. Yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho usabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi dasahi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ tiṭṭhamāno ca taṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti upagacchati na paccakkhāti attani āropeti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti.

Āsabhaṃ ṭhāna means the best position, the highest position. Or Āsabhā are the previous Buddhas, ṭhāna is their position, is the meaning. Moreover, an usabha is superior to a hundred cows, a vasabha is superior to a thousand cows. Or an usabha is superior to a hundred bulls, a vasabha is superior to a thousand bulls. The white one, majestic, bearing a great burden, unshaken even by the sound of a hundred thunderbolts, the bull who is the best of all cows and endures all hardships, the bull that is called nisabha, that is what is intended here by usabha. This, indeed, is a synonym for him. Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ. Ṭhāna means an immovable position, pressing the earth with its four feet. But this is like āsabhaṃ, therefore it is āsabhaṃ. Just as an usabha called nisabha, endowed with the power of a bull, stands in an immovable position pressing the earth with his four feet, so too, the Tathāgata, endowed with the ten powers of a Tathāgata, stands in an immovable position, unshaken by any opponent or enemy in the world with its devas, pressing the earth of the eight assemblies with the four feet of self-confidence. And while so standing, he acknowledges, approaches, does not reject that āsabhaṃ ṭhāna, he places it upon himself. Therefore it was said: "āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī (he acknowledges the place of the bull)."

Parisāsūti aṭṭhasu parisāsu.Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ nadati, abhītanādaṃ nadati, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso ‘‘iti sakkāyo’’tiādinā nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī’’ti.

Parisāsū means in the eight assemblies. Sīhanādaṃ nadatī means he roars the excellent roar, he roars the fearless roar, or he roars a roar like the lion's roar. Here is the simile: just as a lion, endowed with the power of a lion, fearless everywhere, with hair standing on end, roars the lion's roar, so too, the Tathāgata-lion, endowed with the powers of a Tathāgata, fearless and without hair standing on end in the eight assemblies, roars the lion's roar, rich in various modes of teaching in the manner of "such is the aggregate", and so on. Therefore it was said: "parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī (he roars the lion's roar in the assemblies)."

Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti etthabrahmanti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ.Cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañceva desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyaphalāvahaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ, karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyaphalāvahaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ uppannanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi abhinikkhamanato yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva mahābodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Dīpaṅkarato vā paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Desanāñāṇampi pavattamānaṃ pavattanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi yāva aññāsikoṇḍaññassa sotāpattimaggā pavattamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāma. Tesu paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ. Ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ, buddhānaṃyeva orasañāṇaṃ.

Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti: Here, brahma means the best, the highest, the most excellent. Cakka means the Dhamma-wheel. Now, this is twofold: the knowledge of penetration (paṭivedhañāṇa) and the knowledge of teaching (desanāñāṇa). Of these, the knowledge of penetration, developed by wisdom, brings noble fruits to oneself; the knowledge of teaching, developed by compassion, brings noble fruits to disciples. Of these, the knowledge of penetration is twofold: arising and arisen. Indeed, from the time of renunciation until the path of arahantship, it is arising; at the moment of fruition, it is called arisen. Or, from Tusita heaven until the attainment of the path of arahantship at the Great Bodhi-seat, it is arising; at the moment of fruition, it is called arisen. Or, from the time of Dīpaṅkara Buddha until the path of arahantship, it is arising; at the moment of fruition, it is called arisen. The knowledge of teaching is also twofold: proceeding and proceeded. Indeed, until the attainment of the stream-entry path by Aññāsikoṇḍañña, it is proceeding; at the moment of fruition, it is called proceeded. Among these, the knowledge of penetration is supramundane, the knowledge of teaching is mundane. However, both of these are unique to the Buddhas, their own genuine knowledge.

katamāni dasa? Idha, bhikkhave, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānatotiādimāha. Tatthaṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati, tadāyattavuttitāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati. Taṃ bhagavā ‘‘ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ. Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhāna’’nti pajānanto ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Abhidhamme panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇa’’ntiādinā (vibha. 809) nayena vitthāritameva.Yampīti yena ñāṇena.Idampi, bhikkhave, tathāgatassāti idampi ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ nāma hotīti attho. Evaṃ sabbapadesu yojanā veditabbā.

Katamāni dasa? Idha, bhikkhave, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti etc. is said. Here, ṭhānañca ṭhānato means the cause and from the cause. Indeed, because the result stands in the cause, and because it arises and proceeds dependent on it, it is called a place (ṭhāna). The Blessed One, knowing "Whatever things are the cause and condition for the arising of whatever things, that is a place. Whatever things are not the cause and condition for the arising of whatever things, that is a non-place," truly knows the place as place and the non-place as non-place. In the Abhidhamma, this is extensively explained in the way beginning with "Therein, what is the Tathāgata's knowledge of place as place and non-place as non-place?" (vibha. 809). Yampīti: By whichever knowledge. Idampi, bhikkhave, tathāgatassāti: This knowledge of place and non-place is called a strength of the Tathāgata; this is the meaning. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all passages.

Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ.Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ hetu. Imassa pana ñāṇassa vitthārakathā ‘‘atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni gatisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccantī’’tiādinā (vibha. 810) nayena abhidhamme āgatāyeva.

Kammasamādānānanti: Of wholesome and unwholesome actions that have been undertaken and done; or action itself is kammasamādāna. Ṭhānaso hetusoti: From the condition and from the cause. There, destination (gati), basis (upadhi), time (kāla) and effort (payoga) are the place for the result, action is the cause. However, the detailed explanation of this knowledge has come in the Abhidhamma in the way beginning with "There are certain evil undertakings that, being obstructed by the attainment of destination, do not ripen" (vibha. 810).

Sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiñca agatigāminiñca.Paṭipadanti maggaṃ.Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu ‘‘imassa cetanā nirayagāminī bhavissati, imassa tiracchānayonigāminī’’ti iminā nayena ekavatthusmimpi kusalākusalacetanāsaṅkhātānaṃ paṭipattīnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ jānāti. Imassapi ca ñāṇassa vitthārakathā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa sabbatthagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ? Idha tathāgato ayaṃ maggo ayaṃ paṭipadā nirayagāminīti pajānātī’’tiādinā (vibha. 811) nayena abhidhamme āgatāyeva.

Sabbatthagāmininti: Leading to all destinations and not leading to destinations. Paṭipadanti: The path. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti: Even when many people kill a single being, he knows without error the nature of the courses of conduct, reckoned as wholesome and unwholesome intentions, in a single object, in this way: "The intention of this one will lead to hell, the intention of this one will lead to the animal realm." And the detailed explanation of this knowledge has come in the Abhidhamma in the way beginning with "Therein, what is the Tathāgata's knowledge of the course of conduct that leads everywhere? Here, the Tathāgata knows, 'This path, this course of conduct, leads to hell'" (vibha. 811).

Anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi kāmadhātuādīhi vā dhātūhi bahudhātuṃ.Nānādhātunti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇatāya nānappakāradhātuṃ.Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ.Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhati. Idampi ñāṇaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa anekadhātunānādhātulokaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ? Idha tathāgato khandhanānattaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme vitthāritameva.

Anekadhātunti: Manifold elements, by way of the eye-element, etc., or by way of the sense-sphere element, etc. Nānādhātunti: Diverse elements, because of the distinctness of those very elements. Lokanti: The world of aggregates, sense bases, and elements. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti: He truly understands the nature of those elements without error. This knowledge also is extensively explained in the Abhidhamma in the way beginning with "Therein, what is the Tathāgata's knowledge of the world of manifold elements and diverse elements as it actually is? Here, the Tathāgata knows the diversity of aggregates."

Nānādhimuttikatanti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ. Idampi ñāṇaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ? Idha tathāgato pajānāti santi sattā hīnādhimuttikā’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme vitthāritameva.

Nānādhimuttikatanti: The state of diverse inclinations by way of inferior inclinations, etc. This knowledge also is extensively explained in the Abhidhamma in the way beginning with "Therein, what is the Tathāgata's knowledge of the diverse inclinations of beings as it actually is? Here, the Tathāgata knows, 'There are beings with inferior inclinations.'"

Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ.Parapuggalānanti tato aññesaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ, veneyyavasena dvidhā vuttaṃ.Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvañca aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho. Imassāpi ñāṇassa vitthārakathā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ? Idha tathāgato sattānaṃ āsayaṃ pajānātī’’ti (vibha. 814) ādinā nayena abhidhamme āgatāyeva.

Parasattānanti: Of superior beings. Parapuggalānanti: Of other inferior beings than those. Or this is just one pair of words, said in two ways according to those who are to be trained. Indriyaparopariyattanti: The superiority and inferiority of the faculties of faith, etc., meaning the increase and decrease. The detailed explanation of this knowledge has also come in the Abhidhamma in the way beginning with "Therein, what is the Tathāgata's knowledge of the superiority and inferiority of the faculties of other beings and other persons as it actually is? Here, the Tathāgata knows the dispositions of beings" (vibha. 814).

Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ.Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ.Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ.Vuṭṭhānanti ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttaṃ paguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena pana sabbajjhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Taṃ sandhāya ca ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Idampi ñāṇaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ?Jhāyīti cattāro jhāyī, atthekacco jhāyī sampattiṃyeva samānaṃ vipattīti paccetī’’tiādinā (vibha. 828) nayena abhidhamme vitthāritameva. Sabbañāṇānaṃ vitthārakathāya vinicchayo sammohavinodaniyā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāya vutto, pubbenivāsānussatidibbacakkhuñāṇakathā visuddhimagge vitthāritā, āsavakkhayakathā heṭṭhā vuttāyevāti.

Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti: Of the four jhānas beginning with the first, of the eight liberations beginning with "A person with form sees forms," of the three concentrations beginning with concentration with initial and sustained thought, and of the nine serial attainments beginning with the attainment of the first jhāna. Saṃkilesanti: States tending to decline. Vodānanti: States tending to distinction. Vuṭṭhānanti: "Emergence is also vodāna, emergence from that concentration is also emergence" (vibha. 828), thus the proficient jhāna and the life-continuum fruition-attainments are stated. Indeed, the lower proficient jhāna is the basis for the higher one; therefore, it is stated that "emergence is also vodāna." But emergence from all the jhānas is by way of the life-continuum, and emergence from the cessation attainment is by way of the fruition attainment. Regarding that, it is stated that "emergence from that concentration is also emergence." This knowledge also is extensively explained in the Abhidhamma in the way beginning with "Therein, what is the Tathāgata's knowledge of the defilement, cleansing, and emergence regarding jhāna, liberation, concentration, and attainments? Jhāyīti: The four meditating ones; one meditating person regards only attainment as attainment, not misfortune." (vibha. 828). The determination of the detailed explanation of all knowledges has been said in the Vibhanga commentary of the Sammohavinodanī; the explanation of the knowledge of remembering former abodes and the divine eye has been extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga; the explanation of the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas has already been said below.

Tattha paravādīkathā hoti ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ ñāṇaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo’’ti. Taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇañhi sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi tato avasesampi jānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammavipākantarameva, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva, pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti, etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti.

Here, there is the argument of others: "The knowledge of the ten powers is not a separate knowledge; it is just a division of the knowledge of omniscience." That should not be seen in that way. Indeed, the knowledge of the ten powers is one thing, the knowledge of omniscience is another. Indeed, the knowledge of the ten powers knows only its own specific function, but the knowledge of omniscience knows that and also what remains from that. Indeed, in the ten powers, the first knows only cause and non-cause, the second only the interval of the result of actions, the third only the delimitation of actions, the fourth only the cause of the diversity of elements, the fifth only the inclinations and dispositions of beings, the sixth only the sharpness and dullness of the faculties, the seventh only the defilement, etc., together with the jhānas, etc., the eighth only the continuity of aggregates formerly dwelt in, the ninth only the passing away and rebirth of beings, the tenth only the delimitation of the truths. But the knowledge of omniscience understands what must be known by these and also what is beyond that; however, it does not do all of their functions. Indeed, having become a jhāna, it cannot relinquish it; having become a psychic power, it cannot transform; having become a path, it cannot destroy the defilements.

Apica paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāmetaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ avitakkavicāramattaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacaraṃ, lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’nti. Jānanto ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇāni savitakkasavicārānī’’ti vakkhati, ‘‘tato parāni dve avitakkaavicārānī’’ti vakkhati. ‘‘Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ siyā savitakkasavicāraṃ siyā avitakkavicāramattaṃ, siyā avitakkaavicāra’’nti vakkhati. Tathā ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta kāmāvacarāni, tato dve rūpāvacarāni, avasāne ekaṃ lokuttara’’nti vakkhati. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana savitakkasavicārameva lokiyamevā’’ti vakkhati.

Moreover, the other should be asked thus: "Is this knowledge of the ten powers with initial and sustained thought, with sustained thought only, or without initial and sustained thought; belonging to the sense-sphere, belonging to the form-sphere, or belonging to the formless-sphere; mundane or supramundane?" Knowing, he will say, "The seven knowledges in order are with initial and sustained thought"; "The two beyond that are without initial and sustained thought," he will say. "The knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas could be with initial and sustained thought, could be with sustained thought only, could be without initial and sustained thought," he will say. Thus, "The seven in order belong to the sense-sphere, the two beyond that belong to the form-sphere, the last one is supramundane," he will say. "But the knowledge of omniscience is only with initial and sustained thought, only mundane," he will say.

Evamettha anupadavaṇṇanaṃ ñatvā idāni yasmā tathāgato paṭhamaṃyeva ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇena veneyyasattānaṃ āsavakkhayādhigamassa ceva anadhigamassa ca ṭhānāṭṭhānabhūtaṃ kilesāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati lokiyasammādiṭṭhiṭṭhānādidassanato niyatamicchādiṭṭhiṭṭhānābhāvadassanato ca. Atha nesaṃ kammavipākañāṇena vipākāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati tihetukappaṭisandhidassanato, sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇena kammāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati ānantariyakammābhāvadassanato. Evamanāvaraṇānaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇena anukūladhammadesanatthaṃ cariyāvisesaṃ passati dhātuvemattadassanato. Atha nesaṃ nānādhimuttikatañāṇena adhimuttiṃ passati payogaṃ anādiyitvāpi adhimuttivasena dhammadesanatthaṃ. Athevaṃ diṭṭhādhimuttīnaṃ yathāsatti yathābalaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ indriyaparopariyattiñāṇena indriyaparopariyattaṃ passati saddhādīnaṃ tikkhamudubhāvadassanato. Evaṃ pariññātindriyaparopariyattā pana te sace dūre honti, atha jhānādiñāṇena jhānādīsu vasībhūtattā iddhivisesena te khippaṃ upagacchati. Upagantvā ca nesaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena pubbajātibhavaṃ, dibbacakkhānubhāvato pattabbena cetopariyañāṇena sampati cittavisesaṃ passanto āsavakkhayañāṇānubhāvena āsavakkhayagāminiyā paṭipadāya vigatasammohattā āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ deseti. Tasmā iminānukkamena imāni balāni vuttānīti veditabbāni.

Having known this description without fault in this way, now, because the Tathāgata first sees, with the knowledge of place and non-place, the absence of the hindrances of defilements, which is the place and non-place for the attainment or non-attainment of the destruction of the āsavas of beings to be trained, from seeing the basis of right view, and from seeing the absence of the basis of wrong view, which is fixed wrong view, etc.; then with the knowledge of the result of actions, he sees the absence of the hindrances of results from seeing the triple-rooted rebirth; with the knowledge of the course of conduct that leads everywhere, he sees the absence of the hindrances of action from seeing the absence of deeds of immediate result. Thus, for those without hindrances, with the knowledge of the manifold elements and diverse elements, he sees the distinction of conduct for the purpose of teaching the suitable Dhamma, from seeing the distinction of elements. Then, with the knowledge of diverse inclinations, he sees the inclination for the purpose of teaching the Dhamma according to the inclination, even without adopting effort. Then, having seen the inclination in this way, in order to teach the Dhamma according to their capacity and strength, with the knowledge of the superiority and inferiority of the faculties, he sees the superiority and inferiority of the faculties, from seeing the sharpness and dullness of faith, etc. However, those whose faculties have been understood in this way, if they are far away, then, being master of the jhānas, etc., he quickly approaches them by the power of psychic abilities. And approaching them, seeing their former state of existence with the knowledge of remembering former abodes, and seeing their present special state of mind with the power of the knowledge of penetration of the minds of others obtainable by the power of the divine eye, being without delusion on the course of conduct leading to the destruction of the āsavas, by the power of the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas, he teaches the Dhamma for the destruction of the āsavas. Therefore, it should be understood that these powers are stated in this order.

2. Adhivuttipadasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Adhivuttipadasuttavaṇṇanā

22.Dutiyeye te dhammāti ye te dasabalañāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇadhammā.Adhivuttipadānanti adhivacanapadānaṃ, khandhāyatanadhātudhammānanti attho. Adhivuttiyoti hi adhivacanāni vuccanti, tesaṃ ye padabhūtā desanāya padaṭṭhānattā. Atītā buddhāpi hi ete dhamme kathayiṃsu, anāgatāpi eteva kathayissanti. Tasmā khandhādayo adhivuttipadāni nāma. Tesaṃ adhivuttipadānaṃ. Atha vā bhūtamatthaṃ abhibhavitvā yathāsabhāvato aggahetvā vattanato adhivuttiyoti diṭṭhiyo vuccanti, adhivuttīnaṃ padāni adhivuttipadāni, diṭṭhidīpakāni vacanānīti attho. Tesaṃ adhivuttipadānaṃ diṭṭhivohārānaṃ.Abhiññā sacchikiriyāyāti jānitvā paccakkhakaraṇatthāya.Visāradoti ñāṇasomanassappatto.Tatthāti tesu dhammesutesaṃ tesaṃ tathā tathā dhammaṃ desetunti tesaṃ tesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vā itaresaṃ vā āsayaṃ ñatvā tathā tathā dhammaṃ desetuṃ.Hīnaṃ vā hīnanti ñassatīti hīnaṃ vā dhammaṃ ‘‘hīno dhammo’’ti jānissati.Ñāteyyanti ñātabbaṃ.Daṭṭheyyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sacchikareyyanti sacchikātabbaṃ.Tatthatattha yathābhūtañāṇanti tesu tesu dhammesu yathāsabhāvañāṇaṃ. Iminā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dassetvā puna dasabalañāṇaṃ dassentodasayimānītiādimāha. Dasabalañāṇampi hi tattha tattha yathābhūtañāṇamevāti.

22. In the second, ye te dhammāti: Those Dhamma of the knowledge of the ten powers and the knowledge of omniscience. Adhivuttipadānanti: Of the terms of designation, meaning the aggregates, sense bases, and elements. For designations are called adhivutti, those which are terms are the basis for the teaching. Indeed, past Buddhas also spoke of these Dhammas, future Buddhas will also speak of these same. Therefore, the aggregates, etc., are called terms of designation. Of those terms of designation. Or alternatively, because of speaking after overpowering the real meaning, without grasping according to their own nature, views are called adhivutti, the terms of designations are the terms of views, meaning the words that reveal views. Of those terms of designations, of the usages of views. Abhiññā sacchikiriyāyāti: For the purpose of knowing and realizing. Visāradoti: Having attained joyful confidence in knowledge. Tatthāti: In those Dhammas. Tesaṃ tesaṃ tathā tathā dhammaṃ desetunti: Knowing the inclination of those with such and such views or others, to teach the Dhamma in such and such a way. Hīnaṃ vā hīnanti ñassatīti: He will know the inferior Dhamma as "an inferior Dhamma." Ñāteyyanti: Knowable. Daṭṭheyyanti: Seeable. Sacchikareyyanti: Realizable. Tatthatattha yathābhūtañāṇanti: Knowledge of the true nature of those Dhammas. With this, he shows the knowledge of omniscience. Having shown the knowledge of omniscience in this way, again showing the knowledge of the ten powers, he says dasayimānīti etc. Indeed, the knowledge of the ten powers is also knowledge of the true nature in that case.

3. Kāyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Kāyasuttavaṇṇanā

23.Tatiyeāpanno hoti kañcideva desanti kañci āpattikoṭṭhāsaṃ āpanno hoti.Anuviccāti anupavisitvā pariyogāhetvā.Kāyaduccaritanti tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ.Vacīduccaritanti catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ.Pāpikā issāti lāmikā usūyā.Paññāya disvāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya passitvā passitvā pahātabbā.Ijjhatīti samijjhati.Upavāsassāti nissāya upasaṅkamitvā vasantassa.Abhibhuyyāti ajjhottharitvā madditvā.Irīyatīti vattati. Imasmiṃ sutte sahavipassanāya maggo kathito.

23. Tatiye āpanno hoti kañcideva desanti: in the third, he is subject to some part of an offense. Anuviccāti: having investigated, having thoroughly examined. Kāyaduccaritanti: the three kinds of bodily misconduct. Vacīduccaritanti: the four kinds of verbal misconduct. Pāpikā issāti: debasing envy, malicious jealousy. Paññāya disvāti: having seen with wisdom, with insight wisdom, they should be abandoned by seeing again and again. Ijjhatīti: succeeds. Upavāsassāti: depending on, approaching, and dwelling. Abhibhuyyāti: having overcome, having crushed. Irīyatīti: behaves. In this sutta, the path with insight is spoken of.

4. Mahācundasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Mahācundasuttavaṇṇanā

24.Catutthejānāmimaṃ dhammanti iminā ñāṇavādassa vadanākāro vutto.Bhāvitakāyomhītiādīhi bhāvanāvādassa. Tatiyavāre dvepi vādā ekato vuttā, tayopi cete arahattameva paṭijānanti.Aḍḍhavādaṃ vadeyyāti aḍḍhohamasmīti vādaṃ vadeyya.Upanīhātunti nīharitvā dātuṃ.

24. In the fourth, jānāmimaṃ dhammanti: the manner of speaking of the doctrine of knowledge is stated. Bhāvitakāyomhīti, etc.: the doctrine of cultivation. In the third instance, both doctrines are stated together, and all three of these acknowledge only arahantship. Aḍḍhavādaṃ vadeyyāti: he might speak saying "I am half". Upanīhātunti: having brought out, to give.

5. Kasiṇasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Kasiṇasuttavaṇṇanā

25.Pañcame sakalaṭṭhena kasiṇāni, tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ khettaṭṭhena adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vā āyatanānītikasiṇāyatanāni. Uddhanti upari gagaṇatalābhimukhaṃ.Adhoti heṭṭhā bhūmitalābhimukhaṃ.Tiriyanti khettamaṇḍalaṃ viya samantā paricchinditvā. Ekacco hi uddhameva kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍheti, ekacco adho, ekacco samantato. Tena tena vā kāraṇena evaṃ pasāreti ālokamiva rūpadassanakāmo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriya’’nti.Advayanti idaṃ pana ekassa aññabhāvānupagamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi udakaṃ paviṭṭhassa sabbadisāsu udakameva hoti na aññaṃ, evameva pathavīkasiṇaṃ pathavīkasiṇameva hoti. Natthi tassa aññakasiṇasambhedoti. Eseva nayo sabbattha.Appamāṇanti idaṃ tassa tassa pharaṇaappamāṇavasena vuttaṃ. Tañhi cetasā pharanto sakalameva pharati, ‘‘ayamassa ādi, idaṃ majjha’’nti pamāṇaṃ na gaṇhāti.Viññāṇakasiṇanti cettha kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattaviññāṇaṃ. Tattha kasiṇavasena kasiṇugghāṭimākāse, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsavasena tattha pavattaviññāṇe uddhaṃadhotiriyatā veditabbā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayena panetāni pathavīkasiṇādīni vitthārato visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.51 ādayo) vuttāneva.

25. In the fifth, kasiṇāyatanāni: kasiṇa-spheres are so-called in the sense of totality, or in the sense of the sphere of objects related to them, or in the sense of determination. Uddhanti: upwards, facing the surface of the sky. Adhoti: downwards, facing the surface of the earth. Tiriyanti: horizontally, enclosing all around like a field circle. For one person expands the kasiṇa upwards only, another downwards, another all around. By this or that reason he thus spreads it like light, wishing to see a form. Therefore it was said: "One perceives the earth kasiṇa upwards, downwards, horizontally." Advayanti: this, however, is said for the purpose of not approaching a different state of one. Just as for one who has entered the water, there is only water in all directions, and nothing else, so too, the earth kasiṇa is only earth kasiṇa. There is no mixture of another kasiṇa. This same method applies everywhere. Appamāṇanti: this is said in terms of the immeasurable spreading of that. For while spreading it with the mind, he spreads all of it, and does not grasp a measure, saying "this is its beginning, this is the middle." Viññāṇakasiṇanti: here, viññāṇa-kasiṇa is the consciousness occurring in the space of the kasiṇa-removal. There, upwardness, downwardness, and horizontality should be understood in terms of the kasiṇa with regard to the kasiṇa-removal space, and in terms of the kasiṇa-removal space with regard to the consciousness occurring there. This is the summary here, but these earth kasiṇas, etc., have been spoken of in detail in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.51 ff.) by way of the method of meditation subjects.

6. Kāḷīsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kāḷīsuttavaṇṇanā

26.Chaṭṭhekumāripañhesūti kumārīnaṃ māradhītānaṃ pucchāsu.Atthassapattiṃ hadayassa santinti dvīhipi padehi arahattameva kathitaṃ.Senanti rāgādikilesasenaṃ.Piyasātarūpanti piyajātikesu ca sātajātikesu ca vatthūsu uppajjanato evaṃladdhanāmaṃ.Ekohaṃ jhāyaṃ sukhamanubodhinti evaṃ kilesasenaṃ jinitvā ahaṃ ekakova jhāyanto sukhaṃ anubujjhiṃ sacchiakāsiṃ.Sakkhinti sakkhibhāvappattaṃ dhammasakkhiṃ.Na sampajjati kenaci meti mayhaṃ kenaci saddhiṃ mittadhammo nāma natthi.Pathavīkasiṇasamāpattiparamā kho, bhagini, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā atthoti abhinibbattesunti pathavīkasiṇasamāpattiparamo uttamo atthoti gahetvā abhinibbattesuṃ.Yāvatā kho, bhagini, pathavīkasiṇasamāpattiparamatāti yattakā pathavīkasiṇasamāpattiyā uttamakoṭi.Tadabhiññāsi bhagavāti taṃ bhagavā abhiññāpaññāya abhiññāsi.Assādamaddasāti samudayasaccaṃ addasa.Ādīnavamaddasāti dukkhasaccaṃ addasa.Nissaraṇamaddasāti nirodhasaccaṃ addasa.Maggāmaggañāṇadassanamaddasāti maggasaccaṃ addasa.Atthassa pattīti etesaṃ catunnaṃ saccānaṃ diṭṭhattā arahattasaṅkhātassa atthassa patti, sabbadarathapariḷāhavūpasantatāyahadayassa santīti.

26. In the sixth, kumāripañhesūti: in the questions of the maidens, the daughters of Māra. Atthassa pattiṃ hadayassa santinti: with these two terms only arahantship is spoken of. Senanti: the army of defilements such as greed. Piyasātarūpanti: having obtained such a name because of arising in objects that are of a pleasing and agreeable nature. Ekohaṃ jhāyaṃ sukhamanubodhinti: thus, having conquered the army of defilements, I, all alone, while meditating, awakened to bliss, realized it. Sakkhinti: the Dharma-witness attained to the state of witness. Na sampajjati kenaci meti: I have no friendship with anyone. Pathavīkasiṇasamāpattiparamā kho, bhagini, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā atthoti abhinibbattesunti: having taken it that "the earth kasiṇa attainment is the highest goal," they turned away. Yāvatā kho, bhagini, pathavīkasiṇasamāpattiparamatāti: whatever is the highest limit of earth kasiṇa attainment. Tadabhiññāsi bhagavāti: the Blessed One knew that with the knowledge of higher-knowledge. Assādamaddasāti: he saw the truth of arising. Ādīnavamaddasāti: he saw the truth of suffering. Nissaraṇamaddasāti: he saw the truth of cessation. Maggāmaggañāṇadassanamaddasāti: he saw the truth of the path. Atthassa pattīti: because of seeing these four truths, the attainment of the goal called arahantship. Sabbadarathapariḷāhavūpasantatāya hadayassa santīti: peace of heart through the subsiding of all torments and burnings.

7. Paṭhamamahāpañhasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Paṭhamamahāpañhasuttavaṇṇanā

27.Sattameabhijānāthāti abhijānitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā viharatha.Abhiññāyāti abhijānitvā.Idhāti imāya.Dhammadesanāya vā dhammadesananti yadidaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa dhammadesanāya saddhiṃ amhākaṃ dhammadesanaṃ, amhākaṃ vā dhammadesanāya saddhiṃ samaṇassa gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ ārabbha nānākaraṇaṃ vuccetha, taṃ kiṃ nāmāti vadanti. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Iti te majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya sāsanena saddhiṃ attano laddhiṃ vacanamattena samadhuraṃ ṭhapayiṃsu.Neva abhinandiṃsūti ‘‘evameta’’nti na sampaṭicchiṃsu.Nappaṭikkosiṃsūti ‘‘na idaṃ eva’’nti nappaṭisedhesuṃ. Kasmā? Te kira ‘‘titthiyā nāma andhasadisā jānitvā vā ajānitvā vā katheyyu’’nti nābhinandiṃsu.

27. In the seventh, abhijānāthāti: know directly, having directly known, dwell. Abhiññāyāti: having directly known. Idhāti: by this. Dhammadesanāya vā dhammadesananti: whatever differing is spoken of, beginning with our teaching of the Dharma in connection with the teaching of the Dharma of the ascetic Gotama, or the teaching of the Dharma of the ascetic Gotama in connection with our teaching of the Dharma, what is that called? In the second term also, this same method applies. Thus, in the middle of them, like debased gold, they established their own doctrine as very sweet with the Teaching with mere speech. Neva abhinandiṃsūti: they did not approve, saying "so it is". Nappaṭikkosiṃsūti: they did not reject, saying "it is not so". Why? They thought, "Those sectarians are like the blind; they might speak knowing or not knowing," and they did not approve.

Nasampāyissantīti sampādetvā kathetuṃ na sakkhissanti.Uttari ca vighātanti asampādanato uttarimpi dukkhaṃ āpajjissanti. Sampādetvā kathetuṃ asakkontānañhi dukkhaṃ uppajjati.Yathā taṃ, bhikkhave, avisayasminti ettha catanti nipātamattaṃ.Yathāti kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmā avisaye pañhaṃ pucchitā hontīti attho.Ito vā pana sutvāti ito vā pana mama sāsanato sutvā. Itoti tathāgatatopi tathāgatasāvakatopi.Ārādheyyāti paritoseyya, aññathā ārādhanaṃ nāma natthīti dasseti.

Na sampāyissantīti: they will not be able to bring it about and speak. Uttari ca vighātanti: and from not bringing it about, they will undergo further suffering. For suffering arises for those who are unable to bring it about and speak. Yathā taṃ, bhikkhave, avisayasminti: here, tanti is merely a particle. Yathāti: is a statement of cause, meaning "because they are asking a question in an inappropriate sphere." Ito vā pana sutvāti: or else, having heard from this, from my Teaching. "Ito": from the Tathāgata, or from a disciple of the Tathāgata. Ārādheyyāti: should please, he shows that there is no pleasing otherwise.

Ekadhammeti ekasmiṃ dhamme. Iminā uddeso dassito. Paratokatamasmiṃ ekadhammeti iminā pañho dassito.Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti idaṃ panettha veyyākaraṇaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Sammā nibbindamānotiādīsu pana sammā hetunā nayena nibbidānupassanāya nibbindanto ukkaṇṭhanto, virāgānupassanāya virajjanto, paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya muccanassa upāyaṃ katvā vimuccamāno, adhimokkhavasena vā vimuccamāno sanniṭṭhānaṃ kurumānoti attho. Udayabbayehi paricchinditvā pubbantāparantadassanenasammā pariyantadassāvī. Sammadatthaṃ abhisameccāti sammā sabhāgatthaṃ ñāṇena abhisamāgantvā.Dukkhassantakaro hotīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa pariyantaṃ parivaṭumaṃ karo hoti.

Ekadhammeti: in one thing. With this, the topic is shown. Further on, katamasmiṃ ekadhammeti: with this, the question is shown. Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti: here, this is the explanation. In the rest also, this same method applies. Sammā nibbindamānoti, etc.: moreover, sammā nibbindamāno means being disgusted through disgust-contemplation in a proper way, with a reason, with a method, being repelled, being dispassionate through dispassion-contemplation, making an effort for release through reflection-contemplation and being released, or making a firm determination and being released through conviction. Sammā pariyantadassāvī: one who truly sees the end by distinguishing with arising and passing away, by seeing the beginning and the end. Sammadatthaṃ abhisameccāti: having rightly attained the state of a thing with knowledge. Dukkhassantakaro hotīti: he is one who makes an end to all suffering of the round.

Sabbe sattāti kāmabhavādīsu ekavokārabhavādīsu ca sabbabhavesu sabbe sattā.Āhāraṭṭhitikāti āhārato ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikā. Iti sabbasattānampi ṭhitihetu āhāro nāma eko dhammo, tasmiṃ ekadhamme. Nanu ca evaṃ sante yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘asaññasattā devā ahetukā anāhārā aphassakā’’tiādi (vibha. 1017), taṃ virujjhatīti. Na virujjhati. Tesañhi jhānaṃ āhāro hoti. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.11) idaṃ virujjhatīti. Idampi na virujjhati. Etasmiñhi sutte nippariyāyena āhāralakkhaṇā dhammā āhārāti vuttā, idha pana pariyāyena paccayo āhāroti vutto. Sabbadhammānañhi paccayo laddhuṃ vaṭṭati. So ca yaṃ yaṃ phalaṃ janeti, taṃ taṃ āharati nāma. Tasmā āhāroti vuccati. Tenevāha – ‘‘avijjampāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāraṃ vadāmi, no anāhāraṃ. Ko ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya āhāro? Pañca nīvaraṇātissa vacanīya’’nti (a. ni. 10.61). Ayaṃ idha adhippeto. Etasmiñhi paccayāhāre gahite pariyāyāhāropi nippariyāyāhāropi sabbo gahitova hoti.

Sabbe sattāti: all beings in all existences, in the desire realm, etc., and in the one-constituent existence, etc. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti: those for whom existence depends on nutriment are āhāraṭṭhitikā. Thus, nutriment is one thing that is the cause of existence for all beings, in that one thing. But if so, doesn't that contradict what was said: "The unpercipient beings, gods, are without cause, without nutriment, without contact," etc. (vibha. 1017)? It is not contradictory. For jhāna is nutriment for them. Even so, doesn't this contradict: "There are these four nutriments, monks" (saṃ. ni. 2.11)? This too is not contradictory. For in that sutta, states having the characteristic of nutriment are called nutriment in a non-conventional way, but here, a condition is called nutriment in a conventional way. For a condition is fit to be obtained for all states. And whatever result it generates, it brings that. Therefore it is called nutriment. Therefore he said: "I say, monks, that ignorance also has nutriment, not without nutriment. And what, monks, is the nutriment for ignorance? The five hindrances" (a. ni. 10.61). This is what is intended here. For when that condition-nutriment is taken, all nutriment, both conventional and non-conventional, is taken.

Tattha asaññībhave paccayāhāro labbhati. Anuppanne hi buddhe titthāyatane pabbajitā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘dhi cittaṃ, dhi vatetaṃ cittaṃ, cittassa nāma abhāvoyeva sādhu. Cittañhi nissāya vadhabandhādipaccayaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati. Citte asati nattheta’’nti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃ katvā asaññībhave nibbattanti. Yo yassa iriyāpatho manussaloke paṇihito ahosi, so tena iriyāpathena nibbattitvā cittarūpasadiso hutvā pañca kappasatāni tiṭṭhati. Ettakaṃ addhānaṃ sayito viya hoti. Evarūpānampi sattānaṃ paccayāhāro labbhati. Te hi yaṃ jhānaṃ bhāvetvā nibbattā, tadeva nesaṃ paccayo hoti. Yathā jiyāvegena khittasaro yāva jiyāvego atthi, tāva gacchati. Evaṃ yāva jhānapaccayo atthi, tāva tiṭṭhanti. Tasmiṃ niṭṭhite khīṇavego viya saro patanti. Cavanakāle ca tesaṃ so rūpakāyo antaradhāyati, kāmāvacarasaññā uppajjati, tena saññuppādena te devā tamhā kāyā cutāti paññāyanti.

There, condition-nutriment is obtained in the realm of the unpercipient. For when a Buddha has not arisen, ascetics in sectarian abodes perform preliminary work on the space kasiṇa, produce the fourth jhāna, and rising up from that, they generate inclination and liking, thinking "fie on the mind, fie indeed on this mind, the non-existence of mind is indeed good. For suffering arises depending on mind as a condition for murder, bondage, etc. When there is no mind, there is no suffering," and having died without decline of jhāna, they are reborn in the realm of the unpercipient. The posture that was undertaken by whomever in the human world, they are reborn with that posture, become similar to mind-made-form, and remain for five hundred eons. For such a long time they are as if sleeping. For such beings also, condition-nutriment is obtained. For the jhāna that they cultivated and were reborn, that is their condition. Just as an arrow shot with the force of the bow goes as long as the force of the bow exists, so too, they remain as long as the jhāna-condition exists. When that is finished, like an arrow with exhausted force, they fall. And at the moment of death, that form-body disappears, and desire-realm perception arises, and by that arising of perception, those gods are known to have died from that body.

Ye pana te nerayikā neva vuṭṭhānaphalūpajīvī, na puññaphalūpajīvīti vuttā, tesaṃ ko āhāroti? Tesaṃ kammameva āhāro. Kiṃ pañca āhārā atthīti? Pañca, na pañcāti idaṃ na vattabbaṃ, nanu ‘‘paccayo āhāro’’ti vuttametaṃ. Tasmā yena kammena niraye nibbattanti, tadeva tesaṃ ṭhitipaccayattā āhāro hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘na ca tāva kālaṃ karoti, yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantī hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.250, 268; a. ni. 3.36).

But what is the nutriment for those hell-beings who are said to be neither subsisting on the fruit of rising up nor subsisting on the fruit of merit? For them, kamma itself is nutriment. Are there five nutriments? One should not say "five" or "not five", but was it not said that "a condition is nutriment"? Therefore, the kamma by which they are reborn in hell, that itself is nutriment because it is a condition for their existence. This was said referring to that: "And he does not die as long as that evil kamma is not exhausted" (ma. ni. 3.250, 268; a. ni. 3.36).

Kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ ārabbhāpi cettha vivādo na kātabbo. Mukhe uppajjanakheḷopi hi tesaṃ āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Kheḷo hi niraye dukkhavedanīyo hutvā paccayo hoti, sagge sukhavedaniyo. Iti kāmabhave nippariyāyena cattāro āhārā, rūpārūpabhavesu ṭhapetvā asaññe sesānaṃ tayo, asaññānañceva avasesānañca paccayāhāroti iminā ākārena sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti veditabbā. Tattha cattāro āhāro yo vā pana koci paccayāhāro dukkhasaccaṃ, āhārasamuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paññā maggasaccanti evaṃ catusaccavasena sabbavāresu yojanā kātabbā.

Here also, a dispute should not be made concerning material nutriment. For even the saliva that arises in the mouth fulfills the function of nutriment for them. For saliva becomes a condition in hell by being suffering-feeling, and in heaven by being pleasure-feeling. Thus, in the desire-realm, the four nutriments are non-conventional, and in the form and formless realms, excluding the unpercipient, there are three for the rest, and for the unpercipient and the remainder, condition-nutriment: in this manner, all beings should be understood as having nutriment as their condition for existence. There, the four nutriments or any condition-nutriment is the truth of suffering, the former craving that causes the arising of nutriment is the truth of arising, the non-occurrence of both is the truth of cessation, and the wisdom that understands cessation is the truth of the path: thus, the connection should be made in all instances in terms of the four truths.

8. Dutiyamahāpañhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Dutiyamahāpañhasuttavaṇṇanā

28.Aṭṭhamekajaṅgalāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare.Kajaṅgalāti kajaṅgalāvāsino.Mahāpañhesūti mahantaatthapariggāhakesu pañhesu.Yathā mettha khāyatīti yathā me ettha upaṭṭhāti.Sammā subhāvitacittoti hetunā nayena suṭṭhu bhāvitacitto.Eso ceva tassa atthoti kiñcāpi bhagavatā ‘‘cattāro dhammā’’tiādayo pañhā ‘‘cattāro āhārā’’tiādinā nayena vissajjitā, yasmā pana catūsu āhāresu pariññātesu cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā honti, tesu ca bhāvitesu cattāro āhārā pariññātāva honti. Tasmā desanāvilāsena byañjanamevettha nānaṃ, attho pana ekoyeva. Indriyādīsupi eseva nayo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘eso ceva tassa attho’’ti. Atthato hi ubhayampetaṃ majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇamiva hoti.

28. In the eighth, kajaṅgalāyanti: in a city of that name. Kajaṅgalāti: inhabitants of Kajaṅgalā. Mahāpañhesūti: in the great questions that encompass a great meaning. Yathā mettha khāyatīti: as it occurs to me here. Sammā subhāvitacittoti: one whose mind is well cultivated by a cause, by a method. Eso ceva tassa atthoti: although the questions such as "four things" were answered by the Blessed One with the method such as "four nutriments", because when the four nutriments are fully understood, the four foundations of mindfulness are cultivated, and when those are cultivated, the four nutriments are fully understood, therefore, only the expression is different here by way of the charm of the teaching, but the meaning is the same. This same method applies to the faculties, etc. Therefore it was said: "this is its meaning". For in meaning, both of these are like debased gold in the middle.

9. Paṭhamakosalasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭhamakosalasuttavaṇṇanā

29.Navameyāvatāti yattakā.Kāsikosalāti kāsikosalajanapadā.Attheva aññathattanti ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ atthiyeva.Atthi vipariṇāmoti maraṇampi atthiyeva.Tasmimpi nibbindatīti tasmimpi sampattijāte ukkaṇṭhati.Agge virajjatīti sampattiyā agge kosalarājabhāve virajjati.Pageva hīnasminti paṭhamataraṃyeva hīne ittaramanussānaṃ pañca kāmaguṇajāte.

29. In the ninth, yāvatāti: however many. Kāsikosalāti: the Kāsī and Kosala districts. Attheva aññathattanti: there is indeed alteration of what is established. Atthi vipariṇāmoti: there is indeed death also. Tasmimpi nibbindatīti: he is disgusted even with that attainment. Agge virajjatīti: he is dispassionate towards the highest, the state of being a king of Kosala. Pageva hīnasminti: even sooner towards the base, the five sense pleasures that are common to ordinary people.

Manomayāti jhānamanena nibbattā.Bārāṇaseyyakanti bārāṇasiyaṃ uppannaṃ. Tattha kira kappāsopi mudu, suttakantikāyopi tantavāyāpi chekā, udakampi suci siniddhaṃ.Ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhanti dvīsupi passesu maṭṭhaṃ mudu siniddhaṃ khāyati. Catasso paṭipadā lokiyalokuttaramissikā kathitā. Saññāsu paṭhamā kāmāvacarasaññā, dutiyā rūpāvacarasaññā, tatiyā lokuttarasaññā, catutthā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā. Yasmā pana sā saññā aggāti āgatā, tato paraṃ saññāpaññatti nāma natthi, tasmā agganti vuttā.

Manomayāti: produced by the mind of jhāna. Bārāṇaseyyakanti: produced in Bārāṇasī. It seems that there the cotton is soft, the thread-spinners are skillful, and the weavers are clever, and the water is pure and smooth. Ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhanti: it appears soft and smooth, polished on both sides. Four paths have been spoken of that are mundane, supramundane, and mixed. Among perceptions, the first is desire-realm perception, the second is form-realm perception, the third is supramundane perception, the fourth is perception of the realm of nothingness. But because that perception has come as the highest, and there is no designation of perception beyond that, therefore it is called the highest.

Bāhirakānanti sāsanato bahiddhā pavattānaṃ.Nocassaṃ no ca me siyāti sace ahaṃ atīte na bhavissaṃ, etarahipi me ayaṃ attabhāvo na siyā.Na bhavissāmi na me bhavissatīti sacepi anāgate na bhavissāmi, na ca me kiñci palibodhajātaṃ bhavissati.Agge virajjatīti ucchedadiṭṭhiyaṃ virajjati. Ucchedadiṭṭhi hi idha nibbānassa santatāya agganti jātā.

Bāhirakānanti: of those occurring outside the Teaching. No ca assaṃ no ca me siyāti: if I did not exist in the past, then this self-existence would not exist for me even now. Na bhavissāmi na me bhavissatīti: even if I will not exist in the future, there will be no attachment-born for me. Agge virajjatīti: he is dispassionate towards the annihilation view. For the annihilation view here has come to be the highest because of the continuity of nibbāna.

Paramatthavisuddhinti uttamatthavisuddhiṃ. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ākiñcaññāyatanañhi vipassanāpadaṭṭhānattā aggaṃ nāma jātaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ dīghāyukattā.Paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānanti imasmiññeva attabhāve paramanibbānaṃ.Anupādā vimokkhoti catūhi upādānehi aggahetvā cittassa vimokkho. Arahattassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Pariññanti samatikkamaṃ. Tattha bhagavā paṭhamajjhānena kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpeti, arūpāvacarehi rūpānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpeti, anupādānibbānena vedanānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpeti. Nibbānañhi sabbavedayitappahānattā vedanānaṃ pariññā nāma.Anupādāparinibbānanti apaccayaparinibbānaṃ. Idaṃ pana suttaṃ kathento bhagavā anabhiratipīḷitāni pañca bhikkhusatāni disvā tesaṃ anabhirativinodanatthaṃ kathesi. Tepi anabhiratiṃ vinodetvā desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā sotāpannā hutvā aparabhāge vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsūti.

Paramatthavisuddhi means the purification of the highest meaning. This is a designation for the attainment of the realm of neither perception nor non-perception (nevasaññānāsaññāyatana). For the realm of nothingness (ākiñcaññāyatana) is called the highest (aggaṃ) because it is the basis for insight (vipassanā), while the realm of neither perception nor non-perception is called the highest because of its long duration.Paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbāna means the supreme Nibbāna in this very existence.Anupādā vimokkho means the liberation of the mind without grasping with the four kinds of clinging (upādāna). This is a name for Arahatship.Pariñña means surpassing. Herein, the Blessed One teaches the surpassing of sense pleasures (kāmānaṃ) through the first jhāna, He teaches the surpassing of forms (rūpānaṃ) through the formless attainments (arūpāvacara), He teaches the surpassing of feelings (vedanānaṃ) through Nibbāna without clinging (anupādānibbāna). For Nibbāna is called the surpassing of feelings because it is the abandonment of all that is felt.Anupādāparinibbāna means the Parinibbāna without conditions (apaccaya). Now, while relating this sutta, the Blessed One, seeing five hundred bhikkhus afflicted with discontent, spoke it to remove their discontent. And they, having dispelled their discontent, directing their wisdom in accordance with the teaching, became stream-enterers (sotāpannā), and later, developing insight, attained Arahatship.

10. Dutiyakosalasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Dutiyakosalasuttavaṇṇanā

30.Dasameuyyodhikā nivatto hotīti yuddhato nivatto hoti.Laddhādhippāyoti mahākosalaraññā kira bimbisārassa dhītaraṃ dentena dvinnaṃ rajjānaṃ antare satasahassuṭṭhāno kāsigāmo nāma dhītu dinno. Ajātasattunā pitari mārite mātāpissa rañño viyogasokena nacirasseva matā. Tato rājā pasenadikosalo ‘‘ajātasattunā mātāpitaro māritā, mama pitu santako gāmo’’ti tassatthāya aṭṭaṃ karoti, ajātasattupi ‘‘mama mātu santako’’ti tassa gāmassatthāya. Dvepi mātulabhāgineyyā caturaṅginiṃ senaṃ sannayhitvā yujjhiṃsu. Tattha pasenadikosalo dve vāre ajātasattunā parājito nagarameva pāvisi. Tatiyavāre ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho me jayo bhaveyyā’’ti upassutivasena yujjhitabbākāraṃ ñatvā byūhaṃ racayitvā ubhohi passehi parikkhipitvā ajātasattuṃ gaṇhi. Tāvadeva jayādhippāyassa laddhattā laddhādhippāyo nāma ahosi.

30. In the tenth [sutta], uyyodhikā nivatto hotī means he retreats from battle.Laddhādhippāyo means: it seems that when King Mahākosala gave his daughter to Bimbisāra, a Kasi village worth a hundred thousand was given to the daughter between the two kingdoms. When Ajātasattu killed his father, his mother also died not long after from grief over the king's death. Then King Pasenadi Kosala, thinking, "Ajātasattu has killed my parents, [so this is] the village belonging to my father," made an attack for it; Ajātasattu also [thought], "It belongs to my mother," for that village. The two, maternal uncle and nephew, having assembled a fourfold army, fought. There, Pasenadi Kosala, defeated twice by Ajātasattu, entered the city. The third time, having understood the manner of fighting by way of eavesdropping [to find out] "How might victory be mine?", having arranged the array, encircling [him] from both sides, he captured Ajātasattu. Just then, having obtained the intention of victory, he was called one who had obtained his intention (laddhādhippāyo).

Yenaārāmo tena pāyāsīti bahinagare jayakhandhāvāraṃ nivesetvā ‘‘yāva nagaraṃ alaṅkaronti, tāva dasabalaṃ vandissāmi. Nagaraṃ paviṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya hi papañco hotī’’ti amaccagaṇaparivuto yenārāmo tena pāyāsi, ārāmaṃ pāvisi. Kasmiṃ kāle pāvisīti? Piṇḍapātappaṭikkantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ovādaṃ datvā sammāsambuddhe gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭhe bhikkhusaṅghe ca ovādaṃ sampaṭicchitvā attano attano rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni gate.Caṅkamantīti kasmiṃ samaye caṅkamanti? Paṇītabhojanapaccayassa thinamiddhassa vinodanatthaṃ, divā padhānikā vā te. Tādisānañhi pacchābhattaṃ caṅkamitvā nhatvā sarīraṃ utuṃ gāhāpetvā nisajja samaṇadhammaṃ karontānaṃ cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti.Ye te bhikkhūti so kira ‘‘kahaṃ satthā kahaṃ sugatoti pariveṇena pariveṇaṃ āgantvā pucchitvāva pavisissāmī’’ti vilokento araññahatthī viya mahācaṅkame caṅkamamāne paṃsukūlike bhikkhū disvā tesaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Dassanakāmāti passitukāmā.Vihāroti gandhakuṭiṃ sandhāya āhaṃsu.Ataramānoti aturito, saṇikaṃ padapamāṇaṭṭhāne padaṃ nikkhipanto vattaṃ katvā susammaṭṭhaṃ muttajālasinduvārasadisaṃ vālukaṃ avināsentoti attho.Ālindanti pamukhaṃ.Aggaḷanti kavāṭaṃ.Ukkāsitvāti ukkāsitasaddaṃ katvā.Ākoṭehīti agganakhena īsakaṃ kuñcikāchiddasamīpe koṭehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dvāraṃ kira atiupari amanussā, atiheṭṭhā dīghajātikā koṭenti. Tathā akoṭetvā majjhe chiddasamīpe koṭetabbanti idaṃ dvārakoṭanavattanti vadanti.Vivari bhagavā dvāranti na bhagavā uṭṭhāya dvāraṃ vivarati, vivaratūti pana hatthaṃ pasāreti. Tato ‘‘bhagavā tumhehi anekakappakoṭīsu dānaṃ dadamānehi na sahatthā dvāravivaraṇakammaṃ kata’’nti sayameva dvāraṃ vivaṭaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā bhagavato manena vivaṭaṃ, tasmā ‘‘vivari bhagavā dvāra’’nti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.

Yenaārāmo tena pāyāsī means, having established the victory camp outside the city, thinking "Until they decorate the city, I will pay homage to the Ten-Powered One. For from the time I enter the city, there will be proliferation (papañco)," surrounded by a retinue of ministers, he went to where the monastery (ārāmo) was, he entered the monastery. At what time did he enter? After the bhikkhus had returned from their alms round, after the Fully Awakened One had given advice and entered the Perfumed Chamber (gandhakuṭi), and the Sangha, having received the advice, had gone to their respective daytime and nighttime dwellings.Caṅkamantī means: at what time do they pace up and down (caṅkamanti)? For the purpose of dispelling drowsiness (thinamiddhassa) after a delicious meal, or they are those who strive by day. For after such [bhikkhus] have paced up and down after the meal, and bathed, having warmed their bodies, and sat down, when they practice the ways of a renunciate, their minds become concentrated.Ye te bhikkhū means: it seems that he, thinking "I will only enter after asking 'Where is the Teacher? Where is the Well-gone One?' having come to each enclosure," looking around, saw bhikkhus wearing robes taken from a dust heap (paṃsukūlike bhikkhū) pacing up and down on the great promenade (mahācaṅkame) like an elephant in the forest, [and] he went to them. This was said with that in mind.Dassanakāmā means desiring to see.Vihāro they said referring to the Perfumed Chamber (gandhakuṭi).Ataramāno means unhurried, placing his foot carefully in the place for foot placement, fulfilling his duty, meaning without destroying the well-smoothed sand that was like a net of pearls and lapis lazuli.Ālinda means the porch.Aggaḷa means the bolt.Ukkāsitvā means having made a coughing sound.Ākoṭehī means it is said, "Tap a little near the keyhole with the tip of your fingernail." It seems that supernatural beings knock on the door too high up, [and] long-lived beings too low down. In this way, having knocked, one should knock near the hole in the middle. This, they say, is the duty of knocking on the door.Vivari bhagavā dvāra means the Blessed One does not get up and open the door, but stretches out his hand so that it might open. Then, "The Blessed One has not done the work of opening the door with his own hand, even when giving alms for countless aeons." Therefore, the door opened by itself. But because it was opened by the Blessed One's mind, it is fitting to say "vivari bhagavā dvāra".

Mettūpahāranti mettāsampayuttaṃ kāyikavācasikaupahāraṃ.Kataññutanti ayañhi rājā pubbe thūlasarīro ahosi, doṇapākaṃ bhuñjati. Athassa bhagavā divase divase thokaṃ thokaṃ hāpanatthāya –

Mettūpahāra means an offering (upahāraṃ) of loving-kindness accompanied by bodily and verbal action.Kataññuta means: this king was formerly corpulent, he would eat a troughful (doṇapākaṃ). Then the Blessed One, in order to gradually reduce [his weight] day by day [said]:

‘‘Manujassa sadā satīmato,

‘‘For a person who is ever mindful,
Knowing moderation in what he has obtained to eat;
His pains are lessened,
He ages slowly, protecting his life.’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.124) –

Ariye ñāyeti sahavipassanake magge.Vuddhasīloti vaḍḍhitasīlo.Ariyasīloti apothujjanikehi sīlehi samannāgato.Kusalasīloti anavajjehi sīlehi samannāgato.Āraññakoti jāyamānopi araññe jāto, abhisambujjhamānopi araññe abhisambuddho, devavimānakappāya gandhakuṭiyā vasantopi araññeyeva vasīti dassento evamāha. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Ariye ñāye means in the noble path accompanied by insight.Vuddhasīlo means one whose virtue is developed.Ariyasīlo means endowed with virtues that are not of ordinary people (apothujjanikehi).Kusalasīlo means endowed with faultless virtues.Āraññako means he said thus, showing that even when he was being born, he was born in the forest, even when he was awakening, he awakened in the forest, even when dwelling in the Perfumed Chamber that was like a divine mansion, he dwelt in the forest. The rest is obvious everywhere.

4. Upālivaggo

4. Upālivaggo

1. Upālisuttavaṇṇanā
1. Upālisuttavaṇṇanā

31.Catutthassa paṭhamesaṅghasuṭṭhutāyātiādīsu saṅghasuṭṭhutā nāma saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvo, ‘‘suṭṭhu devā’’ti āgataṭṭhāne viya ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvo. Yo ca tathāgatassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchati, tassa taṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattati. Tasmā saṅghassa ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti vacanasampaṭicchanatthaṃ paññattaṃ, asampaṭicchane ādīnavaṃ, sampaṭicchane ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā, na balakkārena abhibhavitvāti etamatthaṃ āvikaronto āha –saṅghasuṭṭhutāyāti.Saṅghaphāsutāyāti saṅghassa phāsubhāvāya, sahajīvitāya sukhavihāratthāyāti attho.

31. In the first [sutta] of the fourth [section], among saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā and so on, saṅghasuṭṭhutā means the well-being of the Sangha, a state of accepting the words "Very well, Bhante", as in the place where "suṭṭhu devā" comes. And that acceptance of the Tathāgata's words leads to welfare and happiness for a long time. Therefore, it was prescribed for the Sangha to accept the words "Very well, Bhante"; revealing this meaning by showing the disadvantage in non-acceptance and the advantage in acceptance, [and] not by overwhelming with force, he said: saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā. Saṅghaphāsutāyā means for the comfort of the Sangha, for the sake of living together harmoniously and happily.

Dummaṅkūnaṃpuggalānaṃ niggahāyāti dummaṅkūnāma dussīlapuggalā, ye maṅkutaṃ āpādiyamānāpi dukkhena āpajjanti, vītikkamaṃ karontā vā katvā vā na lajjanti, tesaṃ niggahatthāya. Te hi sikkhāpade asati ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi diṭṭhaṃ, kiṃ sutaṃ, kiṃ amhehi kataṃ, katamasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ katamaṃ āpattiṃ ropetvā amhe niggaṇhathā’’ti saṅghaṃ viheṭheyyuṃ. Sikkhāpade pana sati te saṅgho sikkhāpadaṃ dassetvā saha dhammena niggahessati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti.

Dummaṅkūnaṃpuggalānaṃ niggahāyā means dummaṅkū are immoral individuals who, even when being accused, are accused with difficulty, or who are not ashamed when committing or having committed a transgression, for the restraint of these. For if there is no training rule, they would harass the Sangha, [saying] "What have you seen? What have you heard? What have we done? On what basis, having laid claim to which offense, do you restrain us?" But if there is a training rule, the Sangha will restrain them together with the Dhamma by showing the training rule. Therefore it was said – "dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā".

Pesalānanti piyasīlānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihāratthāya. Piyasīlā hi bhikkhū kattabbākattabbaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ velaṃ mariyādañca ajānantā sikkhāttayapāripūriyā ghaṭamānā kilamanti, te pana sāvajjānavajjaṃ velaṃ mariyādañca ñatvā sikkhāpāripūriyā ghaṭamānā na kilamanti. Tena tesaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ phāsuvihārāya saṃvattatiyeva. Yo vā dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggaho, sveva tesaṃ phāsuvihāro. Dussīlapuggale nissāya hi uposathappavāraṇā na tiṭṭhanti, saṅghakammāni nappavattanti, sāmaggī na hoti, bhikkhū anekaggā uddesādīsu anuyuñjituṃ na sakkonti. Dussīlesu pana niggahitesu sabbopi ayaṃ upaddavo na hoti, tato pesalā bhikkhū phāsu viharanti. Evaṃ ‘‘pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāyā’’ti ettha dvidhā attho veditabbo.

Pesalāna means for the comfortable dwelling of bhikkhus who are dear in virtue (piyasīlānaṃ). For bhikkhus who are dear in virtue, not knowing what should and should not be done, what is blameworthy and blameless, the right time and the limit, strive for the fulfillment of the threefold training and become exhausted; but having known what is blameworthy and blameless, the right time and the limit, striving for the fulfillment of the training, they are not exhausted. Therefore, the prescribing of training rules for them certainly leads to a comfortable dwelling. Or, the restraint of individuals who are dummaṅkū is itself their comfortable dwelling. For, depending on immoral individuals, the Uposatha and Pavāraṇā do not stand, the acts of the Sangha do not proceed, there is no harmony, and the bhikkhus, being divided, are not able to devote themselves to recitation and so on. But when the immoral ones are restrained, all this trouble does not occur, then virtuous bhikkhus dwell comfortably. Thus, in "pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāyā" the meaning should be understood in two ways.

Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāyāti diṭṭhadhammikā āsavā nāma asaṃvare ṭhitena tasmiṃyeva attabhāve pattabbā pāṇippahāradaṇḍappahārasatthappahārahatthacchedapādacchedaakittiayasavippaṭisārādayo dukkhaviseso, tesaṃ saṃvarāya pidahanāya āgamanamaggathakanāyāti attho.Samparāyikānanti samparāyikā āsavā nāma asaṃvare ṭhitena katapāpakammamūlakā samparāye narakādīsu pattabbā dukkhavisesā, tesaṃ paṭighātatthāya vūpasamatthāya.

Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāyā means diṭṭhadhammikā āsavā are the defilements pertaining to this very life, which, when one is unrestrained, are to be experienced in this very existence: the various kinds of suffering such as blows with the hand, blows with a stick, blows with a weapon, cutting off the hand, cutting off the foot, disrepute, dishonor, remorse, [this] is for the restraint, for the prevention, for obstructing the path of their coming.Samparāyikāna means samparāyikā āsavā are the defilements pertaining to the future life, which, when one is unrestrained, have evil actions as their root and are to be experienced in future lives, in hells and so on, [this is] for their repulsion, for their appeasement.

Appasannānanti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hi sati sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ ñatvā vā, yathāpaññattaṃ paṭipajjamāne bhikkhū disvā vā, yepi appasannā paṇḍitamanussā, te ‘‘yāni vata loke mahājanassa rajjanadussanamuyhanaṭṭhānāni, tehi ime samaṇā ārakā viratā viharanti, dukkaraṃ vata karontī’’ti pasādaṃ āpajjanti vinayapiṭakapotthakaṃ disvā micchādiṭṭhikatavedibrāhmaṇā viya. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘appasannānaṃ pasādāyā’’ti.

Appasannāna means: indeed, when there is a prescription of training rules, having known the prescription of training rules or having seen bhikkhus behaving in accordance with the prescription, even those wise people who are not pleased become pleased, thinking "These renunciates live refraining and abstaining from those things in the world which are places of excitement, corruption, and confusion for the general public; they are doing something difficult", just like those holding wrong views, Vedic Brahmins, [become pleased] after seeing a book of the Vinaya Piṭaka. Therefore it was said – "appasannānaṃ pasādāyā".

Pasannānanti yepi sāsane pasannā kulaputtā, tepi sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ vā ñatvā, yathāpaññattaṃ paṭipajjamāne bhikkhū vā disvā ‘‘aho ayyā dukkaraṃ karonti, ye yāvajīvaṃ ekabhattā vinayasaṃvaraṃ pālentī’’ti bhiyyo bhiyyo pasīdanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyā’’ti.

Pasannāna means: indeed, those sons of good families who are pleased with the Dispensation, having known the prescription of training rules, or having seen bhikkhus behaving in accordance with the prescription, are even more and more pleased, thinking "Alas, the noble ones do something difficult, who maintain the monastic discipline of eating one meal a day for as long as life lasts." Therefore it was said – "pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyā".

Saddhammaṭṭhitiyāti tividho saddhammo pariyattisaddhammo paṭipattisaddhammo adhigamasaddhammoti. Tattha sakalampi buddhavacanaṃ pariyattisaddhammo nāma. Terasa dhutaguṇā cārittavārittasīlasamādhivipassanāti ayaṃ paṭipattisaddhammo nāma. Navalokuttaradhammo adhigamasaddhammo nāma. So sabbopi yasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sati bhikkhū sikkhāpadañca tassa vibhaṅgañca tadatthajotanatthaṃ aññañca buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, yathāpaññattañca paṭipajjamānā paṭipattiṃ pūretvā paṭipattiyā adhigantabbaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ adhigacchanti, tasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā saddhammo ciraṭṭhitiko hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saddhammaṭṭhitiyā’’ti.

Saddhammaṭṭhitiyā means the Good Dhamma is of three kinds: the Good Dhamma of learning, the Good Dhamma of practice, the Good Dhamma of realization. Therein, all the words of the Buddha are called the Good Dhamma of learning. The thirteen ascetic qualities, morality consisting of avoidance and performance, concentration, and insight, this is called the Good Dhamma of practice. The nine supramundane Dhammas are called the Good Dhamma of realization. Since all of that, when there is a prescription of training rules, [means that] bhikkhus learn the training rule, its analysis, and other words of the Buddha for the sake of illuminating its meaning, and fulfilling the practice while behaving in accordance with the prescription, they realize the supramundane Dhamma that should be realized by practice, therefore, with the prescription of training rules, the Good Dhamma lasts long. Therefore it was said – "saddhammaṭṭhitiyā".

Vinayānuggahāyāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sati saṃvaravinayo, pahānavinayo, samathavinayo, paññattivinayoti catubbidho vinayo anuggahito hoti sūpatthambhito. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vinayānuggahāyā’’ti.

Vinayānuggahāyā means, when there is a prescription of training rules, the fourfold discipline (vinayo) – the discipline of restraint (saṃvaravinayo), the discipline of abandonment (pahānavinayo), the discipline of tranquility (samathavinayo), and the enacted discipline (paññattivinayoti) – is upheld, well-supported. Therefore it was said – "vinayānuggahāyā".

2. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanāsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapanāsuttavaṇṇanā

32.Dutiyepārājikoti pārājikāpattiṃ āpanno.Pārājikakathāvippakatā hotīti ‘‘asukapuggalo pārājikaṃ āpanno nu kho no’’ti evaṃ kathā ārabhitvā aniṭṭhāpitā hoti. Esa nayo sabbattha.

32. In the second [sutta], pārājiko means one who has committed a Pārājika offense.Pārājikakathāvippakatā hotī means the discussion, "Has such-and-such a person committed a Pārājika offense or not?" is begun but not concluded. This method [applies] everywhere.

3. Ubbāhikāsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Ubbāhikāsuttavaṇṇanā

33.Tatiyeubbāhikāyāti sampattaadhikaraṇaṃ vūpasametuṃ saṅghato ubbāhitvā uddharitvā gahaṇatthāya.Vinaye kho pana ṭhito hotīti vinayalakkhaṇe patiṭṭhito hoti.Asaṃhīroti na aññassa vacanamatteneva attano laddhiṃ vissajjeti.Paṭibaloti kāyabalenapi ñāṇabalenapi samannāgato.Saññāpetunti jānāpetuṃ.Paññāpetunti sampajānāpetuṃ.Nijjhāpetunti olokāpetuṃ.Pekkhatunti passāpetuṃ.Pasādetunti sañjātapasādaṃ kātuṃ.Adhikaraṇanti vivādādhikaraṇādicatubbidhaṃ.Adhikaraṇasamudayanti vivādamūlādikaṃ adhikaraṇakārakaṃ.Adhikaraṇanirodhanti adhikaraṇānaṃ vūpasamaṃ.Adhikaraṇanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadanti sattavidhaadhikaraṇasamathaṃ.

33. In the third [sutta], ubbāhikāyā means for the sake of taking [it] up, having led out and lifted out from the Sangha to settle a matter that has arisen (sampattaadhikaraṇaṃ).Vinaye kho pana ṭhito hotī means he is established in the characteristics of the Discipline (vinaya).Asaṃhīro means he does not abandon his own view merely at the word of another.Paṭibalo means endowed with both physical strength and strength of knowledge.Saññāpetu means to make known.Paññāpetu means to make fully known.Nijjhāpetu means to cause to observe.Pekkhatu means to cause to see.Pasādetu means to cause pleasure to arise.Adhikaraṇa means the four kinds of legal questions (vivādādhikaraṇādica).Adhikaraṇasamudaya means that which causes a legal question, such as the root of a dispute.Adhikaraṇanirodha means the appeasement of legal questions.Adhikaraṇanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipada means the seven kinds of settlement of legal questions (sattavidhaadhikaraṇasamathaṃ).

4. Upasampadāsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Upasampadāsuttavaṇṇanā

34.Catuttheanabhiratinti ukkaṇṭhitabhāvaṃ.Vūpakāsetunti vinetuṃ.Adhisīleti uttamasīle.Cittapaññāsupi eseva nayo.

34. In the fourth [sutta], anabhirati means the state of being disgusted.Vūpakāsetu means to remove.Adhisīle means in the higher morality.The same method [applies] to cittapaññā too.

7. Saṅghabhedasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Saṅghabhedasuttavaṇṇanā

37.Sattamevatthūhīti kāraṇehi.Avakassantīti parisaṃ ākaḍḍhanti vijaṭenti ekamantaṃ ussārenti.Apakassantīti ativiya ākaḍḍhanti, yathā visaṃsaṭṭhā honti, evaṃ karonti.Āveni kammāni karontīti visuṃ saṅghakammāni karonti.

37. In the seventh [sutta], vatthūhī means with reasons.Avakassantī means they pull the assembly (parisaṃ) apart, disunite [it], and raise [one part] to one side.Apakassantī means they pull [it] even further apart, doing [it] in such a way that they are completely separated.Āveni kammāni karontī means they perform the acts of the Sangha separately.

9-10. Ānandasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
9-10. Ānandasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

39-40.Navamekappaṭṭhikanti āyukappaṃ nirayamhi ṭhitikāraṇaṃ.Kibbisaṃ pasavatīti pāpaṃ paṭilabhati.Āpāyikoti apāyagamanīyo.Nerayikoti niraye nibbattanako.Vaggaratoti bhedarato.Yogakkhemā padhaṃsatīti yogehi khemato arahattato dhaṃsati vigacchati. Dasameanuggahoti aññamaññassa saṅgahānuggaho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

39-40. In the ninth, kappaṭṭhika means a kappa (aeon) as the duration of life, the cause for remaining in hell. Kibbisaṃ pasavati means he obtains evil. Āpāyiko means going to the apāya (lower realms). Nerayiko means being born in hell. Vaggarato means delighting in discord. Yogakkhemā padhaṃsatī means he falls away, departs from security from bonds, from arahatta (arahantship). In the tenth, anuggaho means mutual assistance and support. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

5. Akkosavaggo

5. Akkosavaggo

4. Kusinārasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Kusinārasuttavaṇṇanā

44.Pañcamassa catutthekusinārāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Devatānaṃ atthāya baliṃ haranti etthātibaliharaṇo,tasmiṃ baliharaṇe.Acchiddena appaṭimaṃsenātiādīsu yena kenacideva pahaṭo vā hoti, vejjakammādīni vā katāni, tassa kāyasamācāro upacikādīhi khāyitatālapaṇṇaṃ viya chiddo ca, paṭimasituṃ yattha katthaci gahetvā ākaḍḍhituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya paṭimaṃso ca hoti, viparīto acchiddo appaṭimaṃso nāma. Vacīsamācāro pana musāvādaomasavādapesuññaamūlakānuddhaṃsanādīhi chiddo sappaṭimaṃso ca hoti, viparīto acchiddo appaṭimaṃso.Mettaṃ nu kho me cittanti palibodhaṃ chinditvā kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogena adhigataṃ me mettacittaṃ.Anāghātanti āghātavirahitaṃ, vikkhambhanena vihatāghātanti attho.Kattha vuttanti idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ kismiṃ nagare vuttaṃ.

44. In the fourth of the fifth, kusinārāya means in a city named thus. Baliharaṇo, tasmiṃ baliharaṇe means a place where offerings are made to deities; in that place of offerings. Acchiddena appaṭimaṃsenātiādīsu means, struck by something or other, or having undergone medical procedures, the conduct of his body has holes like a chewed palm leaf due to ulcers and such, and it is paṭimaṃsa because it can be taken anywhere and stretched; the opposite is acchidda appaṭimaṃsa. However, the conduct of speech is chidda (defective) and sappaṭimaṃsa (with support) through false speech, scornful speech, divisive speech, baseless exaggeration, and so on; the opposite is acchidda appaṭimaṃsa. Mettaṃ nu kho me citta means my mind of loving-kindness attained through severing hindrances and applying oneself to meditation subjects. Anāghāta means without ill-will, meaning ill-will is warded off by suppression. Kattha vutta means in what city was this training rule spoken.

Kālena vakkhāmītiādīsu eko ekaṃ okāsaṃ kāretvā codentokālena vadatināma. Saṅghamajjhe vā gaṇamajjhe vā salākaggayāgaggavitakkamāḷakabhikkhācāramaggaāsanasālādīsu vā upaṭṭhākehi parivāritakkhaṇe vā codentoakālena vadatināma. Tacchena vadantobhūtena vadatināma. ‘‘Daharamahallakaparisāvacarakapaṃsukūlikadhammakathikapatirūpaṃ tava ida’’nti vadantopharusena vadatināma. Kāraṇanissitaṃ pana katvā, ‘‘bhante mahallakattha, parisāvacarakattha, paṃsukūlikattha, dhammakathikatthapatirūpaṃ tumhākamida’’nti vadantosaṇhena vadatināma. Kāraṇanissitaṃ katvā vadantoatthasaṃhitena vadatināma.Mettacitto vakkhāmi no dosantaroti mettacittaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā vakkhāmi, na duṭṭhacitto hutvā.

Kālena vakkhāmītiādīsu means one who questions after arranging an opportune moment is called kālena vadati (speaking at the right time). One who questions in the midst of the Saṅgha or a group, or at a time when surrounded by attendants in places such as the ticket hall, the offering distribution, the thought-collection area, the alms-collecting route, the assembly hall, and so on, is called akālena vadati (speaking at the wrong time). One who speaks truthfully is called bhūtena vadati (speaking truthfully). One who says, "This of yours is unbecoming of an elder, a member of the assembly, an ascetic, a preacher, an impostor," is called pharusena vadati (speaking harshly). But one who says, basing it on a reason, "Venerable sir, this of yours is unbecoming of an elder, a member of the assembly, an ascetic, a preacher, an impostor," is called saṇhena vadati (speaking gently). One who speaks basing it on a reason is called atthasaṃhitena vadati (speaking meaningfully). Mettacitto vakkhāmi no dosantaro means I will speak establishing a mind of loving-kindness, not becoming one with a malevolent mind.

5. Rājantepurappavesanasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Rājantepurappavesanasuttavaṇṇanā

45.Pañcamekataṃ vā karissanti vāti methunavītikkamaṃ kariṃsu vā karissanti vā.Ratananti maṇiratanādīsu yaṃkiñci.Patthetīti māretuṃ icchati.Hatthisambādhanti hatthīhi sambādhaṃ. Hatthisammaddanti vā pāṭho, tassattho – hatthīhi sammaddo etthāti hatthisammaddaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Rajanīyāni rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbānīti etāni rāgajanakāni rūpādīni tattha paripūrāni honti.

45. In the fifth, kataṃ vā karissanti vā means they have committed or will commit sexual misconduct. Ratana means any kind of jewel among jewel-stones and so on. Patthetī means he wishes to kill. Hatthisambādha means crowded with elephants. Hatthisammaddanti vā pāṭho, tassattho – hatthīhi sammaddo etthāti hatthisammaddaṃ means alternatively, the reading is "hatthisammaddaṃ," its meaning is "a crush of elephants is here," hence "hatthisammaddaṃ." The same method applies in the remaining instances. Rajanīyāni rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbānī means these attractive forms, sounds, odors, flavors, and tactile objects are fully present there.

6. Sakkasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sakkasuttavaṇṇanā

46.Chaṭṭhesokasabhayeti sokena sabhaye. Sokabhayeti vā pāṭho, ayamevattho. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Yena kenaci kammaṭṭhānenāti kasivaṇijjādikammesu yena kenaci kammena.Anāpajja akusalanti kiñci akusalaṃ anāpajjitvā.Nibbiseyyāti uppādeyya ācineyya.Dakkhoti cheko.Uṭṭhānasampannoti uṭṭhānavīriyena samannāgato.Alaṃ vacanāyāti yutto vacanāya.Ekantasukhappaṭisaṃvedī vihareyyāti ekantameva kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ ñāṇena paṭisaṃvedento vihareyya.Aniccāti hutvā abhāvato.Tucchāti sārarahitā.Musāti niccasubhasukhā viya khāyamānāpi tathā na hontīti musā.Mosadhammāti nassanasabhāvā. Tasmā te paṭicca dukkhaṃ uppajjatīti sandasseti.Idhapana voti etthavoti nipātamattaṃ.Apaṇṇakaṃ vā sotāpannoti avirādhitaṃ ekaṃsena sotāpanno vā hoti. Sopi jhānaṃ nibbatteti, brahmalokaṃ vā gantvā chasu vā kāmasaggesu ekantasukhappaṭisaṃvedī hutvā vihareyya. Imasmiṃ sutte satthā aṭṭhaṅguposathassa guṇaṃ kathesi.

46. In the sixth, sokasabhaye means with sorrow and with fear. Sokabhayeti vā pāṭho, ayamevattho means alternatively, the reading is "sokabhaya," and this is the meaning. The same method applies in the second instance. Yena kenaci kammaṭṭhānenā means by any kind of livelihood among farming, trade, and so on. Anāpajja akusala means without incurring any unwholesome action. Nibbiseyyā means he should produce, accumulate. Dakkho means skilled. Uṭṭhānasampanno means endowed with the energy of effort. Alaṃ vacanāyā means fit for speaking. Ekantasukhappaṭisaṃvedī vihareyyā means he should live experiencing only physical and mental pleasure with knowledge. Aniccā means because of ceasing to exist after having been. Tucchā means devoid of essence. Musā means though appearing as permanent, beautiful, and pleasurable, they are not so, hence false. Mosadhammā means having the nature of decay. Therefore, it shows that suffering arises dependent on them. Idhapana vo means here, vo is merely a particle. Apaṇṇakaṃ vā sotāpanno means either unfailing, certainly a sotāpanna (stream-enterer). He too produces jhāna, or having gone to the Brahma world, or in the six sensual heavens, he might live experiencing only pleasure. In this sutta, the Teacher spoke of the qualities of the eight-factored uposatha (observance day).

7. Mahālisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Mahālisuttavaṇṇanā

47.Sattamemicchāpaṇihitanti micchā ṭhapitaṃ.Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāti akusalakammapathavasena adhammacariyasaṅkhātā visamacariyā. Kusalakammapathavasena itarā veditabbā. Evamidha vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

47. In the seventh, micchāpaṇihita means wrongly established. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyā means the unrighteous conduct known as adhamma-cariya (unrighteous conduct) due to the paths of unwholesome action. The other should be understood as the paths of wholesome action. Thus, in this case, only the round of existence is spoken of.

8. Pabbajitaabhiṇhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Pabbajitaabhiṇhasuttavaṇṇanā

48.Aṭṭhamepabbajitenāti gharāvāsaṃ pahāya sāsane pabbajjaṃ upagatena.Abhiṇhanti abhikkhaṇaṃ punappunaṃ,paccavekkhitabbāoloketabbā sallakkhetabbā.Vevaṇṇiyanti vivaṇṇabhāvaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ vevaṇṇiyaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti sarīravevaṇṇiyaṃ parikkhāravevaṇṇiyañca. Tattha kesamassuoropanena sarīravevaṇṇiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pubbe pana nānāvirāgāni sukhumavatthāni nivāsetvāpi nānaggarasabhojanaṃ suvaṇṇarajatabhājanesu bhuñjitvāpi sirigabbhe varasayanāsanesu nipajjitvāpi nisīditvāpi sappinavanītādīhi bhesajjaṃ katvāpi pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya chinnasaṅghaṭitakasāvarasapītāni vatthāni nivāsetabbāni, ayapatte vā mattikapatte vā missakodano bhuñjitabbo, rukkhamūlādisenāsane muñjatiṇasantharaṇādīsu nipajjitabbaṃ, cammakhaṇḍataṭṭikādīsu nisīditabbaṃ, pūtimuttādīhi bhesajjaṃ kattabbaṃ hoti. Evamettha parikkhāravevaṇṇiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ paccavekkhato kopo ca māno ca pahīyati.

48. In the eighth, pabbajitenā means by one who has abandoned household life and undertaken ordination in the Dispensation. Abhiṇha means frequently, repeatedly. Paccavekkhitabbā means should be reviewed, should be considered. Vevaṇṇiya means a state of discoloredness. But this discoloredness is of two kinds: discoloredness of the body and discoloredness of the requisites. Here, discoloredness of the body should be understood as shaving the head and beard. Formerly, after wearing various colorful fine cloths, after enjoying various delicious foods in gold and silver bowls, after lying down and sitting on excellent couches in luxurious chambers, after making medicine with ghee, butter, and so on, from the time of ordination onwards, one must wear robes that are cut, patched, astringent, and yellow, one must eat mixed rice in an iron bowl or an earthenware bowl, one must lie down on a spread of grass and leaves at the foot of a tree, one must sit on a mat of hide scraps and so on, one must make medicine with putrid urine and so on. Thus, here, discoloredness of the requisites should be understood. By reviewing thus, anger and conceit are abandoned.

Parapaṭibaddhā me jīvikāti mayhaṃ paresu paṭibaddhā parāyattā catupaccayajīvikāti. Evaṃ paccavekkhato hi ājīvo parisujjhati, piṇḍapāto ca apacito hoti, catūsu paccayesu apaccavekkhitaparibhogo nāma na hoti.Añño me ākappo karaṇīyoti yo gihīnaṃ uraṃ abhinīharitvā gīvaṃ paggahetvā lalitenākārena aniyatapadavītihārena gamanākappo hoti, tato aññova ākappo mayā karaṇīyo, santindriyena santamānasena yugamattadassinā visamaṭṭhāne udakasakaṭeneva mandamitapadavītihārena hutvā gantabbanti paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Evaṃ paccavekkhato hi iriyāpatho sāruppo hoti, tisso sikkhā paripūrenti.Kaccinukhoti salakkhaṇe nipātasamudāyo.Attāti cittaṃ.Sīlato na upavadatīti aparisuddhaṃ te sīlanti sīlapaccayo na upavadati. Evaṃ paccavekkhato hi ajjhattaṃ hirī samuṭṭhāti, sā tīsu dvāresu saṃvaraṃ sādheti, tīsu dvāresu saṃvaro catupārisuddhisīlaṃ hoti, catupārisuddhisīle ṭhito vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhāti.Anuvicca viññū sabrahmacārīti paṇḍitā sabrahmacārino anuvicāretvā. Evaṃ paccavekkhato hi bahiddhā ottappaṃ saṇṭhāti, taṃ tīsu dvāresu saṃvaraṃ sādhetīti anantaranayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Parapaṭibaddhā me jīvikā means my livelihood depends on others, is subject to others, consisting of the four requisites. By reviewing thus, livelihood is purified, alms-food is not accumulated, and there is no unreviewed consumption of the four requisites. Añño me ākappo karaṇīyo means the manner of walking that laypeople have, flaunting the chest, raising the neck, with a graceful manner, with an unsteady pace, a manner different from that must be done by me, one must review that one must walk with senses calmed, with mind calmed, looking only a yoke's distance ahead, with a measured pace like a water cart on uneven ground. By reviewing thus, behavior becomes proper, the three trainings are fulfilled. Kaccinukho is a phrase with the meaning of certainty. Attā means mind. Sīlato na upavadatī means the factor of virtue does not reproach, saying, "Your virtue is impure." By reviewing thus, inner shame arises, that achieves restraint at the three doors, restraint at the three doors is virtue purified in four ways, having stood in virtue purified in four ways, one develops insight and attains arahatta. Anuvicca viññū sabrahmacārī means having investigated by wise co-celibates. By reviewing thus, outward fear is established, that achieves restraint at the three doors, it should be understood in the same way as before.

Nānābhāvo vinābhāvoti jātiyā nānābhāvo, maraṇena vinābhāvo. Evaṃ paccavekkhato hi tīsu dvāresu asaṃvutākāro nāma na hoti, maraṇassati sūpaṭṭhitā hoti.Kammassakomhītiādīsu kammaṃ mayhaṃ sakaṃ attano santakantikammassakā. Kammena dātabbaṃ phalaṃ dāyaṃ, kammassa dāyaṃ kammadāyaṃ, taṃ ādīyāmītikammadāyādo. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ yoni kāraṇantikammayoni. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ bandhu ñātakotikammabandhu. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ patiṭṭhātikammapaṭisaraṇo. Tassa dāyādo bhavissāmīti tassa kammassa dāyādo tena dinnaphalaṃ paṭiggāhako bhavissāmi. Evaṃ kammassakataṃ pana paccavekkhato pāpakaraṇaṃ nāma na hoti.Kathaṃbhūtassa me rattindivā vītivattantīti kinnu kho me vattappaṭipattiṃ karontassa, udāhu akarontassa, buddhavacanaṃ sajjhāyantassa, udāhu asajjhāyantassa, yonisomanasikāre kammaṃ karontassa, udāhu akarontassāti kathaṃbhūtassa me rattindivā vītivattanti, parivattantīti attho. Evaṃ paccavekkhato hi appamādo paripūrati.

Nānābhāvo vinābhāvo means difference by birth, separation by death. By reviewing thus, there is no un-guardedness at the three doors, mindfulness of death is well-established. Kammassakomhītiādīsu, kammassakā means kamma (action) is my own, belonging to myself. Kammadāyādo means the fruit to be given by kamma is the inheritance, I take up the inheritance of kamma. Kammayoni means kamma is my womb, my cause. Kammabandhu means kamma is my relative, my kinsman. Kammapaṭisaraṇo means kamma is my refuge, my support. Tassa dāyādo bhavissāmīti means I will be the heir of that kamma, the receiver of the fruit given by it. But by reviewing one's ownership of kamma, there is no doing of evil. Kathaṃbhūtassa me rattindivā vītivattantī means in what state do my days and nights pass, doing my duties, or not doing them, reciting the word of the Buddha, or not reciting it, doing the action of wise attention, or not doing it, in what state do my days and nights pass, revolve, is the meaning. By reviewing thus, diligence is fulfilled.

Suññāgāre abhiramāmīti vivittokāse sabbiriyāpathesu ekakova hutvā kacci nu kho abhiramāmīti attho. Evaṃ paccavekkhato kāyaviveko paripūrati.Uttarimanussadhammoti uttarimanussānaṃ ukkaṭṭhamanussabhūtānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca jhānādidhammo, dasakusalakammapathasaṅkhātamanussadhammato vā uttaritaro visiṭṭhataro dhammo me mama santāne atthi nu kho, santi nu khoti attho.Alamariyañāṇadassanavisesoti mahaggatalokuttarapaññā pajānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, cakkhunā diṭṭhamiva dhammaṃ paccakkhakaraṇato dassanaṭṭhena dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ, ariyaṃ visuddhaṃ uttamaṃ ñāṇadassananti ariyañāṇadassanaṃ, alaṃ pariyattakaṃ kilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ ariyañāṇadassanamettha, assa vāti alamariyañāṇadassano, jhānādibhedo uttarimanussadhammo alamariyañāṇadassano ca so viseso cātialamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Atha vā tameva kilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ visuddhaṃ ñāṇadassanameva visesoti alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso vā.Adhigatoti paṭiladdho me atthi nu kho.Sohanti paṭiladdhaviseso so ahaṃ.Pacchime kāleti maraṇamañce nipannakāle.Puṭṭhoti sabrahmacārīhi adhigataguṇavisesaṃ pucchito.Na maṅku bhavissāmīti patitakkhandho nittejo na hessāmīti. Evaṃ paccavekkhantassa hi moghakālakiriyā nāma na hoti.

Suññāgāre abhiramāmī means do I delight in an empty dwelling, being alone in all postures in a secluded place, is the meaning. By reviewing thus, bodily seclusion is fulfilled. Uttarimanussadhammo means the state beyond the human, the superior state of those who are excellent humans, both the meditators and the noble ones, is there in my mind a state more excellent, more distinguished than the human state, consisting of the ten wholesome paths of action, is the meaning. Alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso means excellent noble knowledge and vision, knowledge in the sense of knowing with great and supramundane wisdom, vision in the sense of seeing, making the Dharma apparent as if seen with the eye, is there in me an excellent noble knowledge and vision that is sufficient, capable of destroying defilements, namely, that is sufficient for it, or alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso means or that same pure knowledge and vision itself that is capable of destroying defilements is the distinction. Adhigato means has been attained, do I have it. Soha means that I, having attained the distinction. Pacchime kāle means at the time of lying on the deathbed. Puṭṭho means asked by co-celibates about the special qualities that have been attained. Na maṅku bhavissāmī means I will not be one whose aggregates have fallen away, lacking energy. For one who reviews thus, there is no deed done in vain.

9-10. Sarīraṭṭhadhammasuttādivaṇṇanā
9-10. Sarīraṭṭhadhammasuttādivaṇṇanā

49-50.Navameponobbhavikoti punabbhavanibbattako.Bhavasaṅkhāroti bhavasaṅkharaṇakammaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Dasame sīlabāhusaccavīriyasatipaññā lokiyalokuttarāmissikā kathitā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

49-50. In the ninth, ponobbhaviko means causing renewed existence. Bhavasaṅkhāro means the kamma that fabricates existence. In this sutta, only the round of existence is spoken of. In the tenth, virtue, great learning, energy, mindfulness, and wisdom, worldly and supramundane, mixed, are spoken of. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(6) 1. Sacittavaggo

(6) 1. Sacittavaggo

1-4. Sacittasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-4. Sacittasuttādivaṇṇanā

51-54.Dutiyassa paṭhamesacittapariyāyakusaloti attano cittavārakusalo.Rajanti āgantukaupakkilesaṃ.Aṅgaṇanti tatthajātakaaṅgakāḷatilakādiṃ.Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti arahattatthāya. Tatiyepaṭibhānenāti vacanasaṇṭhānena. Catuttheadhipaññādhammavipassanāyāti saṅkhārapariggāhakavipassanāya.

51-54. In the first of the second, sacittapariyāyakusalo means skilled in the turnings of one's own mind. Raja means adventitious defilement. Aṅgaṇa means congenital marks, such as birthmarks and moles. Āsavānaṃ khayāyā means for the sake of arahatta. In the third, paṭibhānenā means by the structure of speech. In the fourth, adhipaññādhammavipassanāyā means by insight that grasps the aggregates.

8. Mūlakasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Mūlakasuttavaṇṇanā

58.Aṭṭhameamatogadhāti ettha saupādisesā nibbānadhātu kathitā,nibbānapariyosānāti ettha anupādisesā. Anupādisesaṃ pattassa hi sabbe dhammā pariyosānappattā nāma honti. Sesapadāni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva.

58. In the eighth, amatogadhā means here, the Nibbāna-element with residue is spoken of; nibbānapariyosānā means here, without residue. For all phenomena reach their end for one who has attained the Nibbāna-element without residue. The remaining words have the same meanings as stated below.

9. Pabbajjāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Pabbajjāsuttavaṇṇanā

59.Navametasmāti yasmā evaṃ aparicitacittassa sāmaññattho na sampajjati, tasmā.Yathāpabbajjāparicitañca no cittaṃ bhavissatīti yathā pabbajjānurūpena paricitaṃ. Ye hi keci pabbajanti nāma, sabbe te arahattaṃ patthetvā. Tasmā yaṃ cittaṃ arahattādhigamatthāya paricitaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ, taṃ yathāpabbajjāparicitaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Evarūpaṃ pana cittaṃ bhavissatīti sikkhitabbaṃ.Lokassa samañca visamañcāti sattalokassa sucaritaduccaritāni.Lokassa bhavañca vibhavañcāti tassa vaḍḍhiñca vināsañca, tathā sampattiñca vipattiñca.Lokassasamudayañca atthaṅgamañcāti pana saṅkhāralokaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, khandhānaṃ nibbattiñca bhedañcāti attho.

59. In the ninth, tasmā means therefore, since the meaning of the ascetic life is not accomplished for one whose mind is thus unfamiliar. Yathāpabbajjāparicitañca no cittaṃ bhavissatī means familiar in accordance with the going forth. For all who go forth, all aspire to arahatta. Therefore, that mind which is familiarized and developed for the sake of attaining arahatta should be understood as familiar in accordance with the going forth. One should train that such a mind will be. Lokassa samañca visamañcā means the good conduct and misconduct of the world of beings. Lokassa bhavañca vibhavañcā means its growth and destruction, likewise its success and failure. Lokassasamudayañca atthaṅgamañcā means, however, this is said with reference to the world of formations, meaning the arising and dissolution of the aggregates.

10. Girimānandasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Girimānandasuttavaṇṇanā

60.Dasameanukampaṃ upādāyāti girimānandatthere anukampaṃ paṭicca.Cakkhurogotiādayo vatthuvasena veditabbā. Nibbattitappasādānañhi rogo nāma natthi.Kaṇṇarogoti bahikaṇṇe rogo.Pināsoti bahināsikāya rogo.Nakhasāti nakhehi vilekhitaṭṭhāne rogo.Pittasamuṭṭhānāti pittasamuṭṭhitā. Te kira dvattiṃsa honti.Semhasamuṭṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo.Utupariṇāmajāti utupariṇāmena accuṇhātisītena uppajjanakarogā.Visamaparihārajāti aticiraṭṭhānanisajjādinā visamaparihārena jātā.Opakkamikāti vadhabandhanādinā upakkamena jātā.Kammavipākajāti balavakammavipākasambhūtā.Santanti rāgādisantatāya santaṃ. Atappakaṭṭhenapaṇītaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

60. In the tenth, "anukampaṃ upādāya" means out of compassion for Girimānanda Thera. "Cakkhurogo" (eye disease), etc., should be understood in terms of their cause. For those who have developed delight, there is no such thing as disease. "Kaṇṇarogo" (ear disease) is disease in the outer ear. "Pināso" (nasal disease) is disease in the outer nose. "Nakhasā" (nail disease) is disease in the area scraped by nails. "Pittasamuṭṭhānā" means arising from bile. It is said that there are thirty-two of these. The same method applies to "Semhasamuṭṭhānā" (arising from phlegm), etc. "Utupariṇāmajā" means diseases that arise from the change of seasons, from excessive heat or cold. "Visamaparihārajā" means those that arise from improper behavior, such as sitting or standing for too long. "Opakkamikā" means those that arise from external assault, such as beating or imprisonment. "Kammavipākajā" means those that originate from the result of strong kamma. "Santaṃ" means peaceful due to the peace of craving, etc. "Paṇītaṃ" means excellent due to the intensity of the practice. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

(7) 2. Yamakavaggo

(7) 2. Yamakavaggo

1. Avijjāsuttādivaṇṇanā
1. Avijjāsuttādivaṇṇanā

61-62.Dutiyassa paṭhamesāhāranti sapaccayaṃ.Vijjāvimuttinti phalañāṇañceva sesasampayuttadhamme ca.Bojjhaṅgāti maggabojjhaṅgā. Dutiyebhavataṇhāyāti bhavapatthanāya. Evaṃ dvīsupi suttesu vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ, vaṭṭañcettha paṭhame sutte avijjāmūlakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, dutiye taṇhāmūlakaṃ.

61-62. In the first of the second, "sāhāraṃ" means with conditions. "Vijjāvimutti" means the fruition knowledge (phalañāṇa) and the other associated states. "Bojjhaṅgā" means the bojjhaṅga of the path. In the second, "bhavataṇhāyā" means desire for existence. Thus, in both suttas, only the round of existence (vaṭṭa) is discussed, and here, in the first sutta, the round rooted in ignorance (avijjā) is discussed, and in the second, that rooted in craving (taṇhā).

3-4. Niṭṭhaṅgatasuttādivaṇṇanā
3-4. Niṭṭhaṅgatasuttādivaṇṇanā

63-64.Tatiyeniṭṭhaṃ gatāti nibbematikā.Idha niṭṭhāti imasmiṃyeva loke parinibbānaṃ.Idha vihāyāti imaṃ lokaṃ vijahitvā suddhāvāsabrahmalokaṃ. Catuttheaveccappasannāti acalappasādena sampannā.Sotāpannāti ariyamaggasotaṃ āpannā.

63-64. In the third, "niṭṭhaṃ gatā" means free from doubt. "Idha niṭṭhā" means final nibbāna in this very world. "Idha vihāyā" means having abandoned this world for the Suddhāvāsa Brahma realm. In the fourth, "aveccappasannā" means endowed with unwavering confidence. "Sotāpannā" means having entered the stream of the noble path.

5-7. Paṭhamasukhasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-7. Paṭhamasukhasuttādivaṇṇanā

65-67.Pañcame vaṭṭamūlakaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ pucchitaṃ, chaṭṭhe sāsanamūlakaṃ. Sattamenaḷakapānanti atīte bodhisattassa ovāde ṭhatvā vānarayūthena naḷehi udakassa pītaṭṭhāne māpitattā evaṃladdhanāmo nigamo.Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ anuviloketi, tattha tattha tuṇhībhūtameva.Anuviloketvāti tato tato viloketvā.Piṭṭhi me āgilāyatīti kasmā āgilāyati? Bhagavato hi cha vassāni mahāpadhānaṃ padahantassa mahantaṃ kāyadukkhaṃ ahosi, athassa aparabhāge mahallakakāle piṭṭhivāto uppajji. Upādinnakasarīrassa ṭhānanisajjādīhi appamattakena ābādhena na sakkā kenaci bhavituṃ. Taṃ gahetvāpi therassa okāsakaraṇatthaṃ evamāha.Saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvāekamante patirūpaṭṭhāne paññattassa kappiyamañcassa upari attharitvā.

65-67. In the fifth, happiness and suffering rooted in the round of existence (vaṭṭa) are questioned, and in the sixth, those rooted in the teaching. In the seventh, "naḷakapānaṃ" is the name given to a settlement because in the past, when the bodhisatta was standing giving advice, a group of monkeys drank water through reeds there. "Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtaṃ" means wherever he looks, it is silent. "Anuviloketvā" means having looked around from there. "Piṭṭhi me āgilāyatī" means why does my back ache? It is because the Blessed One, while undertaking the Great Struggle (mahāpadhānaṃ) for six years, had great physical suffering, and then later in old age, wind arose in his back. It is impossible for one with a body sustained by nutriment to be without some slight ailment due to standing or sitting. Taking that as an opportunity, he spoke thus to allow the Elder to prepare a seat. "Saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvā" means having spread out the double robe on a suitable seat in a secluded place, on a permissible bench.

9-10. Kathāvatthusuttadvayavaṇṇanā
9-10. Kathāvatthusuttadvayavaṇṇanā

69-70.Navametiracchānakathanti aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtaṃ kathaṃ. Tattha rājānaṃ ārabbha ‘‘mahāsammato mandhātā dhammāsoko evaṃmahānubhāvo’’tiādinā nayena pavattakathārājakathā. Esa nayocorakathādīsu. Tesu ‘‘asuko rājā abhirūpo dassanīyo’’tiādinā gehasitakathāva tiracchānakathā hoti, ‘‘sopi nāma evaṃmahānubhāvo khayaṃ gato’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana kammaṭṭhānabhāve tiṭṭhati. Coresupi ‘‘mūladevo evaṃmahānubhāvo, meghadevo evaṃmahānubhāvo’’ti tesaṃ kammaṃ paṭicca ‘‘aho sūrā’’ti gehasitakathāvatiracchānakathā. Yuddhesupi bhāratayuddhādīsu ‘‘asukena asuko evaṃ mārito evaṃ viddho’’ti kammassādavaseneva kathā tiracchānakathā, ‘‘tepi nāma khayaṃ gatā’’ti evaṃ pavattā pana sabbattha kammaṭṭhānameva hoti. Apica annādīsu ‘‘evaṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ rasavantaṃ phassasampannaṃ khādimha bhuñjimha pivimha paribhuñjimhā’’ti kāmarasassādavasena kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘pubbe evaṃ vaṇṇādisampannaṃ annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālaṃ gandhaṃ sīlavantānaṃ adamha, cetiyaṃ pūjimhā’’ti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.

69-70. In the ninth, "tiracchānakatha" means talk that is "animalistic" (tiracchāna) because it does not lead out, not being a path to heaven or liberation. There, talk concerning kings, such as, "Mahāsammata, Mandhātu, Dhammāsoka were of such great power," is "rājakathā" (talk about kings). The same method applies to "corakathā" (talk about thieves), etc. Among those, talk that concerns householders, like, "So-and-so king is handsome and beautiful," is "animalistic" talk; however, talk that proceeds with, "Even he of such great power has passed away," stands as a meditation subject. Among thieves also, talk that concerns householders, like, "Mūladeva was of such great power, Meghadeva was of such great power," considering their actions, "Oh, they were brave!" is "tiracchānakatha". In battles also, talk about the battles of Bharata, such as, "So-and-so was killed thus by so-and-so, struck thus," with only enjoyment of the action, is animalistic talk; however, talk that proceeds with, "Even they have passed away," is everywhere a meditation subject. Moreover, regarding food, it is not proper to speak with enjoyment of the taste of sensual desire, "We ate, consumed, drank, and enjoyed such and such, which was of such and such color, taste, and tactile quality;" but it is proper to speak purposefully, "Formerly, we gave food, drink, clothing, vehicles, garlands, and perfumes of such and such color, etc., to virtuous ones; we honored shrines."

Ñātikathādīsupi ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakā sūrā samatthā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evaṃ vicitrehi yānehi vicarimhā’’ti vā assādavasena vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘tepi no ñātakā khayaṃ gatā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evarūpā upāhanā saṅghassa adamhā’’ti vā kathetabbaṃ.Gāmakathāpi suniviṭṭhadunniviṭṭhasubhikkhadubbhikkhādivasena vā ‘‘asukagāmavāsino sūrā samatthā’’ti vā evaṃ assādavaseneva na vaṭṭati, sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti vā ‘‘khayavayaṃ gatā’’ti vā vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Nigamanagarajanapadakathāsupi eseva nayo.

In "ñātikathā" (talk about relatives), etc., it is not proper to speak with enjoyment, saying, "Our relatives are brave and capable," or "Formerly, we traveled in such diverse vehicles;" but it should be said purposefully, "Even those relatives of ours have passed away," or "Formerly, we gave such and such slippers to the Saṅgha." In "gāmakathā" (talk about villages) also, it is not proper to speak with enjoyment only in terms of well-laid-out or poorly-laid-out villages, good times or bad times, or "The villagers of such and such village are brave and capable;" but it is proper to speak purposefully, "They are faithful and serene," or "They have passed away." The same method applies to "nigamanagarajanapadakathāsu" (talk about towns, cities, and countries).

Itthikathāpi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīni paṭicca assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā khayaṃ gatā’’ti evameva vaṭṭati.Sūrakathāpi‘‘nandimitto nāma yodho sūro ahosī’’ti assādavaseneva na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddho ahosi khayaṃ gato’’ti evameva vaṭṭati.Surākathanti pāḷiyaṃ pana anekavidhaṃ majjakathaṃ assādavasena kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati, ādīnavavaseneva vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Visikhākathāpi‘‘asukavisikhā suniviṭṭhā dunniviṭṭhā sūrā samatthā’’ti assādavaseneva na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā khayaṃ gatā’’ti vaṭṭati.Kumbhaṭṭhānakathānāma kūṭaṭṭhānakathā udakatitthakathā vuccati (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.17; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.223; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1080). Kumbhadāsikathā vā. Sāpi ‘‘pāsādikā naccituṃ gāyituṃ chekā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati, ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’tiādinā nayeneva vaṭṭati.

In "itthikathā" (talk about women) also, it is not proper to speak with enjoyment concerning their appearance, figure, etc.; it is proper only to say, "Faithful and serene, they have passed away." In "sūrakathāpi" (talk about heroes) also, it is not proper to speak with enjoyment, saying, "The warrior named Nandimitta was a hero;" it is proper only to say, "He was faithful, he has passed away." In the "surākatha" (talk about liquor) passage, however, it is not proper to speak with enjoyment about talk of various kinds of intoxicants; it is proper to speak only in terms of their dangers. In "visikhākathāpi" (talk about streets) also, it is not proper to speak with enjoyment only, "Such and such street is well-laid-out, poorly-laid-out, or the people are brave and capable;" it is proper to say, "Faithful and serene, they have passed away." "Kumbhaṭṭhānakathā" is said to be talk about raised platforms, bathing places, or water-landing places (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.17; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.223; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1080), or talk about servant girls. That also, it is not proper to speak with enjoyment, "She is delightful, skilled in dancing and singing;" it is proper only in the manner of, "Faithful and serene," etc.

Pubbapetakathānāma atītañātikathā. Tattha vattamānañātikathāsadisova vinicchayo.Nānattakathānāma purimapacchimakathāvimuttā avasesā nānāsabhāvā tiracchānakathā.Lokakkhāyikānāma ‘‘ayaṃ loko kena nimmito? Asukena nāma nimmito. Kāko seto aṭṭhīnaṃ setattā, balākā rattā lohitassa rattattā’’tievamādikā lokāyatavitaṇḍasallāpakathā.Samuddakkhāyikānāma kasmā samuddo sāgaroti. Sāgaradevena khatattā sāgaro, khato meti hatthamuddāya niveditattā samuddotievamādikā niratthakā samuddakkhāyanakathā.Bhavoti vuddhi,abhavoti hāni. Iti bhavo iti abhavoti yaṃ vā taṃ vā niratthakakāraṇaṃ vatvā pavattitakathāitibhavābhavakathānāma.

"Pubbapetakathā" is talk about departed relatives. There, the decision is similar to that of talk about present relatives. "Nānattakathā" is animalistic talk of various kinds, apart from talk about what happened before or after. "Lokakkhāyikā" is talk about the world, such as, "By whom was this world made? It was made by so-and-so. Crows are white because of the whiteness of their bones; herons are red because of the redness of their blood," and other such talk of worldly speculation and sophistry. "Samuddakkhāyikā" is, why is the ocean called the sea (sāgaro)? Because it was dug by Sāgara-deva; because he indicated by a hand gesture, "It is dug by me," it is called sea—and other such pointless stories of the sea. "Bhavo" means increase, "abhavo" means decrease. Talk that proceeds by saying some pointless reason, "It is increase, it is decrease," is called "itibhavābhavakathā".

Tejasā tejanti attano tejasā tesaṃ tejaṃ.Pariyādiyeyyāthāti khepetvā gahetvā abhibhaveyyātha. Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko piṇḍapātiko mahātheraṃ pucchi – ‘‘bhante, tejasā tejaṃ pariyādiyamānā bhikkhū kiṃ karontī’’ti. Thero āha – āvuso, kiñcideva ātape ṭhapetvā yathā chāyā heṭṭhā na otarati, uddhaṃyeva gacchati tathā karonti. Dasamepāsaṃsāni ṭhānānīti pasaṃsāvahāni kāraṇāni. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

"Tejasā tejaṃ" means with their own power, the power of those. "Pariyādiyeyyātha" means having destroyed and seized, you would overcome. Here is a story about this: a certain alms-mendicant asked a great elder, "Bhante, what do monks do when they overcome power with power?" The Elder said, "Āvuso, they do as if having placed something in the sun, so that the shadow does not go downwards, but goes upwards." In the tenth, "pāsaṃsāni ṭhānāni" means praiseworthy reasons. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

(8) 3. Ākaṅkhavaggo

(8) 3. Ākaṅkhavaggo

1. Ākaṅkhasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Ākaṅkhasuttavaṇṇanā

71.Tatiyassa paṭhamesampannasīlāti paripuṇṇasīlā, sīlasamaṅgino vā hutvāti attho. Tattha dvīhi kāraṇehi sampannasīlatā hoti sīlavipattiyā ca ādīnavadassanena, sīlasampattiyā ca ānisaṃsadassanena. Tadubhayampi visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.9, 21) vitthāritaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti ettāvatā kira bhagavā catupārisuddhisīlaṃ uddisitvā ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutā’’ti iminā tattha jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ vitthāretvā dassesīti dīpavihāravāsī sumanatthero āha. Antevāsiko panassa tepiṭakacūḷanāgatthero āha – ubhayatthapi pātimokkhasaṃvarova bhagavatā vutto. Pātimokkhasaṃvaroyeva hi sīlaṃ, itarāni pana tīṇi sīlanti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ atthīti ananujānanto vatvā āha – indriyasaṃvaro nāma chadvārārakkhāmattakameva, ājīvapārisuddhi dhammena samena paccayuppattimattakaṃ, paccayasannissitaṃ paṭiladdhapaccaye idamatthanti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanamattakaṃ. Nippariyāyena pātimokkhasaṃvarova sīlaṃ. Yassa so bhinno, ayaṃ sīsacchinno viya puriso hatthapāde sesāni rakkhissatīti na vattabbo. Yassa pana so arogo, ayaṃ acchinnasīso viya puriso jīvitaṃ sesāni puna pākatikāni kātuṃ sakkoti. Tasmā ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvaraṃ uddisitvā ‘‘sampannapātimokkhā’’ti tasseva vevacanaṃ vatvā taṃ vitthāretvā dassentopātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutātiādimāha. Tatthapātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuttātiādīni vuttatthāneva.Ākaṅkheyya ceti idaṃ kasmā āraddhanti? Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ. Sacepi acirapabbajitānaṃ vā duppaññānaṃ vā evamassa ‘‘bhagavā ‘sīlaṃ pūretha sīlaṃ pūrethā’ti vadati, ko nu kho sīlapūraṇe ānisaṃso, ko viseso, kā vaḍḍhī’’ti tesaṃ dasa ānisaṃse dassetuṃ evamāha – ‘‘appeva nāma etaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyamanāpatādiāsavakkhayapariyosānaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ sutvāpi sīlaṃ paripūreyyu’’nti.

71. In the first of the third, "sampannasīlā" means of complete virtue, or being endowed with virtue, is the meaning. Here, being endowed with virtue comes about through two causes: by seeing the danger in moral failure and by seeing the benefit in moral accomplishment. Both of these have been extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.9, 21). There, the Elder Sumana, a resident of Dīpavihāra, said, "With just 'sampannasīlā' (endowed with virtue), the Blessed One mentioned the fourfold purity of virtue; and with 'pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutā' (restrained by the restraint of the pātimokkha), he showed the elaboration of the most important virtue there." But his student, the Tepiṭaka Cūḷanāga Thera, said, "In both places, the Blessed One spoke of the pātimokkhasaṃvara alone. For the pātimokkhasaṃvara is virtue; but the other three are virtues," not approving of there being a place where this was said, and said, "Indriyasaṃvara is just the mere protection of the six doors; ājīvapārisuddhi is just the mere arising of requisites lawfully and equitably; paccayasannissitaṃ is just the mere reflecting and using the requisites obtained, thinking, 'This is for such-and-such a purpose.' Without qualification, the pātimokkhasaṃvara alone is virtue. He whose pātimokkhasaṃvara is broken, it should not be said that he is like a man whose head is cut off, who will protect his hands, feet, and the rest. But he whose pātimokkhasaṃvara is not diseased, he is like a man whose head is not cut off, who is able to restore life and the rest to their original condition. Therefore, with 'sampannasīlā,' he mentioned the pātimokkhasaṃvara; and saying 'sampannapātimokkhā' as a synonym for that, showing the elaboration of that, he said, 'pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutā' (restrained by the restraint of the pātimokkha), etc." There, "pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuttā," etc., have the meaning as stated before. "Ākaṅkheyya ce" (if he should wish): why is this begun? For the sake of showing the benefit of virtue. Even if it should occur to those recently ordained or those of little wisdom, "The Blessed One says, 'Fulfill virtue, fulfill virtue,' what is the benefit in fulfilling virtue, what is the distinction, what is the increase?" to show them ten benefits, he says thus, "So that perhaps, having heard this benefit, which ends in the destruction of the āsavas, of being beloved and agreeable to their fellow brahmacārīs, they might fulfill virtue."

ākaṅkheyya ceti yadi iccheyya.Piyo cassanti piyacakkhūhi sampassitabbo, sinehuppattiyā padaṭṭhānabhūto bhaveyyaṃ.Manāpoti tesaṃ manavaḍḍhanako, tesaṃ vā manena pattabbo, mettacittena pharitabboti attho.Garūti tesaṃ garuṭṭhāniyo pāsāṇacchattasadiso.Bhāvanīyoti ‘‘addhāyamāyasmā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passatī’’ti evaṃ sambhāvanīyo.Sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti catupārisuddhisīlesuyeva paripūrakārī assa, anūnena ākārena samannāgato bhaveyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyuttoti attano cittasamathe yutto.Anirākatajjhānoti bahi anīhaṭajjhāno, avināsitajjhāno vā.Vipassanāyāti sattavidhāya anupassanāya.Brūhetā suññāgārānanti vaḍḍhetā suññāgārānaṃ. Ettha ca samathavipassanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā rattindivaṃ suññāgāraṃ pavisitvā nisīdamāno bhikkhu ‘‘brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti veditabbo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana icchantena majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.64 ādayo) ākaṅkheyyasuttavaṇṇanāya oloketabbo.

"ākaṅkheyya ce" means if he should wish. "Piyo cassa" (he would be dear) means he would be seen with dear eyes, he would be a basis for the arising of affection. "Manāpo" (agreeable) means delighting their minds, or attainable by their minds, meaning to be suffused with loving-kindness. "Garū" (respected) means worthy of their respect, like a stone umbrella. "Bhāvanīyo" (venerable) means estimable, "Indeed, this venerable one knows what is to be known, sees what is to be seen." "Sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī" (he would be a fulfiller in virtue itself) means he would be a fulfiller in the fourfold purity of virtue, it is said that he would be endowed in an undiminished manner. "Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyutto" (devoted to mental serenity within himself) means devoted to the serenity of his own mind. "Anirākatajjhāno" (not rejecting meditation) means not casting out meditation externally, or not destroying meditation. "Vipassanāyā" (to insight) means to the seven kinds of contemplation. "Brūhetā suññāgārānaṃ" (he would develop empty dwellings) means he would increase empty dwellings. Here, a monk who, having taken up a meditation subject in terms of serenity and insight, enters an empty dwelling and sits down day and night, should be understood as "one who develops empty dwellings." This is the summary here, but one who wants the exposition should look in the Aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.64 ff) under the Ākaṅkheyyasuttavaṇṇanā.

Lābhīti ettha na bhagavā lābhanimittaṃ sīlādiparipūraṇaṃ katheti. Bhagavā hi ‘‘ghāsesanaṃ chinnakatho, na vācaṃ payutaṃ bhaṇe’’ti (su. ni. 716) evaṃ sāvake ovadati. So kathaṃ lābhanimittaṃ sīlādiparipūraṇaṃ katheyya. Puggalajjhāsayavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yesañhi evaṃ ajjhāsayo bhaveyya ‘‘sace mayaṃ catūhi paccayehi na kilameyyāma, sīlāni paripūretuṃ sakkuṇeyyāmā’’ti, tesaṃ ajjhāsayavasenevamāha. Apica sarasānisaṃso esa sīlassa yadidaṃ cattāro paccayā nāma. Tathā hi paṇḍitamanussā koṭṭhādīsu ṭhapitaṃ nīharitvā attanāpi aparibhuñjitvā sīlavantānaṃ dentīti sīlassa sarasānisaṃsadassanatthampetaṃ vuttaṃ.

"Lābhī" (a gainer): here, the Blessed One does not speak of fulfilling virtue, etc., for the sake of gain. For the Blessed One advises disciples, "He should cut off talk of seeking food; he should not utter speech that is attached" (su. ni. 716). How could he speak of fulfilling virtue, etc., for the sake of gain? But this is said in accordance with the inclination of individuals. For this is said in accordance with the inclination of those who might have such an inclination, "If we were not troubled by the four requisites, we would be able to fulfill virtue." Moreover, that these four requisites are called the taste of virtue is indeed a delightful aspect. So, wise people, having taken out what is stored in granaries, etc., give to virtuous ones, without even using it themselves; thus, this is said for the sake of showing the delightful taste of virtue.

yesāhanti yesaṃ ahaṃ.Tesaṃ te kārāti tesaṃ devānaṃ vā manussānaṃ vā te mayi katā paccayadānakārā.Mahapphalā hontu mahānisaṃsāti lokiyasukhena phalabhūtena mahapphalā, lokuttarena mahānisaṃsā. Ubhayaṃ vā etaṃ ekatthameva. Sīlādiguṇayuttassa hi kaṭacchubhikkhāpi pañcaratanamattāya bhūmiyā paṇṇasālāpi katvā dinnā anekāni kappasahassāni duggativinipātato rakkhati, pariyosāne ca amatāya dhātuyā parinibbānassa paccayo hoti. ‘‘Khīrodanaṃ ahamadāsi’’ntiādīni (vi. va. 413) cettha vatthūni. Sakalameva vā petavatthu vimānavatthu ca sādhakaṃ.

"yesāhaṃ" means those whose. "Tesaṃ te kārā" means those acts of giving requisites done by those devas or humans to me. "Mahapphalā hontu mahānisaṃsā" (may they be of great fruit, of great benefit) means of great fruit, with worldly happiness as the fruit, and of great benefit, with the supramundane. Or both of these are of the same meaning. For even a ladleful of alms given to one endowed with virtue, or a leaf hut made on land worth five jewels, protects from falling into bad destinies for many thousands of kappas, and in the end, it is a condition for parinibbāna in the deathless element. Here, the stories beginning with "I gave milk-rice" (khīrodanaṃ ahamadāsi) (vi. va. 413) are examples. Or all of the Petavatthu and Vimānavatthu are evidence.

petāti peccabhavaṃ gatā.Ñātīti sassusasurapakkhikā.Sālohitāti ekalohitabaddhā pitipitāmahādayo.Kālaṅkatāti matā.Tesaṃ tanti tesaṃ taṃ mayi pasannacittaṃ, taṃ vā pasannena cittena anussaraṇaṃ. Yassa hi bhikkhuno kālakato pitā vā mātā vā ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakatthero sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo’’ti pasannacitto hutvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ anussarati, tassa so cittappasādopi taṃ anussaraṇamattampi mahapphalaṃ mahānisaṃsameva hoti.

Petāti gone to a departed existence. Ñātīti relatives on the side of the mother-in-law and father-in-law. Sālohitāti those connected by blood, such as fathers, grandfathers, and so on. Kālaṅkatāti deceased. Tesaṃ tanti that which is their serene mind towards me, or that remembrance with a serene mind. For a bhikkhu whose deceased father or mother, with a serene mind, remembers that bhikkhu, saying, "Our relative, the Elder, is virtuous and of good qualities," even that serenity of mind and that mere remembrance are of great fruit and great benefit.

Aratiratisahoti nekkhammapaṭipattiyā aratiyā kāmaguṇesu ratiyā ca saho abhibhavitā ajjhottharitā.Bhayabheravasahoti ettha bhayaṃ cittutrāsopi ārammaṇampi, bheravaṃ ārammaṇameva.

Aratiratisahoti overcoming and dominating both aversion to the practice of renunciation and delight in sensual pleasures. Bhayabheravasahoti here, bhaya means both mental agitation and the object (of fear), while bherava means only the object.

2. Kaṇṭakasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Kaṇṭakasutta Commentary

72.Dutiyeabhiññātehīti gaganamajjhe puṇṇacando viya sūriyo viya ñātehi pākaṭehi.Parapurāyāti paraṃ vuccati pacchimabhāgo, purāti purimabhāgo, purato dhāvantena pacchato anubandhantena ca mahāparivārenāti attho.Kaṇṭakoti vijjhanaṭṭhena kaṇṭako.Visūkadassananti visūkabhūtaṃ dassanaṃ.Mātugāmūpacāroti mātugāmassa samīpacāritā.

72.In the second, abhiññātehīti known and manifest, like the full moon in the sky, like the sun. Parapurāyāti paraṃ means the western part, purā means the eastern part, meaning with a great retinue running from the front and chasing from behind. Kaṇṭakoti kaṇṭako because of the characteristic of piercing. Visūkadassananti seeing what is corrupt. Mātugāmūpacāroti approaching women.

3-4. Iṭṭhadhammasuttādivaṇṇanā
3-4. Iṭṭhadhammasutta, etc., Commentary

73-74.Tatiyevaṇṇoti sarīravaṇṇo.Dhammāti nava lokuttaradhammā. Catuttheariyāyāti apothujjanikāya, sīlādīhi missakattā evaṃ vuttaṃ.Sārādāyī ca hoti varadāyīti sārassa ca varassa ca ādāyako hoti. Yo kāyassa sāro, yañcassa varaṃ, taṃ gaṇhātīti attho.

73-74.In the third, vaṇṇoti physical complexion. Dhammāti the nine supramundane Dhammas. In the fourth, ariyāyāti non-common, because of being mixed with virtue, etc., thus it is said. Sārādāyī ca hoti varadāyīti one who takes both the essence and the excellent. It means he takes what is the essence and what is excellent for the body.

5. Migasālāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Migasālāsutta Commentary

75.Pañcamassa ādimhi tāva yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ chakkanipāte vuttameva.Dussīlo hotītiādīsu panadussīloti nissīlo.Cetovimuttinti phalasamādhiṃ.Paññāvimuttinti phalañāṇaṃ.Nappajānātīti uggahaparipucchāvasena na jānāti.Dussīlyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti ettha pañca dussīlyāni tāva sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, dasa arahattamaggena. Phalakkhaṇe tāni pahīnāni nāma honti. Phalakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya idha ‘‘nirujjhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Puthujjanassa sīlaṃ pañcahi kāraṇehi bhijjati pārājikāpajjanena sikkhāpaccakkhānena titthiyapakkhandanena arahattena maraṇenāti. Tattha purimā tayo bhāvanāparihānāya saṃvattanti, catuttho vaḍḍhiyā, pañcamo neva hānāya na vaḍḍhiyā. Kathaṃ panetaṃ arahattena sīlaṃ bhijjatīti? Puthujjanassa hi sīlaṃ accantakusalameva hoti, arahattamaggo ca kusalākusalakammakkhayāya saṃvattatīti evaṃ tena taṃ bhijjati.Savanenapiakataṃ hotīti sotabbayuttakaṃ assutaṃ hoti.Bāhusaccenapi akataṃ hotīti etthabāhusaccanti vīriyaṃ. Vīriyena kattabbayuttakaṃ akataṃ hoti, tassa akatattā saggatopi maggatopi parihāyati.Diṭṭhiyāpi appaṭividdhaṃ hotīti diṭṭhiyā paṭivijjhitabbaṃ appaṭividdhaṃ hoti apaccakkhakataṃ.Sāmayikampi vimuttiṃ na labhatīti kālānukālaṃ dhammassavanaṃ nissāya pītipāmojjaṃ na labhati.Hānāya paretīti hānāya pavattati.

75.At the beginning of the fifth, what should be said has already been said in the Chakka Nipāta. However, in dussīlo hotīti, etc., dussīloti without virtue. Cetovimuttinti the fruition attainment (phalasamādhi). Paññāvimuttinti the fruition knowledge (phalañāṇa). Nappajānātīti does not know by way of learning and questioning. Dussīlyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti here, first, the five kinds of immorality are abandoned by the Stream-entry path, and the ten by the Arahatship path. At the moment of fruition, they are said to be abandoned. Here, it is said "nirujjhatī" referring to the moment of fruition. The virtue of an ordinary person is broken by five reasons: by incurring a Pārājika offense, by renouncing the training, by joining another sect, by attaining Arahatship, and by death. Among these, the first three lead to the decline of development, the fourth to increase, and the fifth neither to decline nor to increase. How is it that virtue is broken by Arahatship? For the virtue of an ordinary person is entirely wholesome, and the path of Arahatship leads to the destruction of wholesome and unwholesome actions; thus, it is broken by that. Savanenapi akataṃ hotīti what is fit to be heard is unheard. Bāhusaccenapi akataṃ hotīti here, bāhusaccanti means effort (vīriya). What is fit to be done by effort is undone; because of its being undone, one declines from both heaven and the path. Diṭṭhiyāpi appaṭividdhaṃ hotīti what should be penetrated by view is unpenetrated, not personally realized. Sāmayikampi vimuttiṃ na labhatīti does not attain joy and gladness depending on hearing the Dhamma from time to time. Hānāya paretīti tends towards decline.

Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti ‘‘sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā pañcavidhaṃ dussīlyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti uggahaparipucchāvasena jānāti.Tassa savanenapi kataṃ hotīti sotabbayuttakaṃ sutaṃ hoti.Bāhusaccenapi kataṃ hotīti vīriyena kattabbayuttakaṃ antamaso dubbalavipassanāmattakampi kataṃ hoti.Diṭṭhiyāpi suppaṭividdhaṃ hotīti antamaso lokiyapaññāyapi paccayapaṭivedho kato hoti. Imassa hi puggalassa paññā sīlaṃ paridhovati, so paññāparidhotena visesaṃ pāpuṇāti.

Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti "having attained the fruit of Stream-entry, the five kinds of immorality are completely stopped," he knows by way of learning and questioning. Tassa savanenapi kataṃ hotīti what is fit to be heard is heard. Bāhusaccenapi kataṃ hotīti what is fit to be done by effort, even if only a weak insight, is done. Diṭṭhiyāpi suppaṭividdhaṃ hotīti even with worldly wisdom, the understanding of conditions is done. For the wisdom of this person purifies virtue, and he attains distinction through wisdom-purified virtue.

Pamāṇikāti puggalesu pamāṇaggāhakā.Pamiṇantīti pametuṃ tuletuṃ arahanti.Eko hīnoti eko guṇehi hīno.Paṇītoti eko guṇehi paṇīto uttamo.Taṃ hīti taṃ pamāṇakaraṇaṃ.Abhikkantataroti sundarataro.Paṇītataroti uttamataro.Dhammasoto nibbahatīti sūraṃ hutvā pavattamānaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ nibbahati, ariyabhūmiṃ pāpeti.Tadantaraṃko jāneyyāti taṃ evaṃ kāraṇaṃ ko jāneyya.Sīlavā hotīti lokiyasīlena sīlavā hoti.Yatthassa taṃ sīlanti arahattavimuttiṃ patvā sīlaṃ aparisesampi nirujjhati nāma, tattha yutti vuttāyeva. Ito paresu dvīsu aṅgesu anāgāmiphalaṃ vimutti nāma, pañcame arahattameva. Sesamettha vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānatthameva.

Pamāṇikāti those who take measurements among people. Pamiṇantīti are fit to measure and weigh. Eko hīnoti one who is inferior in qualities. Paṇītoti one who is excellent and superior in qualities. Taṃ hīti that act of measuring. Abhikkantataroti more beautiful. Paṇītataroti more excellent. Dhammasoto nibbahatīti the wisdom of insight, flowing like a hero, carries one on, leads one to the Noble plane. Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyyāti who would know that reason? Sīlavā hotīti is virtuous with worldly virtue. Yatthassa taṃ sīlanti having attained Arahatship-deliverance, virtue is completely stopped; the reasoning has already been stated there. In the two passages after this, the fruit of Non-returning is called deliverance, in the fifth, it is Arahatship itself. The rest here should be understood according to the method already stated. The sixth is obvious in meaning.

7. Kākasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Kākasutta Commentary

77.Sattamedhaṃsīti guṇadhaṃsako. Kassaci guṇaṃ anādiyitvā hatthenapi gahito tassa sīsepi vaccaṃ karoti.Pagabbhoti pāgabbhiyena samannāgato.Tintiṇoti tintiṇaṃ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato, āsaṅkābahulo vā.Luddoti dāruṇo.Akāruṇikoti nikkāruṇiko.Dubbaloti abalo appathāmo.Oravitāti oravayutto oravanto carati.Necayikoti nicayakaro.

77.In the seventh, dhaṃsīti a destroyer of qualities. Without respecting anyone's qualities, even if someone takes him by the hand, he excretes on his head. Pagabbhoti endowed with impudence. Tintiṇoti tintiṇaṃ means craving, endowed with that, or full of longing. Luddoti cruel. Akāruṇikoti without compassion. Dubbaloti weak, without strength. Oravitāti possessing "orava," he behaves with "orava." Necayikoti a maker of accumulation.

9. Āghātavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
9. Āghātavatthusutta Commentary

79.Navameaṭṭhāneti akāraṇe. Sacittakapavattiyañhi ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādi kāraṇaṃ bhaveyya, khāṇupahaṭādīsu taṃ natthi. Tasmā tattha āghāto aṭṭhāne āghāto nāma. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

79.In the ninth, aṭṭhāneti without reason. For in self-motivated actions, there might be a reason, such as "he did me harm," but in the case of being struck by a stump, etc., that is not present. Therefore, hatred there is called hatred without reason. The rest is obvious in meaning everywhere.

(9) 4. Theravaggo

(9) 4. Theravagga

1-3. Vāhanasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-3. Vāhanasutta, etc., Commentary

81-83.Catutthassa paṭhamevimariyādīkatenāti kilesamariyādaṃ bhinditvā vimariyādaṃ katena. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva. Tatiyeno ca payirupāsitāti na upaṭṭhāti.

81-83.In the first of the fourth, vimariyādīkatenāti by breaking the limit of defilements, making it unlimited. The second is obvious in meaning. In the third, no ca payirupāsitāti does not attend.

4. Byākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Byākaraṇasutta Commentary

84.Catutthejhāyī samāpattikusaloti jhānehi ca sampanno samāpattiyañca cheko.Irīṇanti tucchabhāvaṃ.Vicinanti guṇavicinataṃ nigguṇabhāvaṃ. Atha vā irīṇasaṅkhātaṃ araññaṃ vicinasaṅkhātaṃ mahāgahanañca āpanno viya hoti.Anayanti avaḍḍhiṃ.Byasananti vināsaṃ.Anayabyasananti avaḍḍhivināsaṃ.Kiṃ nu khoti kena kāraṇena.

84.In the fourth, jhāyī samāpattikusaloti accomplished in jhāna and skilled in attainments (samāpatti). Irīṇanti emptiness. Vicinanti examining for qualities, the state of being without qualities. Or else, he is as if having entered a wilderness (arañña) called irīṇa and a great thicket called vicina. Anayanti non-growth. Byasananti destruction. Anayabyasananti non-growth and destruction. Kiṃ nu khoti by what reason.

5-6. Katthīsuttādivaṇṇanā
5-6. Katthīsutta, etc., Commentary

85-86.Pañcamekatthī hoti vikatthīti katthanasīlo hoti vikatthanasīlo, vivaṭaṃ katvā katheti.Na santatakārīti na satatakārī. Chaṭṭheadhimānikoti anadhigate adhigatamānena samannāgato.Adhimānasaccoti adhigatamānameva saccato vadati.

85-86.In the fifth, katthī hoti vikatthīti is given to boasting and bragging, speaks openly. Na santatakārīti is not constant. In the sixth, adhimānikoti endowed with conceit about what is not attained. Adhimānasaccoti speaks truthfully only about what is conceived.

7. Nappiyasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Nappiyasutta Commentary

87.Sattameadhikaraṇiko hotīti adhikaraṇakārako hoti.Na piyatāyāti na piyabhāvāya.Na garutāyāti na garubhāvāya.Nasāmaññāyāti na samaṇadhammabhāvāya.Na ekībhāvāyāti na nirantarabhāvāya.Dhammānaṃ na nisāmakajātikoti navannaṃ lokuttaradhammānaṃ na nisāmanasabhāvo na upadhāraṇasabhāvo.Na paṭisallānoti na paṭisallīno.Sāṭheyyānīti saṭhabhāvo.Kūṭeyyānīti kūṭabhāvo.Jimheyyānīti na ujubhāvā.Vaṅkeyyānīti vaṅkabhāvā.

87.In the seventh, adhikaraṇiko hotīti is a maker of disputes. Na piyatāyāti not for lovableness. Na garutāyāti not for respectfulness. Na sāmaññāyāti not for the state of being a recluse (samaṇadhamma). Na ekībhāvāyāti not for continuous existence. Dhammānaṃ na nisāmakajātikoti is not of the nature of listening to the nine supramundane Dhammas, not of the nature of attentiveness. Na paṭisallānoti is not secluded. Sāṭheyyānīti deceitfulness. Kūṭeyyānīti crookedness. Jimheyyānīti not straightforwardness. Vaṅkeyyānīti deviousness.

8. Akkosakasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Akkosakasutta Commentary

88.Aṭṭhameakkosakaparibhāsako ariyūpavādī sabrahmacārinanti ettha sabrahmacāripadaṃ akkosakaparibhāsakapadehi yojetabbaṃ ‘‘akkosako sabrahmacārīnaṃ, paribhāsako sabrahmacārīna’’nti. Ariyānaṃ pana guṇe chindissāmīti antimavatthunā upavadanto ariyūpavādī nāma hoti.Saddhammassa na vodāyantīti sikkhāttayasaṅkhātā sāsanasaddhammā assa vodānaṃ na gacchanti.Rogātaṅkanti ettha rogova kicchājīvitabhāvakaraṇena ātaṅkoti veditabbo.

88.In the eighth, akkosakaparibhāsako ariyūpavādī sabrahmacārinanti here, the term sabrahmacāri should be connected with the terms akkosaka and paribhāsaka as "an abuser of those who live the holy life, a reviler of those who live the holy life." But one who reviles the Noble Ones with the intention of destroying their qualities is called an ariyūpavādī (reviler of the Noble Ones). Saddhammassa na vodāyantīti the Teaching of the Buddha (sāsanasaddhammā), consisting of the three trainings, does not come to his understanding. Rogātaṅkanti here, roga (disease) should be understood as ātaṅka (affliction) because of causing a difficult life.

9. Kokālikasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Kokālikasutta Commentary

89.Navamekokāliko bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti koyaṃ kokāliko, kasmā ca upasaṅkami? Ayaṃ kira kokālikaraṭṭhe kokālikanagare kokālikaseṭṭhissa putto pabbajitvā pitarā kārite vihāre vasati cūḷakokālikoti nāmena, na pana devadattassa sisso. So hi brāhmaṇaputto mahākokāliko nāma. Bhagavati pana sāvatthiyaṃ viharante dve aggasāvakā pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ janapadacārikaṃ caramānā upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya vivekavāsaṃ vasitukāmā te bhikkhū uyyojetvā attano pattacīvaramādāya tasmiṃ janapade taṃ nagaraṃ patvā vihāraṃ agamiṃsu. Tattha nesaṃ kokāliko vattaṃ akāsi. Tepi tena saddhiṃ sammoditvā, ‘‘āvuso, mayaṃ idha temāsaṃ vasissāma, mā no kassaci ārocesī’’ti paṭiññaṃ gahetvā vasiṃsu. Vasitvā pavāraṇādivase pavāretvā ‘‘gacchāma mayaṃ, āvuso’’ti kokālikaṃ āpucchiṃsu. Kokāliko ‘‘ajja, āvuso, ekadivasaṃ vasitvā sve gamissathā’’ti vatvā dutiyadivase nagaraṃ pavisitvā manusse āmantesi – ‘‘āvuso, tumhe dve aggasāvake idha āgantvā vasamānepi na jānātha, na te koci paccayenapi nimantetī’’ti. Nagaravāsino ‘‘kahaṃ, bhante, therā, kasmā no nārocayitthā’’ti? Kiṃ, āvuso, ārocitena, kiṃ na passatha dve bhikkhū therāsane nisīdante, ete aggasāvakāti. Te khippaṃ sannipatitvā sappiphāṇitādīni ceva cīvaradussāni ca saṃhariṃsu.

89.In the ninth, kokāliko bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti who is this Kokālika, and why did he approach? It is said that this Kokālika, in the country of Kokālika, in the city of Kokālika, was the son of the wealthy man Kokālika, and having gone forth, he lived in a monastery built by his father, with the name Cūḷakokālika; however, he was not a disciple of Devadatta. For that one, the son of a Brahmin, was named Mahākokālika. When the Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthī, two chief disciples, wandering on tour in the country with about five hundred bhikkhus, desiring to dwell in seclusion near the beginning of the rains, having dismissed those bhikkhus, and taking their own bowl and robe, arrived in that country, reached that city, and went to the monastery. There Kokālika performed service for them. They, having exchanged greetings with him, and having taken a promise, "Friend, we will dwell here for three months; do not announce us to anyone," dwelt there. Having dwelt there, on the day of the Pavāraṇā (invitation), having performed the Pavāraṇā, they said to Kokālika, "Friend, we are going," and took leave. Kokālika said, "Friend, having dwelt here for one more day, you will go tomorrow," and on the second day, having entered the city, he addressed the people, "Friends, you do not even know that two chief disciples have come here and are dwelling here; no one invites them with any requisites." The townspeople said, "Where, Venerable Sir, are the Elders? Why did you not announce to us?" "What is the use of announcing, friends? Do you not see two bhikkhus sitting on the Elders' seat? These are the chief disciples." They quickly gathered together and collected ghee, molasses, and cloths for robes.

Kokāliko cintesi – ‘‘paramappicchā aggasāvakā payuttavācāya uppannalābhaṃ na sādiyissanti, asādiyantā ‘āvāsikassa dethā’ti vakkhantī’’ti taṃ lābhaṃ gāhāpetvā therānaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Therā disvāva ‘‘ime paccayā neva amhākaṃ, na kokālikassa kappantī’’ti paṭikkhipitvā pakkamiṃsu. Kokāliko ‘‘kathañhi nāma sayaṃ aggaṇhantā mayhampi adāpetvā pakkamissantī’’ti āghātaṃ uppādesi. Tepi bhagavato santikaṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā puna attano parisaṃ ādāya janapadacārikaṃ carantā anupubbena tasmiṃ raṭṭhe tameva nagaraṃ paccāgamiṃsu. Nāgarā there sañjānitvā saha parikkhārehi dānaṃ sajjetvā nagaramajjhe maṇḍapaṃ katvā dānaṃ adaṃsu, therānañca parikkhāre upanāmesuṃ. Therā bhikkhusaṅghassa niyyādayiṃsu. Taṃ disvā kokāliko cintesi – ‘‘ime pubbe appicchā ahesuṃ, idāni pāpicchā jātā, pubbepi appicchasantuṭṭhapavivittasadisāva maññe’’ti there upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘āvuso, tumhe pubbe appicchā viya, idāni pana pāpabhikkhū jātatthā’’ti vatvā ‘‘mūlaṭṭhāneyeva nesaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ bhindissāmī’’ti taramānarūpo nikkhamitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Ayamesa kokāliko, iminā ca kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti veditabbo.

Kokālika thought, "The chief disciples, being of very few desires, will not approve of the gain that has arisen through skillful speech; not approving, they will say, 'Give it to the resident monks,'" and having taken possession of that gain, he went to the Elders. The Elders, having seen him, rejected it, saying, "These requisites are not suitable for us, nor for Kokālika," and departed. Kokālika generated anger, thinking, "How is it that, not taking it themselves, they will depart without even having me give it?" Those two, having gone to the Blessed One and venerated the Blessed One, again taking their own retinue, wandering on tour in the country, gradually returned to that same city in that country. The townspeople, having recognized the Elders, prepared a donation with the requisites, and having made a pavilion in the middle of the city, they gave the donation and presented the requisites to the Elders. The Elders distributed them to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus. Seeing that, Kokālika thought, "These ones were formerly of few desires; now they have become of evil desires; formerly, they seemed to be like those who are of few desires, contented, and secluded," and having approached the Elders, he said, "Friends, formerly you seemed to be of few desires; now, however, you have become evil bhikkhus," and thinking, "I will destroy their foundation at the very root," hurrying out, he approached the Blessed One. This is that Kokālika, and it should be understood that he approached for this reason.

mā hevanti tikkhattuṃ paṭisedhesi. Tatthamā hevanti mā evaṃ abhaṇi.Saddhāyikoti saddhāya āgamakaro pasādāvaho, saddhātabbavacano vā.Paccayikoti pattiyāyitabbavacano.

mā hevanti he forbade three times. There, mā hevanti do not speak thus. Saddhāyikoti one who relies on faith, brings about serenity, or speaks words that should be believed. Paccayikoti speaks words that should be relied upon.

Pakkāmīti kammānubhāvena codiyamāno pakkāmi. Okāsakatañhi kammaṃ na sakkā paṭibāhituṃ.Acirapakkantassāti pakkantassa sato nacireneva.Sabbo kāyo phuṭo ahosīti kesaggamattampi okāsaṃ avajjetvā sakalasarīraṃ aṭṭhīni bhinditvā uggatāhi pīḷakāhi ajjhotthaṭaṃ ahosi. Yasmā pana buddhānubhāvena tathārūpaṃ kammaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve vipākaṃ dātuṃ na sakkoti, dassanūpacāre vijahitamatte deti, tasmā tassa acirapakkantassa pīḷakā uṭṭhahiṃsu.Kalāyamattiyoti caṇakamattiyo.Beluvasalāṭukamattiyoti taruṇabeluvamattiyo.Pabhijjiṃsūti bhijjiṃsu. Tāsu bhinnāsu sakalasarīraṃ panasapakkaṃ viya ahosi. So pakkena gattena jetavanadvārakoṭṭhake visagilito maccho viya kadalipattesu nipajji. Atha dhammassavanatthaṃ āgatāgatā manussā ‘‘dhi kokālika, dhi kokālika, ayuttamakāsi, attanoyeva mukhaṃ nissāya anayabyasanaṃ pattosī’’ti āhaṃsu. Tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā ārakkhadevatā dhikkāramakaṃsu, ārakkhadevatānaṃ ākāsadevatāti iminā upāyena yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanā ekadhikkāro udapādi.

Pakkāmīti being urged on by the effect of his actions, he departed. For an action that has found an opportunity cannot be warded off. Acirapakkantassāti while he was departing, not long after. Sabbo kāyo phuṭo ahosīti without missing even an area the size of a hair-tip, his entire body was covered with boils that had risen, breaking the bones. Since such an action, due to the power of the Buddhas, is not able to give its result in the presence of the Buddhas, it gives it as soon as he has left the range of sight; therefore, as soon as he had departed, boils arose on him. Kalāyamattiyoti the size of chick-peas. Beluvasalāṭukamattiyoti the size of young bamboo shoots. Pabhijjiṃsūti they burst. When those burst, his entire body became like ripe jackfruit. With his ripened body, he lay down on banana leaves like a fish speared at the gatehouse of Jetavana Monastery. Then people who had come to hear the Dhamma said, "Shame on Kokālika, shame on Kokālika, he has done what is not proper; relying only on his own mouth, he has attained non-growth and destruction." Having heard their sound, the guardian deities reproached him; in this way, from the guardian deities up to the Akaniṭṭha realm, a single reproach arose.

Turūti kokālikassa upajjhāyo turutthero nāma anāgāmiphalaṃ vatvā brahmaloke nibbatto. So bhummaṭṭhadevatā ādiṃ katvā ‘‘ayuttaṃ kokālikena kataṃ aggasāvake antimavatthunā abbhācikkhantenā’’ti paramparāya brahmalokasampattaṃ taṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘mā mayhaṃ passantasseva varāko nassi, ovadissāmi naṃ theresu cittappasādatthāyā’’ti āgantvā tassa purato aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘turū paccekabrahmā’’ti.Pesalāti piyasīlā.Kosi tvaṃ, āvusoti nisinnakova kabarakkhīni ummīletvā evamāha.Passa yāvañca te idaṃ aparaddhati yattakaṃ tayā aparaddhaṃ, attano nalāṭe mahāgaṇḍaṃ apassanto sāsapamattāya pīḷakāya maṃ codetabbaṃ maññasīti āha.

Turū: Turu Thera, Kokālika's preceptor, after declaring the fruit of non-returning, was reborn in the Brahma realm. He, starting with the earth-dwelling deities, having heard the sound that reached the Brahma realm through the lineage, saying, "What Kokālika did was improper, accusing the chief disciples with the final accusation," thinking, "Lest this wretch should perish right before my eyes, I will advise him for the sake of generating serenity in the elders," came and stood before him. Referring to that, it was said, "Turu, the Pacceka Brahma." Pesala means having amiable virtue. Who are you, friend? He said, opening his eyes like a seated variegated monkey. See how much you have wronged: How much you have wronged, not seeing the large boil on your forehead, do you think you should accuse me for a pimple the size of a mustard seed?

purisassa hītiādimāha. Tatthakuṭhārīti kuṭhārisadisā pharusavācā.Chindatīti kusalamūlasaṅkhāte mūleyeva nikantati.Nindiyanti ninditabbaṃ dussīlapuggalaṃ.Pasaṃsatīti uttamatthe sambhāvetvā khīṇāsavoti vadati.Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti yo vā pasaṃsitabbo khīṇāsavo, taṃ antimavatthunā codento ‘‘dussīlo aya’’nti vadati.Vicināti mukhena so kalinti so taṃ aparādhaṃ mukhena vicināti nāma.Kalinātenāti tena aparādhena sukhaṃ na vindati. Nindiyapasaṃsāya hi pasaṃsiyanindāya ca samakova vipāko.

He spoke beginning with purisassa hi. There, kuṭhārī means harsh speech like an axe. Chindatī means it cuts off right at the root, which is the root of merit. Nindiya means a blameworthy, immoral person. Pasaṃsatī means praising him by esteeming him as excellent, he calls him a perfected one. Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyo: Or whoever should be praised, a perfected one, accusing him with the final accusation, he says, "This one is immoral." Vicināti mukhena so kali: He gathers that offense with his mouth. Kalinā tenā: He does not find happiness through that offense. For blame of the blameworthy and blame of the praiseworthy have the same result.

Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanāti sabbena sakena dhanenapi attanāpi saddhiṃ yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo nāma, ayaṃ appamattako aparādho.Yo sugatesūti yo pana sammaggatesu puggalesu cittaṃ dūseyya, ayaṃ cittapadosova tato kalito mahantataro kali.

Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanā: That loss of wealth in games of dice, with all one's own wealth and with oneself, is a minor offense. Yo sugatesū: But whoever corrupts his mind towards those gone to a good bourn, this corruption of mind is a greater offense than that.

sataṃ sahassānantiādimāha. Tatthasataṃ sahassānanti nirabbudagaṇanāya satasahassañca.Chattiṃsatīti aparāni chattiṃsati nirabbudāni.Pañca cāti abbudagaṇanāya pañca abbudāni.Yamariyagarahīti yaṃ ariye garahanto nirayaṃ upapajjati, tattha ettakaṃ āyuppamāṇanti attho.

He spoke beginning with sataṃ sahassāna. There, sataṃ sahassāna means a hundred thousand in the count of Nirabbuda. Chattiṃsatī means another thirty-six Nirabbudas. Pañca cā means five Abbudas in the count of Abbuda. Yamariyagarahī: The amount of life span there, where one who reviles the noble ones is reborn in hell, is the meaning.

Kālamakāsīti upajjhāye pakkante kālaṃ akāsi.Padumanirayanti pāṭiyekko padumanirayo nāma natthi, avīcimahānirayasmiṃyeva pana padumagaṇanāya paccitabbe ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nibbatti.

Kālamakāsī: When the preceptor departed, he died. Padumaniraya: There is no separate Paduma hell, but he was born in one place in the great Avīci hell, to be cooked by the Paduma reckoning.

Vīsatikhārikoti māgadhakena patthena cattāro patthā, kosalaraṭṭhe eko pattho hoti. Tena patthena cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ, cattāri āḷhakāni doṇaṃ, catudoṇā mānikā, catumānikā khārī, tāya khāriyā vīsatikhāriko.Tilavāhoti māgadhakānaṃ sukhumatilānaṃ tilasakaṭaṃ.Abbudo nirayoti abbudo nāma pāṭiyekko nirayo natthi, avīcimhiyeva pana abbudagaṇanāya paccitabbaṭṭhānassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Nirabbudādīsupi eseva nayo.

Vīsatikhāriko: Four patthas in the Magadha measure make one pattha in the Kosala country. By that pattha, four patthas make an āḷhaka, four āḷhakas make a doṇa, four doṇas make a mānikā, four mānikās make a khārī, and twenty khārīs by that khārī. Tilavāho: A cartload of fine sesame seeds of the Magadhans. Abbudo nirayo: There is no separate Abbuda hell, but it is the name of a place to be cooked by the Abbuda reckoning in Avīci itself. The same method applies to Nirabbudā and the rest.

Vassagaṇanāpi panettha evaṃ veditabbā – yatheva hi sataṃ satasahassāni koṭi hoti, evaṃ sataṃ satasahassakoṭiyo pakoṭi nāma hoti, sataṃ satasahassapakoṭiyo koṭipakoṭi nāma, sataṃ satasahassakoṭipakoṭiyo nahutaṃ, sataṃ satasahassanahutāni ninnahutaṃ, sataṃ satasahassaninnahutāni ekaṃ abbudaṃ, tato vīsatiguṇaṃ nirabbudaṃ, esa nayo sabbatthāti. Dasamaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Here also the reckoning of years should be understood thus: Just as a hundred thousand hundreds is a koṭi, so a hundred thousand koṭis is called a pakoṭi, a hundred thousand pakoṭis is called a koṭipakoṭi, a hundred thousand koṭipakoṭis is a nahuta, a hundred thousand nahutas is a ninnahuta, a hundred thousand ninnahutas is an abbuda, then twenty times that is a nirabbuda; this is the method everywhere. The tenth should be understood in the same way as stated below. The rest is all self-explanatory.

(10) 5. Upālivaggo

(10) 5. Upāli Vagga

1-2. Kāmabhogīsuttādivaṇṇanā
1-2. Kāmabhogīsutta-ādi-vaṇṇanā

91-92.Pañcamassa paṭhamesāhasenāti sāhasiyakammena. Dutiyebhayānīti cittutrāsabhayāni.Verānīti akusalaverapuggalaverāni.Ariyo cassa ñāyoti saha vipassanāya maggo.Iti imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti evaṃ imasmiṃ avijjādike kāraṇe sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti.Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti yo yassa sahajātapaccayo hoti, tassa uppādā itaraṃ uppajjati nāma.Imasmiṃ asatīti avijjādike kāraṇe asati saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ na hoti.Imassanirodhāti kāraṇassa appavattiyā phalassa appavatti hoti.

91-92.In the first of the fifth, sāhasenā means by a violent action. In the second, bhayānī means fears causing mental distress. Verānī means enmities with unwholesome, hostile individuals. Ariyo cassa ñāyo: And his path is noble, along with insight. Iti imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī: Thus, when this cause, beginning with ignorance, exists, this result, beginning with volitional activities, exists. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī: When that which is a co-nascent condition for something arises, the other arises. Imasmiṃ asatī: When this cause, beginning with ignorance, does not exist, the result, beginning with volitional activities, does not exist. Imassa nirodhā: With the cessation of the cause, there is cessation of the result.

3. Kiṃdiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Kiṃdiṭṭhikasutta Vaṇṇanā

93.Tatiyesaṇṭhāpesunti iriyāpathampi vacanapathampi saṇṭhāpesuṃ.Appasaddavinītāti appasaddena mattabhāṇinā satthārā vinītā.Paratoghosapaccayā vāti parassa vā vacanakāraṇā.Cetayitāti pakappitā.Maṅkubhūtāti domanassappattā nittejā.Pattakkhandhāti patitakkhandhā.Sahadhammenāti sahetukena kāraṇena vacanena.

93.In the third, saṇṭhāpesuṃ means they composed both the bodily deportment and the path of speech. Appasaddavinītā means trained by a Teacher who speaks little. Paratoghosapaccayā vā: Or due to another's speech. Cetayitā: Decided upon. Maṅkubhūtā: Having reached dejection, without vigor. Pattakkhandhā: Having fallen aggregates. Sahadhammenā: With reasoned, causal speech.

4. Vajjiyamāhitasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Vajjiyamāhitasutta Vaṇṇanā

94.Catutthevajjiyamāhitoti evaṃnāmako.Sabbaṃ tapanti sabbameva dukkarakārikaṃ.Sabbaṃ tapassinti sabbaṃ tapanissitakaṃ.Lūkhājīvinti dukkarakārikajīvikānuyogaṃ anuyuttaṃ.Gārayhanti garahitabbayuttakaṃ.Pasaṃsiyanti pasaṃsitabbayuttakaṃ.Venayikoti sayaṃ avinīto aññehi vinetabbo.Apaññattikoti na kiñci paññāpetuṃ sakkoti. Atha vāvenayikoti sattavināsako.Apaññattikoti apaccakkhaṃ nibbānaṃ paññāpeti, sayaṃkatādīsu kiñci paññāpetuṃ na sakkoti.Na so bhagavā venayikoti so bhagavā evaṃ yāthāvato ñatvā kusalākusalaṃ paññāpento na aññena vinetabbo na aññasikkhito. Ye ca dhamme upādāya satto paññāpiyati, tesaṃ paññāpanato na sattavināsako, suvinīto susikkhito sattavināyakoti attho. Tassa ca paññattiyo sapaññattiyoyevāti dasseti.Vimuttiṃ vimuccato akusalā dhammāti micchādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ cittassa adhimuttiṃ adhimuccato akusalā dhammā vaḍḍhanti nāma, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sāsane pana cittassa vimuttisaṅkhāto vimutti kusalānaṃyeva paccayo hoti.

94.In the fourth, vajjiyamāhito means one named thus. Sabbaṃ tapa means all difficult practices. Sabbaṃ tapassi means all dependent on austerity. Lūkhājīvi means attached to the pursuit of a harsh mode of living. Gārayha means fit to be blamed. Pasaṃsiya means fit to be praised. Venayiko means himself undisciplined, to be disciplined by others. Apaññattiko means unable to make anything known. Alternatively, venayiko means a destroyer of beings. Apaññattiko means he makes known a Nibbāna that is not directly experienced; he is unable to make known anything about self-made things and so on. Na so bhagavā venayiko: That Blessed One, having truly known thus, making known the wholesome and unwholesome, is not to be disciplined by another, not taught by another. And not a destroyer of beings by making known those things on the basis of which a being is designated, well-disciplined, well-trained, is the meaning. He shows that his pronouncements are indeed well-pronounced. Vimuttiṃ vimuccato akusalā dhammā: When adhering to the false view, which is a mental adherence, unwholesome states increase. This was said with that in mind. But in the Dispensation, liberation, which is a mental release, is a condition only for wholesome states.

5. Uttiyasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Uttiyasutta Vaṇṇanā

95.Pañcametuṇhī ahosīti sattūpaladdhiyaṃ ṭhatvā apucchaṃ pucchatīti tuṇhī ahosi.Sabbasāmukkaṃsikaṃ vata meti mayā sabbapucchānaṃ uttamapucchaṃ pucchito samaṇo gotamo saṃsādeti no vissajjeti, nūna na visahati na sakkoti vissajjetunti evaṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ mā paṭilabhīti.Tadassāti taṃ evaṃ uppannaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ bhaveyya.Paccantimanti yasmā majjhimadese nagarassa uddhāpādīni thirāni vā hontu dubbalāni vā, sabbaso vā pana mā hontu, corāsaṅkā na hoti. Tasmā taṃ aggahetvā ‘‘paccantimaṃ nagara’’nti āha.Daḷhuddhāpanti thirapākārapādaṃ.Daḷhapākāratoraṇanti thirapākārañceva thirapiṭṭhisaṅghāṭañca.Ekadvāranti kasmā āha? Bahudvārasmiñhi nagare bahūhi paṇḍitadovārikehi bhavitabbaṃ, ekadvāre ekova vaṭṭati. Tathāgatassa ca paññāya añño sadiso natthi. Tasmā satthu paṇḍitabhāvassa opammatthaṃ ekaṃyeva dovārikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekadvāra’’nti āha.Paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato.Byattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato.Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattiyapaññāsaṅkhātāya medhāya samannāgato.Anupariyāyapathanti anupariyāyanāmakaṃ maggaṃ.Pākārasandhinti dvinnaṃ iṭṭhakānaṃ apagataṭṭhānaṃ.Pākāravivaranti pākārassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ.Tadevetaṃ pañhanti taṃyeva ‘‘sassato loko’’tiādinā nayena puṭṭhaṃ ṭhapanīyapañhaṃ punapi pucchi.Sabbo ca tena lokoti sattūpaladdhiyaṃyeva ṭhatvā aññenākārena pucchatīti dasseti.

95.In the fifth, tuṇhī ahosī means he remained silent, standing in the position of observing beings, asking a question without being asked. Sabbasāmukkaṃsikaṃ vata me: Having been asked the best of all questions by me, the ascetic Gotama confuses and does not explain; surely he does not dare, he is not able to explain—lest he should adopt such an evil view. Tadassā: That view that has thus arisen. Paccantima means why did he say "border city," since in the middle country, whether the city's fortifications are strong or weak, or even if there are none at all, there is no fear of robbers? Therefore, not taking that, he said, "border city." Daḷhuddhāpa: Having a strong foundation of ramparts. Daḷhapākāratoraṇa: Having a strong wall and a strong lintel. Ekadvāra: Why did he say "one gate"? For in a city with many gates, there must be many wise gatekeepers; in a city with one gate, one is enough. And there is no one else equal to the Tathāgata's wisdom. Therefore, to illustrate the Teacher's wisdom, to show only one gatekeeper, he said, "one gate." Paṇḍito: Endowed with wisdom. Byatto: Endowed with expertise. Medhāvī: Endowed with intelligence, which is knowledge of what is appropriate. Anupariyāyapatha: A path called anupariyāya. Pākārasandhi: The place where two bricks no longer meet. Pākāravivara: A broken place in the wall. Tadevetaṃ pañha: That same question that was asked with the proposition "the world is eternal" and so on, he asked again. Sabbo ca tena loko: He shows that he asks in another way, standing in the position of observing beings.

6. Kokanudasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kokanudasutta Vaṇṇanā

96.Chaṭṭhepubbāpayamānoti pubbasadisāni nirudakāni kurumāno.Kvettha, āvusoti ko ettha, āvuso.Yāvatā, āvuso, diṭṭhīti yattikā dvāsaṭṭhividhāpi diṭṭhi nāma atthi.Yāvatā diṭṭhiṭṭhānanti ‘‘khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāpi, phassopi, saññāpi, vitakkopi ayonisomanasikāropi, pāpamittopi, paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti evaṃ yattakaṃ aṭṭhavidhampi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ diṭṭhikāraṇaṃ nāma atthi.Diṭṭhādhiṭṭhānanti diṭṭhīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, adhiṭhatvā adhibhavitvā pavattāya diṭṭhiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ.Diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānanti ‘‘katamāni aṭṭhārasa diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānāni? Yā diṭṭhi diṭṭhigataṃ diṭṭhigahanaṃ diṭṭhikantāraṃ diṭṭhivisūkaṃ diṭṭhivipphanditaṃ diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ diṭṭhisallaṃ diṭṭhisambādho diṭṭhipalibodho diṭṭhibandhanaṃ diṭṭhipapāto diṭṭhānusayo diṭṭhisantāpo diṭṭhipariḷāho diṭṭhigantho diṭṭhupādānaṃ diṭṭhābhiniveso diṭṭhiparāmāso. Imāni aṭṭhārasa diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānānī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānaṃ.Samuṭṭhānanti diṭṭhiṭṭhānasseva vevacanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘khandhā paccayo diṭṭhīnaṃ upādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhenā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.124) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Sotāpattimaggo panadiṭṭhisamugghātonāma sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ samugghātakattā.Tamahanti taṃ sabbaṃ ahaṃ jānāmi.Kyāhaṃ vakkhāmīti kiṃkāraṇā ahaṃ vakkhāmi.

96.In the sixth, pubbāpayamāno means making it like before, without water. Kvettha, āvuso: Where is it, friend? Yāvatā, āvuso, diṭṭhī: As many views as there are, friend, even the sixty-two kinds of views. Yāvatā diṭṭhiṭṭhāna: As many locations of views as there are, saying, "The aggregates are a location of views, ignorance is, contact is, perception is, thought is, unwise attention is, an evil friend is, another's speech is a location of views"; thus, as many as eight kinds of locations of views, causes of views, exist. Diṭṭhādhiṭṭhāna: The basis of views; this name is for a view that persists, having determined and dominated. Diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhāna: "What are the eighteen instances of being obsessed by views? That is, a view, a thicket of views, a wilderness of views, a contortion of views, a writhing of views, a fetter of views, a dart of views, an affliction of views, an obstruction of views, a bond of views, a precipice of views, a tendency to views, a torment due to views, a fever due to views, a knot of views, an attachment to views, an insistence on views, a prejudice of views. These are the eighteen instances of being obsessed by views,"—thus, what is said is being obsessed by views. Samuṭṭhāna: A synonym for the location of views. For it was said, "The aggregates are a condition for views in the sense of arising by way of attachment" (paṭi. ma. 1.124); everything should be expanded. But the path of stream-entry is called diṭṭhisamugghāto because it uproots all views. Tamaha: I know all that. Kyāhaṃ vakkhāmī: Why should I speak?

7-8. Āhuneyyasuttādivaṇṇanā
7-8. Āhuneyyasutta-ādi-Vaṇṇanā

97-98.Sattamesammādiṭṭhikoti yāthāvadiṭṭhiko. Aṭṭhameadhikaraṇasamuppādavūpasamakusaloti catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ mūlaṃ gahetvā vūpasamena samuppādavūpasamakusalo hoti.

97-98.In the seventh, sammādiṭṭhiko means having right view, in accordance with reality. In the eighth, adhikaraṇasamuppādavūpasamakusalo means, taking the root of the four disputes, he is skilled in the arising and cessation through the appeasement.

9. Upālisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Upālisutta Vaṇṇanā

99.Navamedurabhisambhavānīti sambhavituṃ dukkhāni dussahāni, na sakkā appesakkhehi ajjhogāhitunti vuttaṃ hoti.Araññavanapatthānīti araññāni ca vanapatthāni ca. Āraññakaṅganipphādanena araññāni, gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānabhāvena vanapatthāni.Pantānīti pariyantāni atidūrāni.Dukkaraṃ pavivekanti kāyaviveko dukkaro.Durabhiramanti abhiramituṃ na sukaraṃ.Ekatteti ekībhāve. Kiṃ dasseti? Kāyaviveke katepi tattha cittaṃ abhiramāpetuṃ dukkaraṃ. Dvayaṃdvayārāmo hi ayaṃ lokoti.Haranti maññeti haranti viya ghasanti viya.Manoti cittaṃ.Samādhiṃ alabhamānassāti upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā alabhantassa. Kiṃ dasseti? Īdisassa bhikkhuno tiṇapaṇṇamigādisaddehi vividhehi ca bhīsanakehi vanāni cittaṃ vikkhipanti maññeti.Saṃsīdissatīti kāmavitakkena saṃsīdissati.Uplavissatīti byāpādavihiṃsāvitakkehi uddhaṃ plavissati.

99.In the ninth, durabhisambhavānī means difficult to come to terms with, hard to endure; it was said that it is not possible to plunge into them with little effort. Araññavanapatthānī means both forests and forest thickets. Forests by accomplishing forest-dwelling practices, and forest thickets by going beyond the village boundary, being places where people do not frequent. Pantānī means remote, very distant. Dukkaraṃ paviveka means bodily seclusion is difficult. Durabhirama means not easy to delight in. Ekatte means in solitude. What does it show? Even when bodily seclusion is done, it is difficult to delight the mind there. For this world delights in duality. Haranti maññe: I think they carry away, as if they devour. Mano: The mind. Samādhiṃ alabhamānassā: For one who does not attain either access concentration or attainment concentration. What does it show? For such a bhikkhu, I think, forests with various frightening sounds, such as grass, leaves, animals, scatter the mind. Saṃsīdissatī: He will sink down with sensual thought. Uplavissatī: He will float upwards with thoughts of ill-will and harming.

Kaṇṇasaṃdhovikanti kaṇṇe dhovantena kīḷitabbaṃ.Piṭṭhisaṃdhovikanti piṭṭhiṃ dhovantena kīḷitabbaṃ. Tattha udakaṃ soṇḍāya gahetvā dvīsu kaṇṇesu āsiñcanaṃ kaṇṇasaṃdhovikā nāma, piṭṭhiyaṃ āsiñcanaṃ piṭṭhisaṃdhovikā nāma.Gādhaṃ vindatīti patiṭṭhaṃ labhati.Ko cāhaṃ ko ca hatthināgoti ahaṃ ko, hatthināgo ko, ahampi tiracchānagato, ayampi, mayhampi cattāro pādā, imassapi, nanu ubhopi mayaṃ samasamāti.

Kaṇṇasaṃdhovika: To be played with by washing the ears. Piṭṭhisaṃdhovika: To be played with by washing the back. There, pouring water into both ears with the trunk is called kaṇṇasaṃdhovikā, pouring on the back is called piṭṭhisaṃdhovikā. Gādhaṃ vindatī: He finds a footing. Ko cāhaṃ ko ca hatthināgo: Who am I, and who is the elephant? Both I and this elephant are animals, I also have four feet, and so does he; surely both of us are equal?

Vaṅkakanti kumārakānaṃ kīḷanakaṃ khuddakanaṅgalaṃ.Ghaṭikanti dīghadaṇḍakena rassadaṇḍakaṃ paharaṇakīḷaṃ.Mokkhacikanti saṃparivattakakīḷaṃ, ākāse daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭhupariyabhāvena parivattanakīḷanti vuttaṃ hoti.Ciṅgulakanti tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamanacakkaṃ.Pattāḷhakaṃvuccati paṇṇanāḷi, tāya vālukādīni minantā kīḷanti.Rathakanti khuddakarathaṃ.Dhanukanti khuddakadhanumeva.

Vaṅkaka means a small plow, a toy for children. Ghaṭika means a game of striking a short stick with a long stick. Mokkhacika means a revolving game; it means a game of revolving in the air holding a stick, or on the ground placing the head, in an upside-down manner. Ciṅgulaka means a wheel made of palm leaves, etc., that revolves by the force of the wind. Pattāḷhaka is called a leaf-tube, with which they play by measuring sand, etc. Rathaka means a small chariot. Dhanuka means a small bow.

Idha kho pana voti etthavoti nipātamattaṃ, idha kho panāti attho.Iṅgha tvaṃ, upāli, saṅghe viharāhīti etthaiṅghāti codanatthe nipāto. Tena theraṃ saṅghamajjhe vihāratthāya codeti, nāssa araññavāsaṃ anujānāti. Kasmā? Araññasenāsane vasato kirassa vāsadhurameva pūrissati, na ganthadhuraṃ. Saṅghamajjhe vasanto pana dve dhurāni pūretvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissati, vinayapiṭake ca pāmokkho bhavissati. Athassāhaṃ parisamajjhe pubbapatthanaṃ pubbābhinīhārañca kathetvā imaṃ bhikkhuṃ vinayadharānaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapessāmīti imamatthaṃ passamāno satthā therassa araññavāsaṃ nānujānīti. Dasamaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

In Idha kho pana vo, vo is merely a particle; the meaning is, "indeed, here." In Iṅgha tvaṃ, upāli, saṅghe viharāhī, iṅghā is a particle used in urging. With that, he urges the Elder to reside within the Sangha, he does not approve of his living in the forest. Why? Because it seems that if he lives in a forest dwelling, he will only fulfill the duty of dwelling, not the duty of study. But living in the midst of the Sangha, he will fulfill both duties and attain Arahatship, and he will become pre-eminent in the Vinaya Piṭaka. "Then, in the midst of the assembly, I will tell of his prior aspiration and prior resolve, and I will place this bhikkhu in the foremost position among the Vinaya-holders," seeing this purpose, the Teacher does not approve of the Elder's living in the forest. The tenth is straightforward in meaning.

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

3. The Third Set of Fifty

(11) 1. Samaṇasaññāvaggo

(11) 1. The Section on Perception of Asceticism

1. Samaṇasaññāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Samaṇasaññā Sutta

101.Tatiyassa paṭhamesamaṇasaññāti samaṇānaṃ uppajjanakasaññā.Santatakārīti nirantarakārī.Abyāpajjhoti niddukkho.Idamatthaṃtissa hotīti idamatthaṃ ime paccayāti evamassa jīvitaparikkhāresu hoti, paccavekkhitaparibhogaṃ paribhuñjatīti attho. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

101. In the first of the third, samaṇasaññā means the perception that arises in ascetics. Santatakārī means doing continuously. Abyāpajjho means without suffering. Idamatthaṃtissa hotī means that he has these requisites of life for this purpose; it means that he uses them after reflection. The second is straightforward in meaning.

3. Micchattasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Micchatta Sutta

103.Tatiyevirādhanā hotīti saggato maggato ca virajjhanaṃ hoti.No ārādhanāti na sampādanā na paripūrakāritā hoti.Pahotīti pavattati.

103. In the third, virādhanā hotī means there is failure from heaven and from the path. No ārādhanā means there is no accomplishment, no fulfilling. Pahotī means it prevails.

4-5. Bījasuttādivaṇṇanā
4-5. Commentary on the Bīja Sutta, etc.

104-105.Catuttheyathādiṭṭhi samattaṃ samādinnanti diṭṭhānurūpena paripuṇṇaṃ samādinnaṃ sakalaṃ gahitaṃ.Cetanāti tīsu dvāresu nibbattitacetanāva gahitā.Patthanāti ‘‘evarūpo siya’’nti evaṃ patthanā.Paṇidhīti ‘‘devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti cittaṭṭhapanā.Saṅkhārāti sampayuttakasaṅkhārā. Pañcame purecārikaṭṭhenapubbaṅgamā. Anvadevāti taṃ anubandhamānameva.

104-105. In the fourth, yathādiṭṭhi samattaṃ samādinnaṃ means completely undertaken and fully grasped according to one's view. Cetanā means the intention produced in the three doors is taken. Patthanā means the wish, "May I be such and such." Paṇidhī means the fixing of the mind, "I will become a deva or a deva of such and such sort." Saṅkhārā means the associated formations. In the fifth, pubbaṅgamā because of being foremost. Anvadevā means following immediately after that.

6. Nijjarasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Nijjara Sutta

106.Chaṭṭhenijjaravatthūnīti nijjarakāraṇāni.Micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hotīti ayaṃ heṭṭhā vipassanāyapi nijjiṇṇā eva pahīnā. Kasmā puna gahitāti? Asamucchinnattā. Vipassanāya hi kiñcāpi nijjiṇṇā, na pana samucchinnā. Maggo pana uppajjitvā taṃ samucchindati, na puna vuṭṭhātuṃ deti. Tasmā puna gahitā. Evaṃ sabbapadesu yojetabbo. Ettha ca sammāvimuttipaccayā catusaṭṭhi dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Katame catusaṭṭhi? Sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe adhimokkhaṭṭhena saddhindriyaṃ paripūrati, paggahaṭṭhena vīriyindriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena satindriyaṃ, avikkhepaṭṭhena samādhindriyaṃ, dassanaṭṭhena paññindriyaṃ paripūreti, vijānanaṭṭhena manindriyaṃ, abhinandanaṭṭhena somanassindriyaṃ, pavattasantatiādhipateyyaṭṭhena jīvitindriyaṃ paripūrati…pe… arahattaphalakkhaṇe adhimokkhaṭṭhena saddhindriyaṃ…pe… pavattasantatiādhipateyyaṭṭhena jīvitindriyaṃ paripūratīti evaṃ catūsu ca maggesu catūsu ca phalesu aṭṭhaṭṭha hutvā catusaṭṭhi dhammā pāripūriṃ gacchanti.

106. In the sixth, nijjaravatthūnī means the causes of attrition. Micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hotī means that this is already rejected and abandoned by insight below. Why is it taken again? Because it is not eradicated. Although it is rejected by insight, it is not eradicated. But the path arises and eradicates it, and does not allow it to arise again. Therefore, it is taken again. Thus, it should be applied in all passages. And here, due to Right Liberation, sixty-four qualities go to the fulfillment of development. Which sixty-four? At the moment of the Sotāpatti path, the faculty of faith is fulfilled in the sense of conviction, the faculty of energy in the sense of exertion, the faculty of mindfulness in the sense of establishing, the faculty of concentration in the sense of non-distraction, the faculty of wisdom in the sense of seeing, the faculty of mind in the sense of knowing, the faculty of joy in the sense of delighting, the faculty of life in the sense of dominating the continuous stream…pe…at the moment of Arahatship-fruition, the faculty of faith is fulfilled in the sense of conviction…pe…the faculty of life is fulfilled in the sense of dominating the continuous stream; thus, in the four paths and four fruits, eight each, sixty-four qualities go to fulfillment.

7. Dhovanāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Dhovana Sutta

107.Sattamedhovananti aṭṭhidhovanaṃ. Tasmiñhi janapade manussā ñātake mate na jhāpenti, āvāṭaṃ pana khaṇitvā bhūmiyaṃ nidahanti. Atha nesaṃ pūtibhūtānaṃ aṭṭhīni nīharitvā dhovitvā paṭipāṭiyā ussāpetvā gandhamālehi pūjetvā ṭhapenti. Nakkhatte patte tāni aṭṭhīni gahetvā rodanti paridevanti, tato nakkhattaṃ kīḷanti.

107. In the seventh, dhovana means bone-washing. In that country, when relatives die, people do not cremate them, but dig a pit and bury them in the ground. Then, when they have become putrid, they take out the bones, wash them, arrange them in order, and keep them, honoring them with perfumes and garlands. When the auspicious time comes, they take those bones and weep and lament, then they play at the auspicious time.

8-10. Tikicchakasuttādivaṇṇanā
8-10. Commentary on the Tikicchaka Sutta, etc.

108-110.Aṭṭhamevirecananti dosanīharaṇabhesajjaṃ.Virittā hotīti nīhaṭā hoti panuditā. Navamevamananti vamanakaraṇabhesajjaṃ. Dasameniddhamanīyāti niddhamitabbā.Niddhantāti niddhamitā.

108-110. In the eighth, virecana means medicine for eliminating impurities. Virittā hotī means it is eliminated, driven away. In the ninth, vamana means medicine for inducing vomiting. In the tenth, niddhamanīyā means to be expelled. Niddhantā means expelled.

11. Paṭhamaasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Commentary on the First Sekha Sutta

111.Ekādasame aṅgaparipūraṇatthaṃ sammādiṭṭhiyevasammāñāṇanti vuttā. Evamete sabbepi arahattaphaladhammā asekhā, asekhassa pavattattā paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi asekhanti vuttaṃ.

111. In the eleventh, sammāñāṇa is said to be Right Knowledge, which is simply Right View, for the purpose of fulfilling the factors. Thus, all these qualities of Arahatship-fruition are those of a non-trainee, and because of the continuation of the non-trainee, even the knowledge of reviewing is said to be that of a non-trainee.

12. Dutiyaasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Commentary on the Second Sekha Sutta

112.Dvādasameasekhiyāti asekhāyeva, asekhasantakā vā. Iminā suttena khīṇāsavova kathitoti.

112. In the twelfth, asekhiyā means simply that of a non-trainee, or belonging to a non-trainee. With this sutta, it is said that only the one with destroyed āsavas speaks.

(12) 2. Paccorohaṇivaggo

(12) 2. The Section on Turning Back

1-2. Adhammasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
1-2. Commentary on the Two Adhamma Suttas

113-114.Dutiyassa paṭhame pāṭiyekkaṃ pucchā ca vissajjanā ca katā. Dutiye ekatova.

113-114. In the first of the second, questions and answers are given separately. In the second, they are given together.

3. Tatiyaadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Third Adhamma Sutta

115.Tatiyeuddesaṃ uddisitvāti mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā.Satthuceva saṃvaṇṇitoti pañcasu ṭhānesu etadagge ṭhapentena satthārā saṃvaṇṇito.Sambhāvitoti guṇasambhāvanāya sambhāvito.Pahotīti sakkoti.Atisitvāti atikkamitvā.Jānaṃ jānātīti jānitabbakaṃ jānāti.Passaṃ passatīti passitabbakaṃ passati.Cakkhubhūtoti cakkhu viya bhūto jāto nibbatto.Ñāṇabhūtoti ñāṇasabhāvo.Dhammabhūtoti dhammasabhāvo.Brahmabhūtoti seṭṭhasabhāvo.Vattāti vattuṃ samattho.Pavattāti pavattetuṃ samattho.Atthassa ninnetāti atthaṃ nīharitvā dassetā.Yathā no bhagavāti yathā amhākaṃ bhagavā byākareyya.

115. In the third, uddesaṃ uddisitvā means having laid down the matrix. Satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito means praised by the Teacher, who placed it at the forefront in five places. Sambhāvito means esteemed with esteem of qualities. Pahotī means he is able. Atisitvā means having transcended. Jānaṃ jānātī means he knows what should be known. Passaṃ passatī means he sees what should be seen. Cakkhubhūto means become, born, produced, like an eye. Ñāṇabhūto means of the nature of knowledge. Dhammabhūto means of the nature of Dhamma. Brahmabhūto means of the nature of excellence. Vattā means capable of speaking. Pavattā means capable of setting in motion. Atthassa ninnetā means one who leads out and shows the meaning. Yathā no bhagavā means as our Lord would explain.

4. Ajitasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Ajita Sutta

116.Catuttheajitoti evaṃnāmako.Cittaṭṭhānasatānīti cittuppādasatāni.Yehīti yehi cittaṭṭhānasatehi anuyuñjiyamānā.Upāraddhāva jānanti upāraddhasmāti viraddhā niggahitā evaṃ jānanti ‘‘viraddhā mayaṃ, niggahitā mayaṃ, āropito no doso’’ti.Paṇḍitavatthūnīti paṇḍitabhāvatthāya kāraṇāni.

116. In the fourth, ajito means one named thus. Cittaṭṭhānasatānī means hundreds of mental states. Yehī means by which hundreds of mental states, being engaged in. Upāraddhāva jānanti upāraddhasmā means they know only when obstructed, because of obstruction, "We are obstructed, we are obstructed, fault is imputed to us." Paṇḍitavatthūnī means causes for the state of being wise.

5-6. Saṅgāravasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-6. Commentary on the Saṅgārava Sutta, etc.

117-118.Pañcameorimaṃ tīranti lokiyaṃ orimatīraṃ.Pārimaṃ tīranti lokuttaraṃ pārimatīraṃ.Pāragāminoti nibbānagāmino.Tīramevānudhāvatīti sakkāyadiṭṭhitīraṃyeva anudhāvati.Dhammedhammānuvattinoti sammā akkhāte navavidhe lokuttaradhamme anudhammavattino, tassa dhammassānucchavikāya sahasīlāya pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyā pavattamānā.Maccudheyyaṃsuduttaranti maccuno ṭhānabhūtaṃ tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ suduttaraṃ taritvā.Pāramessantīti nibbānaṃ pāpuṇissanti.

117-118. In the fifth, orimaṃ tīraṃ means the mundane near shore. Pārimaṃ tīraṃ means the supramundane far shore. Pāragāmino means those going to Nibbāna. Tīramevānudhāvatī means he runs along with the shore of personality-belief. Dhamme dhammānuvattino means behaving in accordance with the Dhamma in the ninefold supramundane Dhamma that is well-proclaimed, proceeding with behavior that accords with that Dhamma, with the preparatory practice of morality. Maccudheyyaṃ suduttaraṃ means the sphere of death, the triple world cycle, is very difficult to cross over. Pāramessantī means they will reach Nibbāna.

Okā anokamāgammāti vaṭṭato vivaṭṭaṃ āgamma.Viveke yattha dūramanti yasmiṃ kāyacittaupadhiviveke durabhiramaṃ, tatrābhiratimiccheyya.Hitvā kāmeti duvidhepi kāme pahāya.Akiñcanoti nippalibodho.Ādānapaṭinissageti gahaṇapaṭinissaggasaṅkhāte nibbāne.Anupādāya ye ratāti catūhi upādānehi kiñcipi anupādiyitvā ye abhiratā.Parinibbutāti te apaccayaparinibbānena parinibbutā nāmāti veditabbā. Chaṭṭhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ desitaṃ.

Okā anokamāgammā means having come from the round of existence to the state beyond the round. Viveke yattha dūramaṃ means in that seclusion of body, mind, and base, where it is hard to delight, one should desire delight there. Hitvā kāme means having abandoned desires of both kinds. Akiñcano means without impediments. Ādānapaṭinissage means in Nibbāna, which is the relinquishing of grasping. Anupādāya ye ratā means those who delight without grasping anything with the four kinds of clinging. Parinibbutā means they should be known as completely extinguished with cessation-Nibbāna. The sixth was taught to the bhikkhus.

7-8. Paccorohaṇīsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
7-8. Commentary on the Two Paccorohaṇī Suttas

119-120.Sattamepaccorohaṇīti pāpassa paccorohaṇaṃ.Pattharitvāti santharitvā.Antarā ca velaṃ antarā ca agyāgāranti vālikārāsissa ca aggiagārassa ca antare. Aṭṭhamaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa desitaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

119-120. In the seventh, paccorohaṇī means turning back from evil. Pattharitvā means having spread out. Antarā ca velaṃ antarā ca agyāgāraṃ means between the heap of sand and the fire-house. The eighth was taught to the Sangha of bhikkhus. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

(13) 3. Parisuddhavaggavaṇṇanā

(13) 3. Commentary on the Section on Purity

123.Tatiyassa paṭhameparisuddhāti nimmalā.Pariyodātāti pabhassarā. Dutiyādīni uttānatthānevāti.

123. In the first of the third, parisuddhā means immaculate. Pariyodātā means radiant. The second, etc., are straightforward in meaning.

(14) 4. Sādhuvaggavaṇṇanā

(14) 4. Commentary on the Section on Goodness

134.Catutthassa paṭhamesādhunti bhaddakaṃ siliṭṭhakaṃ. Dutiyādīni uttānatthānevāti. Ariyamaggavaggo uttānatthoyevāti.

134. In the first of the fourth, sādhu means auspicious, excellent. The second, etc., are straightforward in meaning. The Ariyamagga Section is straightforward in meaning.

Sādhuvaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Section on Goodness.

Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Third Set of Fifty is Finished.

4. Catutthapaṇṇāsakaṃ

4. The Fourth Set of Fifty

155.Catutthassa paṭhamādīni uttānatthānevāti.

155. The first, etc., of the fourth are straightforward in meaning.

8. Kammanidānasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Kammanidāna Sutta

174.Aṭṭhamelobhahetukampīti pāṇātipātassa lobho upanissayakoṭiyā hetu hoti dosamohasampayuttopi. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

174. In the eighth, lobhahetukampī means that greed is the cause, in the sense of a strong support, for killing living beings, even when associated with aversion and delusion. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

9. Parikkamanasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Parikkamana Sutta

175.Navameparikkamanaṃ hotīti parivajjanaṃ hoti.

175. In the ninth, parikkamanaṃ hotī means there is avoidance.

10. Cundasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Cunda Sutta

176.Dasamekammāraputtassāti suvaṇṇakāraputtassa.Kassa no tvanti kassa nu tvaṃ.Pacchābhūmakāti pacchābhūmivāsikā.Kamaṇḍalukāti kamaṇḍaludhārino.Sevālamālikāti sevālamālā viya dhārenti. Sevālapaṭanivāsitātipi vuttameva.Udakorohakāti sāyatatiyakaṃ udakorohanānuyogamanuyuttā.Āmaseyyāsīti hatthena parimajjeyyāsi.

176. In the tenth, kammāraputtassā means son of a goldsmith. Kassa no tvaṃ means whose are you? Pacchābhūmakā means living in the back country. Kamaṇḍalukā means bearing water-pots. Sevālamālikā means wearing garlands of moss. It is also said, "clothed in a garment of moss." Udakorohakā means devoted to the practice of descending into the water every third evening. Āmaseyyāsī means would stroke with the hand.

11. Jāṇussoṇisuttavaṇṇanā
11. Commentary on the Jāṇussoṇi Sutta

177.Ekādasameupakappatūti pāpuṇātu.Ṭhāneti okāse.No aṭṭhāneti no anokāse.Nerayikānaṃāhāronāma tattha nibbattanakammameva. Teneva hi te tattha yāpenti.Tiracchānayonikānaṃpana tiṇapaṇṇādivasena āhāro veditabbo.Manussānaṃodanakummāsādivasena,devānaṃsudhābhojanādivasena,pettivesayikānaṃkheḷasiṅghāṇikādivasena.Yaṃ vā panassa ito anuppavecchantīti yaṃ tassa mittādayo ito dadantā anupavesenti. Pettivesayikā eva hi paradattūpajīvino honti, na aññesaṃ parehi dinnaṃ upakappati.Dāyakopi anipphaloti yaṃ sandhāya taṃ dānaṃ dinnaṃ, tassa upakappatu vā mā vā, dāyakena pana na sakkā nipphalena bhavituṃ, dāyako tassa dānassa vipākaṃ labhatiyeva.

177. In the eleventh, upakappatū means may it reach. Ṭhāne means in a place. No aṭṭhāne means not in a non-place. Nerayikānaṃ āhāro means the karma of being born there itself. For by that, they live there. Tiracchānayonikānaṃ, however, food should be understood as grass, leaves, etc. Manussānaṃ as rice gruel, etc., devānaṃ as divine food, etc., pettivesayikānaṃ as spittle, snot, etc. Yaṃ vā panassa ito anuppavecchantī means whatever his friends, etc., give from here and send to him. For only pretas live on what is given by others; what is given by others does not reach others. Dāyakopi anipphalo means even if what is given with reference to him reaches him or not, it is not possible for the giver to be fruitless; the giver certainly receives the result of that giving.

Aṭṭhānepi bhavaṃ gotamo parikappaṃ vadatīti anokāse uppannepi tasmiṃ ñātake bhavaṃ gotamo dānassa phalaṃ parikappetiyeva paññāpetiyevāti pucchati. Brāhmaṇassa hi ‘‘evaṃ dinnassa dānassa phalaṃ dāyako na labhatī’’ti laddhi. Athassa bhagavā pañhaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘‘dāyako nāma yattha katthaci puññaphalūpajīviṭṭhāne nibbatto dānassa phalaṃ labhatiyevā’’ti dassetuṃidha brāhmaṇātiādimāha.So tattha lābhī hotīti so tattha hatthiyoniyaṃ nibbattopi maṅgalahatthiṭṭhānaṃ patvā lābhī hoti. Assādīsupi eseva nayo. Sādhuvaggo uttānatthoyevāti.

Aṭṭhānepi bhavaṃ gotamo parikappaṃ vadatī means, even when he is born in a non-place, does the honorable Gotama still declare and designate the fruit of giving? For the brahmin has the view, "The giver does not receive the fruit of a gift given in this way." Then, after acknowledging his question, the Lord said, "Wherever the giver is born in a place that lives on the fruit of merit, he certainly receives the fruit of the gift," to show this, he said, idha brāhmaṇā, etc. So tattha lābhī hotī means even if he is born there in the elephant realm, he becomes a gainer by reaching the state of a auspicious elephant. The same method applies to the horse, etc. The Sādhu Section is straightforward in meaning.

Jāṇussoṇivaggo dutiyo.

The Second Section on Jāṇussoṇi.

(21) 1. Karajakāyavaggo

(21) 1. The Section on the Body Composed of Elements

211.Pañcamassa paṭhamādīni uttānatthāneva.

211. The first, etc., of the fifth are straightforward in meaning.

6. Saṃsappanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Saṃsappanīya Sutta

216.Chaṭṭhesaṃsappanīyapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammapariyāyanti saṃsappanassa kāraṇaṃ desanāsaṅkhātaṃ dhammadesanaṃ.Saṃsappatīti taṃ kammaṃ karonto āsappati parisappati vipphandati.Jimhāgatīti tena kammena yaṃ gatiṃ gamissati, sā jimhā hoti.Jimhupapattīti tassa yaṃ gatiṃ upapajjissati, sāpi jimhāva hoti.Saṃsappajātikāti saṃsappanasabhāvā.Bhūtā bhūtassa upapatti hotīti bhūtasmā sabhāvato vijjamānakammā sattassa nibbatti hoti.Phassā phusantīti vipākaphassā phusanti.

216. "The Discourse on Entanglement, monks, is a discourse on the Dhamma," meaning a teaching on the Dhamma, known as the cause of entanglement.Saṃsappati: While doing that action, one clings, adheres, and vibrates.Jimhā gatī: The destination one reaches through that action is crooked.Jimhupapattī: The rebirth one experiences in that destination is also crooked.Saṃsappajātikā: Of the nature of entanglement.Bhūtā bhūtassa upapatti hotī: From an actual nature, from an existing action, there is a arising of a being.Phassā phusantī: The resultant contacts touch.

7-8. Sañcetanikasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
7-8. Commentary on the Two Sañcetanika Suttas

217-218.Sattamesañcetanikānanti cetetvā pakappetvā katānaṃ.Upacitānanti citānaṃ vaḍḍhitānaṃ.Appaṭisaṃveditvāti tesaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ avediyitvā.Byantībhāvanti vigatantabhāvaṃ tesaṃ kammānaṃ paricchedaparivaṭumatākaraṇaṃ.Tañca kho diṭṭheva dhammeti tañca kho vipākaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ diṭṭheva dhamme.Upapajjanti upapajjavedanīyaṃ anantare attabhāve.Apare vā pariyāyeti aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ pana saṃsārappavatte sati sahassimepi attabhāveti. Iminā idaṃ dasseti ‘‘saṃsārappavatte paṭiladdhavipākārahakamme na vijjati so jagatippadeso, yattha ṭhito mucceyya pāpakammā’’ti.Tividhāti tippakārā.Kāyakammantasandosabyāpattīti kāyakammantasaṅkhātā vipatti. Iminā nayena sabbapadāni veditabbāni. Aṭṭhameapaṇṇako maṇīti samantato caturasso pāsako.

217-218. In the seventh, sañcetanikānaṃ means actions done after intending and planning.Upacitānaṃ: Accumulated, increased.Appaṭisaṃveditvā: Without experiencing the result of those actions.Byantībhāvaṃ: The state of disappearance, the making of those actions to be limited and reversed.Tañca kho diṭṭheva dhamme: That result, however, is to be experienced in the present life, it is felt in this very life.Upapajja: To be experienced in the next arising, in the immediately following existence.Apare vā pariyāye: Or in another way, to be experienced in another existence, in the continuation of Saṃsāra, even in a thousandth existence. This shows that, "In the continuation of Saṃsāra, there is no place in the world where one can stand and be freed from evil actions, once an action capable of yielding a result has been obtained."Tividhā: Of three kinds.Kāyakammantasandosabyāpattī: Misconduct consisting of bodily action. In this way, all the terms should be understood. In the eighth, apaṇṇako maṇī means a perfectly square die.

9. Karajakāyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Karajakāya Sutta

219.Navamedukkhassāti vipākadukkhassa, vaṭṭadukkhasseva vā. Imasmiṃ sutte maṇiopammaṃ natthi.Evaṃ vigatābhijjhotievanti nipātamattaṃ. Yathā vā mettaṃ bhāventā vigatābhijjhā bhavanti, evaṃ vigatābhijjho. Evamassa vigatābhijjhatādīhi nīvaraṇavikkhambhanaṃ dassetvā idāni akusalanissaraṇāni kathentomettāsahagatenātiādimāha.Appamāṇanti appamāṇasattārammaṇatāya ciṇṇavasitāya vā appamāṇaṃ.Pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃnāma kāmāvacarakammaṃ.Na taṃ tatrāvatiṭṭhatīti taṃ mahogho parittaṃ udakaṃ viya attano okāsaṃ gahetvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, atha kho naṃ oghe parittaṃ udakaṃ viya idameva appamāṇaṃ kammaṃ ajjhottharitvā attano vipākaṃ nibbatteti.Daharataggeti daharakālato paṭṭhāya.

219. In the ninth, dukkhassā means the suffering of result, or the suffering of the cycle (vaṭṭa). In this sutta, there is no simile of a jewel.Evaṃ vigatābhijjho: Evaṃ is merely a particle. Just as those developing mettā become free from covetousness, so too, free from covetousness. Having shown the suppression of the hindrances through his being free from covetousness, etc., now, speaking of the escapes from unwholesome states, he said, mettāsahagatenāti, etc.Appamāṇaṃ: Immeasurable because it has immeasurable beings as its object, or because it has been practiced and cultivated.Pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ means an action belonging to the Sensuous Sphere.Na taṃ tatrāvatiṭṭhatī: That great flood cannot stand there, taking its place like a little water; rather, this immeasurable action overwhelms it and produces its own result, just like a great flood overwhelms a little water.Daharatagge: From the time of being young.

Nāyaṃ kāyo ādāyagamaniyoti imaṃ kāyaṃ gahetvā paralokaṃ gantuṃ nāma na sakkāti attho.Cittantaroti cittakāraṇo, atha vā citteneva antariko. Ekasseva hi cuticittassa anantarā dutiye paṭisandhicitte devo nāma hoti, nerayiko nāma hoti, tiracchānagato nāma hoti. Purimanayepi cittena kāraṇabhūtena devo nerayiko vā hotīti attho.Sabbaṃ taṃ idha vedanīyanti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyakoṭṭhāsavanetaṃ vuttaṃ.Na taṃ anugaṃ bhavissatīti mettāya upapajjavedanīyabhāvassa upacchinnattā upapajjavedanīyavasena na anugataṃ bhavissati. Idaṃ sotāpannasakadāgāmiariyapuggalānaṃ paccavekkhaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.Anāgāmitāyāti jhānānāgāmitāya.Idhapaññassāti imasmiṃ sāsane paññā idhapaññā nāma, sāsanacaritāya ariyapaññāya ṭhitassa ariyasāvakassāti attho.Uttarivimuttinti arahattaṃ. Dasamaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

Nāyaṃ kāyo ādāyagamaniyo: This body cannot be taken and go to another world, this is the meaning.Cittantaro: Caused by mind, or internal to the mind. For immediately after the passing away-mind of one person, in the second rebirth-mind, he becomes a deva, a denizen of hell, or one gone to the animal realm. Even in the previous way, by the mind as cause, one becomes a deva or a denizen of hell.Sabbaṃ taṃ idha vedanīyaṃ: This is said within the scope of what is to be experienced in this very life.Na taṃ anugaṃ bhavissatī: Because the state of being experienced in the next existence has been cut off by mettā, it will not follow in the manner of being experienced in the next existence. This should be understood as the reviewing of a Stream-enterer or Once-returner.Anāgāmitāyā: To the state of non-returning by means of jhāna.Idhapaññassā: Wisdom in this Dispensation is called "idhapaññā"; it means for an Noble Disciple who stands firm in the Noble Wisdom that accords with the Dispensation.Uttarivimutti: Arahantship. The tenth is clear in meaning.

(22) 2. Sāmaññavaggavaṇṇanā

(22) 2. Commentary on the Sāmañña Vagga

221.Dutiyassa paṭhamaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbā peyyālatanti uttānatthāyevāti.

221. In the second, beginning with the first, all the expansions are clear in meaning.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

The Manorathapūraṇī, commentary to the Aṅguttara Nikāya

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

Aṅguttaranikāye

In the Aṅguttara Nikāya

Ekādasakanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Commentary on the Ekādasaka Nipāta

1. Nissayavaggo

1. Nissaya Vagga

1-6. Kimatthiyasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-6. Commentary on the Kimatthiya Sutta, etc.

1-6.Ekādasakanipātassa paṭhamādīni heṭṭhā vuttanayāneva. Kevalañcettha ādito pañcasu nibbidāvirāgaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā ekādasaṅgāni katāni. Chaṭṭhe sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ adhikaṃ.

1-6. The first, etc., of the Ekādasaka Nipāta are in the same way as stated below. Only here, in the first five, the aversion and dispassion have been divided into two, making eleven factors. In the sixth, renouncing the training is additional.

7-8. Paṭhamasaññāsuttādivaṇṇanā
7-8. Commentary on the Paṭhama Saññā Sutta, etc.

7-8.Sattameatthena atthoti atthena saddhimattho.Byañjanena byañjananti byañjanena saddhiṃ byañjanaṃ.Saṃsandissatīti sampavattissati.Samessatīti samānaṃ bhavissati.Na viggayhissatīti na virajjhissati.Aggapadasminti nibbāne. Aṭṭhame paccavekkhaṇā kathitā.

7-8. In the seventh, atthena attho means meaning together with meaning.Byañjanena byañjanaṃ: Letter together with letter.Saṃsandissatī: Will flow together.Samessatī: Will be the same.Na viggayhissatī: Will not be opposed.Aggapadasmiṃ: In Nibbāna. In the eighth, reflection is described.

9. Saddhasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Saddhā Sutta Commentary

9.Navamedoṇiyā baddhoti yavasassadoṇiyā samīpe baddho.Antaraṃ karitvāti abbhantare katvā.Jhāyatīti cinteti.Pajjhāyatīti ito cito ca nānappakārakaṃ jhāyati.Nijjhāyatīti nirantaravasena nibaddhaṃ jhāyati.Pathavimpi nissāya jhāyatīti samāpattiyaṃ sanikantikavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Samāpattiyañhi sanikantikattā esa khaḷuṅko nāma kato.Āpādīsupi eseva nayo.

9. In the ninth, doṇiyā baddho means tied near a trough of barley.Antaraṃ karitvā: Having made an interval.Jhāyatī: Thinks.Pajjhāyatī: Thinks in various ways from here and there.Nijjhāyatī: Thinks continuously and constantly.Pathavimpi nissāya jhāyatī: This is said in terms of being attached to absorption. For in absorption, because there is attachment, this is called a "khaḷuṅka" (halter).Āpādi, this same method applies to water and the other elements.

Kathañca saddha ājānīyajhāyitaṃ hotīti kathaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ jānantassa sindhavassa jhāyitaṃ hoti.Yathā iṇantiādīsu iṇasadisaṃ bandhanasadisaṃ dhanajānisadisaṃ kalisaṅkhātamahāparādhasadisañca katvā attano abhimukhassa patodassa ajjhoharaṇasaṅkhātaṃ patanaṃ vipassatīti attho.Neva pathaviṃ nissāya jhāyatīti samāpattisukhanikantiyā abhāvena pathaviārammaṇāya catukkapañcakajjhānasaññāya na jhāyati, niyantiyā abhāveneva so ājānīyo nāma hotīti.Jhāyati ca panāti nibbānārammaṇāya phalasamāpattiyā jhāyati.Pathaviyaṃ pathavisaññā vibhūtā hotīti pathavārammaṇe uppannā catukkapañcakajjhānasaññā vibhūtā pākaṭā hoti. ‘‘Vibhūtā, bhante, rūpasaññā avibhūtā aṭṭhikasaññā’’ti imasmiñhi sutte samatikkamassa atthitāya vibhūtatā vuttā, idha pana vipassanāvasena aniccadukkhānattato diṭṭhattā vibhūtā nāma jātā.Āposaññādīsupi eseva nayo. Evamettha heṭṭhā viya samāpattivasena samatikkamaṃ avatvā vipassanācāravasena samatikkamo vutto.Evaṃ jhāyīti evaṃ vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā āgantvā uppāditāya phalasamāpattiyā jhāyanto.

Kathañca saddhā ājānīyajhāyitaṃ hotī: How does the jhāna of a thoroughbred horse that knows cause and effect occur?Yathā iṇaṃādi, he sees the falling that consists of directing the goad towards himself, making it like a debt, like a bond, like a debt of wealth, and like a great offense known as a blemish. Neva pathaviṃ nissāya jhāyatī: Because of the absence of attachment to the bliss of absorption, he does not meditate with the earth element as object, with the fourth or fifth jhāna perception; because of the absence of control, he is called a thoroughbred.Jhāyati ca panā: But he meditates with the fruition attainment that has Nibbāna as its object.Pathaviyaṃ pathavisaññā vibhūtā hotī: The fourth or fifth jhāna perception that arose with earth as its object is clear and manifest. In this sutta, "Vibhūtā, bhante, rūpasaññā avibhūtā aṭṭhikasaññā," because there is transcendence, clarity is spoken of; here, however, clarity has arisen because of seeing impermanence, suffering, and non-self in terms of insight.Āposaññādi, the same method applies to water and the other elements. Thus, here, unlike below, without mentioning transcendence in terms of absorption, transcendence is mentioned in terms of the practice of insight.Evaṃ jhāyī: Thus, one who meditates with the fruition attainment produced after coming through the sequence of insight.

10. Moranivāpasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Moranivāpa Sutta

10.Dasameaccantaniṭṭhoti antaṃ atītattā accantasaṅkhātaṃ avināsadhammaṃ nibbānaṃ niṭṭhā assāti accantaniṭṭho. Iminā nayena sesapadāni veditabbāni.Janetasminti janitasmiṃ, pajāyāti attho.Ye gottapaṭisārinoti ye janā tasmiṃ gotte paṭisaranti ‘‘ahaṃ gotamo, ahaṃ kassapo’’ti, tesu loke gottapaṭisārīsu khattiyo seṭṭho.Anumatā mayāti mama sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ saṃsandetvā desitā mayā anuññātā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

10. In the tenth, accantaniṭṭho means one for whom Nibbāna, which is an ending, a state of being past the end, and a non-perishing Dhamma, is the final goal.Janetasmiṃ: In what is generated, meaning in offspring.Ye gottapaṭisārino: Those people who remember that clan, saying "I am a Gotama, I am a Kassapa," among those who remember the clan, a Khattiya is the best.Anumatā mayā: Approved by me, taught by me after comparing with my omniscience. The rest is clear in meaning everywhere.

2. Anussativaggo

2. Anussati Vagga

1-2. Mahānāmasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
1-2. Commentary on the Two Mahānāma Suttas

11-12.Dutiyassa paṭhamenānāvihārehi viharatanti gihīnaṃ nibaddho eko vihāro nāma natthi, tasmā amhākaṃ anibaddhavihārena viharantānaṃ kena vihārena katarena nibaddhavihārena vihātabbanti pucchati.Ārādhakoti sampādako paripūrako.Dhammasotasamāpanno buddhānussatiṃbhāvetīti dhammasotasamāpanno hutvā buddhānussatiṃ bhāveti. Dutiyegilānā vuṭṭhitoti gilāno hutvā vuṭṭhito.

11-12. In the second, in the first, nānāvihārehi viharataṃ: There is no fixed dwelling place for householders, therefore, he asks with what dwelling, with which fixed dwelling should we who live with unfixed dwellings live?Ārādhako: One who accomplishes, one who fulfills.Dhammasotasamāpanno buddhānussatiṃ bhāvetī: Having attained the stream of the Dhamma, he develops mindfulness of the Buddha. In the second, gilānā vuṭṭhito: Having been ill, he has recovered.

3. Nandiyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Nandiya Sutta Commentary

13.Tatiyekalyāṇamitteti sumitte. Evamettha kalyāṇamittavasena saṅghānussati kathitā.Kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānanti kāmāvacaradevānaṃ.Asamayavimuttoti asamayavimuttiyā vimutto khīṇāsavo.

13. In the third, kalyāṇamitte means with good friends. Thus, here, mindfulness of the Saṅgha is spoken of in terms of good friendship.Kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ: For the gods of the Sensuous Sphere.Asamayavimutto: Freed by untimely freedom, a khīṇāsava.

4. Subhūtisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Subhūti Sutta Commentary

14.Catuttheko nāmāyaṃ subhūtī bhikkhūti jānantopi satthā kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ pucchati.Sudattassa upāsakassa puttoti anāthapiṇḍikaṃ sandhāyāha. Anāthapiṇḍikassa hi putto attano cūḷapitu santike pabbajito, atha naṃ subhūtitthero ādāya satthu santikaṃ agamāsi.Saddhāpadānesūti saddhānaṃ puggalānaṃ apadānesu lakkhaṇesu.

14. In the fourth, ko nāmāyaṃ subhūtī bhikkhū: Even though he knows, the Teacher asks in order to initiate a conversation.Sudattassa upāsakassa putto: He speaks referring to Anāthapiṇḍika. For the son of Anāthapiṇḍika went forth near his own paternal uncle, then the Elder Subhūti took him and went to the Teacher's presence.Saddhāpadānesū: In the characteristics of those people who are faithful.

5. Mettasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Mettā Sutta Commentary

15.Pañcamesukhaṃ supatīti yathā sesajanā samparivattamānā kākacchamānā dukkhaṃ supanti, evaṃ asupitvā sukhaṃ supati. Niddaṃ okkamantopi samāpattiṃ samāpanno viya hoti.Sukhaṃ paṭibujjhatīti yathā aññe nitthunantā vijambhamānā samparivattantā dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhanti, evaṃ appaṭibujjhitvā vikasamānaṃ viya padumaṃ sukhaṃ nibbikāro paṭibujjhati.Na pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passatīti supinaṃ passantopi bhaddakameva supinaṃ passati, cetiyaṃ vandanto viya pūjaṃ karonto viya ca dhammaṃ suṇanto viya ca hoti. Yathā panaññe attānaṃ corehi samparivāritaṃ viya vāḷehi upaddutaṃ viya papāte patantaṃ viya ca passanti, na evaṃ pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passati.

15. In the fifth, sukhaṃ supatī: Just as other people sleep painfully, tossing and turning, so he sleeps happily without sleeping like that. Even when falling asleep, he is as if attaining an absorption.Sukhaṃ paṭibujjhatī: Just as others awaken painfully, yawning and stretching, so he awakens happily, without stirring, like a lotus opening.Na pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passatī: Even if he sees a dream, he sees only a good dream, as if venerating a shrine, as if making an offering, or as if listening to the Dhamma. But just as others see themselves surrounded by thieves, harassed by wild animals, or falling into a precipice, he does not see such an evil dream.

Manussānaṃ piyo hotīti ure āmukkamuttāhāro viya sīse piḷandhitamālā viya ca manussānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo.Amanussānaṃpiyo hotīti yatheva manussānaṃ, amanussānampi piyo hoti visākhatthero viya. Vatthu visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.258) mettākammaṭṭhānaniddese vitthāritameva.Devatā rakkhantīti puttamiva mātāpitaro devatā rakkhanti.Nāssa aggivā visaṃ vā satthaṃ vā kamatīti mettāvihārissa kāye uttarāya upāsikāya viya aggi vā, saṃyuttabhāṇakacūḷasīvattherasseva visaṃ vā, saṃkiccasāmaṇerasseva satthaṃ vā na kamati nappavisati, nāssa kāyaṃ vikopetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhenuvatthumpi cettha kathayanti. Ekā kira dhenu vacchakassa khīradhāraṃ muñcamānā aṭṭhāsi. Eko luddako ‘‘taṃ vijjhissāmī’’ti hatthena samparivattetvā dīghadaṇḍaṃ sattiṃ muñci. Sā tassā sarīraṃ āhacca tālapaṇṇaṃ viya vaṭṭamānā gatā, neva upacārabalena na appanābalena, kevalaṃ vacchake balavahitacittatāya. Evaṃ mahānubhāvā mettā.

Manussānaṃ piyo hotī: He is dear and pleasing to humans, like a pearl necklace worn on the chest or a garland worn on the head.Amanussānaṃ piyo hotī: Just as to humans, he is dear to non-humans as well, like the Elder Visākha. The topic is explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.258) in the section on the practice of mettā.Devatā rakkhantī: The devas protect him like parents protect a son.Nāssa aggi vā visaṃ vā satthaṃ vā kamatī: Fire, poison, or a weapon do not affect or penetrate the body of one who dwells in mettā, like they did not affect Uttarā the laywoman, or like the poison did not affect the Elder Cūḷasīva, speaker of the Saṃyutta, or like the weapon did not affect the novice Saṃkicca; it is said that they do not harm his body. Here, they also tell the story of the cow. It seems that a cow was standing, releasing a stream of milk to its calf. A hunter, thinking, "I will shoot it," took a long shaft, whirled it around in his hand, and released it. It struck her body and went spinning away like a palm leaf, not by the power of proximity, nor by the power of application, but solely because of the strong, focused thought on the calf. Such is the great power of mettā.

Tuvaṭaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyatīti mettāvihārino khippameva cittaṃ samādhiyati, natthi tassa dandhāyitattaṃ.Mukhavaṇṇo vippasīdatīti bandhanā pavuttatālapakkaṃ viya cassa vippasannavaṇṇaṃ mukhaṃ hoti.Asammūḷho kālaṃ karotīti mettāvihārino sammohamaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, asammūḷho pana niddaṃ okkamanto viya kālaṃ karoti.Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti mettāsamāpattito uttari arahattaṃ adhigantuṃ asakkonto ito cavitvā suttappabuddho viya brahmalokaṃ upapajjatīti.

Tuvaṭaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyatī: The mind of one who dwells in mettā quickly becomes concentrated; there is no slowness for him.Mukhavaṇṇo vippasīdatī: His face becomes clear, like a ripe palm fruit released from its stalk.Asammūḷho kālaṃ karotī: There is no death with confusion for one who dwells in mettā; he makes his end without confusion, as if falling asleep.Uttari appaṭivijjhanto: If he cannot penetrate further to attain Arahantship from the mettā-attainment, he is reborn in the Brahma world, like one awakened from sleep.

6. Aṭṭhakanāgarasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Aṭṭhaka Nāgara Sutta Commentary

16.Chaṭṭhedasamoti jātigottavasena ceva sārapattakulagaṇanāya ca dasame ṭhāne gaṇīyati, tenassa dasamotveva nāmaṃ jātaṃ.Aṭṭhakanāgaroti aṭṭhakanagaravāsī.Kukkuṭārāmeti kukkuṭaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme.

16. In the sixth, dasamo means he is counted in the tenth place in terms of birth and clan, as well as in the calculation of the essential family line; therefore, his name became "Dasama" (tenth).Aṭṭhakanāgaro means a resident of Aṭṭhaka City.Kukkuṭārāme: In the monastery built by the wealthy Kukkuṭa.

Tena bhagavatā…pe… sammadakkhātoti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yo so bhagavā samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tena bhagavatā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayaṃ jānatā, hatthatale ṭhapitaṃ āmalakaṃ viya sabbañeyyadhamme passatā, apica pubbenivāsādīhi jānatā, dibbena cakkhunā passatā, tīhi vā vijjāhi chahi vā pana abhiññāhi jānatā, sabbattha appaṭihatena samantacakkhunā passatā, sabbadhammajānanasamatthāya paññāya jānatā, sabbasattānaṃ cakkhuvisayātītāni tirokuṭṭādigatāni cāpi rūpāni ativisuddhena maṃsacakkhunā vā passatā, attahitasādhikāya samādhipadaṭṭhānāya paṭivedhapaññāya jānatā, parahitasādhikāya karuṇāpadaṭṭhānāya desanāpaññāya passatā, antarāyikadhamme vā jānatā, niyyānikadhamme passatā, arīnaṃ hatattā arahatā, sammā sāmaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhenāti evaṃ catuvesārajjavasena catūhi kāraṇehi thomitena atthi nu kho eko dhammo akkhātoti.

Tena bhagavatā…pe… sammadakkhātoti, the concise meaning here is this: that Blessed One who, having fulfilled the thirty perfections, having shattered all defilements, awakened to the unsurpassed perfect self-awakening; that Blessed One, knowing the inclinations and latent tendencies of those beings, seeing all knowable things as if an amalaka fruit placed on the palm of the hand, moreover, knowing through past-life recollections and so on, seeing with the divine eye, knowing with the three knowledges or with the six supernormal powers, seeing with the unobstructed all-around eye everywhere, knowing with the wisdom capable of knowing all things, seeing even forms beyond the range of vision of all beings, such as those behind walls, with the exceedingly pure fleshly eye, knowing with the wisdom of penetration based on the foundation of concentration for accomplishing one's own welfare, seeing with the wisdom of teaching based on the foundation of compassion for accomplishing the welfare of others, knowing obstructive things, or seeing liberating things, being an Arahant who has slain the enemies, being a Perfectly Self-Awakened One because of being rightly self-awakened in all things; thus, is there indeed a single teaching not expounded by that Blessed One who is praised with these four reasons in terms of the four confidences?

Abhisaṅkhatanti kataṃ uppāditaṃ.Abhisañcetayitanti cetayitaṃ kappayitaṃ.Sotattha ṭhitoti so tasmiṃ samathavipassanādhamme ṭhito.Dhammarāgena dhammanandiyāti padadvayenapi samathavipassanāsu chandarāgo vutto. Samathavipassanāsu hi sabbena sabbaṃ chandarāgaṃ pariyādiyituṃ sakkonto arahā hoti, asakkonto anāgāmī hoti. So samathavipassanāsu chandarāgassa appahīnattā catutthajjhānacetanāya suddhāvāse nibbattati. Ayaṃ ācariyānaṃ samānatthakathā.

Abhisaṅkhatanti, made, produced. Abhisañcetayitanti, intended, planned. So tattha ṭhitoti, he abides in that dhamma of serenity and insight. Dhammarāgena dhammanandiyāti, with these two terms, the desire and delight in serenity and insight are stated. For one who is able to completely exhaust desire and delight in serenity and insight becomes an Arahant; one who is unable becomes a Non-Returner. Because the desire and delight in serenity and insight have not been abandoned, he is reborn in the Pure Abodes by the consciousness of the fourth jhāna. This is the consistent explanation of the teachers.

Vitaṇḍavādī panāha – ‘‘teneva dhammarāgenāti vacanato akusalena suddhāvāse nibbattatī’’ti. So ‘‘suttaṃ āharāhī’’ti vattabbo. Addhā aññaṃ apassanto idameva āharissati. Tato vattabbo ‘‘kimpanidaṃ suttaṃ nītatthaṃ, udāhu neyyattha’’nti. Addhā ‘‘nītattha’’nti vakkhati. Tato vattabbo – evaṃ sante anāgāmiphalatthikena samathavipassanāsu chandarāgo kattabbo bhavissati, chandarāge uppādite anāgāmiphalaṃ paṭiladdhaṃ bhavissati, mā ‘‘suttaṃ me laddha’’nti yaṃ vā taṃ vā dīpehi. Pañhaṃ kathentena hi ācariyassa santike uggahetvā attharasaṃ paṭivijjhitvā kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Akusalena hi sagge, kusalena ca apāye paṭisandhi nāma natthi. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā –

However, a hair-splitter says, "Because of the statement 'teneva dhammarāgena,' one is reborn in the Pure Abodes due to unwholesome desire." He should be told, "Bring a sutta." Surely, not seeing anything else, he will bring this very one. Then he should be asked, "Is this sutta of direct meaning, or of interpretable meaning?" Surely, he will say, "Of direct meaning." Then he should be told, "If that is so, one desiring the fruit of Non-Returning should generate desire and delight in serenity and insight; having generated desire and delight, the fruit of Non-Returning will be attained. Do not flaunt whatever you find, thinking, 'I have found a sutta.' " For one who speaks on a question should learn from a teacher's presence, penetrate its meaning and flavor, and then speak. For there is no such thing as rebirth in heaven through unwholesomeness, or in the lower realms through wholesomeness. And this was said by the Blessed One:

‘‘Na, bhikkhave, lobhajena kammena, dosajena kammena, mohajena kammena devā paññāyanti, manussā paññāyanti, yā vā panaññāpi kāci sugatiyo. Atha kho, bhikkhave, lobhajena kammena, dosajena kammena, mohajena kammena nirayo paññāyati, tiracchānayoni paññāyati, pettivisayo paññāyati, yā vā panaññāpi kāci duggatiyo’’ti (a. ni. 6.39) –

"Monks, by deeds born of greed, deeds born of hatred, deeds born of delusion, devas are not discerned, humans are not discerned, nor any other happy destinations. But, monks, by deeds born of greed, deeds born of hatred, deeds born of delusion, the hell realm is discerned, the animal realm is discerned, the realm of ghosts is discerned, nor any other unhappy destinations" (A. Ni. 6.39) –

Evaṃ saññāpetabbo. Sace sañjānāti, sañjānātu. No ce sañjānāti, ‘‘gaccha pātova vihāraṃ pavisitvā yāguṃ pivā’’ti uyyojetabbo.

Thus he should be made to understand. If he understands, let him understand. If he does not understand, he should be dismissed, saying, "Go, enter the monastery early in the morning and drink rice gruel."

Ayaṃ kho, gahapati, ekadhammo akkhātoti ekaṃ dhammaṃ pucchitena ‘‘ayampi ekadhammo akkhāto, ayampi ekadhammo akkhāto’’ti evaṃ pucchāvasena kathitattā ekādasapi dhammā ekadhammo nāma kato. Amatuppattiatthena vā sabbepi ekadhammoti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.

Ayaṃ kho, gahapati, ekadhammo akkhātoti, since one dhamma was asked, and it was said in terms of questions such as, "This too is one dhamma expounded, this too is one dhamma expounded," therefore eleven dhammas are named as one dhamma. Or, in the sense of producing the deathless, it is fitting to say that all are one dhamma.

Nidhimukhaṃgavesantoti nidhiṃ pariyesanto.Sakidevāti ekappayogeneva. Kathaṃ pana ekappayogeneva ekādasannaṃ nidhīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti? Idhekacco araññe jīvitavuttiṃ gavesamāno carati. Tamenaṃ aññataro atthacarako disvā ‘‘kiṃ, bho, carasī’’ti pucchati. So ‘‘jīvitavuttiṃ pariyesāmī’’ti āha. Itaro ‘‘tena hi samma āgaccha, etaṃ pāsāṇaṃ pavaṭṭehī’’ti āha. So taṃ pavaṭṭetvā uparūpariṭṭhitā vā kucchiyā kucchiṃ āhacca ṭhitā vā ekādasa kumbhiyo passati. Evaṃ ekappayogena ekādasannaṃ adhigamo hoti.

Nidhimukhaṃ gavesantoti, seeking a treasure. Sakidevāti, with a single effort. But how does the attainment of eleven treasures occur with a single effort? Here, someone wanders in the forest seeking a livelihood. Another person on a journey sees him and asks, "Why are you wandering?" He says, "I am seeking a livelihood." The other says, "Then come here, my friend, push this stone." He pushes it and sees eleven pots either placed on top of each other or stuck together side by side. Thus, the attainment of eleven occurs with a single effort.

Ācariyadhanaṃ pariyesissantīti aññatitthiyā hi yassa santike sippaṃ uggaṇhanti, tassa sippuggahaṇato pure vā pacchā vā antarantarā vā gehato nīharitvā dhanaṃ denti. Yesaṃ gehe natthi, te ñātisabhāgato pariyesanti. Yesaṃ tampi natthi, te sabhāgato pariyesanti. Tathā alabhamānā bhikkhampi caritvā dentiyeva. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

Ācariyadhanaṃ pariyesissantīti, indeed, other sectarians, from whomever they learn a craft, give wealth taken from their house to him before, after, or in between the learning of the craft. Those who have nothing in their house seek it from relatives. Those who have even that not, seek it from friends. Failing thus, they even go begging and give it. This is said with that in mind.

Kiṃ panāhanti bāhirakā tāva aniyyānikepi sāsane sippamattadāyakassa dhanaṃ pariyesanti, ahaṃ pana evaṃvidhe niyyānikasāsane ekādasavidhaṃ amatuppattipaṭipadaṃ desentassa ācariyassa pūjaṃ kiṃ na karissāmi, karissāmiyevāti vadati.Paccekaṃ dussayugena acchādesīti ekamekassa bhikkhuno ekekaṃ dussayugaṃ adāsīti attho. Samudācāravacanaṃ panettha evarūpaṃ hoti, tasmā acchādesīti vuttaṃ.Pañcasataṃ vihāranti pañcasatagghanikaṃ paṇṇasālaṃ kāresīti attho.

Kiṃ panāhanti, do externalists seek wealth even for one who gives a mere craft in a non-liberating teaching? But why would I not make an offering to the teacher who teaches the elevenfold practice leading to the deathless in such a liberating teaching? I will certainly do so, he says. Paccekaṃ dussayugena acchādesīti, he gave a pair of cloths to each monk, is the meaning. A collective term is appropriate here, therefore "acchādesī" is said. Pañcasataṃ vihāranti, he had a leaf hut made worth five hundred [kahāpaṇas], is the meaning.

7. Gopālasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Gopālasuttavaṇṇanā

17.Sattame tisso kathā ekanāḷikā caturassā nisinnavattikāti. Tattha pāḷiṃ vatvā ekekassa padassa atthakathanaṃekanāḷikānāma. Apaṇḍitagopālakaṃ dassetvā, apaṇḍitabhikkhuṃ dassetvā, paṇḍitagopālakaṃ dassetvā, paṇḍitabhikkhuṃ dassetvāti catukkaṃ bandhitvā kathanaṃcaturassānāma. Apaṇḍitagopālakaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, apaṇḍitabhikkhuṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, paṇḍitagopālakaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, paṇḍitabhikkhuṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamananti ayaṃnisinnavattikānāma. Ayaṃ idha sabbācariyānaṃ āciṇṇā.

17. In the seventh [sutta], there are three kinds of talk: ekanāḷikā, caturassā, and nisinnavattikā. There, stating the Pali and explaining each word is called ekanāḷikā. Presenting an unskillful cowherd, presenting an unskillful monk, presenting a skillful cowherd, presenting a skillful monk; speaking by arranging in this quartet is called caturassā. Presenting an unskillful cowherd and reaching the conclusion, presenting an unskillful monk and reaching the conclusion, presenting a skillful cowherd and reaching the conclusion, presenting a skillful monk and reaching the conclusion; this is called nisinnavattikā. This is what is traditionally practiced by all teachers here.

Ekādasahi,bhikkhave, aṅgehīti ekādasahi aguṇakoṭṭhāsehi.Gogaṇanti gomaṇḍalaṃ.Pariharitunti pariggahetvā vicarituṃ.Phātiṃ kātunti vaḍḍhiṃ āpādetuṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ loke.Na rūpaññū hotīti gaṇanato vā vaṇṇato vā rūpaṃ na jānāti. Gaṇanato na jānāti nāma attano gunnaṃ sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vāti saṅkhyaṃ na jānāti, so gāvīsu haṭāsu vā palātāsu vā gogaṇaṃ gaṇetvā ‘‘ajja ettakā na dissantī’’ti dve tīṇi gāmantarāni vā aṭaviṃ vā vicaranto na pariyesati. Aññesaṃ gāvīsu attano gogaṇaṃ paviṭṭhāsupi gogaṇaṃ gaṇetvā ‘‘imā ettikā gāvo na amhāka’’nti yaṭṭhiyā pothetvā na nīharati. Tassa naṭṭhā gāviyo naṭṭhāva honti. Paragāviyo gahetvā carati. Gosāmikā disvā ‘‘ayaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ amhākaṃ dhenū duhī’’ti tajjetvā attano gāviyo gahetvā gacchanti. Tassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañca gorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti. Vaṇṇato na jānāti nāma ‘‘ettikā gāvī setā, ettikā rattā, ettikā kāḷā, ettikā odātā, ettikā kabarā, ettikā nīlā’’ti na jānāti. So gāvīsu haṭāsu vā palātāsu vā…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.

Ekādasahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehīti, with eleven qualities, parts of unskillfulness. Gogaṇanti, a herd of cows. Pariharitunti, to wander about taking care of. Phātiṃ kātunti, to bring about increase. Idhāti, in this world. Na rūpaññū hotīti, he does not know the appearance, whether by counting or by color. Not knowing by counting means he does not know the number of his own cows, whether a hundred or a thousand; when cows are carried away or have fled, he does not search, wandering in two or three other villages or in the forest, thinking, "So many are not seen today." Even when cows belonging to others have entered his herd, he does not separate them by counting the herd and striking them with a stick, thinking, "These so many cows are not ours." His lost cows are indeed lost. He grazes taking cows belonging to others. The owners of the cows see him and, scolding him, "For so long you have been milking our cows," take their own cows and leave. Thus, his herd also declines, and he is excluded from the enjoyment of the five products of the cow. Not knowing by color means he does not know, "So many cows are white, so many are red, so many are black, so many are pale, so many are spotted, so many are blue." When cows are carried away or have fled…pe… he is excluded from the enjoyment of the five products of the cow.

Na lakkhaṇakusaloti gāvīnaṃ sarīre kataṃ dhanusattisūlādibhedaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ na jānāti. So gāvīsu haṭāsu vā palātāsu vā ‘‘ajja asukalakkhaṇā asukalakkhaṇā ca gāvo na dissantī’’ti…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.

Na lakkhaṇakusaloti, he is not skilled in the marks, he does not know the marks on the bodies of the cows that are in the form of bows, arrows, spears, etc. When cows are carried away or have fled, he does not [search, thinking,] "Today, cows with such and such marks are not seen…"pe… he is excluded from the enjoyment of the five products of the cow.

Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretāti gunnaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādīhi pahaṭaṭṭhānesu vaṇo hoti. Tattha nīlamakkhikā aṇḍakāni ṭhapenti, tesaṃ āsāṭikāti nāmaṃ. Tāni daṇḍakena apanetvā bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ hoti, bālo gopālako tathā na karoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘na āsāṭikaṃ hāretā hotī’’ti. Tassa gunnaṃ vaṇā vaḍḍhanti, gambhīrā honti, pāṇakā kucchiṃ pavisanti, gāvo gelaññābhibhūtā neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇaṃ khādituṃ na pānīyaṃ pātuṃ sakkonti. Tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati, goṇānaṃ javo hāyati, ubhayesampi jīvitantarāyo hoti. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati…pe… pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.

Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretāti, there is a wound in the places affected by thorns, stumps, etc. in the cows. There, bluebottle flies lay eggs, which are called āsāṭikā. Those should be removed with a stick and medicine should be given, but the foolish cowherd does not do so. Therefore it is said, "He does not remove āsāṭikā." The wounds of his cows grow, become deep, insects enter their bellies, the cows, overwhelmed by illness, are unable to eat enough grass or drink water. There, the milk of the cows ceases, the vigor of the bulls diminishes, and there is danger to the life of both. Thus his herd also declines…pe… he is excluded from the five products of the cow.

Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotīti gunnaṃ vuttanayeneva sañjāto vaṇo bhesajjaṃ datvā vākena vā cīrakena vā bandhitvā paṭicchādetabbo hoti. Bālagopālako taṃ na karoti. Athassa gunnaṃ vaṇehi yūsā paggharanti, tā aññamaññaṃ nighaṃsanti. Tena aññesampi vaṇā jāyanti. Evaṃ gāvo gelaññābhibhūtā neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotīti, a wound that has arisen in the cows in the manner already stated should be covered by applying medicine and bandaging with bark or cloth. The foolish cowherd does not do that. Then pus flows from the wounds of his cows, and they rub against each other. Because of that, wounds also arise in others. Thus, the cows, overwhelmed by illness, are unable to eat enough grass…pe… he is excluded.

Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotīti antovasse ḍaṃsamakasādīnaṃ ussannakāle gogaṇe vajaṃ paviṭṭhe tattha tattha dhūmo kātabbo hoti. Apaṇḍitagopālako taṃ na karoti, gogaṇo sabbarattiṃ ḍaṃsādīhi upadduto niddaṃ alabhitvā punadivase araññe tattha tattha rukkhamūlādīsu nipajjitvā niddāyati. Neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotīti, when the cows have entered the pen during the rainy season when gadflies, mosquitoes, etc. are rampant, smoke should be made in various places there. The unskillful cowherd does not do that; the herd, harassed by gadflies, etc. all night, unable to get sleep, lies down the next day in the forest in various places, at the foot of trees, etc. They are unable to eat enough grass…pe… he is excluded.

Na titthaṃ jānātīti titthampi samanti vā visamanti vā sagāhanti vā niggāhanti vā na jānāti. So atitthena gāviyo otāreti. Tāsaṃ visamatitthe pāsāṇādīni akkamantīnaṃ pādā bhijjanti. Sagāhaṃ gambhīraṃ titthaṃ otiṇṇe kumbhīlādayo gāvo gaṇhanti, ‘‘ajja ettikā gāvo naṭṭhā, ajja ettikā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjanti. Evamassa go gaṇopi parihāyati…pe… pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.

Na titthaṃ jānātīti, he does not know whether a ford is level or uneven, shallow or deep. He leads the cows across at an unfordable place. As they step on stones, etc. in the uneven ford, their feet are broken. Crocodiles, etc. seize the cows that have entered a deep ford, and they become liable to be spoken of, "Today so many cows are lost, today so many." Thus his herd also declines…pe… he is excluded from the five products of the cow.

Na pītaṃ jānātīti pītampi apītampi na jānāti. Gopālakena hi ‘‘imāya gāviyā pītaṃ, imāya na pītaṃ, imāya pānīyatitthe okāso laddho, imāya na laddho’’ti evaṃ pītāpītaṃ jānitabbaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ pana divasabhāge araññe gogaṇaṃ rakkhitvā ‘‘pānīyaṃ pāyessāmī’’ti nadiṃ vā taḷākaṃ vā ogāhetvā gacchati. Tattha mahāusabhā ca anusabhā ca balavagāviyo ca dubbalāni ceva mahallakāni ca gorūpāni siṅgehi vā phāsukāhi vā paharitvā attano okāsaṃ katvā ūruppamāṇaṃ udakaṃ pavisitvā yathākāmaṃ pivanti. Avasesā okāsaṃ alabhamānā tīre ṭhatvā kalalamissakaṃ udakaṃ pivanti vā apītā eva vā honti. Atha so gopālako piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā puna araññaṃ paveseti. Tattha apītā gāviyo pipāsāya sussamānā yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ na sakkonti. Tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati. Goṇānaṃ javo hāyati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na pītaṃ jānātīti, he does not know what has been drunk and what has not been drunk. A cowherd should know what has been drunk and what has not been drunk by a cow, whether an opportunity has been obtained at the watering place, or has not been obtained. But this one, after protecting the herd in the forest during the day, goes to a river or pond, thinking, "I will give them water to drink." There, the great oxen and the lesser oxen and the strong cows strike the weak and old cattle with their horns or ribs and make space for themselves and enter water up to their thighs and drink as they please. The remaining ones, unable to get space, stand on the bank and drink muddy water or remain without drinking at all. Then that cowherd strikes them on the back and drives them back into the forest. There, the cows that have not drunk, withering from thirst, are unable to eat enough grass. There, the milk of the cows ceases. The vigor of the bulls diminishes…pe… he is excluded.

Na vīthiṃ jānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ maggo samo khemo, ayaṃ visamo sāsaṅko sappaṭibhayo’’ti na jānāti. So samaṃ khemaṃ maggaṃ vajjetvā gogaṇaṃ itaramaggaṃ paṭipādeti. Tattha gāvo sīhabyagghādīnaṃ gandhena coraparissayena ca abhibhūtā bhantamigasappaṭibhāgā gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā tiṭṭhanti, neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādanti, na pānīyaṃ pivanti. Tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na vīthiṃ jānātīti, he does not know, "This path is level and safe, this path is uneven, risky, and dangerous." Avoiding the level and safe path, he leads the herd along the other path. There, the cows, overwhelmed by the scent of lions, tigers, etc., and by the danger of thieves, stand lifting their necks, like startled deer; they neither eat enough grass nor drink water. There, the milk of the cows ceases…pe… he is excluded.

Nagocarakusalo hotīti gopālakena hi gocarakusalena bhavitabbaṃ, pañcāhikacāro vā sattāhikacāro vā jānitabbo. Ekadisāya gogaṇaṃ cāretvā punadivase tattha na cāretabbo. Mahatā hi gogaṇena ciṇṇaṭṭhānaṃ bheritalaṃ viya suddhaṃ hoti nittiṇaṃ, udakampi ālulīyati. Tasmā pañcame vā sattame vā divase puna tattha cāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Ettakena hi tiṇampi paṭiviruhati, udakampi pasīdati, ayaṃ pana imaṃ pañcāhikacāraṃ vā sattāhikacāraṃ vā na jānāti, divase divase rakkhitaṭṭhāneyeva rakkhati. Athassa gogaṇo haritatiṇaṃ na labhati, sukkhatiṇaṃ khādanto kalalamissakaṃ udakaṃ pivati. Tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na gocarakusalo hotīti, a cowherd should be skilled in pasture, he should know pasture of five days or pasture of seven days. Having grazed the herd in one direction, it should not be grazed there again on the following day. For a place grazed by a large herd becomes clean, without grass, like the surface of a drum, and the water is also stirred up. Therefore, it is fitting to graze there again on the fifth or seventh day. For in that time, both the grass regrows and the water becomes clear. But this one does not know this pasture of five days or pasture of seven days; he protects them day after day in the same protected place. Then his herd does not get fresh grass, eating dry grass and drinking muddy water. There, the milk of the cows ceases…pe… he is excluded.

Anavasesadohī ca hotīti paṇḍitagopālakena hi yāva vacchakassa maṃsalohitaṃ saṇṭhāti, tāva ekaṃ dve thane ṭhapetvā sāvasesadohinā bhavitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vacchakassa kiñci anavasesetvā duhati. Khīrapako vaccho khīrapipāsāya sussati, saṇṭhātuṃ asakkonto kampamāno mātu purato patitvā kālaṃ karonti. Mātā puttakaṃ disvā, ‘‘mayhaṃ puttako attano mātukhīraṃ pātuṃ na labhatī’’ti puttasokena neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ na pānīyaṃ pātuṃ sakkoti, thanesu khīraṃ chijjati. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati…pe… pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.

Anavasesadohī ca hotīti, a wise cowherd should be one who leaves one or two teats until the flesh and blood of the calf are established. This one milks without leaving anything for the calf. The calf, deprived of milk, withers with thirst, unable to stand, trembling, falls in front of its mother and dies. The mother, seeing the calf, thinking, "My calf is not able to drink its own mother's milk," overwhelmed by grief for her offspring, is unable to eat enough grass or drink water, and the milk in her teats ceases. Thus his herd also declines…pe… he is excluded from the five products of the cow.

gopitaro. Gāvo pariṇāyanti yathāruciṃ gahetvā gacchantītigopariṇāyakā. Te naatirekapūjāyāti paṇḍito hi gopālako evarūpe usabhe atirekapūjāya pūjeti, paṇītaṃ gobhattaṃ deti, gandhapañcaṅgulikehi maṇḍeti, mālaṃ piḷandheti, siṅgesu suvaṇṇarajatakosake ca dhāreti, rattiṃ dīpaṃ jāletvā celavitānassa heṭṭhā sayāpeti. Ayaṃ pana tato ekasakkārampi na karoti. Usabhā atirekapūjaṃ alabhamānā gogaṇaṃ na rakkhanti, parissayaṃ na vārenti. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati…pe… pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.

Gopitaro: Just as cows lead (go) [to pasture], taking whatever they like and going, therefore, they are called gopariṇāyakā. Te na atirekapūjāyā: Because a wise cowherd honors a bull of this kind with excessive honor, gives choice rice-gruel for cows, decorates it with five auspicious marks made of scented paste, garlands it, places golden and silver sheaths on its horns, and at night, lights a lamp and lets it sleep under a canopy of cloth. But this one does not do even a single act of reverence from that. Bulls, not receiving excessive honor, do not protect the herd of cows, and do not ward off dangers. Thus, his herd of cows also diminishes…pe… he is also excluded from the five products of the cow.

Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Na rūpaññū hotīti ‘‘cattāri mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpa’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ rūpaṃ dvīhākārehi na jānāti gaṇanato vā samuṭṭhānato vā.Gaṇanato na jānātināma – ‘‘cakkhāyatanaṃ sotāyatanaṃ ghānāyatanaṃ jivhākāyarūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ, itthindriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ kāyaviññatti vacīviññatti ākāsadhātu āpodhātu rūpassa lahutā, mudutā, kammaññatā, upacayo, santati, jaratā, rūpassa aniccatā, kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’ti (dha. sa. 657-665) evaṃ pāḷiyā āgatā pañcavīsati rūpakoṭṭhāsāti na jānāti. Seyyathāpi so gopālako gaṇanato gunnaṃ rūpaṃ na jānāti, tathūpamo ayaṃ bhikkhu. So gaṇanato rūpaṃ ajānanto rūpaṃ pariggahetvā arūpaṃ vavatthapetvā rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā paccayaṃ sallakkhetvā lakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. So yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane sīlasamādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānehi na vaḍḍhati. Yathā ca so gopālako pañcahi gorasehi paribāhiro hoti, evamevāyaṃ asekhena sīlakkhandhena asekhena samādhipaññāvimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhenāti pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhiro hoti.

Idha: In this Dispensation. Na rūpaññū hotī: He does not know rūpa, which has been described as "the four great elements and rūpa derived from the four great elements," in two ways, either by enumeration or by origin. Gaṇanato na jānāti means: he does not know that there are twenty-five categories of rūpa that come in the Pali texts, such as "the eye-base, the ear-base, the nose-base, the tongue-body, form-sound-smell-taste-tangible object-base, the female faculty, the male faculty, the life faculty, body-consciousness, speech-consciousness, space element, water element, lightness of rūpa, softness, wieldiness, integration, continuity, decay, impermanence of rūpa, and nutriment consisting of solid food" (dha. sa. 657-665). Just as that cowherd does not know the nature of the cows by enumeration, so too is this bhikkhu. Not knowing rūpa by enumeration, he cannot reach the culmination of the meditation subject by grasping rūpa, distinguishing arūpa, grasping rūpa and arūpa, considering the cause, and applying the characteristic. Just as the herd of cows of that cowherd does not grow, so too in this Dispensation, he does not grow in virtue, concentration, insight, path, fruit, and Nibbāna. And just as that cowherd is excluded from the five products of the cow, so too is this one excluded from the five aggregates of virtue, the aggregates of concentration, wisdom, liberation, and the knowledge and vision of liberation of the one beyond training.

Samuṭṭhānatona jānātināma – ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ catusamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ nakutoci samuṭṭhātī’’ti na jānāti. Seyyathāpi so gopālako vaṇṇato gunnaṃ rūpaṃ na jānāti, tathūpamo ayaṃ bhikkhu. So samuṭṭhānato rūpaṃ ajānanto rūpaṃ pariggahetvā…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Samuṭṭhānato na jānāti means: he does not know, "So much rūpa arises from one origin, so much from two origins, so much from three origins, so much from four origins, so much does not arise from any origin." Just as that cowherd does not know the nature of the cows by color, so too is this bhikkhu. Not knowing rūpa by origin, grasping rūpa…pe… he is excluded.

Na lakkhaṇakusalo hotīti ‘‘kammalakkhaṇo bālo, kammalakkhaṇo paṇḍito’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ kusalākusalakammaṃ paṇḍitabālalakkhaṇanti na jānāti. So evaṃ ajānanto bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite na sevati. Bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite asevanto kappiyākappiyaṃ kusalākusalaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ garukalahukaṃ satekicchātekicchaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ na jānāti. Taṃ ajānanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti. So yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane yathāvuttehi sīlādīhi na vaḍḍhati. So gopālako viya ca pañcahi gorasehi, pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhiro hoti.

Na lakkhaṇakusalo hotī: He does not know the skillful and unskillful action, the characteristics of the wise and the fool, which are stated as "the fool is characterized by action, the wise person is characterized by action." Not knowing thus, he avoids fools and does not associate with the wise. Not avoiding fools and not associating with the wise, he does not know what is allowable and unallowable, skillful and unskillful, blameworthy and blameless, heavy and light, curable and incurable, cause and non-cause. Not knowing that, he cannot take up a meditation subject and develop it. Just as the herd of cows of that cowherd does not grow, so too in this Dispensation, he does not grow in the aforesaid virtue and so on. And like that cowherd, he is excluded from the five products of the cow, and from the five aggregates of qualities.

Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretā hotīti ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakka’’nti evaṃ vutte kāmavitakkādayo na vinodeti. So imaṃ akusalavitakkaṃ āsāṭikaṃ ahāretvā vitakkavasiko hutvā vicaranto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti. So yathā tassa gopālakassa…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretā hotī: He does not remove the lustful thoughts and so on that have been stated as "arisen sensual thought." Not removing this unskillful thought, not discarding it, wandering under the control of thought, he is not able to take up a meditation subject and develop it. Just as that cowherd…pe… he is excluded.

Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotīti ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hotī’’tiādinā nayena sabbārammaṇesu nimittaṃ gaṇhanto yathā so gopālako vaṇaṃ na paṭicchādeti, evaṃ saṃvaraṃ na sampādeti. So vivaṭadvāro vicaranto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotī: Seeing a form with the eye, taking the sign, and in this way, taking the sign in all objects, just as that cowherd does not cover the wound, so too he does not establish restraint. Wandering with open doors, he is not able to take up a meditation subject and develop it…pe… he is excluded.

Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotīti so gopālako dhūmaṃ viya dhammadesanādhūmaṃ na karoti, dhammakathaṃ vā sarabhaññaṃ vā upanisinnakakathaṃ vā anumodanaṃ vā na karoti, tato naṃ manussā ‘‘bahussuto guṇavā’’ti na jānanti. Te guṇāguṇaṃ ajānanto catūhi paccayehi saṅgahaṃ na karonti. So paccayehi kilamamāno buddhavacanaṃ sajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ vattapaṭivattaṃ pūretuṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotī: That cowherd does not make the smoke, like the smoke of a Dhamma talk, he does not do a Dhamma talk, or a recitation, or a talk for those sitting nearby, or an അനുമോദന (anumodana), therefore people do not recognize him as "learned and virtuous." Not knowing virtue and non-virtue, they do not gather him with the four requisites. Being troubled by the requisites, he is not able to recite the word of the Buddha, to fulfill his duties, to take up a meditation subject and develop it…pe… he is excluded.

Natitthaṃ jānātīti titthabhūte bahussutabhikkhū na upasaṅkamati. Anupasaṅkamanto ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, byañjanaṃ kathaṃ ropetabbaṃ? Imassa bhāsitassa ko attho? Imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāḷi kiṃ vadati? Imasmiṃ ṭhāne attho kiṃ dīpetī’’ti evaṃ na paripucchati na paripañhati, na jānāpetīti attho. Tassa te evaṃ aparipucchitā avivaṭañceva na vivaranti, bhājetvā na dassenti, anuttānīkatañca na uttāniṃ karonti, apākaṭaṃ na pākaṭaṃ karonti.Anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhāniyesu dhammesūti anekavidhāsu kaṅkhāsu ekakaṅkhampi na paṭivinodenti. Kaṅkhāyeva hi kaṅkhāṭhāniyā dhammā nāma. Tattha ekaṃ kaṅkhampi na nīharantīti attho. So evaṃ bahussutatitthaṃ anupasaṅkamitvā sakaṅkho kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti. Yathā vā so gopālako titthaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ ayampi bhikkhu dhammatitthaṃ na jānāti. Ajānanto avisaye pañhaṃ pucchati, ābhidhammikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā kappiyākappiyaṃ pucchati, vinayadharaṃ upasaṅkamitvā rūpārūpaparicchedaṃ pucchati. Te avisaye puṭṭhā kathetuṃ na sakkonti. So attanā sakaṅkho kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na titthaṃ jānātī: He does not approach the learned bhikkhus who are like a tittha (ford). Not approaching, he does not ask, "How should this phrase be applied, venerable sir? What is the meaning of this statement? What does the Pali say in this place? What does the meaning reveal in this place?" The meaning is that he does not fully inquire, does not fully question, and does not make it known. For them, not being asked thus, they do not reveal what is unrevealed, they do not show what is not shown, they do not make plain what is not plain, and they do not make apparent what is not apparent. Anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhāniyesu dhammesū: Among the many kinds of doubts, they do not dispel even one doubt. For the conditions for doubt are indeed called things that cause doubt. The meaning here is that they do not remove even one doubt. Thus, not approaching a tittha of learning, full of doubt, he is not able to take up a meditation subject and develop it. Just as that cowherd does not know the tittha, so too this bhikkhu does not know the Dhamma tittha. Not knowing, he asks a question in the wrong field, approaching an Abhidhamma expert, he asks about what is allowable and unallowable, approaching a Vinaya expert, he asks about the distinction between rūpa and arūpa. Being asked in the wrong field, they are not able to speak. Being doubtful himself, he is not able to take up a meditation subject and develop it…pe… he is excluded.

Napītaṃ jānātīti yathā so gopālako pītāpītaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ na jānāti na labhati. Savanamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthuṃ nissāya ānisaṃsaṃ na vindati, dhammassavanaggaṃ gantvā sakkaccaṃ na suṇāti, nisinno niddāyati, kathaṃ katheti, aññavihitako hoti. So sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ assuṇanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na pītaṃ jānātī: Just as that cowherd does not know what has been drunk and not drunk, so too he does not know or obtain the joy associated with the Dhamma. Depending on the meritorious act of listening, he does not find the benefit, going to the hall for listening to the Dhamma, he does not listen respectfully, sitting down he sleeps, he chatters, he is distracted. Not listening respectfully to the Dhamma, he is not able to take up a meditation subject and develop it…pe… he is excluded.

Na vīthiṃ jānātīti so gopālako maggāmaggaṃ viya ‘‘ayaṃ lokiyo, ayaṃ lokuttaro’’ti ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ yathābhūtaṃ nappajānāti. Ajānanto lokiyamagge abhinivisitvā lokuttaraṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na vīthiṃ jānātī: Just as that cowherd [does not know] the path and non-path, he does not truly understand the Noble Eightfold Path, thinking, "This is mundane, this is supramundane." Not knowing, adhering to the mundane path, he is not able to produce the supramundane…pe… he is excluded.

Na gocarakusalo hotīti so gopālako pañcāhikasattāhikacāre viya cattāro satipaṭṭhāne ‘‘ime lokiyā, ime lokuttarā’’ti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānāti. Ajānanto sukhumaṭṭhānesu attano ñāṇaṃ carāpetvā lokiyasatipaṭṭhāne abhinivisitvā lokuttaraṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Na gocarakusalo hotī: Just as that cowherd [does not know] the five-day or seven-day pasture, he does not truly understand the four foundations of mindfulness, thinking, "These are mundane, these are supramundane." Not knowing, letting his knowledge wander in subtle places, adhering to the mundane mindfulness, he is not able to produce the supramundane…pe… he is excluded.

Anavasesadohīhotīti paṭiggahaṇe mattaṃ ajānanto anavasesaṃ duhati. Niddesavāre panassaabhihaṭṭhuṃ pavārentīti abhiharitvā pavārenti. Ettha dve abhihārā vācābhihāro ca, paccayābhihāro ca.Vācābhihāronāma manussā bhikkhussa santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘vadeyyātha, bhante, yenattho’’ti pavārenti.Paccayābhihāronāma vatthādīni vā sappinavanītaphāṇitādīni vā gahetvā bhikkhussa santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante, yāvatakena attho’’ti vadanti.Tatra bhikkhu mattaṃ na jānātīti bhikkhu tesu paccayesu pamāṇaṃ na jānāti. ‘‘Dāyakassa vaso veditabbo, deyyadhammassa vaso veditabbo, attano thāmo veditabbo’’ti iminā nayena pamāṇayuttakaṃ aggahetvā yaṃ āharanti, taṃ sabbaṃ gaṇhātīti attho. Manussā vippaṭisārino na puna abhiharitvā pavārenti. So paccayehi kilamanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.

Anavasesadohī hotī: Not knowing moderation in receiving, he milks completely. In the section on exposition, however, they prevent him abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavārentī: preventing him, they invite him. Here, there are two invitings: inviting with speech and inviting with requisites. Vācābhihāro means: people go to a bhikkhu and invite him, saying, "Speak, venerable sir, so that there may be benefit." Paccayābhihāro means: taking robes and so on, or ghee, fresh butter, molasses, and so on, they go to a bhikkhu and say, "Take it, venerable sir, as much as is needed." Tatra bhikkhu mattaṃ na jānātī: the bhikkhu does not know the measure in those requisites. The meaning is that without taking what is proportionate, in this way: "The giver's wish should be known, the thing to be given should be known, one's own strength should be known," he takes everything that they bring. People, feeling remorse, do not invite him again, preventing him. Being troubled by the requisites, he is not able to take up a meditation subject and develop it…pe… he is excluded.

Te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hotīti so gopālako mahāusabhe viya there bhikkhū imāya āvi ceva raho ca mettākāyakammādikāya atirekapūjāya na pūjeti. Tato therā ‘‘ime amhesu garucittīkāraṃ na karontī’’ti navake bhikkhū dvīhi saṅgahehi na saṅgaṇhanti, neva dhammasaṅgahena saṅgaṇhanti, na āmisasaṅgahena, cīvarena vā pattena vā pattapariyāpannena vā vasanaṭṭhānena vā kilamantepi nappaṭijagganti, pāḷiṃ vā aṭṭhakathaṃ vā dhammakathābandhaṃ vā guḷhaganthaṃ vā na sikkhāpenti. Navakā therānaṃ santikā sabbaso ime dve saṅgahe alabhamānā imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ sīlādīhi na vaḍḍhanti. Yathā ca so gopālako pañcahi gorasehi, evaṃ pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhirā honti. Sukkapakkho kaṇhapakkhe vuttavipallāsavasena yojetvā veditabbo.

Te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hotī: That cowherd does not honor the elder bhikkhus with excessive honor, in this way, with loving-kindness in body, speech, and mind, both in public and in private, like [honoring] a great bull. Therefore, the elders, [thinking,] "These do not give us due respect," do not gather the new bhikkhus with the two means of gathering, neither with the gathering of Dhamma, nor with the gathering of material things, nor do they attend to them when they are troubled with robes, bowls, or the things needed for the bowl, or dwelling places, nor do they teach them the Pali, or the commentary, or the composition of a Dhamma talk, or a difficult text. Not receiving these two means of gathering at all from the elders, the new ones are not able to become established in this Dispensation. Just as the herd of cows of that cowherd does not grow, so too they do not grow in virtue and so on. And just as that cowherd [is excluded] from the five products of the cow, so too they are excluded from the five aggregates of qualities. The bright side should be understood by applying it in the opposite way to what was said in the dark side.

Anussativaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Recollections.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

The commentary on the Anguttara Nikaya, the Manorathapurani,

Ekādasakanipātassa saṃvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Book of Elevens is Finished.

Nigamanakathā
Concluding Talk

Ettāvatā ca –

And so much -

bhadantajotipālena;

by Bhadanta Jotipala;
With whom I formerly lived in Kañcipura and other places.

Varatambapaṇṇidīpe mahāvihāramhi vasanakālepi;

Even while living in the Mahavihara on the excellent Tambapanni Island;
In the true Dhamma, which was swaying like a tree that has reached ripeness.

Pāraṃ piṭakattayasāgarassa gantvā ṭhitena sumatinā;

By Sumati, who had crossed to the far shore of the three-basket ocean and stood firm;
And by Jivaka, who was asked by one with a pure livelihood.

Dhammakathāya nipuṇaparamanikāyassaṭṭhakathaṃ āraddho;

I began the commentary on the excellent, subtle book of discourses;
Because I wished for the long-term endurance of the Buddha's teaching.

Sā hi mahāaṭṭhakathāya sāramādāya niṭṭhitā esā;

This was finished, taking the essence from the great commentary;
With ninety-four recitations of the Pali.

Sabbāgamasaṃvaṇṇanamanoratho pūrito ca me yasmā;

And since my wish to fulfill the explanation of all the Agamas has been fulfilled;
Therefore, its name is Manorathapūraṇī (The Fulfillment of Wishes).

Ekūnasaṭṭhimatto visuddhimaggopi bhāṇavārehi;

The Visuddhimagga is also sixty less one recitations;
Because it was made to clarify the meaning of the Agamas.

Tasmā tena sahāyaṃ gāthāgaṇanānayena aṭṭhakathā;

Therefore, along with that aid, the commentary, by the method of counting verses;
Should be understood as one hundred and fifty-three recitations.

Tīhādhikadiyaḍḍhasatappamāṇamiti bhāṇavārato esā;

This, revealing the era from the recitations which is one hundred and fifty-three in measure;
To the inhabitants of the Mahavihara.

Mūlaṭṭhakathāsāraṃ ādāya mayā imaṃ karontena;

By me, doing this, taking the essence of the original commentary;
May whatever merit has been accumulated by that, may the world always be happy.

buddhaghosoti garūhi gahitanāmadheyyena therena katā ayaṃmanorathapūraṇīnāma aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathā –

This Anguttara Nikaya commentary named Manorathapūraṇī was made by the Elder whose name was taken by the teachers as Buddhaghosa -

Tāva tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, lokanittharaṇesinaṃ;

May it stand as long as the world, showing to the sons of good families
Who seek deliverance for the world, the way to purity of mind,

Yāva buddhoti nāmampi, suddhacittassa tādino;

As long as the name 'Buddha' of the pure-minded, steadfast one,
The great seer, the world's foremost being, endures in the world.

Manorathapūraṇī nāma

The Manorathapūraṇī (The Fulfillment of Wishes)